JP7810441B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventional gaming machines typically determine whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired when the start conditions are met, and then execute a game presentation (variable presentation) according to the results of that determination.

Some of these gaming machines are known to use specific effect devices (effect buttons, movable members, lamps, image display devices, etc.) to create effects (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816

However, when it comes to gaming machines, there is always a desire to improve the entertainment value of the game. For example, consideration is being given to implementing effects that leave a stronger impression on players, and adjusting the playing period appropriately without reducing players' motivation.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

[Application example]
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is provided with operation means (effect button, operation lever, sword handle unit 135, effect operation stick 136, launch handle device 103) that can be operated by a player, light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, effect button, etc.) that can emit light, and game execution means that acquires judgment information based on the establishment of a first start condition (a ball entering the first start hole 112, winning special 1) or a second start condition (a ball entering the second start hole 115, winning special 2) , judges the judgment information, executes a variable display of a pattern, and is capable of executing a special game when the variable display becomes a predetermined mode. The gaming machine is capable of executing a variable effect of a plurality of effect symbols in accordance with the execution of the variable display, and is capable of reserving and storing the judgment information acquired during the variable display, and displaying the reserved memory on a display means (main display device 131), and is capable of executing the variable effect, a specific character display, a specific effect in which the effect symbols are enlarged, or an instruction effect (right-hit image display) instructing a player to perform a specific operation on the display means, and has a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (advantageous gaming state, specific gaming state) that is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and is capable of controlling the amount of gaming value awarded and used. When a specific value derived from the input reaches a predetermined value (95000), a specific function (complete function) that limits the progress of the game can be controlled to be activated at a predetermined timing, and a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player can be executed by the light-emitting means or the display means, and the rainbow light-emitting display can be executed using the light-emitting means while waiting for customers and while the variable performance is being executed, and the operation means includes an adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) for adjusting the volume state, and the rainbow light-emitting display while waiting for customers can be started based on the operation of the adjustment means . the rainbow light-emitting display during the execution of the variable effect can be started based on the operation of the operation means, and when the special game is executed (when a jackpot pattern is aligned), the rainbow light-emitting display can be executed, and as the instruction effect, a first instruction effect (right-hit image (large)) and a second instruction effect (right-hit image (small)) that is displayed smaller than the first instruction effect can be executed, and when the first instruction effect is being executed, the rainbow light-emitting display by the display means is limited, and when the second instruction effect is being executed, the rainbow light-emitting display by the display means can be executed, When the specific effect is executed in which one effect pattern occupies a larger proportion of the image display area of the display means than the other effect patterns, the area of the rainbow light-emitting display by the display means can be limited , and during the period from the start of a predetermined effect (decisive effect) suggesting the execution of the special game to the start of the next variable effect, the rainbow light-emitting display can be executed in different forms depending on whether the effect pattern is the first stop display (for example, a win at 2) or the second stop display (for example, a win at 7) .

This invention can increase the interest of players.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 100 according to a first embodiment. This is an oblique view of the gaming machine 100 showing the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 in an open state relative to the outer frame 160. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. 10 is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot/win determination table T1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table T2. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. FIG. A block diagram showing details of the performance control board 320. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the transition of game states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a general flow of processing executed on the main control board 300. An explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed on the performance control board 320. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol stop processing, which is one of the processes performed by the main control board 300. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a process for determining whether to transition to a time-shortened gaming state and a process for determining whether to terminate the time-shortened gaming state. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the end of time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating details of an information display 302c. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating specific examples of counting periods of a base value B. FIG. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of display effects for each effect mode. A figure showing an example of the display of the number of pending orders. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the time-saving entry effects executed when transitioning to time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, and the display effects executed before the end of time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2. 10 is a diagram illustrating the display effects executed before and after transition to time-shortened game state 3 or time-shortened game state 4. FIG. This is a diagram explaining the display effects at the end of time-saving game states 1 to 4. A diagram that explains the changes in the state of the gaming machine 100 after fluctuations have stopped and an overview of the display mode of the main display device 131. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the customer waiting demo performance. This is a timing chart (1) when the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the state shifts to waiting for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 7-1. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 7-1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a prize is won while waiting for customers. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect that occurs when the sword handle unit is operated during a changing display. This is a timing chart for when the variable effects in time-saving game state 3 end and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 8-1. A figure showing examples of performances at various timings in Figure 8-1. This is a timing chart (2) when the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the state shifts to waiting for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 9-1. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of rendering in other embodiments. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect while waiting for customers. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect while waiting for customers. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect while waiting for customers. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rainbow-colored effects when volume adjustment display, etc. is being executed. A figure showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect while a variable effect is being executed. This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation during a fluctuation that results in a jackpot after a reach. This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation during a fluctuation that results in a jackpot after a reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a light-emitting effect when a symbol enlargement effect is executed. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of light emission effects when the sword handle unit is operated. This is a diagram showing examples of lighting effects when a jackpot is confirmed and when there is no jackpot (miss). A figure showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect after a jackpot game has started. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation during initial operation when the main board is powered on. This figure shows examples of rainbow-colored presentation patterns when waiting for customers in the first presentation, during the variable presentation, and during the jackpot game. A figure showing an example of the execution rate of rainbow effect patterns after a winning effect. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of combination patterns of the main display device and the rainbow-colored effect of the frame lamp. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the change over time in the number of light-emitting means that execute a rainbow effect after a winning effect. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rainbow-colored presentation patterns during waiting for customers and during jackpot games. A figure showing examples of rainbow-colored presentation patterns under different starting conditions in the normal game state and the specific game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of effects using color effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of zone effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of the change notification sound effect. A diagram showing the execution rate of the pending icon change effect. A diagram showing the execution rate of lamp change effects. A diagram showing the execution rate of the operation performance of the first movable member. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of specific example 1 of rendering. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of the light guide plate display effect. A figure showing a timing chart of the normal game state in specific example presentation 2. A figure showing the normal game state of specific example presentation 2. A figure showing a timing chart of a specific game state in specific example presentation 2. A figure showing a specific game state of specific example presentation 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 3. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 3. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between fluctuation times. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an execution rate of the preparatory operation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of the stop operation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of the fluctuation stop pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of the fluctuation start pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 4. A diagram showing the execution rate of the pattern change effect. A diagram showing the execution rate of the display size change effect of the effect pattern. A diagram showing the execution rate of the display size change effect for the reach effect. A figure showing a timing chart of specific example 5 of presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 5. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of rendering 6. A diagram showing the execution rate of notification effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution rate of vibration effects. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a RAM clear operation and a specific function. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the priority order of error notifications. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the advance notification of a specific function activation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole in normal game mode and the rainbow-colored effect. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the advance notification of a specific function activation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole in a specific game state and the rainbow-colored effect. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the advance notification of a specific function activation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole in a specific game state and the rainbow-colored effect. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the advance notification of a specific function activation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole during normal gameplay and the rainbow-colored presentation of the hold icon. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the advance notification of a specific function activation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole in a specific game state and the rainbow-colored presentation of the hold icon. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the advance notification of a specific function activation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole in a specific game state and the rainbow-colored presentation of the hold icon. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the control flow depending on the game state when the specific function activation flag is set. An explanatory diagram showing the state of each effect from the time the specific function activation flag is set to the time the specific function activation image is displayed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of what happens when power is restored after a power outage when a specific function is not operating. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of what happens when power is restored after a power outage while a specific function is operating. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the process from power-on to the start of fluctuations. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a variable effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the variable presentation of Figure 73. This is a timing chart showing the case where a specific function is activated for specific example 1 of variable presentation. An explanatory diagram showing specific example 1 of the variable presentation of Figure 75. This is a timing chart showing the case where a specific function is activated for specific example 2 of variable presentation. An explanatory diagram showing specific example 2 of the variable presentation of Figure 77. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the motion presentation of the movable member and a specific function. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable presentation in the normal game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable presentation in the normal game state following Figure 80. This is a timing chart showing an example of a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting slot during normal gameplay. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port during normal gameplay. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting port in a specific game state. This is a timing chart showing when a prize is won at the first starting hole in a specific game state. An explanatory diagram showing the case where a prize is won at the first starting port in a specific game state. This is an explanatory diagram of when a specific function is activated by winning the first starting hole during normal gameplay. This is an explanatory diagram of when a specific function is activated by winning at the second start port in a specific game state. This is an explanatory diagram of when a specific function is activated by winning the first starting hole in a specific game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of advance notification of a specific function when a prize is won at the first starting port during normal gameplay. An explanatory diagram showing an example of advance notification of a specific function by winning at the first starting port in a specific game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of advance notification of a specific function by winning at the second starting port in a specific game state.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine 100 as one embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. Note that the embodiment described below does not limit the present invention, and not all of the elements and combinations thereof described in the embodiment are necessarily essential to the solution of the present invention.

[Description of Gaming Machine 100]
The configuration of a gaming machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment. Figure 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine 100, showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 are open relative to the outer frame 160. The gaming machine 100 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches gaming balls based on a player's launching operation, and when a gaming ball lands in a specific winning slot, pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the winning result.

In the following description, where necessary, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "X direction," and in particular, the right direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "+X direction," and the left direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "-X direction." The up-down direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "Y direction," and in particular, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "+Y direction," and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "-Y direction." Furthermore, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "Z direction," and in particular, the direction toward the back of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "+Z direction," and the direction toward the front of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "-Z direction."

1 and 2, the gaming machine 100 comprises an outer frame 160 that is attached to the gaming center's island equipment, an inner frame 170 that is rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 160 and the inner frame 170, and a glass frame 150 that is rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 170 and the inner frame 170. A glass member 151 is attached to the glass frame 150 so that it can be attached and detached from the back side. A lock unit 190 is provided at a predetermined position on the glass frame 150 to enable the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 160 and to enable the upper unit 180 to be attached and detached. A glass frame opening switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the glass frame 150 to detect when the glass frame 150 is opened, and an inner frame opening switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the inner frame 170 to detect when the inner frame 170 is opened.

The inner frame 170 houses the main mechanisms, various parts, and circuit boards that make up the gaming machine 100, and also detachably houses the gaming board unit 102. A gaming area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the gaming board unit 102. This gaming area 106 includes a gaming ball flow area where gaming balls flow down, and a display screen area for the main display device 131.

The game board unit 102 is composed of a game board 102A that constitutes the play area 106, a role unit 102B that includes various movable role units, a main display device 131, a performance control board unit 102C that includes a performance control board 320, and a main control board unit 102D that includes a main control board 300. The game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is positioned in this opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to see the main display device 131. The surface of the game board unit 102 facing the player is also called the front side, and the surface at the back (the side opposite the front side) is also called the back side.

A presentation operation unit BSU is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 150. The presentation operation unit BSU is equipped with a sword handle unit 135 and a presentation operation stick 136. An upper tray 128 is provided at the back of the presentation operation unit BSU, and a launch handle device 103 is provided to the lower right of the presentation operation unit BSU. An upper unit 180, which performs a predetermined associated operation when a predetermined game state is reached, is provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150, covering part of the upper part of the glass frame 150. The upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 and is configured to engage with the glass frame 150. A first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 are provided on both the left and right sides of the glass frame 150 to display presentations during game and non-game play.

The upper tray 128 is a tray for storing game balls to be launched into the play area 106. The game balls stored in the upper tray 128 are led to a launch rail (not shown) and guided by the launch handle device 103 via the launch rail to a guide rail (not shown) at a predetermined launch strength, and are then launched into the play area 106 (game ball flow area). In this case, depending on the degree to which the player rotates the launch handle device 103, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 passes through either the left route 106a or the right route 106b of the game ball flow area included in the play area 106. Specifically, if the player rotates the launch handle device 103 relatively weakly, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 may pass through the left route 106a. On the other hand, if the player rotates the launch handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 may pass through the right route 106b.

A sword handle unit 135, modeled after the handle of a sword, is located in the center of the presentation operation unit BSU. The sword handle unit 135 is equipped with a sword handle button that can be used to perform operations such as confirm operations (operation inputs) during gameplay, a sword handle button detection switch 137 for detecting operation of the sword handle button, a button drive device equipped with a button drive motor for changing the sword handle button between its normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than its normal state, and a button vibration motor for changing the sword handle button between its normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, and a button light-emitting LED for changing the sword handle button between an off state and a lit state in which it emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 100. Additionally, on the left side of the presentation operation unit BSU is provided a presentation operation stick 136, which is a joystick operated by the player to adjust the volume of the gaming machine 100, etc.

The game area 106 is provided with an upper role unit 154 at the back of the upper part, a lower role unit 156 below the game ball flow area, and a light guide panel unit 181 equipped with a light guide panel positioned between these units and the game board 102A to cover these movable role units and the main display device 131.

The upper and lower reel units 154 and 156 are movable reels (so-called gimmicks) provided in the reel unit 102B, and are designed to perform various effects by operating and moving in predetermined ways depending on the progress of the game. The light guide panel unit 181 is equipped with a light guide panel made of a resin such as transparent acrylic, and a light-emitting unit that allows light to enter the light guide panel. The light guide panel unit 181 allows the effect display displayed on the main display device 131 to be visible through the light guide panel, and light incident from the light-emitting unit can illuminate part of the panel to display images, etc. In this embodiment, "movable reel" is interpreted to mean a movable reel, and "reel" is interpreted broadly to include both movable and immovable reels.

A first starting opening 112 is provided in the area roughly below the center of the gaming area 106, which has a starting area where gaming balls can enter. This first starting opening 112 is a general winning opening type opening, and when a gaming ball enters, a jackpot random number is obtained, a jackpot determination is made, and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out. Also, above the first starting opening 112, a stage 140 is provided, which allows gaming balls to warp, rather than passing through the nails, mainly along the left-side route 106a of the gaming ball flow area, making it easier for them to enter the first starting opening 112. After entering the stage 140, the gaming ball may remain in the stage 140 and then return to the gaming ball flow area through a predetermined notch in the stage 140.

In addition, a second starting hole 115 is provided in the area on the lower right side of the game area 106, which has a starting area where game balls can enter. The second starting hole 115 is a so-called attacca-type electric device, with a starting hole provided at its bottom and a movable piece 115b above the starting hole, which is movable between a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, it guides the game ball from the starting hole into the second starting hole 115, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 115. Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the starting hole, and the game ball cannot win at the second starting hole 115. In other words, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state at the second starting hole 115, there is no chance of the game ball winning, but when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the chances of the game ball winning increase. When a game ball wins at the second starting hole 115, just like the first starting hole 112, a jackpot random number is obtained and a jackpot determination is made, and the same prize balls (3 balls) as at the first starting hole 112 are paid out, for example.

In addition, the area to the right of the gaming area 106 is provided with a normal symbol activation gate 113b, which has a normal area through which gaming balls can pass, a first large prize opening 117 through which gaming balls can enter, and a second large prize opening 127 through which gaming balls can enter. When a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a winning random number and a normal symbol random number are obtained and a win determination is made. Note that even if a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, no prize balls based on that passage are paid out.

The first large prize opening 117 is a so-called attacca-type electric device with an opening at the bottom and a movable piece 117b above the opening. Similar to the movable piece 115b of the second starting opening 115, this movable piece 117b is controlled to move between a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 117b is in the retracted state, it guides the game ball from the opening into the first large prize opening 117, making it possible for the game ball to win in the first large prize opening 117 (this state is also referred to as the "open" or "open state"). When a game ball wins in the first large prize opening 117, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in a protruding state, the game ball cannot enter the opening, and the game ball cannot enter the first large winning opening 117 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state").

The second large prize opening 127 is a so-called attacca-type electric device with an opening at the bottom and a movable piece 127b above the opening. Similar to the movable piece 115b of the second starting opening 115 and the movable piece 117b of the first large prize opening 117, this movable piece 127b is controlled to move between a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A, preventing the game ball from winning in the second large prize opening 127, and a retracted state in which it retracts into the game board 102A, allowing the game ball to win in the second large prize opening 127. Furthermore, when a game ball wins in the second large prize opening 127, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out. A prize-winning assist device (not shown) is provided above the second large prize opening 127. This winning assistance device allows multiple game balls that have passed through the right route 106b of the game area 106 to remain on the movable piece 127b for a predetermined time when they pass through the closed movable piece 127b. At predetermined intervals, the movable piece 127b opens, allowing the multiple game balls that have remained to enter the second large winning opening 127 at once, thereby increasing the player's interest.

At the bottom of the game area 106, there is an outlet 111 for discharging game balls that do not enter the first start opening 112, the second start opening 115, the first large prize opening 117, or the second large prize opening 127. Also, in the area on the right side of the game area 106, there is a cover 116 that covers the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second start opening 115, the first large prize opening 117, and the second large prize opening 127 from the front side. This cover 116 has a guide portion that protrudes toward the game board 102A side to guide game balls to the second start opening 115, the first large prize opening 117, and the second large prize opening 127.

A main display device 131, such as a liquid crystal display (LCD), is located approximately in the center of the gaming area 106. This main display device 131 displays images during standby when no game is being played, and displays images according to the progress of the game. In particular, multiple effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner to indicate the jackpot determination result based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start slot 112 or the second start slot 115. A jackpot is notified as the jackpot determination result when a specific effect symbol combination (e.g., 777) stops and is displayed as a fixed stop. In other words, when a gaming ball enters the first start slot 112 or the second start slot 115, the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 (described below), and are displayed as a fixed stop in accordance with the fixed display of the special symbols after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. In other words, the timing of the display of the changing effect symbols by the main display device 131 and the display of the changing special symbols by the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 is synchronized. Furthermore, while the changing effect symbols are displayed, various images, characters, etc. are displayed, or a preview of the reserved display related to the special symbol is displayed, giving the player a sense of anticipation that they may win a jackpot. In this embodiment, the main display device 131 is a liquid crystal display device, but a plasma display, organic EL display, projector, so-called 7-segment LED, dot matrix, rotating drum, or other display device may also be used.

The main display device 131 is located approximately in the center of the gaming board unit 102 and displays three effect symbols in a variable manner, thereby displaying various effects. The effects displayed on the main display device 131 are executed based on the effect patterns described below. Hereinafter, the effects displayed on the main display device 131 will also be simply referred to as "display effects." In the display effects on the main display device 131, if the player wins the jackpot determination described below, i.e., in the event of a jackpot, three effect symbols are displayed in a frozen state, displaying a jackpot symbol arrangement representing a jackpot (for example, a double number such as "7, 7, 7"). In addition, if the player loses the jackpot determination described below, i.e., in the event of a loss, three effect symbols are displayed in a frozen state, displaying a loss symbol arrangement representing a loss (for example, a scattered number such as "2, 5, 1"). This allows the player to recognize the result of the jackpot determination.

A display 125 is provided at the bottom left of the gaming area 106. The display 125 has a normal symbol display 118, a normal symbol reserved display 119, a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol reserved display 123, and a second special symbol reserved display 124. Details of the display 125 will be provided later.

When a player performs a so-called "left hit," maintaining the launch handle device 103 rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weaker force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side of the play area 106. On the other hand, when a player performs a so-called "right hit," maintaining the launch handle device 103 rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively stronger force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side of the play area 106. Therefore, a "right hit" is required to cause the ball to enter the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second start hole 115, the first large prize hole 117, or the second large prize hole 127.

The first start opening 112 is a start opening that is always open. On the other hand, the second start opening 115 is normally blocked by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second start opening 115 based on the result of a hit determination, which is conditioned on the game ball entering the normal symbol activation gate 113b. In this case, a condition is created that makes it easier for the game ball to enter. When a game ball enters the first start opening 112 or the second start opening 115, a jackpot random number, various symbol random numbers (jackpot symbol random number, small jackpot symbol random number, time-saving symbol random number), reach random number, and variable pattern random number are obtained, and the following three determinations can be made: (1) A determination of whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot determination). (2) On the display 125, determining the pattern (hereinafter also referred to as special pattern) that indicates whether or not a jackpot has occurred to notify the result of the jackpot determination (hereinafter also referred to as pattern determination). (3) In the display performance on the main display device 131, determining whether or not to perform a reach (hereinafter also referred to as reach determination), and determining which of multiple variation patterns to use (hereinafter also referred to as variation pattern determination).

Here, a "jackpot game" is a special game consisting of multiple rounds of play (e.g., 10 rounds), with each round opening the first large prize slot 117 or the second large prize slot 127 in a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). However, each round also ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the first large prize slot 117, etc. A "small prize game" is a game in which the first large prize slot 117 or the second large prize slot 127 is opened within the time allowed for game balls to enter (e.g., 1.8 seconds). Furthermore, a "reach" refers to a situation in which two of the three effect symbols displayed on the main display device 131 are displayed stationary, and these two effect symbols constitute two of the three effect symbols that make up the jackpot symbol array. For example, this refers to a case where two of the three effect symbols displayed on the main display device 131 are displayed stationary and the two effect symbols are in the same state. In this case, the effect symbols that make up two of the three effect symbols that make up the jackpot symbol arrangement are also called reach symbols. In the following explanation, the determination made on the condition that a gaming ball that has passed through the first starting hole 112 has won will also be called the "special 1 jackpot determination" or the "first special symbol determination," and the determination made on the condition that a gaming ball has won through the second starting hole 115 will also be called the "special 2 jackpot determination" or the "second special symbol determination."

Furthermore, when the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a winning random number is obtained, and a determination is made as to whether or not to open the movable piece 115b of the second starting opening 115. Hereinafter, the determination made on the condition that the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b will also be referred to as a "winning determination" or "normal symbol determination." In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the probability of a winning normal symbol determination, i.e., the probability of determining to open the movable piece 115b, is designed to change depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100.

The first large prize opening 117 has a movable piece 117b that opens depending on the result of the jackpot determination. The first large prize opening 117 is normally blocked by this movable piece 117b. In contrast, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the movable piece 117b is activated to open the first large prize opening 117. Therefore, by performing a "right hit" during a jackpot game, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played. The second large prize opening 127 has a movable piece 127b that operates in a similar manner to the first large prize opening 117, and is opened during a jackpot game depending on the result of the jackpot determination.

(Explanation of the display 125)
The display 125 mainly displays information relating to the jackpot symbol determination and the normal symbol determination, and has a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol reserved display 123, a second special symbol reserved display 124, a normal symbol display 118, and a normal symbol reserved display 119. Although not specifically shown, the display 125 is made up of a plurality of LEDs, and has an indication that makes it easy to determine that each LED corresponds to each of the above-mentioned displays, such as the first special symbol display 120.

When a first special pattern determination is made, the first special pattern display 120 displays a fluctuating special pattern and then a static special pattern, and the static special pattern indicates the result of the jackpot determination in the first special pattern determination. As the result of the jackpot determination, the first special pattern display 120 displays a static jackpot pattern indicating a jackpot, or a static losing pattern indicating that the result of the first special pattern determination is a losing one.

When a second special pattern determination is made, the second special pattern display 122 displays a variable special pattern and then a static special pattern, and the static special pattern indicates the result of the jackpot determination in the second special pattern determination. This second special pattern display 122 displays a static jackpot pattern indicating a jackpot, or a static losing pattern indicating that the result of the second special pattern determination is a losing one, as the result of the jackpot determination.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is configured so that if a new gaming ball enters the first start slot 112 during, for example, the display of a variable special symbol related to the special symbol determination or during a jackpot game, the first special symbol determination and the display of the variable symbol are not immediately executed in response to the entry. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 is equipped with a hold function that holds the first special symbol determination and stores four pieces of random number information for the first special symbol determination as a set of hold information. The first special symbol hold display 123 displays the number of hold information pieces for the first special symbol determination stored in this manner (first hold number). Similarly, the gaming machine 100 is also equipped with a hold function that holds the second special symbol determination and stores four pieces of random number information for the second special symbol determination as a set of hold information in response to a new gaming ball entering the second start slot 115 during, for example, the display of a variable special symbol related to the special symbol determination or during a jackpot game. The second special symbol pending display 124 displays the number of pending information for determining the second special symbol stored in this manner (second pending number).

When a normal pattern determination is made, the normal pattern display 118 displays the normal pattern in a variable manner and then in a static manner, and the result of the win determination is announced by the statically displayed normal pattern. Incidentally, even if the gaming ball passes through the normal pattern activation gate 113b while the normal pattern display 118 is displaying a variable normal pattern, the normal pattern determination and the variable display of the normal pattern related to the normal pattern determination are not immediately executed. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 is equipped with a hold function that holds a normal pattern determination and stores information on the normal pattern random number for that normal pattern determination as hold information. The normal pattern hold display 119 displays the number of hold information for normal pattern determinations stored in this manner.

The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a right-hit lamp (not shown) and a round lamp (not shown). The right-hit lamp lights up during the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state described below, and encourages the player to make a right hit (details will be described later). The round lamp is composed of two or more lamps, and transitions from an off state to an on state upon a jackpot. When lit, the round lamp indicates the number of rounds of play depending on the type of jackpot upon a jackpot. For example, if there are two round lamps, the lighting of one round lamp indicates that three rounds of play will be performed (i.e., indicating a 3R jackpot), and the lighting of the other round lamp indicates that ten rounds of play will be performed (i.e., indicating a 10R jackpot).

(Internal configuration of gaming machine 100)
The internal configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 is a diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300, a payout control board 310, a performance control board 320, an image/sound control board 330, a lamp control board 340, a launch control board 350, and a power supply board 360.

As shown in Figure 3-1, the main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer 301. The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b, and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 also has input and output ports for main control (neither shown).

Connected to this main control input port are a gate detection switch 303 that detects when a gaming ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a first start gate detection switch 304 that detects when a gaming ball enters the first start gate 112, a second start gate detection switch 305 that detects when a gaming ball enters the second start gate 115, a first prize gate detection switch 306a that detects when a gaming ball enters the first large prize gate 117, a second prize gate detection switch 306b that detects when a gaming ball enters the second large prize gate 127, and a payout control board 310. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 via this main control input port.

In addition, the main control output port is connected to pattern displays 118, 120, 122 that display special and normal patterns that open and close movable pieces 115b, etc., pattern reserve displays 119, 123, 124 that display the number of reserved pieces of information for special pattern determination and the number of reserved pieces of information for normal pattern determination, a game information output terminal board 309 that outputs external information signals, a payout control board 310, and a performance control board 320. Various signals are output from the main control board 300 via this main control output port.

The gaming information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting external information signals generated by the main control board 300 to the gaming parlor's hall computer, etc. The gaming information output terminal board 309 is connected to the main control board 300 via wiring, and is provided with a connector for connecting to the gaming parlor's hall computer, etc.

In the one-chip microcomputer 301 on the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads out programs stored in the main ROM 301b and performs calculations based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device or sends commands to other boards depending on the results of the calculations.

Mounted on the front side of the main control board 300 are an RWM (RAM) clear switch 302a, which inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in the main RAM 301c or to update the setting value (the probability of determining a jackpot), which indicates the degree of advantage in the game; a setting key switch 302b, which inputs a signal to transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later; an information display 302c, which displays the base value B and setting value, which enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped; and other electronic components.

The information display 302c, described in detail below, is made up of four 7-segment displays (302ca-302cd) aligned horizontally. These four 7-segment displays 302ca-302cd display the setting values described below and the base value B in normal game play. When displaying the base value B, dynamic lighting is used, and when displaying a two-digit setting value, static lighting is used by the two 7-segment displays from the right, 302cc and 302cd.

The payout control board 310 controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 310 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer consisting of a payout CPU, payout ROM, and payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 for bidirectional communication. The payout CPU reads out a program stored in the payout ROM and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from a payout ball measurement switch 311, which detects whether game balls have been paid out, a door opening switch 312, and a timer, and transmits corresponding data to the main control board 300 based on this processing. In addition, the output side of the payout control board 310 is connected to a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device, which pays out a predetermined number of prize balls to a player from a game ball storage section. The payout CPU reads a specified program from the payout ROM and performs calculations based on the payout number specification command sent from the main control board 300, and controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to pay out the specified number of prize balls to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the payout CPU's calculations.

The effect control board 320 mainly controls various display effects during gameplay, standby, etc. This effect control board 320 is equipped with a sub-CPU 320a, sub-ROM 320b, and sub-RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so that communication can be performed in one direction from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320. The sub-CPU 320a reads and processes programs stored in the sub-ROM 320b based on various commands received from the main control board 300, various units, the effect operation stick 136, the sword handle button detection switch 137, and input signals from the timer, and transmits corresponding data to the image/audio control board 330 and lamp control board 340 based on this processing. The effect control board 320 is also equipped with a selector switch 22 for switching adjustment modes related to the volume of the effect sounds output from the audio output device 331 and the light intensity of the display devices (main display device, first side display device, second side display device, etc.) and various lighting devices (effect lighting devices, etc.).

For example, when the sub-CPU 320a receives a variation start command from the main control board 300, it determines a presentation pattern for causing the main display device 131, first side display device 132, second side display device 133, audio output device 331, sword handle unit 135, upper unit 180, upper role unit 154, lower role unit 156, role mechanism unit 158, light guide panel unit 181, and performance lighting device 342 to execute a game presentation, and transmits a presentation pattern designation command for executing the presentation pattern to the image/audio control board 330 and lamp control board 340. Details of this presentation pattern determination will be described later. Furthermore, the sub-ROM 320b stores a program for presentation control, data necessary for determining various games, and multiple tables. Details of these tables will be described later. Furthermore, the sub-RAM 320c functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the sub-CPU 320a, and stores game status, effect patterns, effect symbols, counting counters, firing operation information, etc. The sub-RAM 320c is provided with multiple memory areas. Details of these memory areas will be described later.

The image/audio control board 330 is equipped with an image CPU, control ROM, control RAM, CGROM, VRAM, and VDP (not shown) for controlling the image display of the main display device 131, as well as an audio CPU, audio ROM, and audio RAM. This image/audio control board 330 is connected to the performance control board 320 for two-way communication, with the main display device 131, first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and audio output device 331 connected to its output side. The image CPU also controls the VDP to display specified images based on commands received from the performance control board 320. The control RAM functions as a data work area during the image CPU's calculation processing, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM also stores the image CPU's control processing program, animation patterns for displaying animations based on performance patterns, animation scene information, and the like. The CGROM stores a large amount of image data such as effect patterns and backgrounds to be displayed on the main display device 131, etc. The image CPU reads out a predetermined program based on effect pattern specification commands sent from the effect control board 320, expands the predetermined image data stored in the CGROM into VRAM, and controls the image data expanded in VRAM to be displayed on the main display device 131, etc., thereby realizing display effects. The audio ROM stores a large amount of audio data to be output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads out a predetermined program based on effect pattern specification commands sent from the effect control board 320, and controls the audio output of the audio output devices 331, such as speakers, provided in the glass frame 150, first side display device 132, and second side display device 133, thereby realizing audio effects.

The lamp control board 340 controls various movable props (LEDs, etc.), the sword handle unit 135 (button drive device, button-emitting LEDs), and the light guide panel unit 181, as well as lighting devices 342 for effects such as lamps built into the launch handle device 103 and decorative lamps attached to the glass frame 150. Specifically, the lamp control board 340 controls the motors and other components of the sword handle unit 135, upper unit 180, upper prop unit 154, lower prop unit 156, and prop mechanism unit 158, thereby realizing the movable prop effects (movable bodies) of the units. The lamp control board 340 also controls the LEDs of various movable props and the light-emitting elements of the light guide panel unit 181 to realize light-emitting effects using the light guide panel, and controls the lighting/flashing of the lighting devices 342 for effects to realize lighting effects using the lighting devices 342. The lamp control board 340 is connected so that it can receive predetermined signals from the sword handle unit 135, upper unit 180, etc.

The launch control board 350 receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 351 provided on the launch handle device 103 and controls the energization of the launch solenoid 353 and the ball-feed solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the launch volume 352. The touch sensor 351 is a capacitance-type proximity switch that utilizes the change in capacitance caused by the player's touch on the launch handle device 103. When it detects that the player has touched the launch handle device 103, it outputs a touch signal to the launch control board 350 that allows the launch solenoid 353 to be energized. The launch volume 352 is a variable resistor that divides a constant voltage (e.g., 5 V) applied to the launch volume 352 and supplies the divided voltage to the launch control board 350. The rotation speed of the launch solenoid 353 is set to approximately 99.9 revolutions per minute, based on a frequency based on the output period of a crystal oscillator provided on the launch control board 350. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute), with one ball fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid. In other words, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds. The touch signal from touch sensor 351 and the voltage signal from firing volume 352 are input to performance control board 320. This makes it possible for the performance control board 320 to detect the firing of game balls.

The power supply board 360 is equipped with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, and supplies power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100. Specifically, it supplies power supply voltage to the main control board 300, payout control board 310, presentation control board 320, and launch control board 350. It also monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100, and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 300 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 301a becomes inoperative. Note that the backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor; for example, it may be a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery may be used.

(Electrical configuration of main control board 300)
The electrical configuration of the main control board 300 will be described with reference to Figures 3-2 to 3-5. Figure 3-2 is a diagram illustrating the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. Figure 3-3 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot/win determination table T1. Figure 3-4 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table T2. Figure 3-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300.

As shown in Figure 3-2, main ROM 301b stores game control programs and tables necessary for various games, such as a jackpot/win determination table T1, a symbol determination table T2, a reach determination table T3, a first variation pattern table T4, and a second variation pattern table T5.

The jackpot/win determination table T1 is a table for determining whether a jackpot has occurred based on a jackpot random number. It includes a special 1 jackpot determination table T1A that is referenced when determining whether the result of the special symbol fluctuations on the first special symbol display 120 will result in a jackpot, a minor jackpot, time-saving 4 (time-saving game state 4), or a miss (jackpot lottery); a special 2 jackpot determination table T1B that is referenced when determining the result of the special symbol fluctuations on the second special symbol display 122; and a win determination table T1C that is referenced when determining whether the result of the normal symbol fluctuations will result in a win. The special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B in the jackpot/win determination table T1 have different jackpot random numbers set according to multiple setting values, and the probability of determining a jackpot varies for each setting value. Specifically, for example, in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A, the setting value is set to four levels from "1" to "4." The probability of a jackpot being determined is approximately 1/300 when the setting value is "1," approximately 1/290 when the setting value is "2," approximately 1/280 when the setting value is "3," and approximately 1/270 when the setting value is "4." Similarly, in the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, the setting value is set to four levels from "1" to "4." The probability of a jackpot being determined is approximately 1/30 when the setting value is "1," approximately 1/29 when the setting value is "2," approximately 1/28 when the setting value is "3," and approximately 1/27 when the setting value is "4." When these setting values are displayed on the information display 302c, they are displayed as "01" to "04" on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd.

The pattern determination table T2 is a table that is referenced when determining the stopping patterns of special patterns and the like on the pattern display 125 based on the jackpot pattern random number, small win pattern random number, time-saving pattern random number, and normal pattern random number, and includes a jackpot pattern determination table, small win pattern determination table, losing pattern determination table, time-saving pattern determination table, and normal pattern determination table. Details of these determination tables will be provided later.

The reach determination table T3 is a table that is referenced when making a reach determination based on the reach determination random number. The reach determination table T3 includes various tables that can be selected depending on the game state and the type of special symbol, such as the special 1 normal time reach determination table and the special 2 time-saving time reach determination table. Specifically, for example, the special 1 normal time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether to execute a reach in a display effect based on a ball entering the first start port 112 in a normal game state, and the special 2 time-saving time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether to execute a reach in a display effect based on a ball entering the second start port 115 in time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2. Details of various game states, such as non-probability variable game states and probability variable game states, will be described later.

The first fluctuation pattern table T4 is a table for determining fluctuation patterns based on fluctuation pattern random numbers. Its average fluctuation time (average presentation time) is shorter than that of the second fluctuation pattern table T5, and it is the table selected when the acquisition hold order information (described below) is "3" or "4." The first fluctuation pattern table T4 includes four fluctuation pattern tables: the first special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T4A, the first special 1 special variable fluctuation pattern table T4B, the first special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T4C, and the first special 2 special variable fluctuation pattern table T4D. These four fluctuation pattern tables can be selected based on the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the first special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting hole 112 in a non-variable game state. The first special 1 probability variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on a ball entering the first starting hole 112 during probability variation gameplay. The first special 2 normal variation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting hole 115 during non-probability variation gameplay. The first special 2 probability variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting hole 115 during probability variation gameplay.

The second fluctuation pattern table T5 is a table for determining fluctuation patterns based on fluctuation pattern random numbers. It has a longer average fluctuation time than the first fluctuation pattern table T4 and is selected when the acquisition hold order information (described below) is "1" or "2." The second fluctuation pattern table T5 includes four fluctuation pattern tables: the second special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T5A, the second special 1 special variable fluctuation pattern table T5B, the second special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T5C, and the second special 2 special variable fluctuation pattern table T5D. These four fluctuation pattern tables can be selected based on the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the second special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting hole 112 in a non-variable game state. The second special 1 probability variation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on a ball entering the first starting hole 112 during probability variation gameplay. The second special 2 normal variation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting hole 115 during non-probability variation gameplay. The second special 2 probability variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting hole 115 during probability variation gameplay.

Note that when determining the variation pattern, only one of the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 is selected; they are never selected simultaneously. Furthermore, the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 have various variation patterns. Specifically, they are variation patterns that combine various effects, such as pseudo consecutive effects, normal miss effects, normal reach (miss or win) effects, SP reach (miss or win) effects (development effects after the execution of a reach formation effect), SPSP reach (miss or win) effects (development effects after the execution of an SP reach effect), SPSP reach revival (win) effects, effects in which a miss pattern arrangement is formed, and effects in which a jackpot pattern arrangement is formed with a specific pattern. Here, a pseudo consecutive effect (or pseudo continuous variation effect) is an effect in which, during the variable display of a special pattern, the variable display of the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display is resumed, thereby repeating the variable display of the effect pattern in a pseudo manner. In this case, the pseudo consecutive effects temporarily stop the effect symbols, but this is not limited to this; the effect symbols may not be temporarily stopped, but may be slowed down and then displayed in a variable manner.

Here, various game states in this embodiment will be explained. First, there are the "low probability state (non-variable game state)" and the "high probability state (variable game state)" as states related to jackpot determination, and the "non-time-saving game state" and the "time-saving game state" as states related to the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second starting port 115. Therefore, this embodiment provides a "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" which is a low-probability state and a non-time-saving game state, a "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 2/time-saving game state 3/time-saving game state 4)" which is a low-probability state and a time-saving game state, and a "high-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1)" which is a high-probability state and a time-saving state; details will be described later. Note that the initial game state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the "normal game state," and it will also be set to the "normal game state" during jackpot play; however, since jackpot play is being executed, it becomes a game state different from the normal game state.

First, a "low probability state (non-variable game state)" refers to a game state in which the jackpot probability is set low at approximately 1/300 when the setting value (for the jackpot probability), which indicates the degree of game advantage, is "1" as described above. In contrast, a "high probability state (variable game state)" refers to a game state in which the jackpot probability is set high at approximately 1/30 when the setting value is "1" as described above, making it more advantageous for the player than the low probability state. The transition from the low probability state to the high probability state occurs after the jackpot game has ended.

Next, a "non-time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning in the normal symbol determination, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, is set low at 1/20, the average time for the normal symbol variable display is set to approximately 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start gate 115 in the event of a win is set to 0.180 seconds. In contrast, a "time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning in the normal symbol determination is set high at 19/20, the average time for the normal symbol variable display is set to approximately 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start gate 115 in the event of a win is set to 3 to 6 seconds, making it easier for game balls to enter the second start gate 115 compared to a "non-time-saving game state," thereby favoring the player by reducing the consumption of game balls. Note that the "time-saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 115, and the win probability, but it is also possible to set only one of the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 115, and the win probability to be more advantageous. Also, while the win probability in the "non-time-saving game state" is 1/20, it is also possible to set the win probability to 0/20 so that no win is determined. In such a case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the "non-time-saving game state," and the game ball does not enter the second start port 115 (win).

As shown in Figure 3-3 (a-1), the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A sets the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the determination result (jackpot, small win, time-saving 4, miss) of the jackpot determination in each of the low-probability and high-probability states based on the ball entering the first starting hole 112. Details will be described later, but for example, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a jackpot symbol (special symbol A1, etc.) is displayed; if a small win is determined, a small win symbol (special symbol K) is displayed; if time-saving 4 is determined, a time-saving symbol (special symbol J1) indicating a transition to time-saving game state 4, described below, is displayed; and if a miss occurs, a miss symbol (special symbol H) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 3-3 (a-2), the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B sets the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot, small jackpot, time-saving 4, miss) in each of the low-probability and high-probability states based on the ball entering the second starting port 115. Note that while the probability of winning a jackpot is the same for jackpot determinations based on the ball entering the first starting port 112 and jackpot determinations based on the ball entering the second starting port 115, the probability of winning a small jackpot and the probability of winning time-saving 4 differ. Furthermore, in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, it is possible to win time-saving 4 in the low-probability state, but it is not possible to win time-saving 4 in the high-probability state.

Here, we will explain how to determine a jackpot using the Special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the Special 2 jackpot determination table T1B. First, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301a references the game state (low probability state or high probability state) at the time the game ball enters and selects a table corresponding to each game state in the Special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the Special 2 jackpot determination table T1B. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the jackpot random number (the random number range is the number "0" to "598") obtained when the game ball enters the first start slot 112 or the second start slot 115 as described above with the setting in the Special 1 jackpot determination table T1A or the Special 2 jackpot determination table T1B. If there is a match, it determines that a jackpot, a small jackpot, or time reduction 4 has been won. If there is no match, it determines that a miss has occurred. Furthermore, when determining whether a jackpot is won by referencing the Special 1 Jackpot Determination Table T1A or the Special 2 Jackpot Determination Table T1B, the probability of winning a small jackpot and the probability of winning Time Reduction 4 are the same regardless of whether the above-mentioned setting value is "1" to "4."

As shown in Figure 3-3(b), the hit determination table T1C sets the value of the hit random number corresponding to the result of the hit determination (win, miss) in each of the non-time-limited game state and time-limited game state based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. Here, we will explain the hit determination using the hit determination table T1C. First, the main CPU 301a in this embodiment references the game state (non-time-limited game state or time-limited game state) at the time of the gaming ball's winning and selects a table corresponding to each game state in the hit determination table T1C. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the hit random number (the random number range is the value "0" to "19") obtained when the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b as described above with the setting in the hit determination table T1C, and if they match, determines a win or miss.

As shown in Figure 3-4, the symbol determination table T2 includes a jackpot symbol determination table that is referenced when determining the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) when the jackpot determination determines a jackpot, a small win symbol determination table that is referenced when determining the stop symbol (small win symbol) when the jackpot determination determines a small win, a loss symbol determination table that is referenced when determining the stop symbol (loss symbol) when the jackpot determination determines a loss, and a time-saving symbol determination table that is referenced when determining the stop symbol (time-saving symbol) when the jackpot determination determines time-saving 4. It also includes a normal symbol determination table X that is referenced when determining the stop symbol (long-open symbol, short-open symbol) when the hit determination determines a win, and a normal symbol determination table Y that is referenced when determining the stop symbol (loss symbol) when the hit determination determines a loss.

As shown in Figure 3-4 (a-1), the jackpot symbol determination table is set with a first special symbol that is referenced when a jackpot is determined based on a ball entering the first starting hole 112, and a second special symbol that is referenced when a jackpot is determined based on a ball entering the second starting hole 115. Here, we will explain the symbol determination using the jackpot symbol determination table. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment selects either a table for the first special symbol or a table for the second special symbol in the jackpot symbol determination table in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 112 or the second starting hole 115. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the jackpot symbol random number (the random number range is a number between "0" and "99") obtained when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112 or the second starting hole 115 as described above with the settings in the jackpot symbol determination table. When the special symbol starts to change, the main CPU 301a generates a performance symbol designation command that can identify the stop symbol data (type of special symbol).

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination and the jackpot pattern random number obtained upon winning at the first starting gate 112 is between "0" and "59," the main CPU 301a will determine "01 (special pattern A1)" as the stopping pattern, causing the special pattern A1 to be stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 120, and generating "E0H" and "01H" as the effect pattern designation commands. Also, for example, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination and the jackpot pattern random number obtained upon winning at the second starting gate 115 is between "70" and "99," the main CPU 301a will determine "05 (special pattern B2)" as the stopping pattern, causing the special pattern B2 to be stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 122, and generating "E1H" and "02H" as the effect pattern designation commands. In this way, after the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the display 125, jackpot games begin, such as the first variable long win, first short variable win, first normal long win, second variable long win, and second normal long win, corresponding to each special symbol. As mentioned above, jackpot games consist of multiple rounds of play, and a long win (e.g., 10R) consists of more rounds than a short win (e.g., 3R), and the total opening time of the first large prize slot 117 or the second large prize slot 127 is longer.

As shown in FIG. 3-4 (a-2), the small win symbol determination table contains a first special symbol that is referenced when a small win is determined in a jackpot determination based on a ball entering the first starting hole 112, and a second special symbol that is referenced when a small win is determined in a jackpot determination based on a ball entering the second starting hole 115. Here, symbol determination using the small win symbol determination table is explained. First, the main CPU 301a of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment selects either a table for the first special symbol or a table for the second special symbol in the small win symbol determination table in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 112 or the second starting hole 115. Next, the main CPU 301a compares the small win symbol random number (the random number range is a number between 0 and 99) obtained when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112 or the second starting hole 115 as described above with the settings in the jackpot symbol determination table. When the special symbol starts to change, the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command that can identify the stop symbol data (type of special symbol). Specifically, for example, even if a small win is determined in the big win determination and the small win symbol random number obtained upon entry into the first starting slot 112 is any value between "0" and "99," the main CPU 301a will determine "11 (special symbol K)" as the stop symbol, causing the special symbol K to be displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 120, and generating effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "0AH." In this way, after the special symbol is displayed as stopped on the display 125, the small win game begins.

As shown in FIG. 3-4 (a-3), the losing symbol determination table has a first special symbol that is referenced when a jackpot determination based on a ball entering the first starting hole 112 is determined to be a loss, and a second special symbol that is referenced when a jackpot determination based on a ball entering the second starting hole 115 is determined to be a loss. Here, the symbol determination with reference to the losing symbol determination table will be explained. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment selects either a table for the first special symbol or a table for the second special symbol in the losing symbol determination table in response to a winning game ball entering the first starting hole 112 or the second starting hole 115, and determines the stopped symbol. Note that the main CPU 301a generates a performance symbol designation command that can identify the stopped symbol data (type of special symbol) when the special symbol starts to change. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot determination based on winning into the first starting port 112 is determined to be a miss, the main CPU 301a determines the stopping pattern to be "00 (special pattern H)," causing the special pattern K to be displayed stopped on the first special pattern display 120, and generating "E0H" and "00H" as performance pattern designation commands.

As shown in Figure 3-4 (a-4), the time-saving symbol determination table is set to be referenced when a jackpot determination based on a ball entering the first start hole 112 or the second start hole 115 determines time-saving 4, and this is set to be common to both the first start hole 112 and the second start hole 115. Here, we will explain the symbol determination using the time-saving symbol determination table. In this embodiment, the main CPU 301a determines the stopping symbol in accordance with the time-saving symbol random number (the random number range is the number "0" to "99") obtained based on the game ball entering the first start hole 112 or the second start hole 115. Furthermore, when the special symbol starts to change, the main CPU 301a generates a performance symbol designation command that can identify the stopping symbol data (type of special symbol). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot determination determines time-saving 4 and the jackpot symbol random number obtained upon entry into the first starting slot 112 is between "0" and "70," the main CPU 301a will determine "21 (special symbol J1)" as the stopping symbol, causing the special symbol J1 to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and generating "E0H" and "11H" as effect symbol designation commands. In this way, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 125, the game state transitions to time-saving game state 4, as described below, and time-saving gameplay begins.

More specifically, for example, the first special symbol display device 120 may display a variable pattern over approximately 40,000 ms, and the main display device 131 may execute a normal reach effect (described below) and then notify a transition to time-shortened game state 4, or the main display device 131 may execute a predetermined time-shortened transition effect of approximately 40,000 ms (a transition to time-shortened game state 4) and then transition to time-shortened game state 4. Also, for example, the first special symbol display device 120 may display a variable pattern over approximately 60,000 ms, and the main display device 131 may execute a normal reach effect and an SP reach effect (miss) (described below) and then notify a transition to time-shortened game state 4, or the main display device 131 may execute a predetermined time-shortened transition effect of approximately 60,000 ms (a transition to time-shortened game state 4) and then transition to time-shortened game state 4.

As shown in Figures 3-4 (b-1) and (b-2), the normal symbol determination table X is set to be referenced when a win is determined in the win determination based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, and the normal symbol determination table Y is set to be referenced when a loss is determined in the win determination based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. These normal symbol determination tables are common to various game states. Here, we will explain the pattern determination using the normal symbol determination table. The main CPU 301a of this embodiment selects either the normal symbol determination table X or the normal symbol determination table Y in accordance with the result of the win determination, and determines the stopping pattern by comparing it with the normal symbol random number (the random number range is a value between "0" and "10") obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. The main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command capable of identifying the stop symbol data (type of special symbol) when the special symbol starts to change. Specifically, for example, if a win is determined in the win determination and the normal symbol random number obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b is "2" to "10," the main CPU 301a determines "02 (short opening symbol)" as the stop symbol, causing the short opening symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 118, and generating "E8H" and "02H" as effect symbol designation commands. In this way, after the special symbols (long opening symbol, short opening symbol, losing symbol) are displayed as stopped symbols on the display 125, the second start hole 115 corresponding to each special symbol is opened or closed. Note that a long opening (e.g., 6 seconds) refers to a state in which the second starting port 115 is open for a longer period of time than a short opening (e.g., 3 seconds), and a miss refers to a state in which the second starting port 115 is not opened.

As shown in Figure 3-5 (A), the main RAM 301c functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the main CPU 301a and has multiple storage areas, such as the pending information storage area 301cx, which will be described later, and the pending information determination area 301cy, which is a determination area where pattern determination is performed based on the pending information. The main RAM 301c also has a storage area (not shown) in which various flags (such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and jackpot flag, which will be described later) and various recorded values are stored.

As shown in Figure 3-5 (B), the pending information storage area 301cx has four pending information areas (first pending information area, second pending information area, third pending information area, and fourth pending information area) that can store pending information related to the first start port 112 and pending order information at the time of acquisition in association with each other, and four pending information areas (first pending information area, second pending information area, third pending information area, and fourth pending information area) that can store pending information related to the second start port 115. In the pending information area corresponding to the first special pattern in the pending information storage area 301cx, the first pending information area is given top priority for storage; if pending information is stored in the first pending information area, the second pending information area is given priority for storage, then the third pending information area is given priority for storage, and finally the fourth pending information area is selected for storage. The same applies to the pending information area corresponding to the second special pattern. Regarding the presence or absence of holding information storage, a "◯" is indicated for holding information areas in which holding information is stored, and a "-" is indicated for holding information areas in which no holding information is stored. Furthermore, the holding order information at the time of acquisition stored in the holding information areas of the holding information storage area 301cx is information representing the holding order when the holding information was acquired. Specifically, the holding order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the holding information area in which the holding information is stored when acquired. For example, when holding information is acquired and only the first holding information area stores the holding information, the holding information will be stored in the second holding information area, and the holding order information at the time of acquisition is "2." When holding information is acquired and only the first, second, and third holding information areas store the holding information, the holding information will be stored in the fourth holding information area, and the holding order information at the time of acquisition is "4." In other words, Figure 3-5 (B) shows that when the third pending information is acquired, pending information is already stored in the second and third pending information areas, the third pending information is stored in the first pending information area, and the fourth pending information is stored in the fourth pending information area.

(Electrical configuration of the performance control board 320)
The electrical configuration of the performance control board 320 will be described with reference to Figures 3-6 and 3-7. Figure 3-6 is a block diagram showing the details of the performance control board 320. Figure 3-7 is a schematic diagram showing the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. The performance control board 320 determines a performance pattern based on commands (including variation patterns, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 300 and transmits performance pattern designation commands based on the performance pattern to the image/audio control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. As described above, the main display device 131 and the like are electrically connected to the image/audio control board 330, and the sword handle unit 135 and the like are electrically connected to the lamp control board 340. With this configuration, the image/audio control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 can execute display effects, audio effects, lighting effects, and role-moving effects based on the performance pattern designation commands transmitted from the performance control board 320.

As shown in Figure 3-6, the sub-ROM 320b stores a core display effect designation table TS1, a display pattern determination table TS2, and a chance-up determination table TS3. The core display effect designation table TS1 is a table for designating one of the above-mentioned effects (such as the normal miss effect, normal reach (miss or win) effect, SP reach (miss or win) effect, SPSP reach (miss or win) effect, and SPSP reach revival (win) effect) as the core effect (hereinafter referred to as the core display effect) based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300. In this embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the core display effect. Alternatively, multiple core display effects may be associated with a variation pattern, and the sub-CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 may select a core display effect by lottery. In this way, the content of the effect can be changed even for the same variation pattern. Additionally, one core display effect may be associated with multiple variation patterns. The effect symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining the combination of effect symbols that will display temporary stops or confirmed stops in display effects based on effect patterns, and the reach symbols when a reach is executed. The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a specified chance-up effect in display effects. Here, chance-up effects are effects that execute display effects that differ in type from normal effects, and that increase the likelihood of a jackpot compared to normal effects.

As shown in Figure 3-7, sub-RAM 320c has a reserved memory area 320c1 and a preliminary judgment information memory area 320c3. Sub-RAM 320c also has a flag memory area (not shown) in which predetermined flags (continuous execution effect flag, pseudo-continuous execution effect flag, etc.) are stored. Reserve memory area 320c1 is divided into eight areas: a first reserved area, a second reserved area, a third reserved area, and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the first special pattern, and a first reserved area, a second reserved area, a third reserved area, and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the second special pattern, each of which can store one reserved flag. In the reserve area corresponding to the first special symbol in the reserve memory area 320c1, the priority for storing the reserve flag is as follows: the first reserve area is the top priority storage target; if a reserve flag is stored in the first reserve area, the second reserve area is the next priority storage target; then the third reserve area is the next priority storage target; and finally, the fourth reserve area is selected as the storage target. The same applies to the reserve area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the performance control board 320 receives a reserve command from the main control board 300, it identifies the reserve area in the reserve memory area 320c1 where the reserve flag is stored, and stores the reserve flag in the reserve area that should be given the next highest priority for storage after the reserve area. However, if a reserve command is received when a reserve flag is stored in the fourth reserve area, the reserve flag will not be stored. Furthermore, the priority for deleting pending flags is the reverse of the priority for storing them; that is, the fourth pending area is given top priority for deletion; if no pending flags are stored in the fourth pending area, the third pending area is given priority for deletion, then the second pending area is given priority for deletion, and finally the first pending area is selected for deletion. When the performance control board 320 receives a pattern determination command from the main control board 300, it identifies the pending areas in the pending memory area 320c1 that contain pending flags, and deletes the pending flags in the pending areas that should be deleted first. Note that if no pending flags are stored in the first pending area, the deletion process is not performed.

The pre-determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbols, pre-determination variable patterns, and acquisition hold order information), and has four storage areas (first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area) corresponding to the types of special symbols. Each storage area also has a jackpot determination information column that stores jackpot determination information based on the pre-determination special symbols, a jackpot symbol information column that stores jackpot symbol information based on the pre-determination symbols, a variable pattern information column that stores variable pattern information based on the pre-determination variable patterns, an acquisition hold order information column that stores acquisition hold order information, and a continuous effect presence/absence information column that stores continuous effect presence/absence information indicating whether a continuous effect will be activated. The continuous effect presence/absence information includes continuous effect activation information and continuous effect non-activation information.

The hold command sent from the main control board 300 includes pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbol, pre-determination variable pattern, and acquisition hold order information). This pre-determination information is stored in association with each other in the pre-determination information memory area 320c3. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority for storing pre-determination information is as follows: the first storage area is given top priority; if pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area, the second storage area is given priority, then the third storage area is given priority, and finally the fourth storage area is selected as the storage area. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, when pre-determination information for a new first special pattern (specific pattern A, variable pattern 7B, acquisition hold order information "4") is to be stored in the third storage area for the first special pattern (see Figure 3-7), information representing "4" is stored in the acquisition hold order information column of the fourth storage area, information representing "variable pattern 7B" is stored in the variable pattern information column of the fourth storage area, information representing "specific pattern A" is stored in the jackpot pattern information column of the fourth storage area, and information representing "jackpot" is stored in the jackpot determination information column of the fourth storage area.

In Figure 3-7, the pre-determination information for the first storage area related to the first special symbol is stored as follows: "Miss" information in the jackpot determination information column, "None" information in the jackpot symbol information column, "Variation Pattern 1" information in the variation pattern information column, and information representing "3" in the hold order information column at time of acquisition. The pre-determination information for the second storage area is stored as follows: "Miss" information in the jackpot determination information column, "None" information in the jackpot symbol information column, "Variation Pattern 2AX" information in the variation pattern information column, and information representing "1" in the hold order information column at time of acquisition. The pre-determination information for the third storage area is stored as follows: "Miss" information in the jackpot determination information column, "None" information in the jackpot symbol information column, "Variation Pattern 4BX" information in the variation pattern information column, and information representing "2" in the hold order information column at time of acquisition. Furthermore, the continuous effect activation information column stores continuous effect activation information indicating whether or not continuous effects will be executed in the pre-reading process described below. Additionally, in the continuous performance information column corresponding to the fourth storage area for the first special symbol, a "○" is displayed as continuous performance activation information, which is information indicating that continuous performance will be activated, and in the other storage areas, a "-" is displayed as continuous performance non-activation information, which is information indicating that continuous performance will not be activated.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the transition of the game state as the game progresses will be described with reference to Fig. 4-1. Fig. 4-1 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state.

As shown in Figure 4-1, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, as with conventional gaming machines, there are cases where a transition occurs from the "normal gaming state" via "jackpot game" to the "time-shortened gaming state (time-shortened gaming state 1)" ((A) → (D)), and cases where a "jackpot game" is executed when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by the jackpot determination process in the "time-shortened gaming state (time-shortened gaming state 1 or time-shortened gaming state 2)" ((C)), and cases where a transition occurs to the "normal gaming state" when a jackpot is not determined to have occurred ((E)). Furthermore, unlike conventional gaming machines, when a "predetermined condition is met" in the "normal gaming state," it is possible to transition to the "time-shortened gaming state (time-shortened gaming state 3 or time-shortened gaming state 4)" ((B)) without going through a jackpot game. In addition, when a game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state" via a "jackpot game," the number of playable times in the "high-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1)" is "100 times," and the number of playable times in the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 2)" is "100 times." On the other hand, when a game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4)" without going through a "jackpot game," the number of playable times is "700 times." In other words, the number of playable times in the "time-saving game state" is greater when a game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state" due to the "fulfillment of a predetermined condition" without going through a "jackpot game" than when a game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state" via a "jackpot game." For example, in this embodiment, the number of playable times may be set to "700 times" in time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4 so that the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal game state is approximately 3.8 times or less the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the set value is "1").

In addition, the number of times that "time-saving game state 4" can be played may be set differently depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed. For example, when the time-saving symbol is displayed in the "time-saving game state," the number of times that can be played may be greater or less than when the time-saving symbol is displayed in the "normal game state."

In this embodiment, "the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" refers to a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition. The first predetermined condition is when the cumulative number "n," which is the number of times the special symbol has been displayed since the "starting point," reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with an area for counting and storing the cumulative number "n," which is the number of times the special symbol has been displayed in the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)." When the cumulative number "n" counted and stored in this area reaches a predetermined number, the game transitions from the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 3)." The second predetermined condition is when the game stops on a preset "time-saving symbol (specific losing symbol)." In this case, the game transitions from the "normal game state" to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 4)." Note that the rate at which the "time-saving symbol" is determined may be any rate. For example, the probability may be the same as or similar to the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is more difficult to determine than the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is more easily determined. Furthermore, "the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the first and second predetermined conditions, or may include both conditions, or may include conditions other than these.

The predetermined number of times for the first predetermined condition can be set to any number corresponding to the probability of determining a jackpot for each setting value. For example, in this embodiment, the predetermined number of times can be set to "800 (times)" so that the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal game state is approximately 2.5 times or more and approximately 3.0 times or less the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the setting value is "4"). Furthermore, the "starting point" can be set, for example, to the end of the "jackpot game" or the time when the RAM is cleared, such as when the setting is changed as described above. In other words, in the area of main RAM 301c that counts and stores the cumulative number of times "n," initialization processing of the cumulative number of times "n" is executed upon transition to the "jackpot game," the end of the "jackpot game," or when the RAM is cleared. Furthermore, multiple types of symbols may be preset as the "time-saving symbol" for the second predetermined condition, and different numbers of times can be set for each type of "time-saving symbol" in time-saving game state 4.

This provides players with information to help them decide whether or not to play, reducing the number of players who play recklessly. Furthermore, if the predetermined number of tries is around 800, for example, relief measures can be provided to players who have not won a jackpot for a long time, which helps prevent players from abandoning the game. Furthermore, when transitioning to the "time-limited play state" due to the "fulfillment of predetermined conditions," the number of playable times in the "low-probability time-limited play state (time-limited play state 3 or time-limited play state 4)" is greater than when transitioning to the "low-probability time-limited play state (time-limited play state 2)" via a "jackpot play," which can encourage players to actively try playing the "low-probability non-time-limited play state (normal play state)," improving the operation of the gaming machine.

Here, we will explain the counting process of the cumulative number "n" in the area in main RAM 301c that counts and stores the number of times the special symbol variable display occurs. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 301a initializes the cumulative number "n" to "800" at the "starting point," such as the end of a "jackpot game," and subtracts "1" from the cumulative number "n (800)" each time the variable display of the special symbol ends in a low-probability game state, such as "time-reduced game state 2" or "normal game state." When the cumulative number "n" reaches "0," the main CPU 301a determines that the first predetermined condition has been met, and executes processing to transition the game state to "time-reduced game state 3." Even after the gaming state has transitioned to "Time-Shortened Gaming State 3" in this way, the main CPU 301a continues to execute the subtraction process, but will not execute the process of transitioning to "Time-Shortened Gaming State 3" based on the second fulfillment of the first predetermined condition unless the "starting point" is reached again and the cumulative count "n" is updated to "800." The subtraction process is also executed at the end of the variable display of special symbols, which results in a small win or time-shortened 4, during the jackpot determination. This subtraction process prevents the cumulative count "n" from being updated unless the "starting point" is reached, even if the variable display of special symbols is executed 800 or more times in the low-probability gaming state. This prevents the storage capacity of the main RAM 301c and the control capacity of the main CPU 301a from increasing.

Furthermore, if the first or second predetermined condition described above is met while the game is in "Time-Shortened Game State 2 (Low-Probability Time-Shortened Game State)," the game may be controlled to transition from "Time-Shortened Game State 2" to "Time-Shortened Game State 3" or "Time-Shortened Game State 4." With such a gaming machine, "Time-Shortened Game State 3" or "Time-Shortened Game State 4" may continue during "Time-Shortened Game State 2," allowing the game to continue in the "Time-Shortened Game State," further increasing the game's enjoyment. On the other hand, even if the first or second predetermined condition is met while in "Time-Shortened Game State 2," the game may be controlled to remain in "Time-Shortened Game State 2" only, and not transition to "Time-Shortened Game State 3" or "Time-Shortened Game State 4." Such a gaming machine can prevent the player from gaining a significant advantage.

Furthermore, if the second predetermined condition described above is met while the game is in "Time-Shortened Game State 3 (Low-Probability Time-Shortened Game State)," the game machine may be controlled to transition from "Time-Shortened Game State 3" to "Time-Shortened Game State 4." This type of gaming machine also allows players to continue playing in the "Time-Shortened Game State" as described above, further enhancing game enjoyment. On the other hand, even if the second predetermined condition is met while in "Time-Shortened Game State 3," the game machine may be controlled to remain in "Time-Shortened Game State 3" and not transition to "Time-Shortened Game State 4." This type of gaming machine, like the above, can prevent the player from gaining a significant advantage. As described above, since the first predetermined condition is not met while in "Time-Shortened Game State 3," the game machine is not controlled to transition to "Time-Shortened Game State 3" while in "Time-Shortened Game State 3."

If the first or second predetermined condition described above is met while the game is in "Time-Shortened Game State 4," the game machine may be controlled to transition from "Time-Shortened Game State 4" to "Time-Shortened Game State 3" or "Time-Shortened Game State 4." Specifically, for example, if the first predetermined condition is met when the special symbol variable display is executed 600 times in "Time-Shortened Game State 4," the game machine may be controlled to terminate "Time-Shortened Game State 4" and not transition to "Time-Shortened Game State 3" from the 601st special symbol variable display. Instead, the game machine may remain in "Time-Shortened Game State 4" and "Time-Shortened Game State 4" until the 700th special symbol variable display, and transition to only "Time-Shortened Game State 3" from the 701st special symbol variable display. Even with this gaming machine, gameplay can continue in the "Time-Shortened Game State" as described above, further enhancing game enjoyment. On the other hand, even if the first or second predetermined condition is met in "Time-Shortened Game State 4," control may be such that only "Time-Shortened Game State 4" is maintained and no transition to "Time-Shortened Game State 3" or "Time-Shortened Game State 4" occurs. In this type of gaming machine, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining a significant advantage.

(List of processes on the main control board 300)
4-2, the process executed by the main control board 300 will be described. FIG. 4-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the process executed by the main control board 300.

As shown in Figure 4-2, when power is supplied, the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 executes main processing based on the program stored in the main ROM 301b. As main processing, the main CPU 301a executes power restoration processing to restore the game state from before power interruption, setting change processing to change (update) the setting value (the probability of a jackpot being determined in a jackpot determination) which indicates the degree of game advantage based on operation of the setting key switch 302b, RAM clear processing to initialize the main RAM 301c based on operation of the RWM clear switch 302a, and setting confirmation processing to display the setting values saved in the memory area of the main RAM 301c on the information display 302c based on operation of the setting key switch 302b, as well as updating the initial values of various random numbers (e.g., jackpot random numbers, etc.). Additionally, while the main processing is being executed, the main CPU 301a repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, switch processing, special symbol processing, normal symbol processing, big prize device opening control processing, payout processing, command transmission processing) at regular intervals (for example, every 4 milliseconds). Each type of processing is explained below.

The setting change process involves switching to setting change mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (e.g., pressing for two seconds or more), displaying the current setting value on the information display 302c, and changing the setting value during setting change mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (e.g., pressing for one second or less). The setting change process can also terminate setting change mode and set the changed setting value during setting change mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (e.g., pressing for two seconds or more). The setting confirmation process involves switching to setting confirmation mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (e.g., pressing for one second or less) while not in setting change mode, displaying the current setting value on the information display 302c, and ending setting confirmation mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b during setting confirmation mode (e.g., pressing for one second or less).

The random number update process updates various random numbers, such as jackpot random numbers, win random numbers, reach random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, small jackpot symbol random numbers, time-saving symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers. The switch process is executed when a detection signal is input from each switch, and includes the following processes: a start port switch process that acquires and stores a jackpot random number, etc. as reserved information when a ball enters the first start port 112 or the second start port 115; a gate switch process that acquires and stores a normal symbol random number when a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b; and a large prize device switch process that detects a gaming ball that enters the first large prize port 117 or the second large prize port 127 during a jackpot game (during a jackpot game state). The start port switch process also includes a pre-determination process that performs a jackpot determination, a jackpot symbol determination, etc. based on reserved information.

The special symbol processing is processing related to the special symbol according to the processing results of the above-mentioned switch processing (first start port 112, second start port 115) and the special symbol special electric processing data described below. When the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the pending information shift processing shifts the pending information in the pending information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c and the pending order information at the time of acquisition, the pending information shifted to the pending information judgment area 301cy by the pending information shift processing, and the jackpot determination processing performs a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number and the win/jackpot determination table T1 of the pending information, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, This process includes a jackpot pattern determination process that determines the jackpot pattern (special pattern) based on the jackpot pattern random number included in the reserved information and the pattern determination table T2 in the event of a win, a reach determination process that makes a reach determination based on the reach random number included in the reserved information and the reach determination table T3, a fluctuation pattern setting process that sets a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern random number in the reserved information, and a special pattern stop process (details will be described later) that stops the display of the fluctuation display on the first special pattern display device 120 or the second special pattern display device 122.

Normal symbol processing is processing related to normal symbols according to the processing results of the switch processing (normal symbol activation gate 113b), and includes a hit determination process that performs a hit determination based on a hit random number and a hit/jackpot determination table T1; a normal symbol determination process that determines a normal symbol based on a normal symbol random number and a normal symbol determination table T6 when there is reserved information for a normal symbol; an operation pattern setting process that sets the operation pattern of the movable piece 115b when a hit is determined in the normal symbol determination; and an opening/closing member control process that controls the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second starting port 115 based on the operation pattern set in the operation pattern setting process.

The large prize device opening control process is a process related to the opening and closing control of the first large prize opening 117 and the second large prize opening 127 based on the special chart special power processing data described below, and includes an opening pattern setting process that sets an opening pattern during the initial opening performance of a large prize game, and a game state setting process that turns the large prize game flag OFF when the final ending performance of a large prize game has ended, turns ON a high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability game state, or a time-saving 1/time-saving 2 flag indicating that the game is in time-saving game state 1/time-saving game state 2, and sets the number of times that time-saving game play can be performed to a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times).

The payout process controls the payout of prize balls according to the detection results (winning game balls) of the switch process. The command transmission process transmits the various commands generated in the above process and information necessary to determine the presentation content to the presentation control board 320.

(List of processes on the performance control board 320)
Next, referring to Fig. 4-3, the processing executed by the performance control board 320 will be described. Fig. 4-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processing executed by the performance control board 320.

As shown in Figure 4-3, when power is supplied, the sub-CPU 320a of the performance control board 320 executes main performance processing based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 320b. As main performance processing, the sub-CPU 320a executes power restoration notification processing corresponding to the power restoration processing executed by the main control board 300, setting change notification processing corresponding to the setting change processing executed by the main control board 300, RAM clear notification processing corresponding to the RAM clear processing executed by the main control board 300, and setting confirmation notification processing corresponding to the setting confirmation processing executed by the main control board 300. Furthermore, while the main performance processing is being executed, the sub-CPU 320a repeatedly executes performance timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, command reception processing, performance button processing, command transmission processing, etc.) at regular intervals (e.g., every 2 milliseconds). The various processes are explained below.

The power restoration notification process is a process that executes power restoration notifications while the main control board 300 is executing the power restoration process, such as displaying a power restoration screen on the main display device 131 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the user that the game control state has returned to the state it was in before the power was cut off, lighting the performance lighting device 342 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 331 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

The RAM clear notification process is a process that executes a power-on notification while the RAM clear process is being executed on the main control board 300, such as displaying the initial power-on screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") on the main display device 131 to notify the player that the game control state has been initialized, lighting the effect lighting device 342 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 331 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) indicating that the memory area has been initialized.

The setting change notification process is a process that executes a setting change notification while the main control board 300 is in setting change mode and the setting change process is being executed, such as displaying a setting change in progress screen on the main display device 131, etc., indicating that the setting values are being changed, lighting the entire lighting device 342 for performance purposes in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) while the setting is being changed, and outputting a setting change notification sound from the audio output device 331 indicating that the setting is being changed ("Settings are being changed"). The setting confirmation notification process is a process that executes a setting confirmation notification while the main control board 300 is in setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation process is being executed, such as displaying a setting confirmation in progress screen on the main display device 131, etc., indicating that the setting is being confirmed, lighting the entire lighting device 342 for performance purposes in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) while the setting is being confirmed, and outputting a setting confirmation notification sound from the audio output device 331 indicating that the setting is being confirmed ("Setting values are being confirmed").

The random number update process is a process for updating various random numbers used in effects (for example, effect symbol determination random numbers, chance-up random numbers). The command reception process includes a game state setting process that sets the game state based on game state designation commands, etc., which will be described later, a pre-reading process that determines whether to perform continuous effects, pseudo-consecutive effects, icon change effects, etc., based on a hold command, a presentation pattern determination process that determines a presentation pattern based on the core display effect designation table TS1, the presentation symbol determination table TS2, and the chance-up determination table TS3, and a hold flag that is stored in the hold memory area 320c1 of the sub-RAM 320c when a hold command is received, and a hold table for displaying the hold on the main display device 131. The processing includes a hold process that sets a display command; a pre-determination information shift process that shifts the pre-determination information in the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 of the sub-RAM 320c when a variation start command is received; a normal symbol effect process that performs an effect corresponding to the normal symbol variation on the main display device 131 in accordance with the normal symbol determination result; a pattern determination process that performs a fixed and stopped display of the varying effect symbol on the main display device 131 based on a pattern determination command; and a jackpot process that performs an opening effect, ending effect, or round effect corresponding to an opening designation command during a jackpot game. The effect button process detects input via the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button detection switch 137) or the effect operation stick 136 and performs a specified effect. The command transmission process transmits the various commands generated by the above processes to the image/audio control board 330 and the lamp control board 340.

Here, continuous effects are effects that can be executed on the main display device 131, and are effects that can be executed during the change start effect across multiple changing displays of the special pattern. This continuous effect may consist of only one type of effect, or may include multiple types of effects. If the continuous effect includes multiple types of effects, one of the multiple types of effects may be selected and executed. Furthermore, continuous effects may be executed for a single changing display of the special pattern. Furthermore, pseudo-continuous effects may consist of only one type of effect, or may include multiple types of effects. If the pseudo-continuous effect includes multiple types of effects, one of the multiple types of effects may be selected and executed. Furthermore, icon change effects are effects that suggest the expectation (possibility) of a special game being executed by displaying the pending icon or icon displayed on the main display device 131 in a special display mode (special icon) that differs from the normal display mode (normal icon). Special display modes (special icons) come in a variety of colors, sizes, and shapes. For example, while regular icons are white, special icons come in blue, green, red, gold, etc., with the likelihood of winning increasing in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold.

In addition to the above-mentioned processing, the sub-CPU 320a also performs a presentation mode update process as part of the main presentation processing. Specifically, it determines whether update conditions (such as a change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, or the execution of an SP/SPSP reach presentation resulting in a loss) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that defines the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, background music, etc.) on the audio output device 331, main display device 131, first side display device 132, second side display device 133, etc., are met, and if the update conditions are met, it performs processing to update the presentation mode to one of multiple presentation modes. The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A to C, which are set in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state), presentation mode D, which is set in time-saving game state 1 (high-probability time-saving game state) described below, presentation mode E, which is set in time-saving game state 2 (low-probability time-saving game state) described below, and presentation mode F, which is set in time-saving game state 3 (low-probability time-saving game state). When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal game mode (for example, after changing the settings, clearing the RWM, or checking the settings), the first presentation mode set is always presentation mode A. Regarding background music, there are variable background musics 1-3 that are output during the variable display of each of presentation modes A-C in the normal game mode, variable background music 4 that is output during the variable display of presentation mode D in time-saving game mode 1, variable background music 5 that is output during the variable display of presentation mode E in time-saving game mode 2, and variable background music 6 that is output during the variable display of presentation mode F in time-saving game mode 3. Furthermore, background music that is output during the execution of various reach presentations, such as normal reach background music, SP reach background music, and SPSP reach background music, is also provided. As described below, the variable background music settings can be changed according to the player's operation; for example, it is possible to set variable background music 4 to be output during presentation mode A.

(Explanation of special symbol stop processing)
Next, a transition from a gaming state to time-shortened gaming state 3 or time-shortened gaming state 4 will be described with reference to Figures 4-4 and 4-5. Figure 4-4 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol stop process, which is one of the processes performed by the main control board 300. Figure 4-5 is a flowchart illustrating the transition determination process to the time-shortened gaming state and the termination determination process of the time-shortened gaming state, where (a) is a flowchart illustrating the time-shortened gaming state 3 transition determination process, (b) is a flowchart illustrating the time-shortened gaming state 4 transition determination process, and (c) is a flowchart illustrating the time-shortened gaming state termination determination process.

As shown in Figure 4-4, immediately after the variable display of the special symbol stops, the main CPU 301a first executes a time-reduction 3 transition determination process to determine whether the gaming state has transitioned to time-reduction gaming state 3 (S231), and then executes a time-reduction 4 transition determination process to determine whether the gaming state has transitioned to time-reduction gaming state 4 (S232). Details of the time-reduction 3 transition determination process and the time-reduction 4 transition determination process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 301a determines whether the display wait period (e.g., about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed (S233). If it determines that the display wait period has not ended (NO in S233), it waits until it determines that the display wait period has ended. On the other hand, if it determines that the display wait period has ended (YES in S233), it executes the next step. Note that the display wait period is a period set so that the player can recognize the stopped display of the special symbol in the current game. In other words, the display (start of change) of the special symbol in the next game is prohibited until the display wait period ends.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a time-saving game end determination process to determine whether or not the time-saving game has ended (S234). Details of the time-saving game end determination process will be described later. Next, the main CPU 301a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state of the game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301c (S235), determines whether or not the special symbol that stopped in the game is a jackpot symbol (S236), and if it is determined to be a jackpot symbol (YES in S236), sets the special symbol special power processing data to "3" (big prize device release control process) (S237). Here, the special symbol special power processing data is data used in the large prize device opening control process to control the operation of the first special symbol display 120, the second special symbol display 122, and the large prize opening movable pieces 117b, 127b. For example, in the case of "3", the movable pieces 117b, etc. are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern for large prize play after the opening performance of large prize play is executed, in the case of "4", the movable pieces 117b, etc. are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern for small prize play after the opening performance of small prize play is executed, and in the case of "0", the movable pieces 117b, etc. are not set to the open state.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot initialization process to initialize various pieces of information (S238). This jackpot initialization process, for example, changes the high probability flag that is ON in the high probability game state to OFF and transitions to a low probability game state, or changes the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving game state to OFF and transitions to a non-time-saving game state. It also executes initialization processes to initialize the cumulative number of times "n" described above to "800 (times)," and to initialize the remaining number of times "M," which indicates the (remaining) number of times play can continue in the time-saving game state, to "0." The time-saving flags include a first time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 1, a second time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 2, a third time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 3, and a fourth time-saving flag that is ON in time-saving game state 4. All time-saving flags are changed to OFF during the jackpot initialization process. The available number of plays "M" also corresponds to each time-saving game state: available number of plays "M1" in time-saving game state 1, available number of plays "M3" in time-saving game state 2, available number of plays "M4" in time-saving game state 3, and available number of plays "M4" in time-saving game state 4. All available number of plays "M" are initialized during the jackpot initialization process.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot start preparation process that determines the pattern for opening the movable piece 117b of the first large prize opening 117 and the movable piece 127b of the second large prize opening 127 during a jackpot game according to the special symbol (type of jackpot) (S239), sets an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot in the performance transmission data storage area (S240), sets an opening time according to the type of jackpot (S241), and terminates the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S236 above that the special symbol that stopped during the game is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S236), it determines whether the stopped special symbol is a small prize symbol (S242), and if it determines that the special symbol is a small prize symbol (YES in S242), it sets the special symbol special power processing data to "4" (large prize device opening control processing) (S243), and terminates the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S232 above that the special symbol that stopped in the game is not a small win symbol (NO in S242), it sets the special symbol special power processing data to "0" (S243) and ends the processing when the special symbol stopped.

In step S233 of the special symbol stopping process described above, the display wait period is set to a constant value when transitioning to all time-saving game states. However, this is not limited to this and various other periods may be used. For example, the display wait period when a time-saving symbol (such as special symbol J1) is displayed may be longer than the normal display wait period. More specifically, the display wait period when a time-saving symbol is displayed may be the same as the ending period of the jackpot game. Furthermore, during the display wait period when a time-saving symbol is displayed, a time-saving entry effect, which is an effect suggesting a transition to time-saving game state 4, may be executed, or the game may transition to time-saving game state 4 after the display wait period has ended. Furthermore, if a time-saving entry effect is executed when transitioning to time-saving game state 4 after the display wait period has ended, the effect symbols and small symbols described below may or may not be displayed during the display wait period.

As shown in Figure 4-5(a), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time-reduction 3 transition determination process, it first determines whether a jackpot has been won in the game (S261), and if it determines that a jackpot has been won (YES in S261), it terminates the time-reduction 3 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines that a jackpot has not been won in step S261 (NO in S261), it determines whether the game is in a low-probability game state (normal game state or time-reduction game state 2) (S262), and if it determines that the game is not in a low-probability game state (NO in S262), it terminates the time-reduction 3 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S262 that the game is in a low-probability game state (YES in S262), it subtracts "1" from the cumulative number of times "n" (S263), determines whether the cumulative number of times "n" has reached "0" for the first time since the update (after execution of the jackpot initialization process or RAM clear process in S238) (S264), and if it determines that the cumulative number of times "n" has not reached "0" for the first time since the update (NO in S264), it terminates the time-reduction 3 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S264 that the cumulative number of times "n" has reached "0" for the first time since the update (YES in S264), it sets the remaining number of times M3 of games in time-reduction game state 3 to the initial value "700" (S265), updates the time-reduction 3 flag to the ON state (S266), and terminates the time-reduction 3 transition determination process.

In this way, when the time-reduction 3 transition determination process is executed immediately after the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 120 or the second special symbol display device 122, if the jackpot is not won and the game is in a low-probability game state, the cumulative number of times "n" will be subtracted. Furthermore, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, unless the RAM clear process is executed, the game will transition to time-reduction game state 3 only once, and will not transition to time-reduction game state 3 more than once. Note that the main CPU 301c may transmit a time-reduction 3 remaining number command indicating the available number of plays "M3" to the presentation control board 320 when the available number of plays "M3" is set to its initial value, or may transmit a time-reduction 3 remaining number command and a time-reduction 3 cumulative number command indicating the cumulative number of plays "n" when play ends or starts. With this configuration, for example, even if the available number of plays "M3" or the accumulated number of plays "n" is erased on the performance control board 320, the performance control board 320 can refer to the remaining time-reduction 3 command and the accumulated number of time-reduction 3 commands that it receives periodically.

As shown in FIG. 4-5(b), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time-shortening 4 transition determination process, it first determines whether the current game is in a low-probability non-time-shortening game state (S281), and if it determines that the current game is not in a low-probability non-time-shortening game state (NO in S281), it terminates the time-shortening 4 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S281 that the current game is in a low-probability non-time-shortening game state (YES in S261), it determines whether the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 has displayed the time-shortening symbol J1 (S282), and if it determines that the time-shortening symbol J1 has displayed the time-shortening symbol J1 (YES in S282), it sets the available number of plays "M4" in time-shortening game state 4 to the initial value "100" (S283), updates the time-shortening 4 flag to the ON state (S286), and terminates the time-shortening 4 transition determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S282 that the time-saving symbol J1 has not been displayed as stopped (NO in S282), it determines whether the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 has displayed the time-saving symbol J2 as stopped (S284), and if it determines that the time-saving symbol J2 has been displayed as stopped (YES in S284), it sets the number of plays available in time-saving game state 4, "M4," to the initial value "700" (S285), updates the time-saving 4 flag to the ON state in step S286, and terminates the time-saving 4 transition determination process.On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S284 that the time-saving symbol J2 has not been displayed as stopped (NO in S284), it terminates the time-saving 4 transition determination process.

In this way, when the time-saving 4 transition determination process is executed immediately after the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 displays a stopped special symbol, if the time-saving symbol J1 stops as the special symbol, the game will transition to time-saving game state 4, where the number of available plays is 100. If the time-saving symbol J2 stops as the special symbol, the game will transition to time-saving game state 4, where the number of available plays is 700. Therefore, this configuration can increase the player's interest in the game compared to time-saving game state 4, where the number of available plays is fixed. Note that, similar to when the above-mentioned time-saving 3 transition determination process is executed, the main CPU 301c may send a time-saving 4 remaining number command indicating the number of available plays "M4" to the effect control board 320 when the number of available plays "M4" is set to its initial value or when play ends or starts.

As shown in Figure 4-5 (c), when the main CPU 301a begins executing the time-saving end determination process, it first determines whether the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag is in the ON state (S301). If it determines that the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag is in the OFF state (NO in S301), it determines whether the time-saving 3 flag is in the ON state (S305). If it determines that the time-saving 3 flag is in the OFF state (NO in S305), it determines whether the time-saving 4 flag is in the ON state (S309). If it determines that the time-saving 4 flag is in the OFF state (NO in S309), it terminates the time-saving end determination process. In other words, if the game state is not a time-saving game state, the time-saving end determination process is not executed. As mentioned above, when a jackpot game is initiated during the special symbol stop processing, the jackpot initialization processing changes all of the time-saving flags, time-saving 1 flag, time-saving 2 flag, time-saving 3 flag, and time-saving 4 flag, to the OFF state (S238 in Figure 4-4), so the main CPU 301c will not execute the time-saving end determination processing during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S301 that the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag is ON (YES in S301), it subtracts the value "1" from the number of available plays "M1" in time-saving play state 1 and time-saving play state 2 (S302), determines whether the number of available plays "M1" is "0" (S303), and if it determines that the number of available plays "M1" is "0" (YES in S303), it sets the time-saving 1 flag or the time-saving 2 flag to the OFF state (S304) and proceeds to step S305. Furthermore, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S303 that the number of available plays "M1" is not "0" (NO in S303), it also proceeds to step S305. By executing the processes from step S301 to step S304, unless a jackpot is won, time-saving play in time-saving play state 1 and time-saving play state 2 can be continued up to 100 times, as indicated by the initial value "100" of the number of times playable "M1" in time-saving play state 1 and time-saving play state 2.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S305 that the time-saving 3 flag is ON (YES in S305), it subtracts the value "1" from the number of available plays "M3" in time-saving game state 3 (S306), determines whether the number of available plays "M3" is "0" (S307), and if it determines that the number of available plays "M3" is "0" (YES in S307), it sets the time-saving 3 flag to the OFF state (S308) and proceeds to step S309. Furthermore, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S307 that the number of available plays "M3" is not "0" (NO in S307), it also proceeds to step S309. By executing the processes from step S305 to step S308, unless a jackpot is won, time-saving play in time-saving play state 3 can be continued up to 700 times, as indicated by the initial value "700" of the number of times playable "M1" in time-saving play state 3.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S309 that the time-saving 4 flag is ON (YES in S309), it subtracts the value "1" from the number of available plays "M4" in time-saving game state 4 (S310), determines whether the number of available plays "M4" is "0" (S311), and if it determines that the number of available plays "M4" is "0" (YES in S311), it sets the time-saving 4 flag to OFF (S312) and terminates the time-saving termination determination process. Furthermore, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S311 that the number of available plays "M4" is not "0" (NO in S311), it also terminates the time-saving termination determination process. By executing the processes from step S309 to step S312, unless a jackpot is won, time-saving play in time-saving play state 4 can be continued up to 700 times, as indicated by the initial value "700" of the number of times playable "M1" in time-saving play state 4.

In this way, in the time-saving end determination process, when a trigger to end a time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1, time-saving game state 2, time-saving game state 3, time-saving game state 4) is met, the time-saving game state is ended by changing the time-saving flag corresponding to that time-saving game state (time-saving 1 flag, time-saving 2 flag, time-saving 3 flag, time-saving 4 flag) to the OFF state. Note that in the time-saving end determination process, the number of available plays "M (M1, M2, M3, M4)" is decremented each time the variable display on either the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 is stopped.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving end determination process, each time-saving game state is set to end when the available number of plays "M (M1, M2, M3, M4)" becomes "0," i.e., when the total number of variable displays on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches a predetermined initial value. However, this is not limited to this and various other modes are also possible. For example, each time-saving game state may be set to end when the total number of variable displays on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches 50, when the number of variable displays on the second special symbol display 122 reaches 5, or when a small win is first won. Furthermore, the trigger for ending each time-saving game state may be different. For example, the time-saving game state 1 ends when the total number of times the variable display on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches 50 times, when the number of times the variable display on the second special symbol display 122 reaches 5 times, or when a small win is first won, and the time-saving game state 3 ends when the total number of times the variable display on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches 500 times, when the number of times the variable display on the second special symbol display 122 reaches 5 times, or when a small win is first won. The time-saving game state 4 may end when the first of the following occurs: when the total number of variable displays on the display 122 reaches 20, or when a small prize is won four times; and the time-saving game state 4 may end when the first of the following occurs: when the total number of variable displays on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches 30, when the number of variable displays on the second special symbol display 122 reaches 6, or when a small prize is won three times.

Referring to Figures 4-6, we will now explain the end of the time-shortened game state 3 and time-shortened game state 4. Figures 4-6 are diagrams explaining the end of time-shortened game state 3 and time-shortened game state 4, with (a) illustrating a case where a jackpot game occurs during time-shortened game state 3, ending time-shortened game state 3, and (b) illustrating a case where a jackpot game occurs during time-shortened game state 4, ending time-shortened game state 4. Note that Figures 4-6 illustrate the jackpot game period (including the opening period and ending period), the operating periods of time-shortened game state 1, time-shortened game state 3, and time-shortened game state 4, and the available number of plays "M1," "M3," and "M4."

As shown in Figure 4-6(a), when a jackpot game starts at time tb1 during time-shortened game state 3, jackpot initialization processing is executed at time tb1. Therefore, the number of available plays "M3" in time-shortened game state 3 at time tb1 is updated from "500" to "0," and time-shortened game state 3 ends. Furthermore, at time tb2 when the jackpot game ends, the number of available plays "M1" in time-shortened game state 1 is set to the initial value "100," and the game transitions to time-shortened game state 1, without restarting time-shortened game state 3. In this way, when a jackpot is won during time-shortened game state 3, time-shortened game state 3 may be ended without restarting time-shortened game state 3 after the jackpot game, so that the maximum number of available plays in time-shortened game state 3, "700 plays," can be played.

As shown in Figure 4-6(b), when a jackpot game starts at time tc1 during time-shortened game state 4, jackpot initialization processing is executed at time tc1. As a result, the number of available plays "M4" in time-shortened game state 4, which was "10" at time tc1, is updated to "0," and time-shortened game state 4 ends. Furthermore, at time tc2 when the jackpot game ends, the number of available plays "M1" in time-shortened game state 1 is set to the initial value "100," and the game transitions to time-shortened game state 1, without restarting time-shortened game state 4. In this way, even when a jackpot is won during time-shortened game state 4, time-shortened game state 4 may be ended without restarting time-shortened game state 4 after the jackpot game, so that the maximum number of available plays in time-shortened game state 4, "700 (plays)," can be played.

(Explanation of information display 302c)
Next, the information display 302c of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4-7 and 4-8. FIG. 4-7 is a diagram illustrating the details of the information display 302c. FIG. 4-8 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the counting period of the base value B. Here, the base value B is a numerical value calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls paid out in a specific section of the normal game mode (low-probability non-time-saving game mode) by the number of outs (the total number of game balls shot out). The number of outs refers to the number of game balls detected by an out ball detection switch (not shown). For example, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch includes game balls that have entered the out hole 111, a start hole such as the first start hole 112, a prize hole such as the first large prize hole 117, or a general prize hole (not shown).

As shown in Figure 4-7(a), first, various counters (base calculation out counter, base calculation prize ball counter, total out counter) provided in main RAM 301c are used to control the display of base value B on information display 302c. The base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific interval. For example, each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch, a value of "1" is added to the base calculation out counter. The base calculation prize ball counter counts prize balls in a specific interval. For example, the base calculation prize ball counter is incremented by a value of "10" when a game ball enters a general prize slot, by a value of "15" when a game ball enters a prize slot such as first large prize slot 117, and by a value of "3" when a game ball enters a start slot such as first start slot 112. The total out counter counts the number of outs since the power was first turned on (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "total number of outs"). The main CPU 301a then calculates a base value B for a specific interval by multiplying the result of dividing the value of the base calculation prize ball counter by the value of the base calculation out counter by the value "100." Each time a predetermined interval ends, the base value B for that interval is stored (saved). In this embodiment, the base value B is stored each time the number of outs reaches 60,000. Specifically, each time the total out counter is incremented by the value "60,000," the main CPU 301a calculates and stores the base value B from the current values of the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter, and initializes the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter. In this embodiment, the period during which the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are incremented is referred to as the "counting period," and periods other than the counting period are sometimes referred to as the "non-counting period."

As shown in Figure 4-7(b), next, 60,000 outs are counted in section 3, then 60,000 outs are counted in section 2, then 60,000 outs are counted in section 1, and then section L (where the number of outs is less than 60,000 (0 to 59,999)) begins. Here, the base value B for section 3 is "B3," the base value B for section 2 is "B2," the base value for section 1 is "B1," and the base value B for section L is "BL." In such section L, the information display 302c displays the base value BL for section L (real time), the base value B1 for section 1, the base value B2 for section 2, and the base value B3 for section 3, switching in this order approximately every 5 seconds. Furthermore, when the number of outs in section L reaches 60,000, the base value BL for section L is stored as the base value B for the newest section, the base value B1 for section 1 is stored as the base value B for the next newest section, the base value B2 for section 2 is stored as the base value B for the third newest section, and the base value B3 for the oldest section 3 is discarded. In other words, when one section ends (60,000 outs are counted), the base value B for that section is saved as the base value B for the previous section, and the base value B for the oldest section is discarded. Note that in this embodiment, these base values B are continuously displayed on the information display 302c, including the period during which play is possible.

As shown in Figure 4-7(c), the information display 302c is composed of four seven-segment displays 302ca to 302cd. As described above, the two seven-segment displays 302cc and 302cd display the two-digit base value B in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3, switching approximately every five seconds. If the base value B is greater than the numerical value "100," "99." is displayed (the dot display section lights up). Furthermore, the two seven-segment displays 302ca and 302cb display identification information "bL," "b1," "b2," and "b3," which correspond to the base value B displayed on the two seven-segment displays 302cc and 302cd and enable identification of which interval of base value B is displayed. Specifically, on the two seven-segment displays 302ca, 302cb of the information display 302c, the identification information "bL" is displayed during the period when the base value BL for section L is displayed, the identification information "b1" is displayed during the period when the base value B1 for section 1 is displayed, the identification information "b2" is displayed during the period when the base value B2 for section 2 is displayed, and the identification information "b3" is displayed during the period when the base value B3 for section 3 is displayed.

Here, we will explain in more detail the display mode on information display 302c for each of sections L to 3. For example, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000 and the identification information "b1," "b2," and "b3" is displayed, base value B may not be calculated. When the total number of outs is less than 60,000, each identification information flashes on seven-segment displays 302ca and 302cb, and the special symbol "--" is displayed on seven-segment displays 302cc and 302cd. Furthermore, if the total number of outs is greater than 60,000 and less than 120,000, base value B1 may be calculated, but base value B2 for identification information "b2" and base value B3 for identification information "b3" may not be calculated. In this way, when the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed, the identification information is displayed lit and the base value B1 is displayed lit, but during the period when the identification information "b2" and "b3" are displayed, each identification information is displayed flashing and the special symbol "--" is displayed lit. Furthermore, when the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, the base value B1 and base value B2 are calculated, but the base value B3 of the identification information "b3" may not be calculated. In this way, when the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, during the period when the identification information "b1" or "b2" is displayed, the identification information is displayed lit and the base value B1 or base value B2 is displayed lit, but during the period when the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is displayed flashing and the special symbol "--" is displayed lit. As described above, in this embodiment, while the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed, if the number of normal outs in section L is not sufficiently high, it may be difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In such a case, for example, if the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6,000, the identification information "bL" may be displayed flashing, and if the number of normal outs is 6,000 or more, the identification information "bL" may be displayed lit. With this display mode, whether the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently high is essentially notified, allowing the administrator of the gaming machine 100 to evaluate the base value B after taking into account whether the number of normal outs in section L is sufficient.

Before a player actually plays, an administrator typically checks the operation of the gaming machine 100. This check includes checking whether gaming balls are detected correctly by various detection switches (such as the out ball detection switch). When this check is performed, for example, in a configuration in which the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are incremented immediately after the gaming machine 100 is first powered on, the base value B calculated immediately after the first power-on may differ from the base value B calculated during actual play. In such cases, in this embodiment, the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter may not be incremented until the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., the value "300"). This prevents the base value from differing immediately after the first power-on.

Here, we will provide a detailed explanation of the counting process, which is one of the processes executed in the main processing on the main control board 300, and which counts the number of prize balls and the number of outs to calculate the base value B in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state), and the base display process, which displays the base value B on the information display 302c. When the counting process is executed, the main CPU 301a adds a value of "10" (the number of prize balls corresponding to the normal prize opening) to the base calculation prize ball counter when a game ball enters a normal prize opening and is detected by the normal prize opening detection switch in the normal game state; adds a value of "3" when a game ball is detected by the first prize opening detection switch 304 or the second prize opening detection switch 305; and adds a value of "15" when a game ball is detected by the first prize opening detection switch 306a or the second prize opening detection switch 306b. Furthermore, when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch during normal game play, the main CPU 301a adds a value of "1" to the base calculation out counter. Note that in game states other than normal game play, no values are added to the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter. After executing the counting process, the main CPU 301a calculates a base value from the normal prize ball count and normal out count counted in the above-mentioned counting process, and executes a base display process that displays the identification information and base value B on the information display 302c. By executing this base display process, the identification information and base value B are displayed on the information display 302c in the manner described above.

Referring to Figure 4-8, we will now explain a specific example of the counting period, which is the period during which the counting process required to display base value B on the information display 302c is performed. First, Figure 4-8(a) is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the counting period before and after a transition from a low-probability, non-time-reduced game state (normal game state) to time-reduced game state 3. Figure 4-8(b) is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the counting period before and after a transition from a low-probability, non-time-reduced game state (normal game state) to time-reduced game state 4. Furthermore, Figure 4-8(c) is a diagram illustrating another specific example of the counting period before and after a transition from a low-probability, non-time-reduced game state (normal game state) to time-reduced game state 4. Note that in the following explanation, the counting period refers to the period during which the above-mentioned counting process is performed, and the non-counting period refers to the period during which the counting process is not performed.

As shown in Figure 4-8(a), this section describes a case where the 800th play (variable display of special symbols) in the low-probability, non-time-saving game state begins at time tn1, a losing symbol is displayed as a static symbol during the 800th play, and at time tn2, the losing symbol is displayed as a static symbol and the cumulative number of times "n" for the first predetermined condition becomes "0." In such a case, the low-probability, non-time-saving game state prior to time tn2 becomes the counting period, and the time-saving game state 3 from time tn2 onward becomes the non-counting period. Furthermore, this section describes a case where a jackpot is not won in time-saving game state 3, and the final play in time-saving game state 3 (variable display of special symbols for the 700th play) begins at time tn3, a losing symbol is displayed as a static symbol during the final play at time tn4, and the number of times available for play becomes "0 (plays)." In such a case, the game enters a low-probability non-time-reduced game state from time tn4 onwards, and the counting period resumes from time tn4. Note that, while the above description stated that the start of the non-counting period when transitioning to time-reduced game state 3 was time tn2, it could also be time tn1. Also, while the restart of the counting period when transitioning to a low-probability non-time-reduced game state after time-reduced game state 3 ends was time tn4, it could also be time tn3.

As shown in Figure 4-8(b), this section describes a case where a game in which the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed as a static display in a low-probability, non-time-saving game state begins at time t01, and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed as a static display at time t02. In such a case, the low-probability, non-time-saving game state prior to time t02 constitutes the counting period, and the time-saving game state 4 from time t02 onward constitutes the non-counting period. Also, this section describes a case where a player does not win a jackpot in time-saving game state 4, and the final game in time-saving game state 4 (the 700th special symbol variable display) begins at time t03, and a losing symbol is displayed as a static display in that final game at time t04, reducing the number of available plays to "0." Note that, at this time, it is assumed that the cumulative number "n" of the first predetermined condition is not "0." In such a case, the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving game state from time t04 onward, and the counting period resumes from time t04. For example, if a time-saving symbol J1 or the like is displayed as a stopped symbol during the final game of time-saving game state 4, the counting period may be resumed, similar to when a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, as described above. Also, if a small win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol during the final game of time-saving game state 4, the counting period may be resumed after the small win game ends. Furthermore, while the start of the non-counting period upon transition to time-saving game state 4 was described above as time t02, it may also be time t01. Furthermore, the restart of the counting period upon transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state after the end of time-saving game state 4 was described as time t04, it may also be time t03.

As shown in Figure 4-8(c), this section describes a case where a game in which the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed as a static display in a low-probability, non-time-saving game state begins at time tp1, and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed as a static display at time tp2. In such a case, the low-probability, non-time-saving game state prior to time tp2 constitutes the counting period, and time-saving game state 4 from time tp2 onward constitutes the non-counting period. Also, this section describes a case where a player does not win a jackpot in time-saving game state 4, and the final game of time-saving game state 4 (the 700th variable display of a special symbol) begins at time tp3, a losing symbol is displayed as a static display in that final game at time tp4, and the number of available plays becomes "0." At this time, it is assumed that the cumulative number "n" of the first predetermined condition becomes "0." In such a case, time-saving game state 3 begins from time tp4 onward, and the non-counting period continues even after time tp4. Furthermore, if the cumulative number of times "n" that the first predetermined condition is met reaches "0" in the final game of time-saving game state 4, the non-counting period will continue even if a time-saving symbol such as J1 or a small win symbol is displayed in that game.

(Examples of display effects for each mode)
5-1 and 5-2, we will explain examples of presentation displays (pre-change action, pre-stop action, etc.) for each presentation mode on the main display device 131, and examples of presentation displays for the number of reserved items. Fig. 5-1 is a diagram showing examples of presentation displays (pre-change action, pre-stop action, etc.) for each presentation mode on the main display device 131, and Fig. 5-2 is a diagram showing an example of presentation displays for the number of reserved items on the main display device 131.

As shown in Figures 5-1 and 5-2, the main display device 131 displays various effects depending on the progress of the game. These effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the special symbol variable display is not being executed, a variable effect that involves the variable display (pre-variation action, update variation) of the effect symbol 50a that is performed while the special symbol variable display is being executed, a variable display (update variation) of the special symbol TZ (the so-called fourth symbol) that is performed while the special symbol variable display is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is performed while a jackpot game is being executed. The display section (effective display area) of the main display device 131 is formed with a variable display area for displaying the three effect symbols 50a (left symbol, center symbol, right symbol), a mode display area for indicating the display mode related to the execution of the variable effect, and the like. The main display device 131 also has a first hold icon display area 50b for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number in normal game mode, a second hold icon display area 50d (not shown) for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number in time-saving game mode, an icon display area 50c for displaying an icon (execution information) indicating that a variable effect is being executed, a first hold number display area SA for displaying the first hold number numerically, and a second hold number display area SB for displaying the second hold number numerically.

The effect symbols 50a are composed of symbols representing the numbers "1" through "9," for example, and begin to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special symbols executed by the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122, and are stationary in response to the stop of the changing display of the special symbols. The effect symbols 50a are also stationary and displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a mode (miss mode, jackpot mode) that notifies the result of the jackpot determination. A jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 50a, such as "777" or "555," while a miss mode is any other mode. While the changing display of the effect symbols 50a scrolls vertically, they may also scroll horizontally, or may switch on the spot or rotate (spin). Additionally, while the display of the effect symbol 50a is changing (changing effect), various effect images such as background images and characters, as well as movies, are displayed on the main display device 131, etc., depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby heightening the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game (special game).

The first hold icon display area 50b is divided into a first display section 50b1 (first area), a second display section 50b2 (second area), a third display section 50b3 (third area), and a fourth display section 50b4 (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 50c, and the first display section 50b1 to the fourth display section 50b4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number. Specifically, the first display section 50b1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol will be displayed first, the second display section 50b2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol will be displayed second, the third display section 50b3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol will be displayed third, and the fourth display section 50b4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol will be displayed fourth. The second hold icon display area 50d is divided into a first display section 50d1, a second display section 50d2, a third display section 50d3, and a fourth display section 50d4 from the side closest to the icon display area 50c, and the first display section 50d1 to the fourth display section 50d4 display second hold icons in numbers corresponding to the second hold number.

The icon display area 50c is larger than the display sections of the first hold icon display area 50b to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 50b and the second hold icon display area 50d, and the displayed icon is also displayed larger than the first hold icon. Specifically, for example, as the display of the first special pattern (effect pattern 50a) begins, the first hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 50b move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 50c, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 50b1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 50c, becoming the icon. When the display of the first special pattern (effect pattern 50a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased) (a disappearance effect of the icon (erasing effect)). Note that the icon may also disappear during the display of the first special pattern (effect pattern 50a).

As shown in Figure 5-1(a), in presentation mode A (normal game mode), the Mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action), presentation pattern 50a is displayed in the first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes, and a cumulative count image RK indicating the number of plays corresponding to the above-mentioned cumulative count "n" is displayed. Furthermore, presentation pattern 50a in the first form scrolls downward (update fluctuation) during the variable presentation, and as a pre-variation action indicating the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position for 0.75 seconds, and as a pre-stop action indicating the end of this scrolling display, the character image CG is displayed shaking its head at the symbol stop position for 0.9 seconds. In addition, in the icon display areas (first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in a first form (hexagonal). The normal icon in the first form is configured to perform a swinging motion (performance motion) that constantly repeats with one cycle of 2 seconds, from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, to a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position. In addition, during the variable display in performance mode A, variable BGM1 is output. Furthermore, the cumulative count image RK is hidden before the cumulative count "n" in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 780 times), and begins to be displayed after the predetermined number is reached. Each time one game in the normal game state ends (stop display with a losing symbol, etc.), the image is updated to an image with a number incremented by "1."

As shown in Figure 5-1 (b), in presentation mode B (normal game mode), the Mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation), presentation pattern 50a is displayed in the second form (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes, and the accumulated count image RK is displayed in the same form as presentation mode A described above. The presentation pattern 50a in the second form is scrolled downward (updated and changed) during the variable presentation, but as a pre-change operation before starting this scrolling display (updating operation), the presentation pattern 50a is reduced and displayed normally for 0.5 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation before ending this scrolling display (updating operation), the presentation pattern 50a is reduced and displayed normally at the pattern stop position for 0.5 seconds. Additionally, in the icon display areas (first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the second form (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second form then swings from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, to a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position, repeatedly performing a swinging motion (performance motion) at a cycle of 2 seconds while displayed on the main display device 131. Additionally, during the variable display in performance mode B, variable BGM2 is output.

As shown in Figure 5-1 (c), in presentation mode C (normal game mode), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation), presentation pattern 50a is displayed in the third form (a round-chamfered rectangular base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a round-chamfered hexagonal image), special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes, and a cumulative count image RK is displayed in the same form as presentation mode A described above. Furthermore, presentation pattern 50a in the third form is scrolled downward (updated and changed) during the change presentation, and before this scrolling display (updated and changed) begins, the presentation pattern 50a is enlarged and displayed for 0.5 seconds, and before this scrolling display (updated and changed) ends, the presentation pattern 50a is rotated and displayed at the pattern stop position for 0.7 seconds. Additionally, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), normal icons are displayed in the third form (star shape). A normal icon in the third form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the specific apex is at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, a rotational movement (performance movement) that is constantly repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds. Additionally, during the variable display in performance mode C, variable BGM 3 is output.

While the cumulative count image RK has the same appearance in presentation modes A to C described above, it may have different appearances depending on the presentation mode. For example, the character font may be different, or the size may be different. Furthermore, while the cumulative count image RK begins to be displayed after the cumulative count in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 790 times), it may also be displayed constantly during the normal game state. Furthermore, while the cumulative count image RK indicates the number of games played corresponding to the cumulative count "n" described above, this is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed in a manner that indicates the number of games played until transition to time-saving game state 3. Specifically, it may be displayed in a manner that also displays wording that encourages anticipation of transition to time-saving game state 3, such as "20 more games until play time begins (transition to time-saving game state 3)!!"

As shown in Figure 5-1(d), in presentation mode D (time-saving game state 1), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation), presentation pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes, remaining number image JK indicating the number of plays remaining in time-saving game state 1 (corresponding to the number of plays remaining "M1") is displayed, and right-hit image MG indicating a right hit is displayed. Furthermore, presentation pattern 50a in the fourth form is displayed as a downward scroll (update change) in the variable presentation, and as a pre-change operation indicating the start of this scrolling display, a floating display in which the symbol floats upward from the symbol stop position is displayed for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation indicating the end of this scrolling display, a bounding display in which the symbol floats upward from the symbol stop position and then falls downward is displayed for 0.4 seconds. The bounce display, which is the pre-stop action, has a similar presentation to the floating display, which is the pre-variation action, but the bount display has a faster movement speed of the presentation symbol 50a and a lower floating height. In the icon display area (second pending icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth form (round). The fourth-form normal icon rotates from a first position (initial position) with the internal black dot at the top, then moves to a second position where the black dot moves, and then returns to the first position (presentation operation), repeating this rotational motion (presentation operation) every 3 seconds. During the variable display in presentation mode D, variable background music 4 is output. Furthermore, the remaining number image JK is updated to an image with a value subtracted by "1" each time a game in time-saving game state 1 is completed (stop display with a losing symbol, etc.). The right hit image MG is displayed when the right hit lamp is lit and is hidden when the right hit lamp is off.

As shown in Figure 5-1 (e), in presentation mode E (time-saving game state 2), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation), presentation pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes, remaining number image JK indicating the remaining number of plays available in time-saving game state 2 (corresponding to the remaining number of plays "M2") is displayed, and right-hit image MG indicating a right hit is displayed. Furthermore, presentation pattern 50a in the fourth form is displayed as a downward scroll (update change) in the variable presentation, and as a pre-change operation indicating the start of this scrolling display, a floating display that floats upward from the pattern stop position is displayed for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation indicating the end of this scrolling display, a rotating (small) display of presentation pattern 50a is displayed at the pattern stop position for 0.4 seconds. Additionally, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth configuration (circular). The normal icon in the fourth configuration rotates from a first configuration (initial configuration) in which the internal black dot is positioned at the top, then moves to a second configuration in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first configuration, repeating this rotational motion (performance motion) at a cycle of 3 seconds. During the variable display in performance mode E, variable background music 5 is output. Furthermore, the remaining number image JK is updated to an image with a value subtracted by "1" each time a single play in time-saving game state 2 ends (stop display with a losing symbol, etc.). The right-hit image MG is displayed while the right-hit lamp is lit, and is hidden while the right-hit lamp is off.

As shown in Figure 5-1(f), in presentation mode F (time-saving game state 3), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation action), presentation pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (numerical image) common to all presentation modes, remaining number image JK indicating the number of plays remaining in time-saving game state 3 (corresponding to the number of plays remaining "M3") is displayed, and right-hit image MG indicating a right hit is displayed. Furthermore, presentation pattern 50a in the fourth form is scrolled downward (updated and changed) during the change presentation, and a reduced display of presentation pattern 50a is displayed for 0.4 seconds as a pre-change action indicating the start of this scrolling display, and a bound (small) display floating upward from the symbol stop position is displayed for 0.4 seconds as a pre-stop action indicating the end of this scrolling display. Additionally, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth configuration (pentagon). The normal icon in the fifth configuration rotates from a first configuration (initial configuration) in which the specific apex is positioned at the top, passes through a second configuration in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first configuration, repeating this rotational motion (performance motion) at a cycle of 3 seconds. During the variable display in performance mode F, variable background music 6 is output. Furthermore, the remaining number image JK is updated to an image with a value subtracted by "1" each time a single play in time-saving game state 3 is completed (stop display with a losing symbol, etc.). The right-hit image MG is displayed while the right-hit lamp is lit and is hidden while the right-hit lamp is off.

In addition, regardless of whether the performance symbol 50a performs any of the multiple types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) during the change performance, the start order of the pre-change actions and scrolling display (updated change) of the three performance symbols 50a is the same (left → center → right), but the start order of the pre-change actions and scrolling display (updated change) of the three performance symbols 50a may be different depending on the type of pre-change action (floating display: left → center → right, enlarged display: center → left → right, reduced display: right → center → left, etc.). Furthermore, multiple types of pre-change actions of the performance symbol 50a may be provided for each performance mode so that the likelihood of a jackpot differs. Additionally, regardless of whether the effect pattern 50a performs any of the multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking → normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display) in the variable effect, the pre-stop actions and temporary stop order of the three effect patterns 50a are the same (left → right → center), but the pre-stop actions and temporary stop order of the three effect patterns 50a may be different depending on the multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display: left → right → center, rotating display: left → center → right, etc.). Additionally, multiple types of pre-stop actions of the effect pattern 50a may be provided for each effect mode so that the likelihood of a jackpot differs.

In addition, while the details of the presentation mode corresponding to time-limited game state 4 are not described, it may be the same as presentation mode F corresponding to time-limited game state 3, or it may be different from presentation modes A to F described above. For example, presentation mode G may be configured such that the background image and background music for presentation mode F are composed of the background image and background music for mode G. Furthermore, the presentation pattern 50a in time-limited game states 1 to 4 may also be different for each. Because time-limited game states 1 to 4 each have different background images and background music, the player can easily recognize the type of time-limited game state they are in after transitioning to one of time-limited game states 1 to 4. Furthermore, while the presentation modes differ for each of time-limited game states 1 to 4, the same presentation mode is used during each time-limited game. However, the presentation mode may change depending on the number of available plays during each time-limited game. For example, in time-saving game state 3, when the number of available plays "M3" reaches "100" (when 600 plays have been played in time-saving game state 2), the mode may be changed from presentation mode F to a different presentation mode.

Furthermore, while the remaining number of times image JK is of a common form in the above-mentioned presentation modes D to F, etc. (time-shortened game states 1 to 4), it may be of a different form depending on the presentation mode, for example, it may be of a different character font or a different size. Also, depending on the above-mentioned presentation modes D to F, etc. (time-shortened game states 1 to 4), the remaining number of times image JK may be displayed or not displayed. Furthermore, the remaining number of times image JK may be constantly displayed during each time-shortened game state, or it may be displayed only until a predetermined number of plays have been played after transitioning to each time-shortened game state, after the available number of plays "M" has reached a predetermined number, or for a predetermined period during the time-shortened game state. For example, the remaining number of plays image JK may be displayed in time-saving game state 1 (presentation mode D) and time-saving game state 2 (presentation mode E), but the remaining number of plays image JK may not be displayed in the early stages of play after transitioning to time-saving game state 3 (presentation mode F), and the remaining number of plays image JK may only begin to be displayed after the number of plays available in time-saving game state 3, "M3," has been reduced to "100."

The first hold icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second hold icon display area 50d are shown in the same format across all presentation modes, but may be different for each presentation mode, for example, with different colors, decorations, or shapes. In addition, in presentation modes D through F, a display indicating the current game status may be displayed; for example, a display such as "Time-saving 1 mode," "Time-saving 2 mode," or "Time-saving 3 mode" may be displayed at the top of the main display device 131. Furthermore, while the first hold number display area SA, the second hold number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ are shown in different positions in presentation modes A through C and D through F, they may be displayed in the same position, for example, in the lower right or lower left corner of the main display device 131.

Here, we will explain the time-saving effect symbols that correspond to the time-saving symbols and are composed of three predetermined effect symbols 50a. As described above (see Figure 3-4 (a-4)), the time-saving symbols are special symbol J1, which corresponds to a transition to time-saving play state 4 with 100 available plays, and special symbol J2, which corresponds to a transition to time-saving play state 4 with 700 available plays. The time-saving effect symbols corresponding to these special symbols J1 and J2 may be composed of the same effect symbol 50a (e.g., "151"), or may be composed of different effect symbols 50a (e.g., "151" and "515"), or multiple types of time-saving effect symbols may be set for each special symbol.

In addition, the time-saving effect symbol is primarily composed of a symbol 50a that is composed of symbols such as numbers, but is not limited to this and may take various forms. For example, the time-saving effect symbol may be configured to include a dedicated symbol composed primarily of the word "time-saving." Specifically, the time-saving effect symbol may be configured as a "1" effect symbol 50a, a "time-saving" dedicated symbol, or a "1" effect symbol 50a. In particular, during the variable effect using the effect symbol 50a, the "time-saving" dedicated symbol may temporarily stop after two "1" effect symbols 50a temporarily stop. In such a form, when playing with a variable pattern in which a reach effect is executed, the variable effect symbol 50a may not include a dedicated symbol during the period in which the reach effect is not executed, and the dedicated symbol may be displayed after the reach effect is executed. Additionally, in games that do not have a time-saving effect symbol displayed (games that have not been determined to have won time-saving 4 in the jackpot determination process), the temporarily stopped special symbol may change to the normal effect symbol 50a. In such a case, even in games that do not have a time-saving effect symbol displayed, the expectation of transitioning to time-saving game state 4 can be increased by the time-saving effect symbol displayed. Furthermore, in transitioning to time-saving game state 3 according to the accumulated number of times, the effect symbol 50a may be displayed as a special symbol such as the one described above (a different form from the time-saving effect symbol or the effect symbol 50a corresponding to a jackpot/minor jackpot, for example, a symbol consisting of the words "Time-saving game begins!") during the transition.

As shown in Figure 5-2(a), when the number of pending calls is "0" and the call is waiting for a customer, no icon is displayed in the first pending call icon display area 50b and the corresponding icon display area 50c, and "0" is displayed in the first pending call number display area SA and the second pending call number display area SB.

As shown in Figure 5-2(b), next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 112 and the first reserved number becomes "1," a reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 50b, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1." At this time, the reserved icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and a performance action (swinging action) begins from there.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (c), next, when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the display of the first special symbol begins to change, the reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b begins to shift (decreasing display, changing display) toward the icon display area 50c, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreasing display) to "0". At this time, the transparency of the reserved icon HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (d), when the shift display of the hold icon HI finishes, the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the hold icon HI and in an opaque state, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(e), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 112 and the first reserved number becomes "1," the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode begins to be additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 50b, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1." At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI begins to perform a presentation (shaking action) in synchronization with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is enlarged from a translucent, extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image. In other words, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved icon HI may not begin displaying in the first position (initial position).

As shown in Figure 5-2 (f), when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in its normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (g), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 112, the first reserved number becomes "2," and it is determined that an icon change effect will be executed, an additional display (increasing display) of the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) begins in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 50b, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increasing display) to "2." At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI begins a display operation (rotating operation) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (the icon TI in this case) from the first position (initial position) in which the specific part is located at the top, and is enlarged from a translucent, tiny size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (h), when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is completed, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (rotation action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(i), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and becomes stationary, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c begins to disappear. At this time, the icon TI that is disappearing gradually becomes more transparent and disappears, accompanied by an effect image, but a performance action (shaking action) is performed even while the disappearing display is in progress.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (j), next, when the first hold number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, the two hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 50b begin to shift (decrease) toward the icon display area 50c, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated (decrease) to "1". At this time, the transparency of the two hold icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance actions (swinging action, rotation action) continue.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (k), when the shift display of the two hold icons HI finishes, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 50b is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the hold icon HI and in an opaque state, and the presentation action (shaking action) continues. Furthermore, the hold icon HI in the first special mode that was displayed in the second display section of the first hold icon display area 50b is displayed in the first display section in a normal size and in an opaque state, and accordingly changes to the second special display mode (red) through an icon change presentation, but the presentation action (spinning action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (l), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 112 and the first reserved number becomes "2", the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode begins to be additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 50b, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "2". At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI begins to perform a performance operation (shaking operation) so as to synchronize with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is enlarged from a semi-transparent, extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (m), when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in its normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2(n), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and becomes stationary, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c begins to disappear. At this time, the icon TI that is disappearing gradually becomes more transparent and disappears, accompanied by an effect image, but a performance action (shaking action) is performed even while the disappearing display is in progress.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (o), next, when the first hold number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, the two hold icons HI that were displayed in the first hold icon display area 50b and were performing a performance operation begin to shift display (decreasing display) toward the icon display area 50c, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" (decreasing display). At this time, the transparency of the two hold icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance operation (swinging operation, rotating operation) continues.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (p), for example, if the conditions for switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B are met, a blocking image (blackout image BO, whiteout image WO, etc.) is displayed on the entire screen of the main display device 131, and while the pending numbers in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB remain visible, visibility of the icons in the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c is restricted.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (q), in the rear layer of the occlusion image, the display mode and presentation action (rotation action) of the icon TI are maintained, and the hold icon HI is switched to a hold icon HI in the normal display mode corresponding to presentation mode B. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the presentation action (swinging action) begins from there.

As shown in Figure 5-2 (r), when the obscuring image is erased, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first hold icon display area 50b and the icon TI in the second special display mode displayed in the icon display area 50c become visible.

Note that when two or more hold icons are displayed in the normal display mode, an effect is performed to synchronize the hold icons in the normal display mode with the corresponding icon in the normal display mode, just as an effect is performed to synchronize multiple hold icons in the normal display mode. While the hold display example in effect mode A has been mainly described here, other effect modes will basically display the same hold number (including the display when switching effect modes), with only differences in the display and effect of the hold icons. The timing at which the decrease in the hold number begins may be set to precede the timing at which the hold icon changes to the corresponding icon (shifting from hold icon to hold icon), and the completion of the decrease in the hold number may be set to precede the completion of the change in the hold icon to the corresponding icon (shifting from hold icon to hold icon). The start and end of the increase in the hold number may also be set to precede the start of the increase in the hold icon. The shape, etc., of the hold icons may differ from the transparency only when the increase in the hold icons begins and after the increase in the hold icons is completed.

The timing at which the presentation action of a hold icon displayed in normal display mode based on a new start winning is synchronized with the presentation action of other hold icons may be when the display starts, when a predetermined time has passed since the display starts, when the shift display starts, or when the shift display is completed. Furthermore, if the presentation action of a hold icon is to be resumed after the shift display of the hold icon, the hold icon may resume its presentation action from its initial position at the position after the shift display (hold icon display area, the icon display area).

Note that even when a special symbol (performance symbol) stops and the icon disappears, the icon continues to perform its performance, but the performance may also be terminated by the special symbol (performance symbol) stopping. Also, multiple icons (pending icons, and pending icons and the icon) displayed in the normal display mode are synchronized to perform their performance, but rather than performing their performance in perfect synchronization, they may perform their performance in approximately synchronization. Note that the timing at which the performance of a pending icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new start winning approximately synchronizes with the performance of other pending icons may be at the start of display, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display, at the start of shift display, or at the completion of shift display.

(Example of display effects for each time-saving game state)
Specific examples of display effects in time-shortened game states 1 to 4 will now be described with reference to Figures 5-3 to 5-5. Figure 5-3 is a diagram illustrating the time-shortened entry effect executed upon transition to time-shortened game state 1 and time-shortened game state 2 and the display effects executed before the end of time-shortened game state 1 and time-shortened game state 2, (a-1) and (a-2) are diagrams showing examples of the display effects of the time-shortened entry effect upon transition to time-shortened game state 1, etc., (a-3) is a diagram showing an example of the display effects before the end of time-shortened game state 1, etc., and (b) is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after transition to time-shortened game state 1, etc. 5-4 is a diagram illustrating the display effects executed before and after the transition to time-shortened game state 3 or time-shortened game state 4, (a-1) and (a-2) are diagrams showing examples of the display modes of the display effects before and after the transition to time-shortened game state 3, (b-1) is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after the transition to time-shortened game state 3, and (b-2) is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after the transition to time-shortened game state 4. FIG. 5-5 is a diagram illustrating the display effects at the end of time-shortened game states 1 to 4, (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of time-shortened game state 1 and time-shortened game state 2, (b-1) is a diagram illustrating the display mode before and after the end of time-shortened game state 1 and time-shortened game state 2, (b-2) is a diagram illustrating the display mode before and after the end of time-shortened game state 3, and (b-3) is a diagram illustrating the display mode before and after the end of time-shortened game state 4.

As shown in Figures 5-3 (a-1) and (a-2), when a state ends and transitions to time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2, a time-saving entry effect is executed, suggesting the start of time-saving game state 1, etc. During the time-saving entry effect for time-saving game state 1, etc., the main display device 131 displays, for example, a background image corresponding to the entry effect as the background image, along with a entry image CT notifying the player of the transition to time-saving game state 1, a prevention image CH notifying the player to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the game card inserted into the gaming device, and a right-hit image MG suggesting a right-hit. After that, a warning image nh, warning the player of game addiction, is displayed in place of the prevention image CH. The right-hit image MG is displayed from the start of the jackpot game and throughout the jackpot game when the game transitions to time-saving game state 1, etc., and continues to be displayed even after the transition to time-saving game state 1, etc.

As shown in Figure 5-3 (a-3), before the end of time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2, the main display device 131 displays, for example, a remaining number image GJ, which is an image notifying the remaining number of times that can be played in time-saving game state 1, etc. (corresponding to the number of times that can be played "M1"/"M2"). Furthermore, the remaining number image GJ begins to be displayed when the number of times that can be played falls below a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and is displayed to notify the number of times that has been decremented by "1" each time one play in time-saving game state 1, etc. ends (stop display of a losing symbol, etc.). At this time, because the main display device 131 is in time-saving game state 1, as described above (see FIG. 5-1(d)), the Mode D background image, remaining number of times image JK, effect symbol 50a (variable display or stopped display), special symbol TZ, reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB), icon display area (second reserved icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc. are displayed, and the remaining number of times image GJ is displayed large on the front in approximately the center of the main display device 131, overlapping with effect symbol 50a. Note that in the final game in time-saving game state 1, etc., the remaining number of times image GJ may be displayed as "LAST." Furthermore, although the remaining number of times image GJ is displayed before the end of time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2, it may also be displayed in a similar manner before the end of time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4.

As shown in Figure 5-3(b), before and after the transition to time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, the display effects are executed in the following order: jackpot effect → time-saving entry effect → time-saving entry effect. Here, time th1 is the time when the round period in the jackpot game ends and the ending period begins, and time th2 is the time when the ending period ends. First, during the round period of the jackpot game before time th1, the effect symbol 50a, entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are not displayed, and a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot effect is displayed, and a jackpot effect composed of a predetermined type of video or the like is executed. Next, during the period from time th1 to time th2, the effect symbol 50a is not displayed, and a time-saving entry effect is executed in which the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are displayed, and a entry background image is displayed (see Figures 5-3(a-1) and (a-2)). However, during this period, only the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are displayed for a predetermined period from the start of the game. After that, the prevention image CH is hidden and the warning image nh is displayed instead of the prevention image CH. In this way, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are not displayed simultaneously. Then, during the time-saving game state 1 after time-saving th2, the entry image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are hidden, and a time-saving background image, such as the Mode D background, is displayed. A variable display using the fourth mode of the effect pattern 50a is displayed, and a time-saving effect consisting of a predetermined mode of video or the like is executed. The period during which the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are displayed is not limited to the above-described period and may be various. For example, the warning image nh may also be displayed for at least a portion of the period during which the prevention image CH is displayed. Furthermore, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh may be displayed at the start of the time-saving effect or immediately before the end of time-saving game state 1. Furthermore, during the period from time th1 to th2, the main display device 131 may display the entry image CT for a predetermined period, and then, while displaying the Mode D background image, the fourth mode effect pattern 50a, etc., a right-hit start image suggesting the start of a right-hit, such as "Please start right-hitting!", may be displayed in a size that covers almost all of the three effect patterns 50a. When the right-hit start image is displayed, a sound may also be output instructing the player to start right-hitting play.

As shown in Fig. 5-4(a-1), next, before the transition to the time-shortened gaming state 3, for example, an accumulated number image AK, which is an image notifying the accumulated number of times of play (corresponding to the accumulated number "n") in the normal gaming state, etc., is displayed on the main display device 131. The accumulated number image AK notifies the number of times of play remaining until the transition to the time-shortened gaming state 3, and begins to be displayed when the accumulated number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 795 times), and each time one game in the normal gaming state, etc., ends (a stop display with a losing symbol, etc.), it is displayed to notify the number of times that has been decremented by "1." At this time, since the main display device 131 is in normal game mode, as described above (see FIG. 5-1(a)), the Mode A background image, cumulative count image RK, effect symbol 50a (variable display or stopped display), special symbol TZ, reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB), icon display area (first reserved icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc. are displayed, and the cumulative count image AK is displayed large on the front, approximately in the center of the main display device 131, overlapping the effect symbol 50a. The cumulative count image AK is displayed immediately after the start of play and becomes invisible after a predetermined time (e.g., a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time) has elapsed. This display time for the cumulative count image AK can prevent the cumulative count image AK displayed during the current game from being displayed again during the next game. In addition, in the game immediately before transitioning to time-saving game state 3, the cumulative number image AK may be displayed as "LAST," or may be displayed together with a message that encourages anticipation of transitioning to time-saving game state 3, such as "Two more until chance time."

As shown in Figure 5-4 (a-2), when the normal game state ends and transitions to time-shortened game state 3, a time-shortened entry effect is executed to indicate the start of time-shortened game state 3. During the time-shortened entry effect of time-shortened game state 3, the main display device 131 displays, for example, a background image at entry corresponding to the time-shortened entry effect as the background image, and also displays a entry image CT, which is an image announcing the transition to time-shortened game state 3. At this time, in order to transition to time-saving game state 3, the main display device 131 displays the fourth mode effect pattern 50a (variable display or stopped display), right-hit image MG, special pattern TZ, hold number display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), icon display area (first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc., as described above (see Figure 5-1 (f)), and the entry image CT is displayed large on the front, approximately in the center of the main display device 131, overlapping effect pattern 50a. Note that although the entry image CT is displayed during the time-saving entry effect upon transition to time-saving game state 3, it may also be displayed in a similar manner during the time-saving entry effect upon transition to time-saving game state 4.

As shown in FIG. 5-4(b-1), before and after the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3, the display effects are executed in the following order: normal effect → time-saving entry effect → time-saving effect, as shown in FIG. 5-4(a-1) above. Here, time ti1 is the time when the normal gaming state transitions to the time-saving gaming state 3. First, during the normal gaming state before time ti1, the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image (such as the mode A background image) is displayed, and the effect pattern 50a (variable display or stationary display) of the first mode, etc., the accumulated count image AK (for the predetermined period as described above), the accumulated count image RK, the special pattern TZ, the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB), the icon display area (first reserved icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Next, in the period after time ti1, first, a time-saving entry effect is executed, for example, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the background image is changed from the normal background image to the entry background image, and the entry image CT, the effect pattern 50a of the fourth mode switched from the first mode, etc., the special pattern TZ, the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB), the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Then, when the time-saving entry effect ends, a time-saving entry effect is executed, and for example, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh remain hidden, the entry image CT is not displayed, and the background image is changed from the entry background image to the time-saving background image (mode F background), and the effect pattern 50a of the fourth mode, the special pattern TZ,
The reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB), icon display area (second reserved icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc. are displayed. The time-saving entry effect is executed regardless of whether the first game after transition to time-saving game state 3 is executed (whether there is a reserved game at the time of transition to time-saving game state 3). Also, if there is a reserved game at the time of transition to time-saving game state 3 and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the variable display of the effect symbol 50a is displayed at the time of transition, the background image of the time-saving effect may be the time-saving background image (mode F background). Furthermore, in the time-saving entry effect, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, a mode D background image, the fourth mode effect symbol 50a, etc., may be displayed, and a right-hit start image suggesting the start of right-hit, such as "Please start right-hit!", may be displayed in a size that covers almost all of the three effect symbols 50a. When the right-hit start image is displayed, a sound may also be output instructing the player to start right-hit play.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 upon transition to time-shortened game state 3 as described above (the variable display of game play when the cumulative count "n" becomes "0"), the variable time is not longer or shorter than normal, and no dedicated variable time is set that corresponds only to transition to time-shortened game state 3. On the other hand, after transition to time-shortened game state 3, a dedicated variable time may be set for play in time-shortened game state 3, making the variable time of the second special symbol display 122 longer or shorter than normal. Specifically, when transitioning to time-shortened game state 3 after RAM clear processing, no dedicated variable time may be set for time-shortened game state 3, and when transitioning to time-shortened game state 3 after a jackpot state, a dedicated variable time may be set for time-shortened game state 3.

As shown in Figure 5-4 (b-2), before and after the transition to time-saving game state 4, the display effects are executed in the following order: normal game effect (time-saving transition effect) in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state → time-saving entry effect → time-saving game effect. Here, time tj1 is the time when the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the previous game, and the normal game state transitions to time-saving game state 4. First, during the normal game state before time tj1, the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image (mode A background image, etc.) is displayed, and the effect symbol 50a of the first mode, etc. (variable display, stopped display, stopped display with time-saving symbol), cumulative count image RK, special symbol TZ, hold number display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), icon display area (first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc. are displayed. Next, in the period from time tj1 onwards, first, a time-saving entry effect is executed, and for example, the prevention image CH and warning image nh are not displayed, and the background image is changed from the normal background image to the entry background image, and the entry image CT, the effect pattern 50a of the fourth state switched from the first state etc., the special pattern TZ, the hold number display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), the icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI etc. are displayed. Then, when the time-saving entry effect ends, the time-saving entry effect is executed, and, for example, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh remain hidden, the entry image CT is hidden, and the background image at the time of entry is replaced with the time-saving background image (mode F background), and the fourth mode effect pattern 50a, special pattern TZ, hold number display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc. are displayed. Note that the time-saving entry effect is executed regardless of whether the first game after transition to time-saving game state 4 is executed (whether or not there is a hold at the time of transition to time-saving game state 4). Also, if there is a hold at the time of transition to time-saving game state 4, and the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and the variable display of effect pattern 50a is displayed at the time of transition, the background image for the time-saving entry effect may be the time-saving background image (mode F background). Furthermore, in the time-saving entry effect, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, a mode D background image, the fourth mode effect pattern 50a, etc. may be displayed, and a right-hit start image suggesting the start of right-hit, such as "Please start right-hit!", may be displayed in a size that covers almost all of the three effect patterns 50a. When the right-hit start image is displayed, a sound may also be output instructing the player to start right-hit play.

Furthermore, during the normal performance before transition to time-shortened game state 3 (see Figure 5-4 (a-1)), the icon display area is displayed even while the cumulative count image AK is being displayed, making it possible to execute the hold change display effect. Here, for example, while the cumulative count image AK is being displayed during the normal performance before transition to time-shortened game state 3, the execution of the hold change display effect may be restricted. In such a normal performance before transition to time-shortened game state 3, the player can easily grasp the number of plays remaining before transition to time-shortened game state 3 by the display of the cumulative count image AK, without focusing on the hold change effect. Furthermore, during the normal performance before transition to time-shortened game state 3, where the execution of the hold change display effect is restricted while the cumulative count image AK is being displayed, only the cumulative count image JK may be displayed without displaying the cumulative count image AK. Even during such a normal performance before transition to time-shortened game state 3, the player can easily grasp the number of plays remaining before transition to time-shortened game state 3 by the display of the cumulative count image JK, without focusing on the hold change effect.

Here, we compare the time-saving entry effects when transitioning to time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2 with the time-saving entry effects when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4. First, in the time-saving entry effects when transitioning to time-saving game state 1, etc., the prevention image CH and warning image nh are displayed, but the effect symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, hold number display area, etc. are hidden. On the other hand, in the time-saving entry effects when transitioning to time-saving game state 3, etc., the prevention image CH and warning image nh are hidden, but the effect symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, hold number display area, etc. are displayed. This is because, in the time-saving entry effects when transitioning to time-saving game state 1, etc., which are executed during the ending period of a jackpot game, the player does not need to check the results of the jackpot determination using the effect symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, hold number display area, etc.; rather, there is a strong need for the prevention image CH and warning image nh to draw attention. On the other hand, in the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 or the like, which is executed during a period other than the ending period of the jackpot game, the player does not need to be alerted by the prevention image CH and warning image nh, and there is a high need to check the results of the jackpot determination using the effect symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, and hold number display area. Also, by hiding the prevention image CH and warning image nh, which are less necessary for the player to check, in the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 or the like, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to check information that is highly necessary due to the excessive amount of image information displayed on the main display device 131. Furthermore, in the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 or the like, the effect symbol 50a may be hidden, but the special symbol TZ may be displayed. Even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to check information that is highly necessary due to the excessive amount of image information displayed on the main display device 131.

In the time-saving entry effect upon transitioning to one of the above-mentioned time-saving game states 1 to 4, the entry image CT is primarily displayed to enable the player to recognize that they have transitioned to one of the time-saving game states 1 to 4. However, this is not limited to this and various other embodiments are possible as long as the player can recognize the transition. For example, the special symbol TZ may always be displayed during the time-saving entry effect upon transitioning to any of the time-saving game states 1 to 4. More specifically, during the time-saving entry effect upon transitioning to time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2, a stopped display of the special symbol TZ corresponding to a jackpot symbol is displayed; during the time-saving entry effect upon transitioning to time-saving game state 3, a stopped display of the special symbol TZ corresponding to a losing symbol is displayed; and during the time-saving entry effect upon transitioning to time-saving game state 4, a stopped display of the special symbol TZ corresponding to a time-saving symbol is displayed. In this manner, the player can easily recognize the type of time-saving game state after transition by the display of the special symbol TZ during the time-saving entry effect.

Furthermore, in the time-saving entry effect upon transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state 3, the entry image CT was displayed covering the effect symbol 50a while the effect symbol 50a, right-hit image MG, special symbol TZ, icon display area, icon TI, etc. were displayed. However, the entry image CT may be displayed in a state where only the effect symbol 50a among these displayed images is hidden. In such an embodiment, the difference between the time-saving entry effect upon transition to time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2 (see Figure 5-3(a-1), etc.), in which the special symbol TZ, icon display area, etc. are not displayed, and the time-saving entry effect upon transition to time-saving game state 3 makes it easier for the player to recognize the type of time-saving game state to which the player has transitioned. Furthermore, any embodiment may be used in each of the time-saving entry effects upon transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game states 1 to 4, as long as it makes it easy for the player to recognize the type of time-saving game state. For example, the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to time-saving game state 3 may display at least one element from the effect symbol 50a, right-hit image MG, special symbol TZ, icon display area, icon TI, etc. Similarly, the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to time-saving game state 4 may display elements different from those displayed in time-saving game state 3. In such an embodiment, although the entry image CT is displayed in the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to each time-saving game state, the elements displayed other than the entry image CT will be different, allowing the player to easily recognize the type of time-saving game state after transition.

As shown in Figure 5-5(a), at the end of time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, a result image GP is displayed on the main display device 131, which is an image that displays information about the profits earned during the jackpot game state, time-saving game state 1, etc. The result image GP also displays the number of jackpot games (e.g., 3) during the period from the first jackpot win to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (advantageous period), and the total number of prize balls paid out during that advantageous period (e.g., 4,515). At this time, the main display device 131 hides the effect symbol 50a by covering it with the result image GP, and displays the result background image as the background image, along with the result image GP, right-hit image MG, special symbol TZ, hold number display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), icon display area (second hold icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc. Note that the total number of prize balls in the result image GP includes prize balls resulting from winning at large prize slots such as the first large prize slot 117, but does not include prize balls paid out based on balls winning at start slots such as the first start slot 112, or at general prize slots. However, the total number of prize balls in the result image GP may also include prize balls paid out from balls winning at general prize slots.

As shown in Figure 5-5 (b-1), next, at the end of time-saving game state 1 and time-saving game state 2, there is usually a transition from time-saving game state 1 etc. to a low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state). Here, time tk1 is the time when the last game in time-saving game state 1 etc. (the game determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination) begins, time tk2 is the time when the end of that last game is indicated (the effect pattern 50a temporarily stops with a miss pattern), and time tk3 is the time when time-saving game state 1 etc. ends and there is a transition to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. First, at time tk1, the result image GP is not displayed, and a time-saving effect in time-saving game state 1, such as a variable display using the effect pattern 50a of the fourth mode, is displayed. Next, at time tk2, the result image GP is displayed as described above. Then, at time tk3, the result image GP is hidden, and a left-hit start image suggesting the start of left-hit play, such as "Please return to left-hit play!", is displayed in a size that covers almost all three effect symbols 50a, and normal effects such as those in normal play state are displayed. In other words, the result image GP is displayed from the middle of the last play in time-limited play state 1 until its end. Furthermore, the left-hit start image is displayed regardless of whether the first play is executed (regardless of whether there are any reserved numbers) after transitioning from time-limited play state 1 or the like to a low-probability non-time-limited play state. Furthermore, when the left-hit start image is displayed, a sound instructing the player to start left-hit play may also be output.

As shown in Figures 5-5 (b-2) and (b-3), at the end of time-limited game state 3 or time-limited game state 4, the game normally transitions from time-limited game state 3 or time-limited game state 4 to a low-probability non-time-limited game state (normal game state). Here, time tl is the time when time-limited game state 3 or time-limited game state 4 ends and transitions to a low-probability non-time-limited game state. Since the result image GP is not displayed around time tl, time-limited game state 3 and time-limited game state 4 end with a left-hit start image, but end without displaying the result image GP. Also, as described above, the left-hit start image is displayed after transitioning from time-limited game state 3, etc. to a low-probability non-time-limited game state, regardless of whether the first play is executed (whether there are any reserved balls or not). Furthermore, when the left-hit start image is displayed, a sound may also be output instructing the player to start left-hit play. Unlike time-saving game states 1 and the like, time-saving game states 3 and 4 are not states entered after a jackpot game. Therefore, no prizes are awarded to large prize slots such as first large prize slot 117 during time-saving game states 3 and 4. Therefore, the number of jackpot games displayed in the result image GP is "0," and the total number of prize balls is "0." In other words, at the end of time-saving game states 3 and 4, a result image GP indicating "0" jackpot games and "0" total prize balls is not displayed. This prevents the player from losing motivation to play, which would occur if such a result image GP were displayed. At the end of time-saving game states 3 and 4, an image such as "Time Reduction Ended" may be displayed on the main display device 131 to notify the end of time-saving game state 3, etc.

Note that, although the result image GP is not displayed at the end of the time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4 described above, it may be displayed instead. Thus, if a result image GP indicating that the number of jackpot games is "0" and the total number of prize balls is "0" is displayed at the end of time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4, the player can easily recognize that time-saving game state 3, etc. has ended. Furthermore, while the result image GP displayed at the end of time-saving game state 1, etc., is displayed for a predetermined period as described above, this predetermined period may be any other period. For example, the result image GP may be displayed at the end of the last game in the time-saving game state (time-saving game states 1 to 4), and then the result image GP may be hidden after the second reserved number is reduced to "0" and the variable display on the second special symbol display 122 stops. In other words, after transitioning to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the result image GP may continue to be displayed until the first variable display on the first special symbol display 120 can begin. Furthermore, while the above-mentioned left-hit start image is displayed regardless of whether the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed or not, various other embodiments are possible. For example, on the condition that the first game after transitioning from the time-saving game state (time-saving game states 1 to 4) to the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed, the left-hit start image may be displayed together with an audio output instructing the player to start left-hit game.

Here, we will explain what happens after time-saving game state 3 ends, such as when no jackpot is won during time-saving game state 3, the available number of plays "M3" becomes "0," and time-saving game state 3 ends. As described above, during the period from the end of a jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, unless a RAM clear process is executed, the game will transition to time-saving game state 3 only once, and will not transition to time-saving game state 3 more than once. Therefore, for example, after time-saving game state 3 ends, a notification may be provided that time-saving game state 3 has already ended. In such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that time-saving game state 3 has ended. Specifically, during the low-probability non-time-saving game state after time-saving game state 3 ends, the cumulative count image RK displayed on the main display device 131 may display a count exceeding "800 times," thereby notifying the player that time-saving game state 3 has already ended. Furthermore, after the time-shortened game state 3 ends, the main display device 131 may display a transition notification image such as "Time-shortened 3 Completed," indicating that the game has transitioned to the time-shortened game state 3 and ended, thereby notifying the player that the time-shortened game state 3 has already ended. The cumulative count image RK and the transition notification image displayed after the time-shortened game state 3 end may be continuously displayed until a RAM clear process is executed or a jackpot game is executed after the time-shortened game state 3 ends. The cumulative count image RK and the transition notification image displayed after the time-shortened game state 3 end may be displayed on the main display device 131 after power is supplied, even if the power is turned off and then supplied while they are displayed. Furthermore, after the time-shortened game state 3 ends, when the power is turned off and then supplied, a transition notification image large enough to cover the entire surface of the main display device 131 may be displayed, or a notification may be given by audio or the like. Furthermore, in the normal game state after the time-shortened game state 3 has ended, the normal game effects may be executed in a different presentation mode from presentation modes A to C in the normal game state before the transition to time-shortened game state 3 (for example, a presentation mode specific to the normal game state after the time-shortened game state 3 has ended). In this manner, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game in the normal game state after the time-shortened game state 3 has ended.

[Outline of display mode on main display device 131 after fluctuation has stopped]
6-1 and 6-2, the transition of the gaming machine 100 state after the fluctuation is stopped and the outline of the display mode of the main display device 131 will be described. Fig. 6-1 is a diagram explaining the transition of the gaming machine 100 state after the fluctuation is stopped and the outline of the display mode of the main display device 131. Fig. 6-2 is a diagram explaining the outline of the customer waiting demo effect.

As shown in Figure 6-1, when the variable display of the special symbol stops and, for example, the reserved number for the first reserved number, etc., is "0" and no game balls have entered the first starting port 112, the machine enters a customer waiting state, and demo waiting period B1 and customer waiting demo period B2 are repeated alternately, such as demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds) → customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) → second demo waiting period B1 (100 seconds) → second customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) → ... Demo waiting period B1 is a period during which three performance symbols 50a are displayed in a stopped state on the main display device 131, and is a period during which the machine is waiting for the display of the customer waiting demo effect described below. Furthermore, customer waiting demo period B2 is a period during which the customer waiting demo effect is displayed on the main display device 131. Note that the duration of the first demo waiting period B1 is longer than the second and subsequent demo waiting periods B1, but the second and subsequent demo waiting periods B1 are the same length. On the other hand, the customer waiting demo period B2 is the same length for the first customer waiting demo period B2 and the second and subsequent customer waiting demo periods B2.

As shown in Figure 6-1(a), first, while the special symbol is changing, the main display device 131 displays a background image, such as a horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, and in front of that, two of the three effect symbols 50a are displayed stationary while one effect symbol 50a is scrolling. Also, in front of the background image, a first hold icon display area 50b is displayed in which a first hold icon HI corresponding to the first hold number is displayed, and an icon display area 50c is displayed in which an image of that icon TI is displayed as an animation that oscillates from side to side. Furthermore, in front of the background image, a first hold number display area SA and a second hold number display area SB are displayed in which numbers corresponding to the first hold number and second hold number are displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a scrolling state.

As shown in FIG. 6-1(b), during the demo waiting period B1, the main display device 131 displays a background image such as a horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, and three stationary effect symbols 50a in front of it. Also, in front of the background image, a first hold icon display area 50b in which the first hold icon HI is not displayed, and an icon display area 50c in which the image of the icon TI is not displayed, are displayed. Furthermore, in front of the background image, a first hold number display area SA and a second hold number display area SB are displayed, indicating that the first hold number and second hold number are "0," and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stationary state with a combination of numbers corresponding to the three stationary effect symbols 50a. Then, in front of the background image and the three effect symbols 50a, a sound adjustment image OC is displayed, indicating that the volume of background music, etc., can be adjusted by operating the effect operation stick 136.

As shown in FIG. 6-1(c), during customer waiting demo period B2, the main display device 131 displays the customer waiting demo effect described below, and in front of the customer waiting demo effect display, the first hold number display area SA and the second hold number display area SB, which indicate that the first hold number and the second hold number are "0", are displayed. Note that during customer waiting demo period B2, the main display device 131 does not display the three effect symbols 50a, first hold icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the special symbol TZ that were displayed during demo waiting period B1. Also, during customer waiting demo period B2 (while the customer waiting demo effect is being displayed), the main display device 131 may be configured to display the special symbol TZ along with the first hold number display area SA and the second hold number display area SB.

With reference to Figure 6-2, the display mode of the customer waiting demo performance will now be explained. The customer waiting demo performance (80 seconds) is composed of the following content displays, which are displayed in this order: "Demo of variable performance (25 seconds)" → "Character introduction (25 seconds)" → "Model name (5 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (5 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Demo of movable parts (10 seconds)." In other words, these contents will be displayed on the main display device 131 during customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds).

As shown in Figure 6-2(a), first, the "variable effect demo" in the customer waiting demo effect is an effect in which various variable effects are displayed on the main display device 131 while the special symbol is being displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, various variable effects such as the SPSP reach revival effect, SPSP reach effect, SP reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach effect, etc. are displayed in order of the likelihood of winning a jackpot. Note that when each variable effect is displayed in this "variable effect demo," it may be displayed with text added that explains the content of the effect and the likelihood of winning.

As shown in Figure 6-2(b), the "Character Introduction" in the customer waiting demo presentation is a presentation in which multiple characters displayed during various variable presentations and multiple characters that are part of the composition of presentation pattern 50a are displayed. Specifically, on main display device 131, a character introduction background including an image simulating a stage is scrolled as a background image, and character displays CP1 to CP3 consisting of images of each character moving and the text display of each character's name are displayed in front of the background image. Furthermore, character display CP1 includes characters displayed in variable presentations with high expectations, such as SPSP reach presentations. Character display CP2 includes characters displayed in variable presentations with relatively high expectations, such as SP reach presentations. Character display CP1 includes characters displayed in variable presentations such as normal reach presentations. Furthermore, during the "Character Introduction" display, character display CP1 is displayed for a longer period of time than the other character displays CP2 and CP3. In other words, when "Character Introduction" is displayed, character display CP1 will be displayed at a higher rate than character displays CP2 and CP3. Note that character displays CP1 to CP3 may be animated so that the image of each character and the displayed name text move in various different ways.

As shown in Figure 6-2 (c), next, the "Machine Name" in the customer waiting demo effect is an effect in which a machine name display KH indicating the machine name of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, for example, a machine name background composed of a white and blue gradation is scrolled as a background image, and the machine name display KH is displayed so that it suddenly appears in front of the background image. Here, we will explain the changes in appearance during the 5-second display time of the "Machine Name." During the 5-second display time of the "Machine Name," a change in display appearance is executed, from the start of the display of the machine name display KH on the main display device 131 (switching from "Character Introduction") through to the completion of display (e.g., 1 second), and then the machine name display KH disappears.

As shown in FIG. 6-2(d), the "Manufacturer Name" in the customer waiting demo effect is an effect in which the manufacturer name display MH, which indicates the name of the manufacturer that produced the gaming machine 100, is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white manufacturer name background is displayed as the background image, and the frame portion of the manufacturer name display MH suddenly appears in front of the background image, with the "Bikkuri.," "Inc.," and "Logo mark" portions appearing in order from left to right. Alternatively, the shading of all of the "Bikkuri. Inc. (Logo mark)" may be displayed so that it gradually darkens from a light state. Here, we will explain the changes in appearance during the five-second display time of the "Manufacturer Name." During the five-second display time of the "Manufacturer Name," the main display device 131 changes its display appearance from the start of the display of the manufacturer name display MH (switching from the "Model Name") through the completion of the display (e.g., three seconds) to the disappearance of the manufacturer name display MH.

As shown in Figure 6-2 (e), next, the "Caution to prevent addiction" in the customer waiting demo effect is an effect in which a caution display NH consisting of text that warns players against excessive play on the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white caution background is displayed as the background image, and in front of the background image, a caution display NH consisting of a first section NB1 displayed as the top row, a second section NB2 displayed below the first section NB1, and a third section NB3 displayed below the second section NB2 is displayed in order from the top row. The first section NB1 is made up of a red frame with red text inside the frame saying "Be careful not to get addicted," the second section NB2 is made up of a black frame with black text inside the frame saying "Pachinko and pachislot are," and the third section NB3 is made up of a black frame with black text inside the frame saying "These are games that should be enjoyed in moderation."

As shown in Figure 6-2 (f), the "movable role demo" in the customer waiting demo performance is a performance in which movable roles such as the upper role unit 154 and lower role unit 156 operate in a manner similar to the manner in which they operate during various variable performances. Specifically, for example, on the main display device 131, a movable role demo background composed of radial lines is displayed as a background image, and the lower role unit 156 moves in front of the background image to a position where it operates in an SPSP reach performance or the like, and operates in the same manner as an SPSP reach performance or the like (a manner that combines movement, etc. with light-emitting performances using LEDs, etc.). Note that in the "movable role demo," various performances may be executed not only by the lower role unit 156, but also by the upper role unit 154 and light guide panel unit 181.

In the customer waiting state described above, the second demo waiting period B1 (100 seconds) is shorter than the demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds), which is the period from the stop of fluctuations to the start of the first customer waiting demo effect. In this customer waiting state, since there is a possibility that the player will continue playing immediately after fluctuations stop, extending the time until the start of the customer waiting demo effect can reduce the player's annoyance caused by the execution of the customer waiting demo effect immediately after fluctuations stop, compared to when the customer waiting demo effect starts immediately after fluctuations stop. Meanwhile, during the customer waiting state, shortening the intervals between multiple displays of the customer waiting demo effect and increasing the frequency of the display of the customer waiting demo effect can appeal to the player and increase the interest in the effects during the customer waiting state. In addition, one way to strongly appeal to players through such frequently displayed customer waiting demo effects is to have customer waiting demo periods B2 executed consecutively after the first customer waiting demo period B2 has elapsed (after the first customer waiting demo effect has been displayed), without having to go through the second demo waiting period B1, such as demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds) → customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) → second customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) → ... In this way, two customer waiting demo effects are displayed consecutively in the customer waiting state, which makes a stronger impression on the player with the content of the customer waiting demo effect and, similar to the above, makes a strong appeal to players.

According to the customer waiting demo effect described above, while the "character introduction" is being displayed, character display CP1 is displayed for a longer period of time and at a higher rate than character displays CP2 and CP3. With this type of customer waiting demo effect, characters associated with highly anticipated variable effects (e.g., character display CP1) are displayed for a longer period of time and at a higher rate, making it easier for players viewing the customer waiting demo effect to recognize characters likely to appear in highly anticipated variable effects.

In the customer waiting demo presentation described above, the "addiction prevention warning" is displayed for a longer period (10 seconds) than the "machine name" (5 seconds). This type of customer waiting demo presentation effectively draws attention to the "addiction prevention warning," which is more important than the information about the machine name.

In the customer waiting demo performance described above, the movable device is moved to the advance position during the variable performance as a "demo of the movable device," and a demo of the movable performance is executed. This type of customer waiting demo performance can more effectively appeal to players than conventional gaming machines that do not operate movable devices during the customer waiting demo performance.

In the customer waiting demo effect described above, the first hold number display area SA, the second hold number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ are displayed on the main display device 131, allowing the player to easily recognize not only the current hold number (the hold number is "0") but also that the display is not currently changing. In particular, in the customer waiting demo effect, as described above, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes to various things (Figures 6-2 (a) to (f)), which can lead players to mistakenly believe that the display is showing a change in the display even when the customer waiting demo period B2 is in progress. The display of the first hold number display area SA, the second hold number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ prevents players from making such a mistake.

According to the above-described customer waiting demo effect, the time from the start of displaying the manufacturer name display MH to the end of displaying the "manufacturer name" can be made longer than the time from the start of displaying the model name display KH to the end of displaying the "model name." Such a customer waiting demo effect can leave a stronger impression on the player of information about the "manufacturer name," which is less likely to be recognized by the player at the start of play, than information about the "model name," which is more likely to be recognized by the player at the start of play or during play. Various embodiments may be employed to leave a stronger impression on the player of information about the "manufacturer name" than information about the "model name." For example, in the above-described customer waiting demo effect, the display time of the "manufacturer name" may be longer than the display time of the "model name," such as "model name (3 seconds)" and "manufacturer name (5 seconds)." Specifically, during the three-second display time of the "machine name," the main display device 131 changes its display mode from the start of the display of the machine name display KH (switching from the "character introduction" display) to its completion (e.g., one second), and then the machine name display KH disappears. Meanwhile, during the five-second display time of the "manufacturer name," the same process is performed. That is, not only is the display time of the manufacturer name display MH in the "manufacturer name" longer than the display time of the machine name display KH in the "machine name," but the time from the completion of the display of the manufacturer name display MH in the "manufacturer name" to its disappearance is also longer than the time from the completion of the display of the machine name display KH in the "machine name" to its disappearance. Therefore, even with this kind of customer-waiting demo effect, the information about the "manufacturer name" can leave a stronger impression on the player than the information about the "machine name."

[Specific example 1 when variable effects in normal gaming mode end and the machine enters a waiting state for customers]
7-1 to 7-3, we will explain specific example 1 when the variable effect in the normal gaming state ends and the demo waiting period changes to the customer waiting demo period. Figure 7-1 is a timing chart (1) when the variable effect in the normal gaming state ends and the customer waiting state changes, and Figures 7-2 and 7-3 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in Figure 7-1. Note that here we will explain the case of effect mode A, but the explanation of effect modes B and C will be omitted as they are basically the same.

As shown in Figure 7-1, first, at timing T0, the first reserved number is "0" and the first special symbol display 120 is displaying a variable first special symbol. At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 123 and the first reserved number display area SA display "0." Additionally, in front of the Mode A background image, which is scrolling horizontally, the center one of the three effect symbols 50a and the three special symbols TZ are updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display). Additionally, the first reserved icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c are displayed, and while the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b, the icon TI is displayed in its normal display mode in the icon display area 50c. Additionally, the variable BGM 1 corresponding to the effect Mode A is being audibly output (see Figure 7-2(a)).

Next, at time T1, the central effect symbol 50a, which has been scrolling (updating and changing) at a slow speed, temporarily stops, and the characters of the three effect symbols 50a perform a pre-stop action (a pre-stop action of shaking their heads), causing the three effect symbols 50a to temporarily stop at a losing result ("537"). Then, at time T2, when the special symbol change time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320, and the losing special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 120. In addition, the changing BGM 1 corresponding to effect mode A continues to be audibly output (see Figure 7-2 (b)).

Next, at timing T3, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c begins to disappear in an animated display, and the display of the effect pattern 50a ("537") and the special pattern TZ ("537") begins to stop. After that, at timing T4, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the icon TI's disappearance in an animated display, the icon TI's disappearance in an animated display ends. In addition, variable BGM 1 corresponding to effect mode A continues to be audibly output (see Figure 7-2 (c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and the game enters a customer waiting state, entering a demo waiting period in which the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. At this time, the background image is a horizontally scrolling Mode A background image similar to that displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120, and any background music is continuously output. For example, the same variable background music 1 as before the first special symbol display 120 is continuously audibly output, or a predetermined background music (e.g., BGM 8) corresponding to the demo waiting period (customer waiting state) that is different from that before the first special symbol display 120 is stopped may be output. Note that, in this case, the same variable background music 6 as before the first special symbol display 120 is continuously audibly output (see FIG. 7-2(d)).

Next, at timing T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display device 120 stopped displaying, the variable BGM 1 that had been being audibly output is stopped and silence is restored (see Figure 7-2 (e)). During the period from T4 to T6 when variable BGM 1 is being output, the volume of variable BGM 1 can be changed and the output volume setting can be changed in response to the player's operation of the effect control stick 136.

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display 120 stopped, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the symbol 50a, indicating that the volume of the variable background music, etc. can be adjusted by operating the effect control stick 136 (see Figure 7-2 (f)). The sound adjustment display OC displays the currently set volume (volume gauge) and information indicating the direction in which the effect control stick 136 is operated. Note that, depending on the operation of the effect control stick 136, the volume display (volume gauge) during the sound adjustment display changes, and the output volume setting is also changed.

Next, at timing T8, when the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the main control board 300 sends a customer waiting demo performance start command to the performance control board 320, and the customer waiting demo performance begins for a predetermined period (80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the performance pattern 50a and behind the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), the customer waiting demo image begins fading in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds), and the performance pattern 50a, first hold icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the Mode A background image, and the special pattern TZ begin fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing). In other words, the disappearance display in which the three effect symbols 50a, first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c, Mode A background image, and special symbol TZ gradually disappear and the appearance display in which the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) gradually appears will be displayed so that at least a portion of them overlap. Note that the hold display areas (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, and therefore will never be invisible (obscured) by the customer waiting demo image (see Figure 7-3 (g)).

Then, after timing T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is complete, the effect symbols 50a and the like are hidden (become invisible), and the customer waiting demo begins in the following order: "Variable effect demo (20 seconds)" → "Character introduction (20 seconds)" → "Model name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Moving device demo (10 seconds)" (see Figure 7-3 (h)). In other words, if no game balls are won during the customer waiting state, once the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting state designation command was received, a customer waiting demo to encourage the player to play begins. Furthermore, if no game balls are won during the customer waiting demo, the customer waiting demo will be displayed for a predetermined period (80 seconds).

Referring to Figure 7-3(i), we will now explain the case where the player changes the volume of variable BGM1 by operating the effect operation stick 136 during the period from T5 to T6.

As shown in Figure 7-3 (i), when the effect operation stick 136 is operated during the period T5 to T6 while the variable BGM1 is being output, the main display device 131 begins displaying the sound adjustment display OC (the sound adjustment display OC that is currently displayed will cease to be displayed if the effect operation stick 136 is not operated within a predetermined period (2 seconds)), and predetermined sound effects and audio-visual sounds are output from the audio output device 331 for a fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Here, the predetermined sound effects and audio-visual sounds that accompany the start of the display of the sound adjustment display OC are output at a timing that corresponds to the timing at which the display of the sound adjustment display OC begins (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131), but the output is terminated even if it is not at a timing that corresponds to the timing at which the display of the sound adjustment display OC ends (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (e.g., before the display of the sound adjustment display OC ends). Furthermore, based on the operation of the effect operation stick 136 while the sound adjustment display OC is displayed, the volume of the variable BGM 1 changes, and the volume display (volume gauge) in the sound adjustment display OC changes, changing the volume setting of the BGM to be output. Furthermore, in conjunction with the display of the change in the volume gauge based on the operation of the effect operation stick 136, a predetermined audiovisual sound at the changed volume setting is output for a fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in the audio output device 331. Here, although the predetermined audiovisual sound is output at a timing corresponding to the start of the display of the change in the volume gauge based on the operation of the effect operation stick 136 (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131), the output may be terminated even if it is not at a timing corresponding to the completion of the display of the change in the volume gauge (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (e.g., before the completion of the display of the change in the volume gauge).

Referring to Figures 7-3 (j-1) and (j-2), we will also explain the case where menu images MN1a and MN1b are displayed by operating the sword handle unit 135 while in the customer waiting state. As mentioned above, while in the customer waiting state, the performance control board 320, which has received the customer waiting state designation command, sets the effective operation period for the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button). When the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the effective operation period, a predetermined signal based on the operation of the sword handle button detected by the sword handle button detection switch 137 is transmitted to the performance control board 320. Based on the predetermined signal from the performance control board 320, the lamp control board 340 and the button drive device vibrate the sword handle unit 135 in a predetermined manner. Furthermore, when the display of menu images MN1a, etc., based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135 begins, or when the appearance changes due to the operation of the sword handle unit 135 while the menu image MN1a, etc., is displayed, a predetermined sound effect is output from the audio output device 331 for a fixed period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Here, the specified sound effect is output at a timing corresponding to the start of displaying the menu image MN1a or the like or the change in its state based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135 (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131), but the output ends even if it does not correspond to the completion of displaying the menu image MN1a or the like or the change in its state (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, at a timing before the completion of displaying the menu image MN1a or the like or the change in its state).

As shown in FIG. 7-3 (j-1), for example, if the sword handle unit 135 is operated while "Character Introduction" is displayed during the valid operation period in the waiting state, a menu image MN1a is displayed in front of the "Character Introduction" display. The menu image MN1a displays a "Machine Description" tag, a "Effect Customization" tag, and a "Pachi Log" tag, and any of the tags can be selected and confirmed by operating the effect operation stick 136. If the "Machine Description" tag is selected and confirmed, an explanation of the game flow and features of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. If the "Pachi Log" tag is selected and confirmed, data on the gaming results of the gaming machine 100, such as the number of jackpots for the current day and the previous day, is displayed. The valid operation period is set to continue during the waiting state, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN1a is displayed, the menu image MN1a disappears.

As shown in Figure 7-3 (j-2), when "Effect Customization" is selected and confirmed while menu image MN1a is displayed, menu image MN1b is displayed. Menu image MN1b displays the words "Select Favourite Character" along with tags for multiple character names that can be selected and confirmed by operating the effect operation stick 136. For example, when a tag for one character name is selected in this menu image MN1b, when an effect pattern 50a including the selected character is displayed during play, the word "Favourite Character" is added to the effect pattern 50a. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated while menu image MN1b is displayed, menu image MN1b disappears.

In the customer waiting state described above, the display time of the customer waiting demo effect (80 seconds) is longer than the time from when the fluctuation stops until the output of the variable BGM is stopped (30 seconds). In such a customer waiting state, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing immediately after the fluctuation stops, so by continuing to output the variable BGM, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing. Furthermore, because the output time of the variable BGM after the fluctuation stops is shorter than the display time of the customer waiting demo effect, it is possible to prevent players of other nearby gaming machines from feeling uncomfortable if the continuous output of the variable BGM after the fluctuation stops is too long, and the display of the customer waiting demo effect for a long period of time can also appeal to players of other nearby gaming machines to continue playing.

In the customer waiting state described above, the time from when the sound adjustment display OC is displayed until the customer waiting demo effect is displayed (80 seconds or 60 seconds) is longer than the time from when the fluctuation stops until the sound adjustment display OC is displayed (40 seconds). In such a customer waiting state, the sound adjustment display OC is not displayed for a predetermined period of time after fluctuation stops, allowing players who are playing to focus on the fluctuation effects, etc., and reducing the annoyance caused by the display of the sound adjustment display OC for players who continue playing immediately after fluctuation stops. Furthermore, because the period from when the sound adjustment display OC is displayed until the customer waiting demo effect is displayed is sufficiently long and the display of the customer waiting demo effect does not make the sound adjustment display OC difficult to see, players in the customer waiting state can easily recognize that the volume of background music, etc. can be adjusted.

In the customer waiting state described above, the timing of the output of the predetermined sound effect or predetermined preview sound from the audio output device 331 can be made earlier than the timing of changes in the display mode on the main display device 131 (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131), such as the display of the sound adjustment display OC, the display of changes in the volume gauge, and the display of menu images MN1a, etc., on the main display device 131. In this customer waiting state, for example, even if a player is operating the effect operation stick 136 while the sound adjustment display OC, etc. is displayed to adjust the volume to a desired level, and is also operating the launch handle device 103 in the hope of quickly winning at the first starting slot 112, etc., and the display of the effect pattern 50a begins to change before the display of the volume gauge change on the main display device 131 is complete, causing the player to stop paying attention to the display of the volume gauge change, the predetermined preview sound output before the display of the volume gauge change is complete can make the player aware that the volume adjustment to the desired level has been completed. In other words, the player can recognize that the change in the settings of the gaming machine 100 in response to his or her operation has been completed by a predetermined sound effect or preview sound, without having to visually confirm that the change in the display mode on the main display device 131 based on the player's operation has been completed.

(Example of what happens when you win while waiting for customers)
With reference to Figure 7-4, an example of the presentation when a prize is won while waiting for customers will be described. Figure 7-4 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when a prize is won while waiting for customers. Here, an example of the presentation when a prize is won during the period T4 to T6 of the demo waiting period while waiting for customers will be described.

As shown in Figure 7-4(a), during the demo waiting period T4 to T6 in the customer waiting state, as described above, the stop time for the special symbol has elapsed, and the main control board 300 sends a customer waiting state designation command to the performance control board 320, entering the demo waiting period in which the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a static state. At this time, on the main display device 131, the background image is a horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, similar to that displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120, and the variable BGM 1, similar to that before the variable display of the first special symbol display 120, is continuously audibly output.

As shown in Figure 7-4(b), when a game ball enters the first start opening 112, the first hold number becomes "1", an additional hold icon HI is displayed in the normal display mode in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 50b, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1". Also, variable BGM 1 continues to be audibly output, and a sound effect indicating a win is output. Furthermore, the Mode A background image continues to be output as a horizontal scroll. In other words, if a game ball enters the first start opening 112 during the demo waiting period when customers are waiting and variable BGM is being output, the variable BGM that was being output before the win will continue to be output.

As shown in Figure 7-4 (c), when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the display of the first special symbol begins to change, the reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b begins to shift (decrease, change) toward the icon display area 50c, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated to "0" (decrease). Furthermore, in front of the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image, the three display symbols 50a that were displayed stationary begin to float up as a pre-change action, and the scrolling display of the special symbol TZ begins. Furthermore, even at this time, the change BGM 1 continues to be audibly output. At this time, for example, if the display mode is changed, the change display may be displayed with the background image, display symbol 50a, reserved icon HI, icon TI, change BGM, etc. changed.

(Example of a performance when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during a variable display)
Referring to FIG. 7-5, an example of a presentation when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the variable display of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 7-5 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the variable display. Here, a case will be described in which the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and an SPSP reach presentation is set as the variable presentation pattern. In addition, when the SPSP reach presentation (jackpot) is set as the variable presentation pattern on the presentation control board 320, an operation valid period (10 seconds) during which operation of the sword handle unit 135 is valid is set. Furthermore, the operation valid period (10 seconds) is not limited to the SPSP reach presentation (jackpot), and is set for multiple types of variable presentation patterns, such as an SPSP reach presentation (miss), an SP reach presentation (jackpot), and a pseudo-continuous presentation.

As shown in Figure 7-5(a), first, at the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the deciding performance begins, at which point a prompt image encouraging the player to operate the sword handle button on the sword handle unit 135 is displayed, and the valid operation period (10 seconds) for the sword handle button begins. Specifically, an operation prompt image SSG resembling a sword handle button is displayed on the main display device 131, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and the sound effect "Press" is output from the audio output device 331. At this time, a reduced performance pattern 50a is displayed in a variable manner in the upper left corner of the main display device 131.

As shown in FIG. 7-5(b), when the sword handle button on the sword handle unit 135 is next operated during the valid operation period (10 seconds), a successful win effect is executed, indicating that a jackpot game will be executed. Specifically, the lower role unit 156 moves to the effect position, and multiple light-emitting LEDs provided on the lower role unit 156 flash. Furthermore, a successful win image SEF is displayed in front of the SPSP reach background on the main display device 131, and a "kyuin kyuin" sound effect is output from the audio output device 331. Furthermore, the sword handle unit 135 vibrates due to the button drive device. Then, the reduced effect symbol 50a in the upper left corner of the main display device 131 temporarily stops at "5," resulting in the three effect symbols 50a temporarily stopping at the jackpot result ("555"). If the sword handle unit 135 is not operated during the valid operation period, the operation prompt image SSG disappears, and the successful win effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 7-5 (c), after the execution period of the SPSP reach effect has elapsed, a pre-stop effect is executed (display of a blocking image (an eye-catching image including the machine name) that blocks the background image and effect image 50a for 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect pattern 50a will stop, after which the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image resumes and the effect pattern 50a returns to the position and first mode it was in before the start of the SPSP reach effect, displaying a temporarily stopped state. In addition, the first hold icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c displaying the icon TI are redisplayed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 331 for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the effect pattern 50a stops).

In a variable presentation where the valid operation period is set as described above, the valid operation period (10 seconds) set according to the variable presentation pattern is set for multiple types of variable presentation patterns, so it can be set more times than the valid operation period (one time) set during the customer waiting state, and can be set shorter than the valid operation period set during the customer waiting state (set throughout the customer waiting state). In such a variable presentation, the variable presentation by setting the valid operation period during the variable presentation increases the player's anticipation, and since it can be implemented with many types of variable presentation patterns in a short valid operation period, it can increase the interest of the variable presentation. Furthermore, since the presentation by setting the valid operation period during the customer waiting state sets a long valid operation period only a few times (one time), it can reduce player boredom and increase the interest of the presentation during the customer waiting state.

[Specific example of when the variable effect in the time-saving gaming state 3 ends and the state shifts to waiting for customers]
Using Figures 8-1 to 8-3, we will explain a specific example of when the variable effect in time-saving gaming state 3 ends when the available number of plays "M3" is not "0" and the demo waiting period changes to a customer waiting demo period. Figure 8-1 is a timing chart when the variable effect in time-saving gaming state 3 ends and the customer waiting state changes, and Figures 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in Figure 8-1. Note that here we will explain the case of effect mode F, but the effect modes D and E, which are effect modes in the time-saving gaming state, are basically the same, so we will not explain them here.

As shown in Figure 8-1, first, at timing T0, the second reserved number is "0" and the second special symbol display 122 is displaying a variable second special symbol. At this time, the second special symbol reserved display 124 and the second reserved number display area SB display "0." Additionally, in front of the Mode F background image, which is scrolling horizontally, one of the three performance symbols 50a in the fourth mode and the three special symbols TZ are updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display). Additionally, the remaining number of times image JK (indicating that the remaining number of times available for play in time-saving play state 3 is "101 times") is displayed, and the second reserved icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50c are displayed. While the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50c. In addition, the right-hit image MG is displayed, and variable BGM 6 corresponding to presentation mode F is audibly output (see Figure 8-2 (a)).

Next, at time T1, the central effect symbol 50a, which had been scrolling (updating and changing) at a slow speed, temporarily stops, and the three effect symbols 50a perform a pre-stop action (bounce (small) display), and the three effect symbols 50a temporarily stop with a losing result ("537"). Then, at time T2, when the special symbol change time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320, and the losing special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the second special symbol display 122. Additionally, the right-hit image MG and remaining number image JK are displayed, and the changing BGM 6 corresponding to effect mode F is continuously audibly output (see Figure 8-2 (b)).

Next, at timing T3, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c begins to disappear in an animated fashion, and the effect symbol 50a ("537") and special symbol TZ ("537") begin to stop. Then, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the icon TI's disappearance in an animated fashion, the icon TI's disappearance in an animated fashion ends. Also, the right-hit image MG and remaining number of plays image JK are displayed, and variable BGM 6 corresponding to effect mode F is continuously audibly output (see Figure 8-2 (c)). Although not shown, as the disappearance of the icon TI ends, the remaining number of plays image JK displays an image reading "100 plays remaining" in an animation that subtracts "1" from the available number of plays "101."

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state, and a demo waiting period in which the special symbol is displayed still is initiated. A customer waiting state command is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320. At this time, the background image is a horizontally scrolling Mode F background image, similar to that displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol display 122. Any BGM needs to be continuously output. For example, the same variable BGM 6 as before the variable display of the second special symbol display 122 may be continuously audibly output, or a predetermined BGM (e.g., BGM 8) corresponding to the demo waiting period (customer waiting state) that is different from that before the variable display of the second special symbol display 122 may be started to be output. Note that, in this case, the variable BGM 6, similar to that before the variable display of the second special symbol display 122, is continuously audibly output. The right-hit image MG and remaining number image JK are also continuously displayed (see Figure 8-2 (d)).

Next, at timing T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the second special symbol display 122 stopped, the variable BGM 6 that had been being output audibly is stopped and silence is restored. The right-hit image MG and remaining number image JK continue to be displayed (see Figure 8-2 (e)). During the period from T4 to T6 when the variable BGM 6 is being output, the volume of the variable BGM 6 can be changed and the output volume can be adjusted in response to the player's operation of the effect control stick 136.

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the second special symbol display 122 stopped, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the symbol 50a, indicating that the volume of the variable background music, etc. can be adjusted by operating the effect control stick 136. The right-hit image MG and remaining number of times image JK are also displayed continuously (see Figure 8-2 (f)). The sound adjustment display OC displays the currently set volume level (volume gauge) and the direction in which the effect control stick 136 is being operated. Note that, depending on the operation of the effect control stick 136, the volume level display (volume gauge) during the sound adjustment display changes, and the output volume setting is also changed.

Next, at timing T8, when the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo effect is initiated for a predetermined period (80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the effect symbol 50a and behind the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), the customer waiting demo image begins to fade in (gradually become opaque from a transparent state) for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds), and the effect symbol 50a, right hit image MG, remaining number image JK, second hold icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c, mode F background image, and special symbol TZ begin to fade out (gradually become transparent from an opaque state and disappear). In other words, the disappearance display in which the three effect symbols 50a, the right-hit image MG, the remaining number of times image JK, the second hold icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c, the Mode F background image, and the special symbol TZ gradually disappear, and the appearance display in which the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) gradually appears, are displayed so that at least a portion of them overlap. Note that the hold display areas (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, so they are never in a state where they cannot be seen (are obscured) by the customer waiting demo image (see Figure 8-3 (g)).

Then, after timing T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is complete, the effect symbols 50a and the like are hidden (become invisible), and the customer waiting demo begins in the following order: "Variable effect demo (20 seconds)" → "Character introduction (20 seconds)" → "Model name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Moving device demo (10 seconds)" (see Figure 8-3 (h)). In other words, if no game balls are won during the customer waiting state, once the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting state designation command was received, a customer waiting demo to encourage the player to play will begin. Furthermore, if no game balls are won during the customer waiting demo, the customer waiting demo will be displayed for a predetermined period (80 seconds).

With reference to Figure 8-3(i), we will now explain the case where the player changes the volume of the variable background music 6 by operating the effect operation stick 136 during the period T5 to T6. As shown in Figure 8-3(i), when the effect operation stick 136 is operated during the period T5 to T6 when the variable background music 6 is being output, the volume adjustment display OC is displayed. Then, in response to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, the volume of the variable background music 6 changes, and the volume display (volume gauge) in the volume adjustment display OC changes, changing the volume setting of the output background music, etc. At this time, a specified audio output at the changed volume setting is output in accordance with the change in the volume display in response to the operation of the effect operation stick 136. Furthermore, if the effect operation stick 136 is not operated within the specified period (2 seconds), the volume adjustment display OC disappears.

Referring to Figures 8-3 (j-1) and (j-2), we will also explain the case where menu images MN2a and MN2b are displayed by operating the sword handle unit 135 while waiting for customers. Note that when menu image MN2a, etc., starts to be displayed, or when the appearance of menu image MN2a, etc. changes due to operation of the sword handle unit 135 while it is being displayed, a predetermined sound effect is output for a fixed period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Similar to the relationship between menu image MN1a, etc., and sound effects described above, the timing of the display or appearance change of menu image MN2a, etc. (i.e., the frame update timing of the main display device 131) may not coincide with the timing of the output of the predetermined sound effect.

As shown in Figure 8-3 (j-1), in the customer waiting state, the effect control board 320, which has received the customer waiting state designation command, sets the valid operation period for the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button). For example, when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during this valid operation period and during the demo waiting period, the Mode F background image, three stopped effect symbols 50a, right-hit image MG, remaining number of plays image JK, second hold icon display area 50d, and menu image MN2a are displayed in front of the icon display area 50c. The menu image MN2a displays a "Machine Description" tag and a "MUSIC Selection" tag, and either tag can be selected and confirmed by operating the effect operation stick 136. When the "Machine Description" tag is selected and confirmed, an explanation of the game flow and features of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN2a is displayed, the menu image MN2a disappears.

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (j-2), when the "MUSIC SELECT" tag is selected and confirmed while menu image MN2a is displayed, menu image MN2b is displayed. Menu image MN2b displays the words "MUSIC SELECT" along with multiple song title tags that can be selected and confirmed by operating the performance control stick 136. For example, when a song title tag is selected in this menu image MN2b, the background music for the selected song title is output, and the volume of the background music for the selected song title can be adjusted by operating the performance control stick 136. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated while menu image MN2b is displayed, menu image MN2b disappears. Furthermore, when the volume of the background music for the selected song title is adjusted while menu image MN2b is being output, a volume adjustment image OC may be displayed.

Here, we will compare the state of the customer waiting state when the machine enters the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state (before the cumulative count "n" reaches "0") (see Figures 7-1 to 7-3) as described above with the state of the customer waiting state when the machine enters the customer waiting state in time-saving gaming state 3 (after the cumulative count "n" reaches "0") (see Figures 8-1 to 8-3), and explain what is different and what is the same. For convenience, in the following explanation, the state of the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state will be referred to as "normal customer waiting," and the state of the customer waiting state in time-saving gaming state 3 will be referred to as "time-saving 3 customer waiting."

First, we will explain the elements that cause differences between normal customer waiting and time-saving 3-customer waiting. The first element is the background image displayed between the time when fluctuation stops and the start of the customer waiting demo effect, which differs between normal customer waiting and time-saving 3-customer waiting. Specifically, in normal customer waiting, the background image corresponds to one of presentation modes A to C, while in time-saving 3-customer waiting, the background image corresponds to presentation mode F, which is exclusive to time-saving game state 3. The second element is the aspect of the presentation pattern 50a displayed between the time when fluctuation stops and the start of the customer waiting demo effect, which differs between normal customer waiting and time-saving 3-customer waiting. Specifically, in normal customer waiting, the background image is one of modes 1 to 3, while in time-saving 3-customer waiting, the background image is mode 4. The third element is the background music that is output for a predetermined period after fluctuation stops and the time-saving 3-customer waiting. Specifically, in normal customer waiting, the background image is one of BGM1 to BGM3, while in time-saving 3-customer waiting, the background image is BGM6. The fourth element is that the manner in which the hold icon display area is displayed between the time when the fluctuation stops and the start of the customer waiting demo effect differs between normal customer waiting and time-saving 3 customer waiting. Specifically, in normal customer waiting, it is the first hold icon display area 50b, and in time-saving 3 customer waiting, it is the second hold icon display area 50d. Note that, as described above, if the display manner of the first hold icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second hold icon display area 50d differs for each effect mode, the manner in which the hold icon display area differs between normal customer waiting and time-saving 3 customer waiting. Also, in time-saving 3 customer waiting, the right-hit image MG and the remaining number image JK are displayed between the time when the fluctuation stops and the start of the customer waiting demo effect, but they are not displayed in normal customer waiting. Furthermore, in time-saving 3 customer waiting, if a display indicating the current game status is displayed as described above, "Time-saving 3 mode" is displayed, but this is not displayed in normal customer waiting. Furthermore, while the first through fourth elements described above are different between normal customer waiting and time-saving 3 customer waiting, they may be the same.

Next, we will explain the elements that are the same in the normal customer waiting mode and the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode. The first element is that the sound adjustment image OC displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the start of the customer waiting demo performance is the same in the normal customer waiting mode and the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode. The second element is that the volume display (volume gauge) in the sound adjustment image OC displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the start of the customer waiting demo performance and the preview sound (short tone) output when adjusting the volume are the same in the normal customer waiting mode and the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode. The third element is that the customer waiting demo performance displayed after the demo waiting period following the fluctuation stops is the same in the normal customer waiting mode and the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode. The fourth element is that the special pattern TZ displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the start of the customer waiting demo performance is the same in the normal customer waiting mode and the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode. The fifth element is that the period during which background music is output after the fluctuation stops, the period from the time the fluctuation stops until the display of the sound adjustment image OC begins, and the demo waiting period B1 are the same in the normal customer waiting mode and the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode. As described above, if the display position of the special symbol TZ is the same in each presentation mode, it will be the same in both the normal waiting mode and the time-shortened waiting mode. Furthermore, while the first to fifth elements described above are assumed to be the same in both the normal waiting mode and the time-shortened waiting mode, different modes are also possible. In particular, in the fifth element, all three periods may be different in both the normal waiting mode and the time-shortened waiting mode, or at least one or two of the three periods may be different in both the normal waiting mode and the time-shortened waiting mode. Specifically, if the period from the cessation of fluctuation until the BGM is output and the period from the cessation of fluctuation until the display of the sound adjustment image OC is initiated are shorter in the time-shortened waiting mode than in the normal waiting mode, a player who wants to adjust the volume of the output sound before starting play in the time-shortened gaming state 3 can check the volume of the BGM and adjust the volume earlier than in the normal waiting mode, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, when waiting for customers in time-saving 3 mode, if the demo waiting period B1 is made longer than when waiting for regular customers, it is possible to reduce the annoyance caused by the display of the customer waiting demo effect for players who want to play in time-saving gaming state 3 immediately, thereby reducing the loss of interest in the game.

We will also explain a comparison of the customer waiting state when the machine enters a customer waiting state in normal gaming mode (when the jackpot determination process has not yet won time-saving 4) (see Figures 7-1 to 7-3) and when the machine enters a customer waiting state in time-saving gaming mode 4 (when the jackpot determination process has won time-saving 4). The elements that are different or the same in these customer waiting states are the same as those in the comparison between normal customer waiting and time-saving 3 customer waiting described above.

[Specific example 2 when variable effects in normal gaming mode end and the machine enters a waiting state for customers]
9-1 and 9-2, we will explain specific example 2 when the variable effect in the normal gaming state ends and the demo waiting period changes to the customer waiting demo period. Figure 9-1 is a timing chart (2) when the variable effect in the normal gaming state ends and the customer waiting state changes, and Figure 9-2 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in Figure 9-1. Note that here we will explain the case of effect mode A, but the explanation of effect modes B and C will be omitted as they are basically the same.

As shown in Figure 9-1, first, at timing T0, the first reserved number is "0" and the first special symbol display 120 is displaying a variable first special symbol. At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 123 and the first reserved number display area SA display "0." Also, in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally, the central one of the three effect symbols 50a and the three special symbols TZ are being updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). Also, the first reserved icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c are displayed, and while the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b, the icon TI is displayed in the normal display mode in the icon display area 50c. Also, the variable BGM 1 corresponding to effect Mode A is being audibly output.

Next, at time T1, the central effect symbol 50a, which has been scrolling (updating and changing) at a slow speed, temporarily stops, and the characters of the three effect symbols 50a perform a pre-stop action (a pre-stop action of shaking their heads), causing the three effect symbols 50a to temporarily stop at a losing result ("537"). Then, at time T2, when the special symbol change time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320, and the losing special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 120. In addition, the changing BGM 1 corresponding to effect mode A continues to be audibly output.

Next, at timing T3, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c begins to disappear in an animated display, and the display of the effect pattern 50a ("537") and the special pattern TZ ("537") begins to stop. After that, at timing T4, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the icon TI's disappearance in an animated display, the icon TI's disappearance in an animated display ends. In addition, variable BGM 1 corresponding to effect mode A continues to be audibly output.

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and enters a demo waiting period in which the special symbol is displayed stationary, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320. At this time, the background image is a horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, similar to that displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120, and the variable BGM 1, similar to that before the variable display of the first special symbol display 120, continues to be audibly output (see Figure 9-2 (d)).

Next, at timing T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display 120 stopped, while the variable BGM 1 continues to be audibly output, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the effect symbol 50a, indicating that the volume of the variable BGM, etc. can be adjusted by operating the effect operation stick 136. The sound adjustment display OC displays the currently set volume level and the direction in which the effect operation stick 136 is operated. Note that, depending on the operation of the effect operation stick 136, the volume level displayed during the sound adjustment display changes, and the output volume level setting is also changed (see Figure 9-2 (e)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol display device 120 stopped displaying, the variable BGM 1 that had been being audibly output is stopped and the game enters a silent state (see Figure 7-2 (f)). Even when variable BGM 1 is not being output after T7, the volume of variable BGM 1 can be changed and the output volume setting can be changed in response to the player's operation of the effect control stick 136. For example, when the effect control stick 136 is operated in a silent state, a short sound (trial sound) at the set volume level is output, allowing the player to confirm the volume level set.

Next, at timing T8, when the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting state designation command was received, a customer waiting demo performance begins for a predetermined period (80 seconds). Specifically, in front of performance pattern 50a and behind the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), the customer waiting demo image begins fading in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds), and performance pattern 50a, first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c, Mode A background image, and special pattern TZ begin fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and then disappearing). In other words, the disappearance display in which the three effect symbols 50a, first hold icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c, Mode A background image, and special symbol TZ gradually disappear and the appearance display in which the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) gradually appears will be displayed so that at least a portion of them overlap. Note that the hold display areas (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, and therefore will never be invisible (obscured) by the customer waiting demo image.

Then, after timing T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is complete, the effect symbols 50a and the like are hidden (become invisible), and the customer waiting demo begins in the following order: "Variable effect demo (20 seconds)" → "Character introduction (20 seconds)" → "Model name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Moving device demo (10 seconds)" (see Figure 7-3 (h)). In other words, if no game balls are won during the customer waiting state, once the demo waiting period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting state designation command was received, a customer waiting demo to encourage the player to play begins. Furthermore, if no game balls are won during the customer waiting demo, the customer waiting demo will be displayed for a predetermined period (80 seconds).

[Effects of this embodiment]
According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 as described above, the main display device 131, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, displays a performance including scrolling of a mode background image according to the performance mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display has ended, and displays a customer waiting demo performance until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed after the first time has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo performance can be displayed as a customer waiting demo performance from the second time onwards even after the second time has elapsed, and after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display has ended, displays a sound adjustment display OC that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the performance operation stick 136, and in a customer waiting state, it is possible to continuously output the variable BGM until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed even after the variable display has ended. With such a gaming machine, background music that enhances the enjoyment of the game is continuously output for a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the end of the changing display, which makes it more appealing to continue playing and improves the enjoyment of the presentation while customers are waiting, compared to conventional gaming machines in which the background music stops immediately after the end of the changing display and no background music is output while customers are waiting.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 as described above, the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the demonstration mode as a demo waiting period from the end of the variable display until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed, displays a customer waiting demo demonstration from the first time elapsed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo demonstration can be displayed as a customer waiting demo demonstration for the second or subsequent times even after the second time has elapsed, and displays a sound adjustment display OC that indicates that the volume can be adjusted in accordance with operation of the demonstration operation stick 136 after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the variable display, and in the customer waiting state, it is possible to continuously output variable background music until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed even after the variable display has ended, and during the fourth time, the volume of the variable background music can be adjusted in accordance with operation of the demonstration operation stick 136 while the player can confirm the variable background music. With this type of gaming machine, players can listen to background music, etc. while waiting for customers, change the volume to their preferred level, and then continue playing with the background music, etc. at their preferred volume. This increases the appeal to continue playing compared to conventional gaming machines where players cannot adjust the volume while listening to background music, etc. while waiting for customers, and improves the interest of the presentation while waiting for customers.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 6-1 and 6-2 as described above, during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to display a first display ("machine name") which is a display relating to the title of the gaming machine, and a second display ("Caution to prevent addiction") which is a display urging the player to be careful about addiction to the game, and in the customer waiting state, it is possible to display a third display (sound adjustment display OC), and the demo waiting period is a first time (120
The customer waiting demo effect is executed until a third time (80 seconds) has elapsed after the first time has elapsed, the first display is displayed before the second display, the third display is displayed after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and the second effect (a second customer waiting demo effect) can be executed again after the second time has elapsed. With such a gaming machine, the second display calling attention is displayed after the first display related to the title of the gaming machine or the like, which includes content preferred by the player. Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines in which the first display related to the title of the gaming machine or the like is displayed after a display calling attention, the second display displayed later can effectively call the attention of a player who remains focused on the first display displayed earlier, thereby appropriately increasing the interest of the effects during the customer waiting state.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 as described above, in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the demonstration mode is displayed as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and a customer waiting demo demonstration is displayed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed after the first time has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo demonstration can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo demonstration even after the second time has elapsed, and after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the demonstration operation stick 136, and while the variable display is being executed, the first character (character display CP1) or the second character (character displays CP2, CP3) can be displayed on the main display device 131, and while the customer waiting demo demonstration is being executed in the customer waiting state, the first character can be displayed at a higher rate than the second character on the main display device 131. With this type of gaming machine, a player who sees the customer waiting demo effect can continue playing after recognizing the highly anticipated first character. This increases the sense of anticipation when the first character appears in the effect during play, compared to conventional gaming machines in which the display ratio of the first character to the second character is roughly the same during the customer waiting demo effect, and improves the enjoyment of the effect during the customer waiting state.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 as described above, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the demonstration mode is displayed as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and a customer waiting demo demonstration is displayed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed since the first time has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo demonstration can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo demonstration even after the second time has elapsed, and after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the demonstration operation stick 136, and during the customer waiting demo demonstration, a "warning to prevent addiction" display is executed to warn the player about addiction to the game, and this display can be configured to have a first display section NB1 and a second display section NB2 below the first display section NB1. In this type of gaming machine, the "addiction prevention warning" display is made up of multiple lines of text, which makes it easier for players to quickly recognize the content of the display compared to, for example, a single line of text displayed horizontally on the main display device 131. This makes it possible to effectively warn players with this display, which in turn can appropriately increase the excitement of the presentation while customers are waiting.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 and 7-5, the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, displays an effect including scrolling of a mode background image according to the presentation mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, displays a customer waiting demo effect after the first time has elapsed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as a customer waiting demo effect from the second time onwards even after the second time has elapsed, and displays a sound adjustment display OC that indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the presentation operation stick 136 after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the valid operation period during the variable display, executes a first mode presentation (Figure 7-5(b)), and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the valid operation period during the customer waiting state, executes a second mode presentation (display of menu image MN1). With this type of gaming machine, compared to conventional gaming machines in which no valid operation period is set during the customer waiting state and which do not execute effects such as the second mode effect even when an effect button such as the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the customer waiting state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the gaming machine during the customer waiting state, and ultimately to increase the player's interest in the effects during the customer waiting state.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 as described above, the main display device 131, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the demonstration mode as a demo waiting period from the end of the variable display until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed, displays a customer waiting demo demonstration from the first time elapsed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo demonstration can be displayed as a customer waiting demo demonstration for the second or subsequent times even after the second time has elapsed, and displays a sound adjustment display OC that indicates that the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the demonstration operation stick 136 after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the variable display, and in a customer waiting state, variable BGM can be output continuously until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed even after the variable display has ended, and the third time can be set to be longer than the fourth time but shorter than the first time. With this type of gaming machine, the sound adjustment display OC can be displayed between the time when the fluctuation stops and the start of the customer waiting demo performance, so players who want to focus on the customer waiting demo performance can set the volume to their preferred level while checking the sound adjustment display OC before the customer waiting demo performance starts, and then continue playing, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1, 6-2, 9-1, and 9-2, the main display device 131, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the demonstration mode as a demo waiting period from the end of the variable display until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed, displays a customer waiting demo demonstration from the first time elapsed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo demonstration can be displayed as a customer waiting demo demonstration for the second or subsequent times even after the second time has elapsed, and displays a sound adjustment display OC that indicates that the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the demonstration operation stick 136 after a third time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the variable display, and in a customer waiting state, variable BGM can be output continuously until a fourth time (40 seconds) has elapsed even after the variable display has ended, and the third time can be set to be shorter than the first time and the fourth time. With such a gaming machine, the sound adjustment display OC can be displayed between the time when the fluctuation stops and the start of the customer waiting demo effect, so players who want to focus on the customer waiting demo effect can set the volume to their preferred level while checking the sound adjustment display OC before the customer waiting demo effect starts and then continue playing, thereby increasing their interest in the game. Furthermore, since the player can change the volume to their preferred level while listening to background music, etc. while waiting for customers, and then continue playing with the background music, etc. at their preferred volume, this increases the appeal to continue playing compared to conventional gaming machines in which the player cannot adjust the volume while listening to background music, etc. while waiting for customers, and increases the interest in the effects during the customer waiting state.

According to the embodiment of the gaming machine shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-4 as described above, the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, displays a display including scrolling of a mode background image according to the display mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and displays a customer waiting demo display after the first time has elapsed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demo display can also be displayed as a customer waiting demo display from the second time onwards after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed, which indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the display operation stick 136. In the customer waiting state, even if the variable display has ended, variable BGM1 can be continuously output until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed. If the variable display is started based on a win before the fourth time has elapsed, variable BGM1 can be continuously output even after the variable display has started. With this type of gaming machine, even if a prize is won while background music is being played during customer waiting, gameplay continues without interruption to the background music. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to background music being interrupted, compared to conventional gaming machines in which a prize is won while background music is being played during customer waiting and the background music being interrupted or changed when the variable display begins, and ultimately increases the interest of the presentation during customer waiting.

In the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3, the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image corresponding to the demonstration mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended. After the first time has elapsed, the customer waiting demo demonstration is displayed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demo demonstration can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo demonstration even after the second time has elapsed. After a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and at any time other than the second time, a sound adjustment indicator OC can be displayed that indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the demonstration control stick 136. With such a gaming machine, the sound adjustment indicator OC unrelated to the content is not displayed during the customer waiting demo demonstration. Therefore, players who want to focus on the customer waiting demo demonstration can watch it without being bothered by the sound adjustment indicator OC unrelated to the content of the customer waiting demo demonstration, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the demonstration during the customer waiting state.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 as described above, the main display device 131, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, displays an effect including scrolling of a mode background image corresponding to the presentation mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and displays a customer waiting demo effect from the first time until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as a customer waiting demo effect from the second time onwards even after the second time has elapsed, and after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, displays a sound adjustment display OC that indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the presentation operation stick 136, and the demo waiting period can be executed in different ways depending on the mode background image corresponding to the presentation mode set before the variable display ended. With this type of gaming machine, for example, the presentation mode before the fluctuation stops can be a highly anticipated presentation mode, and the demo standby period can be set to a mode background image corresponding to that presentation mode. This encourages players to continue playing while maintaining their expectation of winning a jackpot if they win during the demo standby period. Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines that start the variable display in a specific presentation mode regardless of the presentation mode before the fluctuation stops when a prize is won during the demo standby period, the appeal to continue playing can be increased, and the entertainment value of the presentation during the customer waiting state can be improved.

According to the gaming machine embodiment shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 as described above, the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, displays a demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the demonstration mode as a demo waiting period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, and displays the customer waiting demo demonstration after the first time has elapsed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demo demonstration can be displayed as a second or subsequent customer waiting demo demonstration even after the second time has elapsed, and after a third time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the demonstration operation stick 136, and during the customer waiting demo demonstration, multiple character displays can be displayed in a "character introduction" display, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player while multiple characters are displayed, the player can select and set one of the multiple characters as their favorite character according to their actions. With this type of gaming machine, for example, the "Character Introduction" display during the customer waiting demo performance allows players to check the characters and then customize them to suit their preferences, such as their favorite characters. This increases the excitement of the performance during the customer waiting state compared to conventional gaming machines that do not allow customization while checking the content of such customer waiting demo performance.

According to the gaming machine embodiments shown in Figures 6-1 to 7-3 and 8-1 to 8-3 as described above, the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, displays an effect including scrolling of a mode background image according to the presentation mode as a demo waiting period from the end of the variable display until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed, and displays the customer waiting demo effect after the first time has elapsed until a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demo effect can also be displayed as a customer waiting demo effect from the second time onwards even after the second time has elapsed. The demo waiting period B1 in the normal game state and the demo waiting period B1 in the time-saving game state are displayed in different ways. If the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demo waiting period B1 in the normal game state, a first setting (favorite character selection) can be made, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demo waiting period in the time-saving game state, a second setting (MUSIC selection) can be made. Such gaming machines can be customized to suit the player's preferences depending on the game state of the machine, which can increase the excitement of the presentation while waiting for customers compared to conventional gaming machines that do not allow for multiple types of customization.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments will be described with reference to Figure 10. Figure 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in another embodiment. As shown in Figure 10, in this embodiment, a scrolling pattern SZ is displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the presentation pattern 50a, etc. on the main display device 131 during a variable presentation. The scrolling pattern SZ is composed of three patterns, and each pattern, "■", "□", "●", "○", and "◎", is displayed in a variable (scroll) manner and then statically displayed. Note that Figure 10 describes the case of presentation mode A, but the other presentation modes B to F are similar, so explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), first, after the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable display of the scrolling symbol SZ begins at the same time as the variable display of the three effect symbols 50a begins. As shown in FIG. 10(b), before the static display of the special symbol, while at least one of the three effect symbols 50a is in a variable display, the scrolling symbol SZ is statically displayed. At this time, the order in which the three symbols of the scrolling symbol SZ are statically displayed may be from left to right, or from right to left. In other words, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112 or the second starting hole 115, the variable display of the scrolling symbol SZ will be performed. Note that the number of times the same combination of three symbols is statically displayed during the static display of the scrolling symbol SZ is stored in the sub-RAM 320c of the effect control board 320.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), for example, when the "Pachilog" tag is selected and confirmed by operating the effect control stick 136 while menu image MN1a is displayed in the waiting state, menu image MN3 may be displayed. Menu image MN3 displays a list of the number of times the same combination of three symbols in the scrolling pattern SZ has stopped and displayed for the past three days, as well as the types of symbols that have stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the player can check information such as the number of times the same three symbols in the scrolling pattern SZ have stopped and displayed while in the waiting state, and can even estimate the setting values of the gaming machine 100 based on this information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the sound adjustment display OC was displayed during the waiting state. However, a small sound adjustment display smaller than the sound adjustment display OC may also be displayed on the main display device 131 during the variable effect in response to operation of the effect control stick 136, and may disappear if the effect control stick 136 is not operated for a predetermined period (5 seconds). In such an embodiment, the small sound adjustment display during the variable effect is smaller than the sound adjustment display OC during the waiting state and is displayed for a short period of time. This does not interfere with the visibility of the variable effect on the main display device 131, preventing a decrease in interest in the game. Note that the sound adjustment display during the variable effect may take various forms that do not interfere with the display of the variable effect on the main display device 131. For example, it may be displayed on the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. Even in such a form, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Next, we will explain the case where the volume of output sounds such as background music is adjusted by operating the effect operation stick 136 before the special symbol fluctuations stop and when the machine transitions to the customer waiting state. Specifically, while the special symbol is fluctuating, the small sound adjustment indicator is displayed and the volume can be adjusted in response to the operation of the effect operation stick 136. When the special symbol fluctuations stop and the machine transitions to the customer waiting state, the small sound adjustment indicator disappears and the volume cannot be adjusted. After the transition to the customer waiting state, the sound adjustment indicator OC is displayed by operating the effect operation stick 136 and the volume can be adjusted. In this embodiment, the player can adjust the volume at their preferred timing whether the gaming machine is in a state where special symbols are fluctuating or when the machine is in the customer waiting state.

In the above-described embodiment, the "machine name" during the customer waiting demo was displayed before the "warning to prevent addiction" and for a short time, but it may also be displayed before the "warning to prevent addiction" and for a longer time. In such an embodiment, the "machine name" is displayed for a longer time than the "warning to prevent addiction," making the game machine's content more memorable to the player, and the "warning to prevent addiction" is displayed after the "machine name," making the warning to prevent addiction more memorable to the player.

In the above-described embodiment, the "manufacturer name" and the "addiction prevention warning" were displayed separately during the customer waiting demo performance. However, the "manufacturer name" and the "addiction prevention warning" may be displayed simultaneously, or the "addiction prevention warning" may be displayed partway through the "manufacturer name" display. Specifically, the display may be "manufacturer name & addiction prevention warning (10 seconds)," or the "addiction prevention warning" may be displayed three seconds after the "manufacturer name" begins to be displayed. In such an embodiment, the "manufacturer name" and the "addiction prevention warning," which are intended to impress players, can be displayed simultaneously, making a stronger impression on players. Furthermore, shortening the display time of the customer waiting demo performance also prevents players from becoming bored with the long display of the customer waiting demo performance. Additionally, a "warning to prevent addiction" is displayed midway through the display of the "manufacturer name," which creates a more varied customer waiting demo presentation than conventional gaming machines, which simply display the information in order, and leaves a stronger impression on players.

In the above-described embodiment, only the warning display NH was displayed during the display time of the "Caution to Prevent Addiction" in the customer waiting demo effect. However, other images that warn players of cautions, warnings, etc. may also be displayed. For example, images that warn players of cautions other than the warning display NH include a prevention image CH (see Figure 5-3 (a-1)) that warns players not to forget to remove gaming cards inserted into the gaming device, images that warn against illegal acts against gaming machines, and images that warn players that smoking should only be done in designated areas. At least one of these images may be displayed during the display time of the "Caution to Prevent Addiction" in the customer waiting demo effect, or each image may be displayed in sequence. In other words, during the display time of the "Caution to Prevent Addiction" in the customer waiting demo effect, the warning display NH may be constantly displayed, and images that warn players of other cautions, etc. may be displayed. In this manner, by changing the manner in which the "addiction prevention warning" is displayed during the customer waiting demo performance, the most important warning display NH can be more easily impressed on the player than in a mode in which only the warning display NH is displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the volume adjustment display OC is displayed after a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed after the variable BGM, which has continued to be output after the volume has stopped, has stopped. However, the volume adjustment display OC may also be displayed simultaneously with the stopping of the variable BGM. In such an embodiment, displaying the volume adjustment display OC simultaneously with the stopping of the variable BGM more effectively allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted, rather than displaying the volume adjustment display OC alone.

In the above-described embodiment of Figures 8-1 to 8-3, a specific example was described in which the number of available plays "M3" is not "0," that is, when the variable presentation during time-saving game state 3 ends and the game enters a waiting state for players. However, there are various other cases in which the game enters a waiting state for players. Here, for example, a case in which the game enters a waiting state for players when transitioning from the normal game state to time-saving game state 3 is described. In this case in which the waiting state for players is entered when transitioning from the normal game state to time-saving game state 3, when the variable presentation of the first special symbol display device 120 stops during a game in which the cumulative number of plays "n" becomes "0," the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the presentation modes A to C (see Figures 5-1(a) to (c)) described above to presentation mode F (Figure 5-1(f)), and the game enters a waiting state for players in the display mode of time-saving game state 3 (see Figures 8-2(d) to (f) and Figure 8-3). At this time, the right-hit lamp is lit, and the main display device 131 begins displaying a right-hit image MG, displaying a remaining number image JK such as "700 hits remaining." When the player is waiting for a customer in time-shortened game state 3 and a winning entry is made in the second start slot 115, an effect corresponding to the first game in time-shortened game state 3 is executed, and the right-hit image MG continues to be displayed on the main display device 131 (the right-hit lamp also continues to be lit). However, while the time-shortened game state 3 is in a waiting-for-customer state, the time-shortened game entry effect described above is not executed. However, the time-shortened game entry effect is executed when the player wins the first winning entry in the second start slot 115 in time-shortened game state 3. While the time-shortened game state 3 is in a waiting-for-customer state and the time-shortened game state 3 is not executed, the time-shortened game entry effect may be executed. Also, for example, on the main display device 131, the cumulative number of times image RK that was displayed in the normal game state before entering the customer waiting state may continue to be displayed even when entering the customer waiting state in time-saving game state 3, such as "800 times," and may be hidden upon the start of the first game in time-saving game state 3, and a remaining number of times image JK such as "700 times remaining" may be displayed.

In addition, when the waiting state for customers is entered during the transition from the normal game state to the time-limited game state 3, the timing at which the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of presentation modes A to C to presentation mode F may be, in addition to the timings described above, when the first variable display of the second special pattern display device 122 in the time-limited game state 3 begins. In such a state, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains in the normal game state (one of presentation modes A to C), and the right hit image MG and remaining number of plays image JK as described above are not displayed (although the right hit lamp is lit), and the waiting state for customers is entered (see Figures 7-2(d) to (f) and Figure 7-3). If the second starting gate 115 is won while in this customer waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of presentation modes A to C to presentation mode F (Figure 5-1 (f)), and the right-hit image MG begins to be displayed, and a remaining number image JK such as "700 remaining" is displayed, thereby executing a presentation corresponding to the first game in time-limited game state 3. Also, for example, on the main display device 131 in the customer waiting state described above, the accumulated number image RK such as "800 remaining" may remain displayed, but may be hidden at the same time as the first game in time-limited game state 3 begins, and a remaining number image JK such as "700 remaining" may be displayed.

Next, we will explain the case where, for example, a customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the normal game state to time-shortened game state 4. In this case where a customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the normal game state to time-shortened game state 4, when the variable display of the first special symbol display device 120 stops in a game in which time-shortened game state 4 is won in the jackpot determination process, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the above-mentioned presentation modes A to C (see Figures 5-1 (a) to (c)) to presentation mode G corresponding to time-shortened game state 4, and the game enters a customer waiting state in the display mode of time-shortened game state 4. The change in the mode on the main display device 131, etc. in this case is similar to the change in mode when a customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the above-mentioned normal game state to time-shortened game state 3 and the variable display of the first special symbol display device 120 stops in a game in which the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0." Furthermore, for example, when a customer waiting state is entered upon transition from the normal game state to the time-shortened game state 4, and the first variable display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time-shortened game state 3 begins, the display mode on the main display device 131 may change from one of the above-described presentation modes A to C (see Figures 5-1 (a) to (c)) to presentation mode G corresponding to the time-shortened game state 4. The change in mode on the main display device 131, etc. in such a mode is similar to the change in mode when a customer waiting state is entered upon transition from the above-described normal game state to the time-shortened game state 3, and the first variable display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time-shortened game state 3 begins.

Next, we will explain the case where, for example, a customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from time-limited game state 3 to normal game state. In this case where a customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from time-limited game state 3 to normal game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol indicator 122 stops during a game in which the number of available plays reaches "0," the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from the aforementioned presentation mode F (FIG. 5-1(f)) to one of presentation modes A to C (see FIGS. 5-1(a) to (c)), and the device enters a customer waiting state in the display mode of the normal game state (see FIGS. 7-2(d) to (f) and 7-3). At this time, the right-hit lamp is turned off, and the right-hit image MG and remaining play count image JK are hidden on the main display device 131, with the left-hit start image displayed for a predetermined period. After the predetermined period has elapsed, the left-hit start image is hidden, the transition notification image is displayed, and the device enters a customer waiting state in the display mode of the normal game state. Also, for example, on the main display device 131, the remaining number of times image JK that was displayed in time-saving game state 3 before entering the customer waiting state may continue to be displayed even when entering the customer waiting state in normal game state, such as "0 times remaining," and may be made to disappear upon the start of the first game in normal game state, and a transition notification image such as "Time-saving 3 completed" may be displayed instead.

In addition, when the game enters a customer waiting state during the transition from time-saving game state 3 to the normal game state, the timing at which the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from presentation mode F to one of presentation modes A to C may be, in addition to the timing described above, when the first variable display of the first special symbol display device 120 begins in the normal game state. In such a state, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains in time-saving game state 3 (presentation mode F), the left-hit start image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (the right-hit lamp is turned off), and the right-hit image MG and remaining number image JK described above are hidden, entering the customer waiting state. Then, when a winning ball is won in the first start slot 112 during this customer waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from presentation mode F to one of presentation modes A to C, the transition notification image begins to be displayed, and an effect corresponding to the first play in time-saving game state 3 is executed. Also, for example, in the main display device 131 in the customer waiting state described above, the cumulative number image RK such as "800 times" may remain displayed, but may be hidden at the start of the first game in the normal game state, and a transition notification image such as "Time reduction 3 completed" may be displayed instead.

◆A gaming machine of a first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, is capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display control means (presentation control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, a sound control means (presentation control board 320) that controls a sound output means (audio output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (presentation operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation by the player, and in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, the display control means executes a first customer waiting state from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed. The gist of the gaming machine is that it executes a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2) that is different from the first customer waiting effect after the first time has elapsed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2). After a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, it executes a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment means, and the sound control means can continue to output the predetermined sound in the customer waiting state until a fourth time has elapsed, even after the variable display has ended (FIG. 7-2(d) and FIG. 8-2(d)). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

◆A gaming machine of a second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, can execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (audio output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation by the player, and the display control means, in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, executes a first customer waiting performance (Figures 7-2 (d) to (f), Figures 8-2 (d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, and After the variable display ends, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2). After a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, which allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted in response to operation of the volume adjustment means. In the customer waiting state, the sound control means can continue to output the predetermined sound until a fourth time has elapsed, even after the variable display has ended (FIGS. 7-2(d) and 8-2(d)). During the fourth time, the volume of the predetermined sound can be adjusted in response to operation of the volume adjustment means, while the player can hear the predetermined sound (FIGS. 7-3(i) and 8-3(i)). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine with a third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a first effect (Fig. 7-2 (d) to (f), Fig. 8-2 (d) to (f)) and a second effect (customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 6-2) in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and is capable of displaying a first display (machine name display KH) and a second display (attention warning display NH) during execution of the second effect, and is capable of displaying a third display (sound adjustment image OC) different from the first and second displays in the customer waiting state, and The effect is executed from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, the second effect is executed after the first time has elapsed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, the first display is displayed before the second display, the third display is displayed after a third time has elapsed from the end of the variable display, the second effect can be executed again after the second time has elapsed, the first display is a display related to the title of the gaming machine, and the second display is a display that calls the player's attention to avoid becoming addicted to the game. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A fourth configuration of gaming machine for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, can execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331) by operation by the player, and in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, the display control means displays a first customer waiting performance (Figures 7-2 (d) to (f), Figures 8-2 (d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, and After the variable display ends, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is displayed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and the second customer waiting effect can still be displayed after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2). After a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is displayed, indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment means. During the variable display, the display means can display a first character (character display CP1) or a second character (character displays CP2, CP3), and during the second customer waiting effect in the customer waiting state, the display means displays the first character at a higher rate than the second character. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

◆A fifth configuration of gaming machine for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can execute a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331) by operation by the player, and the display control means executes a first customer waiting performance (Figures 7-2 (d) to (f), Figures 8-2 (d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed. After the first time has elapsed, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2). After a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment means. In the second customer waiting effect, a warning display (warning display NH) is executed to warn the player about becoming addicted to the game, and the warning display has a first display section (first display section NB1) and a second display section (second display section NB2, etc.) below the first display section. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆ A sixth configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can execute a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331) by operation by the player, a motion detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's actions, and a valid period setting means (performance control board 320) that can set a valid period during which the player's actions can be detected by the motion detection means during the variable display and the customer waiting state, and the display control means, during the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, displays a first customer waiting performance (Figure 7-2 ( and after the first time has elapsed, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and further, the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 6-2), and after a third time has elapsed since the variable display has ended, a sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed which enables the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the volume adjustment means, and if a player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective period while the variable display is in the customer waiting state, a first mode effect (Fig. 7-5) is executed, and if a player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective period while the player is in the customer waiting state, a second mode effect (Figs. 7-3(j-1), (j-2), Fig. 8-3(j-1), (j-2)) different from the first mode effect is executed. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine with the configuration of No. 7-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can execute a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (audio output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation by the player, and in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, the display control means displays a first customer waiting performance (Figs. 7-2(d) to (f), Figs. 8-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed. After the first time has elapsed, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed; the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2); after a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, which allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted in response to operation of the volume adjustment means; and the sound control means can continue to output the predetermined sound in the customer waiting state until a fourth time has elapsed, even after the variable display has ended (FIGS. 7-2(d) and 8-2(d)), and the third time is longer than the fourth time but shorter than the first time (FIGS. 7-1 and 8-1). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of No. 7-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can execute a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (audio output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation by the player, and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, displays a first customer waiting performance (Figs. 7-2(d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed. , 8-2(d)-(f)), and after the first time has elapsed, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed; the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2); after a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, which allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted in response to operation of the volume adjustment means; and the sound control means can continue to output the predetermined sound in the customer waiting state even after the variable display has ended until a fourth time has elapsed (FIG. 9-2), and the third time is shorter than the first time and the fourth time (FIG. 9-1). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆An eighth configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (audio output device 331) that outputs a predetermined sound (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by operation by the player, and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, executes a first customer waiting performance (Figures 7-2 (d) to (f), Figures 8-2 (d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, and and then executes a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed; the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2); and after a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, executes a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that indicates that the volume can be adjusted in response to operation of the volume adjustment means; and the sound control means continues to output the predetermined sound in the customer waiting state even after the variable display has ended until a fourth time has elapsed (FIGS. 7-2(d), 8-2(d)); and if the variable display of the identification information has started based on the establishment of the start condition before the fourth time has elapsed, continues to output the predetermined sound even after the variable display has started (FIG. 7-4). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

◆A gaming machine with a ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, can execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from a sound output means (audio output device 331) by operation by the player, and the display control means, in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not being executed, executes a first time period (demo waiting period) after the variable display has ended. ) has elapsed, a first customer waiting effect (FIGS. 7-2(d)-(f), 8-2(d)-(f)) is executed, and after the first time has elapsed, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and the second customer waiting effect can also be executed after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2), and after a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended and at a time other than the second time, a sound adjustment possible display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, which allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment means. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine with a tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can execute a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display predetermined images including mode images (performance modes A to G: Figure 5-1) corresponding to a plurality of modes that are set according to the state of the game, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from a sound output means (audio output device 331) by operation by the player, and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, is configured to adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331) when a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed since the variable display ended. The gist of the gaming machine is that it executes a first customer waiting effect (FIGS. 7-2(d)-(f), 8-2(d)-(f)) until the first time elapses, executes a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect until a second time (customer waiting demo period) elapses after the first time elapses, and further executes the second customer waiting effect even after the second time elapses (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 6-2), executes a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment means after a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, and executes the first customer waiting effect in different modes depending on the mode image corresponding to the mode set before the variable display ended (FIGS. 7-2(d)-(f), 8-2(d)-(f)). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

◆ An eleventh configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display control means (performance control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331) by operation by the player, and an action detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's actions, and in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, the display control means executes a first customer waiting performance (Figures 7-2 (d) to (f), Figures 8-2 (d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, and After the time has elapsed, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2). After a third time has elapsed since the variable display ended, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment means. During the execution of the second customer waiting effect, multiple characters can be displayed (Figure 6-2(b)). If a player's movement is detected by the movement detection means while the multiple characters are displayed, one of multiple display modes selected in response to the player's movement detected by the movement detection means is displayed (Figures 7-3(j-1), (j-2)). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine of a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, executes a special game advantageous to the player when the identification information stops in a predetermined special manner, and is capable of transitioning to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state after the special game ends, and is equipped with a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) that can display a predetermined image, and an action detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the actions of the player, and in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, executes a first customer waiting effect (Figures 7-2 (d) to (f), Figures 8-2 (d) to (f)) from the end of the variable display until a first time (demo waiting period) has elapsed, and executes a second time (customer waiting period) after the first time has elapsed. The gist of this gaming machine is that a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until the second time period (waiting demo period) has elapsed, and the second customer waiting effect can also be executed after the second time period has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: Figure 6-2). The first customer waiting effect in the normal gaming state (Figure 7-2) and the first customer waiting effect in the advantageous gaming state (Figure 8-2) are executed in different modes, and if a player's movement is detected by the movement detection means during execution of the first customer waiting effect in the normal gaming state, a first setting can be performed (Figures 7-3(j-1), (j-2)), and if a player's movement is detected by the movement detection means during execution of the first customer waiting effect in the advantageous gaming state, a second setting different from the first setting can be performed (Figures 8-3(j-1), (j-2)). Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

<Rainbow-colored production>
[Specific examples of light emission modes]
A specific example of the rainbow effect produced by the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
A rainbow effect is an effect that includes a rainbow light-emitting display that appears to a player as a rainbow by displaying multiple colors using a light-emitting means. Note that, as long as the player sees the rainbow colors, there are no particular restrictions on the type or tone (level) of the specific colors that must be output, nor is there any particular restriction on the number of colors that make up the rainbow. For example, colors can be displayed using five colors that appear primarily as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. Of course, the number of primarily visible colors can be fewer than this, but it is preferable that there be three or more colors. In the following description, the colors displayed to represent the rainbow colors will also be simply referred to as multiple colors.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the rainbow effect in this embodiment is performed by the main display device 131, backstage display device 141, sword handle unit 135, launch handle device 103, light guide panel unit 181, and the first side display device 132, second side display device 133, upper display device 134, and upper unit 180 provided on the glass frame 150, all of which are provided on the game board unit 102. The backstage display device 141 includes so-called starting gate lamps that perform the effects of the first starting gate 112 and the second starting gate 115.

11(b), the rainbow effect can also be performed in the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, etc. Also, the rainbow effect can also be performed in devices other than the above-mentioned devices, such as the light guide panel unit 181 and a film for performing 3D effects, which are not shown in FIGS.
In devices other than the main display device 131 that perform the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is realized by one or more light-emitting elements, such as LEDs, that can switch between multiple colors. By switching the light-emitting color of the light-emitting elements over time, color changes and movement can be expressed, further emphasizing the rainbow colors. The number of colors that can be simultaneously emitted by multiple light-emitting elements does not need to be seven, as long as three or more predetermined colors can be simultaneously emitted.

In the following description, when the above-mentioned light-emitting means including the main display device 131 are described without any particular distinction, they will also be simply referred to as "light-emitting means." One light-emitting means means one light-emitting unit that has one or more light-emitting elements and operates at the same time.
For example, the main display device 131, the backstage display device 141, the first side display device 132, etc. can each be a single light-emitting means. However, in the case of a light-emitting means with a large light-emitting area, it may be divided into several areas and operated, and in that case, each area may be treated as a single light-emitting means. The rainbow effect may be performed by one light-emitting means or may be realized by multiple light-emitting means.

The rainbow effect may be achieved by combining two or more of the above-mentioned light-emitting means. For example, the rainbow effect may be achieved by combining the movable role devices (upper role device unit 154, lower role device unit 156) with the main display device 131. The rainbow effect may also be achieved by combining the main display device 131 with the light guide panel unit 181.
11(a) shows an example in which the backstage display device 141, which is a light-emitting means provided in the game area, emits light using LEDs. Here, the backstage display device 141 may be configured to emit light in either a rainbow effect as a whole or only around the first starting hole 112, as shown in FIG. 11(b).

(Examples of light emission patterns)
The rainbow effect can be realized in various ways as long as the player recognizes the rainbow colors. Representative examples of such ways will be described below.
12(a) shows an example of a rainbow effect using flashes. Flash means an effect of momentary light, and in gaming machines, refers to an effect of momentarily emitting light multiple times. In other words, a rainbow effect flash means an effect in which multiple colors are displayed and momentarily emitting light multiple times using one or more light-emitting means. Note that two or more colors may be displayed with one light emission, and the color may change with each light emission.
12A illustrates flashing by the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134, but is not limited to this and various combinations of light-emitting means or a single light-emitting means may be used. When flashing is used, the specific shape of the light-emitting portion is not particularly limited. For example, a specific portion of the main display device 131 or the light guide panel unit 181 may flash in rainbow colors.

A specific example of a flash will be described with reference to Figure 13. Figure 13(a) shows a mode in which the colors change in time series over time, with each color momentarily emitting a strong light. In this mode, for example, four colors, color 1 to color 4, emit strong light in sequence. By emitting light in sequence, colors 1 to 4 can be selected so that the player sees a rainbow of colors. Of course, there is no particular limit to the number of colors. In this mode, multiple light-emitting means or light-emitting elements may emit the same color simultaneously, or may emit different colors.
FIG. 13(b) shows a mode in which a rainbow light-emitting display is performed while flashing by emitting light of a specific color (e.g., white) at regular short intervals. The specific color may be a color that does not constitute a rainbow, or may be a color that constitutes a rainbow. The specific color may also be multiple colors. The light-emitting element that performs the rainbow light-emitting display and the light-emitting element that performs the flash may be the same element, or may be different elements. If they are different light-emitting elements, the light-emitting element that performs the rainbow light-emitting display does not need to stop the rainbow light-emitting display at the timing of the flash. Even with a display mode such as that shown in FIG. 13(b), a player can visually recognize the flashing as a rainbow effect.

Figure 12(b) shows an example of a rainbow effect in which multiple colors move and emit light. "Moving light" here refers to an effect in which the colors displayed on the light-emitting means appear to the player to be moving in a specific direction. This effect is achieved by repeatedly changing an area that emits light in a certain color (e.g., red) to an adjacent area in a specific direction. This light-emitting control makes the colors that make up the rainbow appear to be moving to the player. Note that Figure 12(b) shows multiple colors displayed on the first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134, which move in sequence. This shows an example of a moving effect being executed across multiple light-emitting means. This moving effect may be executed, for example, when light-emitting means, which are movable roles that appear at specific times, such as the upper role unit 154 and lower role unit 156, move in front of the main display device 131. Moving light may also be executed in only the light-emitting area of one light-emitting means.

The direction of movement of the moving light may not be particularly limited. For example, as shown in Figure 12(b), the light may move across multiple light-emitting devices (the first side display device 132, the upper display device 134, and the second side display device 133), as indicated by arrow Y1 along the outer periphery of the gaming machine 100. Moving light across multiple light-emitting devices refers to an effect in which a specific color appears to move sequentially across multiple light-emitting devices. While Figure 12(b) illustrates an example in which the color moves clockwise, it may also move counterclockwise. Furthermore, the color may move to converge at a specific location (e.g., the location of the first starting hole 112), as indicated by arrow Y2 pointing toward the center of the left and right sides of Figure 12(b). The color may also move radially outward from a specific location, or conversely, it may move from the periphery to converge at a specific location. Such radial movement can be effectively achieved using the main display device 131. Furthermore, the main display device 131 may cooperate with the board lamps and frame lamps arranged around it to achieve radial movement across the main display device 131 and the board lamps or frame lamps. Furthermore, one or more of the multiple light-emitting means may emit light such that the colors move in the same direction (for example, from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, left to right, etc.).

When producing a rainbow effect, the light can change color over time, providing a stronger effect for the player. The change in color over time can be achieved by cyclical light emission. The light emission period here can be the period required for the color to change from blue to green, for example, when looking at a specific point in the lit area. In other words, it can also be said to be the time it takes for a certain LED element to emit a specific color, regardless of whether the position that is lit with that specific color moves. This includes cases where the color of the light-emitting means as a whole changes, and cases where the color of only part of the light-emitting means changes.

Other types of light emission include a gradual change in color in a specific direction in a predetermined order, forming a so-called rainbow gradation, and a change in color that may or may not appear rainbow-colored depending on the speed at which the colors change, with the colors either not moving or not moving.
Specific rainbow light-emitting patterns include (a) a gradation light-emitting pattern that changes gradually in the order of blue → green → yellow → red, (b) a light-emitting pattern in which the colors change radially and spread out, (c) a light-emitting pattern that changes while moving/without moving and that appears to be rainbow colors, (d) a light-emitting pattern in which a flash (white) comes in when the colors change from blue → white (flash) → green → white (flash) → red → white (flash) → yellow..., and (e) a pattern that changes from blue → green → red in an operation suggestion display that suggests the operation of an operation button (lever, sword handle unit 135) that the player can operate. Note that with regard to the above (e), it may or may not appear rainbow colors depending on the speed of the change.

When switching colors in a sequence, they may be switched in an order that follows the colors of the actual rainbow (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple) (for example, if there are four colors, red → yellow → green → blue → red...), or they may be switched in an order that does not follow the colors of the actual rainbow. Furthermore, in the case of moving light emission, the order in which the colors move may or may not follow the colors of the actual rainbow.

Incidentally, when similar colors have different cycles (when the number of colors does not quite reach the level of a rainbow), the content of the effect may be configured to change depending on the cycle, such as performing a first effect in one cycle and a second effect in another cycle. Also, it may be configured so that a third effect is not performed in a certain cycle. For example, it may be configured so that a specific effect (such as a confirmation stop) is not performed until the light emission in a certain cycle has ended, and then the specific effect is performed after the light emission has ended.

[Specific examples of lighting effects]
(Example of rainbow color effects during a demonstration while waiting for customers)
An example of a rainbow-colored effect during a customer waiting demo by the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 shows an example of a light-emitting effect during a customer waiting demo.
When the display of the special symbols stops changing and, for example, the reserved number of the first reserved number or the like is "0" and no game ball has entered the first start port 112, the machine enters a waiting state for customers and a demo for a predetermined period of time is started.

Here, we will explain the display mode of the customer waiting demo performance. During the customer waiting demo performance period (80 seconds), the performance is composed of displays of content such as "Demo of variable performance (25 seconds)" → "Character introduction (25 seconds)" → "Model name (5 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (5 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Demo of moving parts (10 seconds)", and is displayed in this order. In other words, these contents will be displayed on the main display device 131 during the customer waiting demo period (80 seconds).

As shown in Figure 14(a), first, the "variable effect demo" in the customer waiting demo effect is an effect in which various variable effects are displayed on the main display device 131 while the special symbol is being displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, various variable effects such as the SPSP reach revival effect, SPSP reach effect, SP reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach effect, etc. are displayed in order of the likelihood of winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the "character introduction" in the customer waiting demo presentation is a presentation in which multiple characters are displayed during various variable presentations. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a character introduction background, including an image resembling a stage, is scrolled as a background image, and in front of the background image, character displays CP1-CP3, consisting of an image of each moving character and the character's name displayed in text, are displayed. Here, the edges of the display area of the main display device 131 appear rainbow-colored (rainbow effect R1). Furthermore, the character displays CP1-CP3 are displayed with rainbow-colored text (rainbow effect R2). Furthermore, although not shown, rainbow colors may be displayed behind the displayed characters. Note that the duration of the rainbow effect is not limited to the entire duration of the "character introduction." For example, rainbow effect R1 may last for a few seconds when a character appears. Furthermore, rainbow effect R2 may only last for the period during which the corresponding character is introduced.

As shown in Figure 14(c), next, in the "Machine Name" section of the customer waiting demo effect, a machine name display KH indicating the model name of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, for example, a machine name background composed of a white and blue gradation is displayed as a scrolling background image, and the machine name display KH is displayed so that it suddenly appears in front of the background image. At this time, no rainbow color effect is executed using any of the light-emitting means.

As shown in Figure 14(d), next, in the "Manufacturer Name" section of the customer waiting demo effect, a manufacturer name display MH indicating the name of the manufacturer that produced the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white manufacturer name background is displayed as the background image, and the frame portion of the manufacturer name display MH suddenly appears in front of the background image, with the "Bikkuri," "Inc." and "Logo mark" portions appearing in order from left to right. However, no rainbow color effects are performed using any of the light-emitting means.

As shown in Figure 14(e), next, in the "Caution to Prevent Addiction" part of the customer waiting demo presentation, a caution display NH is displayed, consisting of text warning players against excessive play on the gaming machine 100. The content displayed here is the same as that shown in Figure 6-2(e). At this time, the rainbow display is not displayed on the main display device 131.

As shown in Figure 14 (f), the "movable role demo" in the customer waiting demo performance is a performance in which movable roles such as the lower role unit 156 operate in a manner similar to the manner in which they operate during various variable performances. Specifically, for example, on the main display device 131, a movable role demo background composed of radial lines is displayed as a rainbow performance R3 as a background image, and the lower role unit 156 moves in front of the background image to a position where it operates in an SPSP reach performance or the like, and the LEDs provided on the lower role unit 156 emit rainbow-colored light and operate in a manner. At this time, the frame lamps (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, upper display device 134) and board lamps (backstage display device 141) also simultaneously execute a rainbow performance.

In the "movable role demo," various effects may be executed not only by the lower role unit 156 but also by the upper role unit 154, the upper unit 180, or the light guide panel unit 181. The background image and the lower role unit 156 execute the same displays and operations as in the SPSP reach performance, etc., but the sound output device 331 does not output sounds (music, sound effects, etc.) for the effects generated in the SPSP reach performance, etc.
In addition, the moving light emission at this time has a relatively slow speed of color movement compared to, for example, the variable effects shown in Figure 19(g) and Figures 22(e) to (g) described below.

As shown in Figure 14(g), when a certain period of time has elapsed in the demo of the movable role object, the rainbow display by the main display device 131 is stopped. Meanwhile, the frame lamp and the board lamp continue to display the rainbow color.
As shown in FIG. 14(h), after the customer waiting demo performance has ended, the screen returns to the one where the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a stopped state.
The above-mentioned customer waiting demo effect may be a rainbow effect using the frame lamps and board lamps at the timing shown in FIG. 14(d) or FIG. 14(e).

(Example of rainbow color effects during a demonstration while waiting for customers)
15, an example of a rainbow effect during another customer waiting demo by the gaming machine 100 will be described. FIG. 15 shows an example of a light emitting effect during customer waiting.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), first, a demo of the change effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 14(a).
As shown in Figure 15(b), next, a "character introduction" is performed in the customer waiting demo effect. Here, a rainbow effect using frame lamps, board lamps, etc. is performed during the introduction period. On the main display device 131, a rainbow effect R4 is performed in which the character moves across the display screen for part of the period (several seconds).
15(c), the main display device 131 continues to display the effect, but the rainbow effect is not executed on the display screen. On the other hand, the rainbow effect continues on the frame lamp.

As shown in Fig. 15(d), next, the "model name" effect is executed as in Fig. 14(c). After that, although not shown, the "manufacturer name" and "advice to prevent addiction" are executed as in Figs. 14(d) and (e).
As shown in FIG. 15(e), after the customer waiting demo performance has ended, the screen returns to the one where the performance symbol 50a is displayed in a stopped state.

An example of how the rainbow effect changes over time while waiting for customers will be described using Figure 16. The demo effect while waiting for customers starts when a demo waiting period (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed while the static display is being executed, and a demo video is displayed, for example, as shown in Figures 15(a) and 15(b). During this demo video display period, a rainbow light-emitting display is executed for a certain period.
For example, at a first timing (rainbow light emission period) during the demo video display period, rainbow light emission display is performed in a specific first region (specific location) of the liquid crystal display device 131 and the frame lamp and board lamp. At a second timing other than the first timing, rainbow light emission display is not performed, and light emission in a light emission color other than rainbow light emission display is performed. For example, a change in light emission color of two or more colors, a flash, a color movement speed in a specific direction, or a blinking speed is performed. On the other hand, when neither the first timing nor the second timing occurs, monochromatic light emission or light emission in multiple colors that do not appear rainbow (biased to similar colors or a small number of colors) is performed.

Subsequently, when the title display is executed, the frame lamp and the board lamp move slowly relative to each other to produce a rainbow-colored effect. A rainbow-colored background and objects are also displayed on the main display device 131. The second area is an area that includes at least a portion of the light-emitting means that is different from the first area.
Next, when a warning display such as an anti-addiction display is executed, the rainbow light display is restricted. That is, a single color or multiple colors that do not appear rainbow may be used, flashing may be restricted, or color changes may be restricted. Since the main purpose of the light display at this timing is to convey information to the player, the moving speed of the light color, the blinking speed, and the range of brightness may be slower than, for example, the third timing of the demo video display period described above.

In addition, lamps (frames, special effects, buttons) are provided with a first area and a second area, and the light-emitting pattern in the first area can be different from that in the second area. Examples of the first area include the game board (board lamp) and special effects, while examples of the second area include the frame (lamp) and special effects buttons. For example, when waiting for customers, at the first timing described above, the first area can emit light by flashing, and the second area can emit light in a moving manner.

The rainbow effect is limited when a specific character is displayed as a warning during the customer waiting demo. On the other hand, the rainbow light effect may be executed not only when the model name or manufacturer logo (including character display) is displayed, but also when a specific character is displayed.
That is, in the customer waiting demo performance, when first specific information (character display such as manufacturer name) is displayed, a rainbow color performance can be executed, and when second specific information (anti-addiction display) in a display mode including characters different from the first specific information is displayed, the rainbow color performance can be restricted.

Note that limiting the execution of the rainbow effect means not only not executing the rainbow effect itself, but also, for example, (a) executing a single color/flashing light (white), (b) limiting color changes or transitions, (c) limiting flash effects, etc. Note that when the lamp is divided into a first region and a second region, for example, the first region may be configured to light up in the above (a) to (c). As a supplement to the above (a), white light may be emitted in the first region and blue light may be emitted in the second region.
The first specific information and the second specific information (including text) may be different in the ease with which the rainbow light-emitting display is executed. When the anti-addiction display (specific text information) is executed, the execution of the flash effect may be restricted.

(Example of rainbow color effect when volume adjustment display etc. is being executed)
An example of a rainbow effect when a volume adjustment display or the like is being executed by the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 shows an example of a light-emitting effect when a volume adjustment display is executed while waiting for customers.

As shown in Figure 17, when the display of the special symbol stops changing and, for example, the reserved number for the first reserved number, etc. is "0" and no game ball has entered the first start port 112, the machine enters a waiting state for customers.

As shown in Figure 17(a), first, while the special symbol is changing, the main display device 131 displays a background image, such as a horizontally scrolling Mode A background image, and in front of that, two of the three effect symbols 50a are displayed stationary while one effect symbol 50a is displayed scrolling. Also, in the icon display area 50c, an image of the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a scrolling state. At this time, although not shown, a rainbow effect can be produced using the board lamp, frame lamp, main display device 131, etc.

As shown in Figure 17(b), the rainbow effect is not executed immediately after the stop display of a losing win. After this, if there is no winning entry in the first starting slot 112, the display of the effect symbols 50a on the main display device 131 will stop for a certain period of time (e.g., 120 seconds) without scrolling, entering a demo waiting period. During the demo waiting period, the main display device 131 will display, for example, a horizontally scrolling background image, with three effect symbols 50a stopped in front of it. Also, in front of the background image, a first hold icon display area 50b in which the first hold icon HI is not displayed, and an icon display area 50c in which the image of the icon TI is not displayed are displayed. Also, the special symbol TZ is displayed stopped with a combination of numbers corresponding to the three effect symbols 50a in the stopped state.

17(c), when the effect operation stick 136 is operated, a sound adjustment image OC is displayed in front of the background image and the three effect symbols 50a, indicating that the volume of background music, etc. can be adjusted. When this OC is displayed, the rainbow effect by the board lamp, frame lamp, main display device 131, etc. is not executed.
In addition to the volume control image, a screen brightness control display may be displayed. Also, an adjustment display for adjusting the effect level may be displayed. Even when such an image is displayed, the rainbow effect is not executed.

17(d), after the sound adjustment image OC is no longer displayed, a customer waiting demo effect is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, a rainbow color effect can be executed using the board lamp, frame lamp, main display device 131, etc.
The volume control image OC and the screen brightness control display may be executable even during the change. In this case, the rainbow effect may not be limited.

(Example 1 of rainbow effect during variable effect)
An example of a rainbow effect during execution of a variation effect by the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect during which a jackpot occurs after a reach.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), first, as the variable display of the special symbol starts, the variable display of the three performance symbols 50a starts.
As shown in Fig. 18(b), a preview effect before a reach is started. In this preview effect, a rainbow color effect using a frame lamp or the like can be executed.

18(c) to 18(e), the preview effect starts after the reach is reached. In the preview effect, a rainbow effect is executed.
In Figure 18 (c), the left and right effect symbols 50a stop changing at the same number, and only the central effect symbol 50a changes, resulting in a ready-to-win state. In the ready-to-win state, it may develop into an SP ready-to-win, an SPSP ready-to-win, etc.

In Figure 18 (d), the lower role unit 156 moves to the performance position, and a rainbow performance is executed in which multiple light-emitting LEDs provided on the lower role unit 156 flash. In addition, the rainbow performance of the main display device 131 is executed, and a "kyuuin kyuuin" sound effect is output from the audio output device 331. Furthermore, the sword handle unit 135 (not shown) vibrates due to the button drive device. Then, the reduced performance symbol 50a in the upper left corner of the main display device 131 temporarily stops at "5," and the three performance symbols 50a temporarily stop at the jackpot result ("555").

In Figure 18 (e), the effect symbol 50a is then displayed in a provisionally stopped state. In addition, the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c in which the icon TI is displayed are displayed again. After the provisionally stopped display, a final effect is executed in which the effect symbol 50a stops. After this, the game transitions to a jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 18(b-1), in the preview effect before the reach in Figure 18(b), a rainbow effect R1 may be executed, in which the edges of the display screen of the main display device 131 are displayed in rainbow colors.

(Rainbow effect example 2 during variable effect execution)
FIG. 19 shows an example of a variable effect that occurs after a reach and results in a jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 19(a), first, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the three performance symbols 50a starts.
As shown in Figure 19 (b), when the first start slot 112 is won, a hold display is added to the first hold icon display area 50b. At this time, the hold is displayed in rainbow colors as a preview. This rainbow-colored hold display is an example of a rainbow effect (rainbow effect R5).

As shown in Figure 19(c), the rainbow-colored hold display continues to be displayed until the hold becomes the hold. Note that the display mode of the hold may change when the hold becomes the hold, or before or after the hold.
19(d), a preview effect before a reach is executed in which a character CR and a line SE are displayed. In this preview effect, a rainbow-colored effect is executed by the frame lamp and the board lamp.
As shown in FIG. 19(e), the fluctuation of the left and right performance symbols 50a stops at the same number, and only the central performance symbol 50a fluctuates, resulting in a reach state.
19(f), as a preview effect after a reach, a light guide panel unit 181 is displayed in front of the display screen of the main display device 131. Here, a rainbow effect is executed in which the light guide panel unit 181 flashes in rainbow colors.

In Figure 19 (g), the lower role unit 156 moves to the performance position, and multiple light-emitting LEDs provided on the lower role unit 156 flash. Also, the main display device 131 displays rainbow light, and the sound output device 331 outputs the sound effect "queen, queen." At this time, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134 perform a rainbow performance. Here, a rainbow performance using moving light is performed. Note that this is a faster operation than, for example, the moving light in the customer waiting performance of Figure 14 (f).
In Fig. 19(h), the fixed effect is executed from the temporary stop as in Fig. 14(h). Note that the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, etc. execute the rainbow effect, but the lower role unit 156 does not emit rainbow light.

Incidentally, at the timing when the numbers are displayed as the performance pattern 50a in the confirmation performance, the main display device 131 may or may not execute a rainbow performance.
As shown in Figures 20(a), (b-1), and (c-1), for example, the rainbow effect display mode may be changed when a "2" stopping symbol is displayed, and as shown in Figures 20(a), (b-2), and (c-2), for example, when a "7" stopping symbol is displayed. Figures 20(c-1) and (c-2) show examples in which the rainbow effect, which displays the edges of the display screen in rainbow colors, is present or absent. In addition to this, for example, the speed of the moving light emission, the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow effect, and the number or presence of rainbow effect lines, cut-ins, characters, etc. displayed on the main display device 131 may also be changed.

Figure 21 also shows an enlarged symbol effect (emphasis effect). An enlarged symbol display is a display mode in which the central symbol 50a occupies a larger area of the screen than the symbols on either side, and is displayed in such an area that the rainbow light-emitting effect image cannot be displayed on the screen. In Figure 21(b), the central symbol 50a obscures (limits display of) the rainbow effect (e.g., the rainbow color of the edge) displayed on the display screen. This enlarged symbol effect is a display mode in which the symbol 50a is gradually enlarged, and is larger than the enlarged display size when a reach is achieved or the display size during the symbol fluctuation before a reach is achieved. After that, as shown in Figure 21(c), the symbol 50a returns to its original size and is displayed stationary. At this time, a rainbow effect may be executed by the backstage display device 141 (board lamp). A rainbow effect may also be executed by the main display device 131 or frame lamp.

(Example of a performance when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during a variable display)
22, a description will be given of an example of a rainbow effect when the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the gaming machine 100. Fig. 22 shows an example of a light emitting effect when a so-called deciding effect is executed.
As shown in FIG. 22(a), a normal variable effect is being executed in which the display pattern 50a is displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in Figure 22 (b), the "2" effect symbol 50a is displayed as a static symbol (temporary static symbol) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the variable display symbol 50a, while a reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 50a is displayed as a dynamic symbol in the central variable display area.

As shown in Figure 22(c), when the game progresses to SP Reach, a performance begins in which ally character C2 and enemy character C3 face off against each other.

As shown in Figure 22 (d), after the SPSP reach effect has developed, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped at the final stage of the effect and the deciding effect begins, at which point a prompt image is displayed encouraging the player to operate the sword handle button (effect button) on the sword handle unit 135, and the valid operation period (10 seconds) for the sword handle button begins. Specifically, an operation prompt image SSG resembling a sword handle button is displayed on the main display device 131, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and the sound effect "Press" is output from the audio output device 331. At this time, a reduced effect pattern 50a is displayed in a variable manner in the upper left corner of the main display device 131.

In Figure 22 (e), next, when the sword handle button of the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the valid operation period (10 seconds), a successful decision effect is executed, suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed. Specifically, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the upper display device 134, and the backstage display device 141 execute a rainbow effect by flashing light. In addition, the main display device 131 executes a rainbow effect (R6) by image, and the lower role unit 156 moves in front of it. The lower role unit 156 also executes a rainbow effect.
22(f), a rainbow effect is then executed using moving light emission. Here, the colors of the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the upper display device 134, and the backstage display device 141 move in a clockwise rotation around the main display device 131. The main display device 131 displays a successful hit image (not shown), and the audio output device 331 outputs a "squeak squeak" sound effect. At this point, the rainbow effect of the movable role object is stopped. If the sword handle unit 135 is not operated during the valid operation period, the operation prompt image SSG described above disappears, and the successful hit effect is executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22(g), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, indicating a jackpot, and the effect pattern 50a that was being displayed in a variable manner is displayed stopped in a combination (here, "222") indicating a jackpot.
At this point, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the upper display device 134, and the backstage display device 141 are performing the rainbow effect, and the other light-emitting means have stopped performing the rainbow effect.
Then, as shown in Figure 22 (h), the performance pattern 50a returns from the reduced display to its original size and is displayed stopped in the center of the liquid crystal display device 131 (main liquid crystal).

(Example of a guaranteed jackpot when the game progresses)
23, a description will be given of an example of a rainbow effect when a jackpot is confirmed by the gaming machine 100. In FIG. 23, an example of a light-emitting effect when a jackpot is confirmed and, for comparison, when a jackpot is not confirmed (miss) is shown.

As shown in Figure 23 (a), when the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, i.e., when no hold memories are stored, a variable effect is executed to display the variable effect pattern 50a.
As shown in Figure 23 (b), a reach effect is executed in which the "2" performance pattern 50a is displayed as a stopped display (temporary stopped display) in the variable display areas on the left and right of the performance pattern 50a that was being displayed as a change, while the performance pattern 50a is displayed as a change in the central variable display area.
23(c), the line SE "Big chance!!" is displayed on the main display device 131 as a preview effect. In this effect, the edge of the line is outlined in rainbow colors (rainbow effect R7). When this effect is displayed, it is a confirmation effect that suggests that the change is a big win change.
23(d), after a reach effect is performed using, for example, a movable accessory or the main display device 131, the effect symbol 50a is displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot. In this case, a rainbow effect is executed using a frame lamp, a board lamp, etc.

Next, in the case where no big win occurs, the configuration in which the preview effect is different from that in FIG. 23(b) will be explained.
In Fig. 23(e), the same dialogue SE as in Fig. 23(c) is displayed as a preview effect, but the rainbow effect is not executed in the background of the dialogue. In other words, in Fig. 23(e), a preview effect is executed which has a lower reliability of executing a special game than the rainbow effect.
As shown in FIG. 23(f), after a reach effect is performed using, for example, a movable role device or the main display device 131, the effect symbol 50a is displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a loss.

(Example of a jackpot during play)
24, an example of a presentation during a jackpot game by the gaming machine 100 will be described. In FIG. 24, an example of a light-emitting presentation after the presentation symbol 50a stops at the jackpot symbol and the jackpot game starts is shown.

As shown in Figure 24(a), during a jackpot game, a background for the effects is first displayed on the display screen of the main display device 131, and a right-hit image MG1 with a rainbow-colored display (rainbow effect R8) on the edges is displayed. The rainbow effect R8 is partially hidden by the image MG1. The frame lamp and board lamp can also be displayed in rainbow colors, and background music for the jackpot game is output from the audio output device 331.

As shown in Figure 24 (b), during round play (special play), a small right-hit image MG is displayed along with the background effect, and a rainbow effect is executed using the main display device 131, frame lamp, board lamp, etc.

As shown in Figure 24(c), when a specific ball win display is executed, numbers etc. are displayed in rainbow colors. The specific ball win display is not limited to 5,000 balls, but can also be "2,500 balls" or "10,000 balls", and other numbers (such as 3,000 balls) do not display in rainbow colors. In other words, rainbow effects are less likely to be executed. Note that ball win displays like those in Figure 24(c) are particularly likely to appear during consecutive wins. The value of the specific ball win display can be set as desired.

As shown in FIG. 24( d ), when a predetermined round is completed, a text display is made. This text display may be a warning, such as a warning not to forget the prepaid card or a theft warning. When such text display is made, the rainbow color display is limited. That is, the rainbow color effect is not performed, or is performed in a more restrained manner than when text display is made in other states.
Next, the model name, manufacturer name, etc. may be displayed as shown in Fig. 24(e) In this case, a rainbow color display may be performed.

As shown in Figure 24 (f), the time-saving feature (probability hit/non-probability hit) then begins. The display screen of the main display device 131 displays "Right Hit" in large letters (right hit image MG1). A rainbow-colored background (rainbow effect R8) is displayed so as to be hidden by the "Right Hit" display. The appearance of this rainbow effect may be determined according to whether the reel is in a probability hit or not, or according to the symbols that will be displayed in the jackpot confirmation effect.

As shown in FIG. 24(g), a time-saving game is then executed. At this time, when a reach effect is executed or when a jackpot is hit, a rainbow effect can be executed. The form of the rainbow effect at this time is not particularly limited. After that, if a jackpot is hit during the time-saving game, a jackpot game is executed again.
If a predetermined number of variations are performed without a jackpot, a result screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 24(h). At this time, a rainbow effect may be performed. For example, the text or background may be displayed in rainbow colors. The display mode of the rainbow effect may also be changed depending on the number of consecutive wins or the number of winning balls.

In this embodiment, text such as warnings is displayed only during the ending of the first jackpot game. After that, during consecutive jackpot games (endings), the anti-addiction display, warning about forgetting to remove the prepaid card, and theft display are not displayed, so the rainbow effect is not executed.

Incidentally, the display of balls won during consecutive wins may be either type (A), which continues to add up, or type (B), which displays when a specific number of balls is reached. In the above type (A), the rainbow display may be limited when a specific number of balls is won. Also, both (A) and (B) may be implemented. Furthermore, the display may be configured so that the rainbow mode is more likely to be implemented when a specific display is executed in the hold consecutive win suggestion display or the MAX ball output display.

(Example of initial operation)
Referring to FIG. 25, an example of the effects during the initial operation of the gaming machine 100 will be described.
25(a), when the power to the main board is turned on, a power-on message such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the display screen, and the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the upper display device 134, the backstage display device 141, etc., light up. At this time, the display may be illuminated in a rainbow-colored manner.
As shown in Figure 25 (b), the initial operation of the movable role is then performed. Although only the lower role unit 156 is shown, the upper role unit 154 also operates sequentially or simultaneously. At this time, the rainbow effect by the movable role does not have to be performed.
As shown in FIG. 25(c), after the main display device 131 and the movable device perform a specific operation, a stop display screen indicating a loss is displayed on the main display device 131.
As shown in FIG. 25(d), after a certain period of time has elapsed, a logo is displayed and a customer waiting demo performance is displayed.

[Characteristics of light emission by gaming machines]
(Light Emitting Mode Feature 1)

As shown in Figures 14 to 25, the gaming machine 100 can produce rainbow-colored effects using board lamps (behind-the-stage display device 141, sword handle unit 135, launch handle device 103, light guide panel unit 181, upper role unit 154, lower role unit 156), which are light-emitting means provided in the gaming board unit 102 (first area), and frame lamps (first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134 provided in the glass frame 150), which are light-emitting means provided in the glass frame 150 (second area). The gaming machine 100 can also produce a first effect that produces a light-emitting display in the first and second areas (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and board lamp work together), and a second effect that produces a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that is different from the first effect. For example, the first effect may be one in which the same rainbow effect is executed in two areas, and the second effect may be one in which the light-emitting effect is different in one of the areas (including one in which the rainbow effect is not executed in either area).

As for the first effect that emits light in the first and second areas, there are two patterns of rainbow effects that can be selected when waiting for customers, and nine patterns of rainbow effects that can be selected during variable effects, as shown in Fig. 26. In other words, there are more patterns of rainbow light-emitting effects when the gaming machine 100 is performing variable effects than when it is waiting for customers.
By being able to execute such effects, during the execution of the variable effects, the player's interest in the game can be increased by the effects that are different from those during the waiting for customers.

"Waiting for customers" here refers to both the first state, in which the static display is continued without executing the variable display, as shown in Figure 14(h), and the second state, in which the waiting for customers demo is executed, as shown in Figures 14(a) to (i). Note that the gaming machine 100 may be configured so that there are more rainbow light-emitting effect patterns when the variable effect is being executed than when it is in either the first or second state waiting for customers.

Specifically, during the variable effect, it is possible to perform a rainbow effect (first effect) in which the board lamp and frame lamp mentioned above work together to change color, or a rainbow effect (second effect) in which the board lamp and frame lamp operate separately, as shown in Figure 12 (b).
For example, when moving light is emitted, if the direction of movement is the same, the speed of movement is different, or the duration of the moving light emission is different, these may be counted as different presentation patterns.Similarly, differences in the number of rays emitted when emitting rainbow-colored light radially, differences in the form of rainbow-colored presentations due to pending changes, and differences in the colors when appearing rainbow-colored can also be counted as presentation patterns.

Specific examples of the first effect include an effect in which each color rotates and moves in the same direction, an effect in which the color of the frame and adjacent role objects become the same, and an effect in which the colors of adjacent parts of different light-emitting objects such as the frame lamp, board lamp, and sword handle unit 135 (effect button) become closer. Specific examples of the second effect include an effect in which each light-emitting object has a different light-emitting pattern, such as flashing or moving.

In addition, while the variable effects are being performed, the first and second effects described above can be performed, but while waiting for customers, only an effect in which either the board lamp or the frame lamp is activated may be performed.

Note that the first area is not limited to the game board unit 102, and the second area is not limited to the glass frame 150. The first area may be part of the game board unit 102, or may include parts of the game board units 102 and 150. For example, the light-emitting means provided in the first area and the light-emitting means provided in the second area may be a combination of two or more of the following: board lamps (the backstage display device 141, the sword handle unit 135, the launch handle device 103, the light guide panel unit 181, the upper role unit 154, and the lower role unit 156) and frame lamps (the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134 provided in the glass frame 150). In other words, they may be a combination of board lamps, such as the upper role unit 154 and the light guide panel unit 181, or a combination of one of the frame lamps and the LCD display device 131. The main display device 131 may also be the first or second area. The above-mentioned areas do not necessarily have to be distinguished depending on the device. For example, part of the display screen of the main display device 131 may correspond to the first area, and another part may correspond to the second area. Also, in a light-emitting means equipped with multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs), for example, the areas may be distinguished by specific light-emitting elements. Furthermore, in the first and second performances, there may naturally be some overlap between the first and second areas.

In addition, the number of light-emitting effect patterns may be greater while waiting for customers than while the variable effect is being performed.
In the above example, the number of rainbow light-emitting effects was compared between the waiting-for-customer state (first state) and the variable effect state (second state), but comparisons may be made in other states. Examples of the first state include, for example, a jackpot game with the first stopping symbol (a win with 2), during the execution of a development effect, a normal game state (non-variable game state), a variable game state, etc. Examples of the second state include a jackpot game with the second stopping symbol (a win with 7), during the execution of a winning effect, a variable game state, a normal game state (non-variable game state), etc. These can be combined as desired. Examples of combinations include "jackpot play with the first stopping pattern (win at 2) and jackpot play with the second stopping pattern (win at 7),""while a development effect is being executed and while a final effect is being executed,""normal game state (non-probability variable game state) and probability variable game state," and "probability variable game state/normal game state (non-probability variable game state)."

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 2)
18, 19, and 24, the gaming machine 100 can produce a rainbow effect using board lamps (the backstage display device 141, the sword handle unit 135, the launch handle device 103, the light guide panel unit 181, the upper role unit 154, and the lower role unit 156), which are light-emitting means provided in the gaming board unit 102 (first area), and frame lamps (the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134 provided in the glass frame 150), which are light-emitting means provided in the gaming machine 100. The gaming machine 100 can produce a first effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the board lamp work together) that produces a light-emitting display in the first area and the second area, and a second effect that produces a rainbow light-emitting display in a different manner from the first effect. For example, the first effect may be one in which the same rainbow effect is executed in two areas, and the second effect may be one in which the light-emitting effect is different in one of the areas (including one in which the rainbow effect is not executed in either area).

As for the first effect that emits light in the first and second areas, there are nine rainbow effect patterns that can be selected for the variable effect, and three rainbow effect patterns that can be selected during a jackpot game, as shown in Fig. 26. In other words, there are more light-emitting patterns for the first effect when the variable effect is being performed than when the gaming machine 100 is playing a jackpot game.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player expect a big win with many different effect patterns during the execution of the variable effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as explained in Feature 1 of the light-emitting aspect above, the first and second areas are not limited to the game board unit 102 and the glass frame 150, but may be at least partially different areas that are equipped with light-emitting means that do not overlap in at least part.

For example, if the first area or the second area includes the display screen of the main display device 131, rainbow-colored effects during the execution of the variable effects can be displayed in a rainbow-colored manner, such as a hold icon, an operation suggestion effect for the sword handle unit 135, lines, effects, captions, titles, step-up frames, etc., and the number of such executable effect displays is the number of effect patterns.
In addition, the rainbow color effects during a jackpot game include rainbow light-emitting displays such as the number of balls dispensed and the rainbow color display of the frame on the main display device 131. The method for counting the number of effect patterns can be performed in the same way as in the light-emitting mode 1 described above.

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 3)
The gaming machine 100 includes a second light-emitting means provided in the role (upper role unit 154, lower role unit 156) and a first light-emitting means provided in a location other than the role. As shown in Figures 18 and 22, the gaming machine can execute a first effect in which two specific light-emitting means, such as a frame lamp and a role, simultaneously produce a rainbow effect, and a second effect in which only one of the light-emitting means produces a rainbow effect. The second effect includes a state in which one light-emitting means does not produce a rainbow effect, and a state in which the light is emitted but in a position that is not visible to the player (e.g., a hidden position). In other words, the second effect is an effect in which only one of the two specific light-emitting means is visible to the player.

Furthermore, in one variable effect, the gaming machine 100 is configured such that the first effect is more likely to be executed after the reach (second state) than before the reach (first state). Specifically, before the reach, the rainbow effect by the role object is limited, and as a result, the execution of the first effect is limited.
By being able to execute such effects, the effect of the rainbow effect is more pronounced after a reach is reached, which strongly suggests the possibility of a jackpot and increases the player's interest in the game.

The role is not limited to the lower role unit 156, but may be the upper role unit 154. In the first or second performance, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of roles are activated simultaneously, or a configuration in which only one of the roles is activated.
In addition, the above-mentioned role is not limited to the movable role such as the lower role unit 156 or the upper role unit 154, but may be other roles. For example, it may be a role constituted by an LED light emitting element provided on a movable member provided on the center role, the starting hole, or the winning hole.

The examples of the first and second states described above are not limited to before and after a reach. Examples of the first state include a normal reach state, before a reach state during a change, normal reach development, miss change, and a normal game state. Examples of the second state include an SP reach state, during a jackpot game, reach development with a confirmed jackpot, jackpot change, and an advantageous game state (time-saving/probability change). These can be combined arbitrarily. Examples of combinations include a normal reach state (first state) and an SP reach state (second state), before a reach state during a change (first state) and during a jackpot game (second state), normal reach development (first state) and reach development with a confirmed jackpot (second state), miss change (first state) and jackpot change (second state), and a normal game state (first state) and an advantageous game state (second state). It is sufficient that the first effect is more easily executed in the second state than in the first state.

Incidentally, as an example of the first effect, a rainbow effect using a movable role object and a frame lamp is exemplified, and in this case, the movable role object does not emit light in the second effect. Also, as the second effect, a rainbow effect using the main display device 131 alone (for example, when the reserved status is displayed in rainbow colors due to the reserved status change effect) is exemplified.
An example of the first performance may be a combination of one or more of the frame lamp, board lamp, sword handle unit 135, light guide panel unit 181, and main display device 131 with a movable prop.

(Feature 4 of Light Emitting Mode)
The gaming machine 100 can produce rainbow effects using a variety of light emission modes, such as moving light emission and flashing. The gaming machine 100 also has a first light emission area (e.g., a frame lamp) and a second light emission area (e.g., a board lamp) that can produce rainbow effects.
19(d), the main display device 131 can display a first character display (such as a cut-in effect or dialogue) at a first timing, such as during the execution of a variable effect, and a second character display (such as a warning after a big win, a logo, a cheat warning, the model name, or the manufacturer's name) at a second timing, such as during the execution of a variable effect, as shown in FIG. 24(d). Here, the second timing is a predetermined timing during a specific period between the start of the effect during the execution of a special game (a big win effect) and the start of the next variable effect. During the specific period, when the second character display is displayed, the rainbow effect using the frame lamp or the board lamp is limited.

By being able to execute such effects, players can be made aware that the text displayed after the start of a special game (jackpot game) is an important text display such as a warning, and the text display as an effect can have a significant effect on the player, increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, when a third text display (such as "WIN" in Figure 22(g)) is displayed on the main display device 131 at a third timing, such as during the execution of a variable effect, the rainbow effect does not need to be restricted.

(Feature 5 of Light Emitting Mode)
As shown in Figures 11 and 12, the gaming machine 100 is capable of producing different types of rainbow effects using two or more light-emitting effect means, such as a frame lamp and a sword handle unit 135.Specific rainbow effects include a flashing rainbow effect, a rainbow effect in which the colors move (moving light emission), and a rainbow effect in which the colors are displayed without moving (for example, the seven colors that appear as a rainbow are displayed without moving).
27 , in the rainbow effect after the deciding effect, four patterns of rainbow effect are executed in this embodiment. Here, the probability that a flashing effect (third effect) followed by a rainbow effect with shifting colors (second effect) will be selected is 10%, and the probability that the second effect will be executed following the third effect is 90% (30% × 3). In other words, in the rainbow effect after the start of the deciding effect, a pattern in which a flash is executed followed by a rainbow effect with shifting colors is more likely to be executed than a light-emitting pattern in which a flash is executed followed by a rainbow effect with shifting colors.
By being able to execute such effects, the effect of the rainbow effect can be enhanced when a jackpot is hit, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the rainbow color effect after the final effect may be configured to start after a certain time has passed since the sword handle unit 135 was operated.
Also, in the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 20, the light emission pattern (contents of the rainbow effect) during a jackpot may change depending on the winning stopped symbol (for example, "2,""5,""7," etc.).

In addition, an effect in which the colors are displayed without moving includes, for example, an effect in which the colors are displayed without changing, or an effect in which the light-emitting means flashes multiple colors or changes the intensity of the light, creating a rainbow-like appearance to the player.
Furthermore, the combination of two or more light-emitting means is not particularly limited, and any combination of two of the light-emitting means (main display device 131, backstage display device 141, sword handle unit 135, firing handle device 103, light guide panel unit 181, first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134, 3D display, props, etc.) may be used.

(Feature 6 of Light Emitting Mode)
The gaming machine 100 can execute a rainbow effect (first effect) in which colors move slowly, such as the rainbow effect during customer waiting shown in FIG. 14 , and can also execute a rainbow effect (second effect) in which colors move quickly, such as the rainbow effect during SP reach shown in FIG. 22 . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 28 , the number of combinations of the rainbow effect by the main display device 131 and the rainbow effect by the frame lamps (the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the upper display device 134 provided in the glass frame 150) is greater when the rainbow effect is executed in the second effect than when the first effect is executed. The color movement speed is the speed when moving light is executed by the main display device 131 or the frame lamp. In other words, multiple light-emitting means do not need to execute moving light. Of course, multiple light-emitting means may execute moving light.
By being able to execute such effects, the effect of the rainbow effect can be enhanced when the expected value of a jackpot is high, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that examples of the timing for executing the first and second effects described above are not limited to waiting for customers and during an SP reach. Examples of timing for executing the first effect include when the stopping symbol "2" is displayed, normal reach, a miss variation, and normal game state. Examples of timing for executing the second effect include when the stopping symbol "7" is displayed, an SP reach state, a jackpot variation, and a favorable game state (time-saving/probable win). These can be combined arbitrarily. Examples of combinations include when the stopping symbol 50a is displayed as "2" (first effect) and when the stopping symbol is displayed as "7" (second effect), a normal reach (first effect) and an SP reach (second effect), a miss variation (first effect) and a jackpot variation (second effect), and a normal game state (first effect) and a favorable game state (second effect).

In the first and second effects described above, the first effect may have a greater number of combination patterns between the rainbow color effect by the main display device 131 and the rainbow color effect by the frame lamp.
The number of combination patterns is the number of combinations that can actually be performed when the rainbow color effect by the main display device 131 and the rainbow color effect by the frame lamp are performed at the same time. Note that if the rainbow color effect is not performed at the same time by the main display device 131 and the frame lamp, the number of patterns for that effect will be 0.

In addition, the light-emitting means that is combined with the main display device 131 to produce the rainbow effect in the first effect is not limited to a frame lamp, but may also be a board lamp.

The first effect is an effect in which the color moves faster than the second effect. In other words, the second effect is an effect in which, from the player's perspective, a given color appears to be moving relatively quickly. When the second effect is executed, the color switching (change to the next color) cycle of each light-emitting element (such as an LED) is faster. Note that the light emission patterns of the first and second effects may be reversed.

For example, in a variable effect in which rainbow light is emitted at a fast cycle, or after that variable effect, the display may be configured so that the fixed stop display of the display pattern 50a is displayed. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, a rainbow effect similar to the first effect may be included. In other words, the first effect is a rainbow effect in which the second effect is not executed.

(Feature 7 of Light Emitting Mode)
In gaming machine 100, as shown in Figure 27, in the rainbow effect after the winning effect, a flash (second effect with a second light-emitting pattern) is executed first, and an effect other than a flash (first effect with a first light-emitting pattern) is likely to be executed.
By being able to execute such effects, the effect of the rainbow effect can be enhanced when a jackpot is hit, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Specific examples of the first effect include, for example, a moving light emission in which the color moves, and an effect in which the color does not move but changes slowly.
The second effect is not limited to a flash, but may be a light emission mode (blinking, blinking, etc.) in which the intensity of the light changes at a longer cycle than the flash. In this case, the light intensity may change slowly and gradually, or the light may be emitted in a blinking manner.
In addition, the rainbow color effect after the final effect may be configured to start after a certain time has passed since the sword handle unit 135 was operated.
In addition, in the gaming machine 100, as a rainbow effect during a jackpot, the light emission pattern (contents of the rainbow effect) may change depending on the winning symbol (for example, "2,""5,""7," etc.).

(Feature 8 of Light Emitting Mode)
In the gaming machine 100, the light-emitting means has a greater number of color switching cycle (light-emitting mode) patterns in the rainbow color effect (first effect) executed while the variable effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 19, than in the rainbow color effect (second effect executed in a specific state) executed while waiting for customers, as shown in FIG. 14.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player expect a big win with many different effect patterns during the execution of the variable effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that the number of patterns referred to here is not limited to the color switching cycle, and the various patterns described above can be used as long as they emit light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored.

In addition, the rainbow color effect produced by the main display device 131 may be to make objects such as characters or dialogue rainbow colored, or to make the entire screen rainbow colored, or to make specific parts (such as the edges of the screen) rainbow colored. Each of these can be counted as a different pattern. Also, different color switching cycles, such as flashing, blinking at a normal speed, and blinking with a slow color change, are different patterns. Note that the color movement effect is essentially the switching of the colors of the light-emitting elements, so a faster color movement speed corresponds to a shorter color switching cycle.

For example, in the second performance that is executed while waiting for customers, when comparing the start gate lamp (a lamp that can light up depending on whether a win is won and is based on a change in the pending icon) with the frame lamp, the start gate lamp may not emit rainbow colors, but the frame lamp may be configured to emit light.

The variable display on which the first performance is executed includes one or more of non-reach variable, reach variable, pre-reach in reach variable, post-reach in reach variable, variable display in normal game state, and variable display in advantageous state (time-saving/probable change).
The second effect is not limited to the waiting state for customers. For example, when an effect suggesting a probability change is being executed, the second effect may be executed during a jackpot game.

While waiting for customers, brightness and volume adjustments can be made when the customer waiting demo is not running, but while manufacturer markings, immersion displays, etc. are displayed during the customer waiting demo, the screen display for adjusting brightness, etc. is restricted, and the rainbow effect is also restricted. In other words, both the rainbow effect and adjustment displays are restricted, especially during the above displays during the customer waiting demo. Even during these restrictions, the reserved numbers and small symbols are displayed, but they are not rainbow-colored.

The light-emitting means for implementing the first performance may be any of the frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131, etc. The light-emitting means for implementing the second performance may be only the frame lamp, only the board lamp, or only the main display device 131.

(Feature 9 of Light Emitting Mode)
The gaming machine 100 can execute two types of rainbow effects: a first effect that involves color movement and a second effect that does not involve color movement, such as a change in color, blinking, or flashing.
Then, as shown in Fig. 20, after the start of the winning effect, a rainbow effect is produced in a manner corresponding to the jackpot symbol (stopped display, for example, stopped symbols such as 7, 5, 2, etc.). For example, either the first effect or the second effect may be selectively executed according to the jackpot symbol. Also, the combination of the first and second effects may be changed according to the jackpot symbol. For example, when a "7" is won, flashing, blinking, movement, etc. are all executed, but when a "2" is won, flashing and movement are executed, and no blinking effect is executed.
By being able to execute such effects, a great effect can be produced for a player who is able to play a jackpot game, and the player can expect a profit according to the stopping pattern (stop display) of the jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The lighting pattern may also be configured to differ depending on the period of time until a jackpot occurs and the effects before the jackpot occurs. For example, the lighting pattern may differ between a jackpot occurring from a normal state and a jackpot occurring from a special state. The lighting pattern may also differ depending on whether or not a promotion effect is present.

Furthermore, for example, the style of the rainbow effect may be changed when the content of the special game (number of rounds, presence or absence of a special bonus, etc.) differs depending on the jackpot symbol or for other reasons. For example, if a "2" hit results in four rounds of special game, the rainbow effect executed in the fourth round may be relatively less flashy (for example, moving slowly, with a small number of light-emitting means in play) and may have a short execution time. On the other hand, a "7" hit results in ten rounds of special game (for example, when the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed), and a rainbow effect that is relatively flashy and has a long execution time may be executed.

(Feature 10 of Light Emitting Mode)
The gaming machine 100 can produce rainbow effects using a variety of light emission modes, such as moving light emission and flashing. The gaming machine 100 also has a first light emission area (e.g., a frame lamp) and a second light emission area (e.g., a board lamp) that can produce rainbow effects.

In addition, as shown in Figure 19, it is possible to display a first text display (such as a cut-in effect or dialogue) that is executed at a first timing, such as during the execution of a variable effect, and as shown in Figure 24, a second text display (warning after a jackpot, logo, cheat warning, model name, manufacturer name) that is executed at a second timing. Here, the second timing refers to a predetermined timing during a specific period between the start of the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo) and the start of the next variable display.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 19 , during a variable effect, for example, a first timing can be used to display text (first text display), such as a cut-in dialogue character. As shown in FIG. 14 , during the period from the start of the customer waiting demo to the start of the next variable effect, a second timing can be used to display warnings (second text display), such as a warning against addiction, age restrictions, no cheating, and caution against contact with movable devices. When text display is performed at this second timing, at least flashy aspects, such as fast-moving moving light, flashing, and fast blinking, are restricted from rainbow light effects. On the other hand, aspects that are not restricted include slow-moving light, slow blinking, and the like. Of course, when text display is performed at the second timing, a rainbow light effect does not have to be performed.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that the text display is important, such as a warning, and the text display as an effect can have a great effect on the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

It should be noted that text display can be executed at times other than the first and second times described above. For example, text display informing players that the effect content can be changed (e.g., "mode change possible") can be executed while waiting for customers or during variable effects. It should be noted that when such text display is executed, the rainbow effect can be restricted.
In addition, when a third character display (such as "Victory" in Figure 22 (g)) is displayed on the main display device 131 at a third timing, such as when a variable effect is being executed, the rainbow effect does not need to be restricted.

(Feature 11 of Light Emitting Mode)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 16, during the customer waiting performance, the rainbow color performance by the liquid crystal display screen of the main display device 131 is executed for a relatively short time, while the rainbow color performance by the light-emitting means other than the main display device 131 (the first side display device 132, second side display device 133, and upper display device 134 provided in the glass frame 150, the backstage display device 141 provided in the game board unit 102, the sword handle unit 135, the launch handle device 103, the light guide panel unit 181, the upper role unit 154, and the lower role unit 156) is executed for a relatively longer time.
In other words, when this gaming machine 100 performs a customer waiting effect, the execution period of the rainbow effect (first effect) by the other light-emitting means is longer than the execution period of the rainbow effect (second effect) by the main display device 131. The other light-emitting means may be any of the light-emitting means provided in the gaming board unit 102 or any of the light-emitting means provided in the glass frame 150.
By being able to execute such effects, the rainbow-colored effects of frame lamps and the like can attract the interest of players while waiting for customers, and by differentiating the effects while waiting for customers and while the machine is in operation, it is possible to create effects that cannot be seen in demonstrations while waiting for customers, etc., and this can increase the interest in the game.

The execution period of the second effect may be 0 seconds. In other words, even if the second effect is not executed and the first effect is executed, the execution period of the first effect can be said to be long. However, the execution period of the second effect may be configured to be long for certain effects, such as a rainbow effect on the edge of the display screen of the main display device 131.

The first and second effects described above may be performed under the condition that the movable role units, such as the upper role unit 154 or the lower role unit 156, are in a standby position where they do not perform any performance action by moving. Even when comparing the execution periods under such conditions, the execution period of the first effect will be longer than the execution period of the second effect.

19 and 25, the execution period of the effect (first effect) by the light-emitting means may be longer than the execution period of the effect (second effect) by the liquid crystal display device during the execution of the variable effect and the execution of the initial operation of the gaming machine 100. Also, the execution period of the effect (second effect) by the liquid crystal display device may be longer than the execution period of the effect (first effect) by the light-emitting means during the execution of the variable effect and the execution of the initial operation of the gaming machine 100.
In addition, while the variable effect is being performed, a rainbow effect may be performed in a specific area (for example, the edge portion) of the liquid crystal display device 131, and while the initial operation is being performed, the rainbow effect may be restricted in the above-mentioned specific area.

(Feature 12 of Light Emitting Mode)
19 and 22, in the gaming machine 100, while the effect of varying the effect symbols is being executed, the execution period of the rainbow effect (first effect) by other light-emitting means (periods in FIGS. 19(d), (g), and (h) and periods in FIGS. 22(e) and (g)) is longer than the execution period of the rainbow effect (second effect) by the main display device 131 (period in FIG. 19(g) and periods in FIGS. 22(e) and (f)). Specific examples of the second effect include rainbow effects that spread along the edges of the LCD screen, the colors of characters and lines, button effects (operation suggestion effects), and the like.

In this way, multiple rainbow-colored light effects can be produced by the liquid crystal display. Any of these effects can be used as the second effect. In other words, the first effect takes longer to run than any of the second effects produced by the main display device 131.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to execute rainbow color effects over a long period of time while the main display device 131 executes effects of a wide variety of images that are not limited to rainbow colors, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The first effect can be the above-mentioned flash, moving light emission, etc. In the first effect, the duration of the rainbow effect caused by the moving light emission is particularly longer than in the second effect.
In other words, the light-emitting effect means is capable of executing a first light-emitting mode in which the intensity of the light emitted by the colors that make up the rainbow changes over time (flashes), and a second light-emitting mode in which the visible colors move, as rainbow light-emitting effects, and while the effect pattern is changing, the period in which the effect of the second light-emitting mode is executed may be longer than the period in which the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed on the liquid crystal display screen.

The rainbow effect produced by the main display device 131 can be achieved by displaying the hold display in rainbow colors (rainbow light-emitting display in the first mode), or by other displays (dialogue, cut-ins, background, etc.) (rainbow light-emitting display in the second mode). The first effect may have a longer execution period than the rainbow light-emitting display in the second mode, but a shorter execution period than the rainbow light-emitting display in the first mode. The first effect may also be longer than the effect produced by either the first or second mode. The first effect may also be longer than the effect produced by the first mode. The first effect may also be longer than the effect produced by the second mode.

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 13)
In the gaming machine 100, rainbow effects can be produced in a flashing mode (first effect) and in a non-flash mode (second effect). Also, as shown in Figures 22 and 27, a light emission pattern from a flash to a non-flash mode is more likely to be executed in an effect after the start of a winning effect than a light emission pattern from a non-flash mode to a flash.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to provide a great effect to a player who has been enabled to win a big prize, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The second effect described above includes various effects that emit light with a longer cycle of changing the intensity of light (or no change) than the first effect. For example, the second effect may be a moving light effect, or an effect that does not emit light or flash but allows a certain number of colors to be seen simultaneously, or an effect in which the colors change over time.
The first and second effects may be performed by any of a plurality of light-emitting means. For example, in a moving light-emitting effect, the first and second effects may be performed by a portion of the light-emitting means, or may be performed by a combination of specific light-emitting means.

In addition, the light emission mode of the gaming machine 100 can be other than flashing, such as a mode in which multiple colors that make up a rainbow are visible at a certain timing, or a mode in which the colors change over time to create the appearance of a rainbow. Furthermore, a pattern in which a flash changes to a non-flash mode may be more likely to be executed in the effect after the start of the winning effect than a pattern in which a rainbow light emission display other than a flash is executed to a flashing rainbow light emission display.

(Feature 14 of Light Emitting Mode)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Figures 22, 24, and 29, in the performance after the start of the deciding performance (the performance executed in the period from the start of a predetermined performance (deciding performance) that suggests the execution of a special game to the start of the next variable display), immediately after the variable pattern stops, a rainbow light-emitting performance is executed by many light-emitting performance means (board, gimmicks, frames, buttons, etc.), but as time passes, the number of light-emitting performance means that execute the rainbow light-emitting performance decreases.
That is, the gaming machine 100 can perform the rainbow effect in both the first period after the start of the deciding effect and the second period after the first period. The number of light-emitting means performing the rainbow light-emitting display in the first period is greater than the number of light-emitting means performing the rainbow light-emitting display in the second period.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to provide a great effect to the player at the extremely exciting moment when the decisive effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The number of light-emitting means refers to, for example, the number of units that perform light-emitting operations in conjunction with one light-emitting device. For example, the first side display device 132 and the second side display device 133 can be counted as two even if they always display the same type of light. On the other hand, for example, if the upper display device 134 displays different light-emitting modes in multiple areas, the number of those areas may be used as the number of light-emitting means. If the main display device 131 displays multiple different rainbow colors, the number may be used as the number of light-emitting means.

The number of light-emitting means that perform rainbow light-emitting display in the second period may be greater than that in the first period.
Incidentally, the final effect can be, for example, the period from when the sword handle unit 135 is operated (or after a predetermined time has elapsed without operation) until the effect pattern 50a is fixed and stopped.

The change in the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow light-emitting display is shown in Figure 29. In this case, for example, when comparing the first period with the second period, the second period is shorter. Figure 29 also shows an example of a gaming machine that is configured so that a so-called V win puts the player in an advantageous state (for example, a probability change occurs during the time-saving mode after the end of a round of play). In this case, when a V win is achieved, the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow light-emitting display may increase compared to before. Even in this case, the number of light-emitting means is smaller than immediately after the start of the deciding performance.

(Feature 15 of Light Emitting Mode)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 22, in the performance after the start of the deciding performance (the performance executed in the period from the start of a predetermined performance (deciding performance) that suggests the execution of a special game to the start of the next variable display), a rainbow light-emitting performance is executed in a wide area immediately after the variable pattern stops, but the area in which the rainbow light-emitting performance is executed decreases as time passes.
In other words, the gaming machine 100 can execute the rainbow effect in both a first period after the start of the winning effect and a second period after the first period. The light-emitting area that executes the rainbow light-emitting display in the first period is larger than the light-emitting area that executes the rainbow light-emitting display in the first period. Note that the comparison of the area sizes can be made not only at specific times but also within the range in which the rainbow light-emitting display is executed during the relevant periods.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to provide a great effect to the player at the extremely exciting moment when the decisive effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The light emitting region that performs rainbow light emitting display in the second period may be larger than that in the first period.
The area in which the rainbow light-emitting effect is performed is the planar area when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the player, i.e., when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front. The size of the area changes as the number of light-emitting means that perform the rainbow light-emitting display increases or decreases. In other words, when the rainbow light-emitting display of a specific light-emitting means is stopped, the area becomes smaller.

(Feature 16 of Light Emitting Mode)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 23, in the jackpot confirmation effect (first state), a rainbow light emission effect of "short cycle/fast movement" is executed, and as shown in FIG. 14, in the effect while waiting for customers (second state), a rainbow light emission effect of "long cycle/slow movement" is executed.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30, in the jackpot confirmation effect, there are many patterns of cycle/movement speed in the rainbow light emission effect, but there are fewer patterns of cycle, movement direction, or movement speed in the effect while waiting for customers. In other words, four patterns, A-D, can be executed in the customer waiting demo, but nine patterns, E-M, can be executed in the jackpot confirmation effect. These patterns are merely examples, and the specific content and number are not particularly limited.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to provide a great effect to a player who has been able to win a big prize, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In Figure 30, the speed may be, for example, the time required for a specific color to move from a first point to a second point. The speed may also be the time (msec) or cycle until the color of a specific light-emitting element is switched.

Specific examples of the first state include not only the period during which a jackpot is determined, but also, for example, the period during which a jackpot fluctuates (from the start of the fluctuation that results in a jackpot to the end), during a jackpot game, etc. In these first states, there are more patterns of cycles/movement speeds than when waiting for customers.
In addition, specific examples of combinations of the first state and the second state include, in addition to the above-mentioned "jackpot confirmation effect/waiting for customers,""normal game state/advantageous game state (probable hit/time-saving)," and "when the jackpot stopping symbol is 7/when it is 2."
The jackpot stopping symbols are not limited to the difference between "7" and "2", but may be configured to have different patterns depending on other numbers, odd numbers and even numbers, etc. Also, the difference in the effect content depending on the stopping symbols is not limited to the above-mentioned cycle/movement speed pattern, but may be the difference in the length of the rainbow effect period.

(Feature 17 of Light Emitting Mode)
In the gaming machine 100, the timing at which the above-mentioned movable device operates is exemplified by the initial operation, the start of a change, the development effect, the final effect, etc. At this time, the probability that the main display device 131 will execute a rainbow light emission effect at each timing is in the order of final effect > development effect > start of change > initial operation.
In this way, the rainbow light emission effect on the display screen of the main display device 131 is more likely to be executed when the above-mentioned specific role is used in the final effect than when a specific role (light guide panel unit 181, upper role unit 154, lower role unit 156, or 3D effect) is used at the start of variation or development.
By being able to execute such effects, the player can have stronger expectations of a big win when the deciding effect is executed than when the variable effect starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The above-mentioned 3D effect is an effect that appears three-dimensional using the liquid crystal display screen of the main display device 131 and a film placed in front of it (on the player's side).
It should be noted that some of the roles (upper role unit 154, lower role unit 156) can execute an effect in which they operate in response to the player operating the sword handle unit 135 in accordance with the operation suggestion effect, but the timing of the action of the role may be simultaneous with the operation of the sword handle unit 135 or after a certain period of time has passed. Therefore, when a deciding effect is started based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135, there are cases in which the timing of the rainbow effect during the deciding effect does not match the timing of the effect by the role.

The ease with which the rainbow effect is executed may also vary depending on the magnitude of the movement of the movable part. For example, the movable part may be capable of executing a first action, which is a relatively small movement, and a second action, which is a large movement, and when the second action is executed, the rainbow effect (rainbow light-emitting display) by the light-emitting means may be executed more easily. The specific form of the rainbow effect may also be configured to change between the first action and the second action. The second action is likely to be executed in the final effect. The first action is likely to be executed at the start of a change or during a development effect.

(Feature 18 of Light Emitting Mode)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 14, even if the rainbow light emission effect is being executed while waiting for customers (second state), the sound output that matches the rainbow light emission, such as that during a jackpot or during fluctuations (first state), is restricted.
In this way, the first effect, which simultaneously displays a rainbow light and outputs a sound (output of a confirmation sound) by the sound output means, is more likely to be executed when the gaming machine is in the first state (changing) than when the gaming machine is in the second state (waiting for customers).
By being able to execute such effects, a greater effect can be provided to the player while the machine is in operation than while waiting for customers, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The sound output mentioned above may be music that matches the rainbow light-emitting display, or a sound effect such as a confirmation sound. For example, it may be a sound effect when the hold display changes to a rainbow-colored state due to a hold change effect, or a sound effect when a button or lever is operated in a deciding effect.

In addition, in the second state, the device may be configured to output a different effect sound from the first effect in the first state, for example, a relatively quieter effect sound.
Furthermore, specific examples of the second state are not limited to when waiting for customers. For example, it may be when a rainbow light-emitting display is being displayed during a jackpot game, or when a round of play is being played. In this case, the background music for the game is played, but the execution of the above-mentioned specific sound output is restricted. Furthermore, specific examples of the first state are not particularly limited to when a variable effect is being displayed or when a jackpot is confirmed. For example, the first state may be when a promotion effect is being displayed during a jackpot game.

In the first state, sound may be output when a specific operation (such as operating a performance button or control lever) is performed, and in the second state, sound may not be output even when the specific operation is performed.

In addition, the above sound output can be performed in normal game play, and can also be performed in special 2 variable display in specific game play states (advantageous game play states such as time-saving and probability variation), but the sound output can be limited (or the likelihood of sound output can be different) in special 1 variable display in specific game play states.

(Feature 19 of Light Emitting Mode)
19 and 24, in the gaming machine 100, for example, during a variable effect, a character display (first character display) such as a cut-in of dialogue characters can be executed at a first timing, and during a jackpot game, a caution (second character display) can be executed at a second timing using characters such as a warning against addiction, age restrictions, no cheating, and caution against contact with movable devices. When character display is executed at this second timing, the rainbow light emission effect is restricted.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that the text display is important, such as a warning, and the text display as an effect can have a great effect on the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that the text displays for which rainbow color effects are restricted are not limited to warnings. For example, rainbow color effects may be restricted for text displays such as title displays, manufacturer name displays, and logo displays. On the other hand, rainbow color effects may be possible for text displays such as title displays, manufacturer name displays, and logo displays.

The rainbow display may also be restricted when specific text (operation guidance, game instructions) is displayed while customers are waiting (third timing). The likelihood of the rainbow display being displayed may differ between the first to third timings. For example, the likelihood of the rainbow display being displayed may be greater than the first timing. Or, it may be greater than the first timing. Or, it may be the same value between the first to third timings. There may also be cases where the rainbow display is not displayed. Furthermore, when a fourth text display (e.g., a text display when a V win is made) is displayed on the main display device 131 at the fourth timing, such as during a jackpot game, the rainbow effect may not be restricted.

(Feature 20 of Light Emitting Mode)
14 and 19, in the gaming machine 100, for example, during a variable performance, a character display (first character display) such as a cut-in of dialogue characters can be executed at a first timing, and during the period from the start of the customer waiting demo to the start of the next variable performance, a character warning (second character display) such as a warning against addiction, age restrictions, no cheating, and caution against contact with movable parts can be executed at a second timing. When character display is executed at this second timing, the rainbow light emission performance is restricted.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that the text display is important, such as a warning, and the text display as an effect can have a great effect on the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that the text displays for which rainbow color effects are restricted are not limited to warnings. For example, rainbow color effects may be restricted for text displays such as title displays, manufacturer name displays, and logo displays. On the other hand, rainbow color effects may be possible for text displays such as title displays, manufacturer name displays, and logo displays.

(Features 21 and 22 of the light-emitting aspect)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 31 , when the first special symbol variable display is executed based on a win in the first starting slot 112 in the normal gaming state, the number of rainbow effects, i.e., the number of light-emitting patterns, executed in the variable display for a single win differs from when the first special symbol variable display is executed in the advantageous gaming state (probability change/time-saving). Note that in FIG. 31 , patterns A, B, and C are light-emitting patterns for rainbow effects executed by, for example, a reserve change, a development effect, a winning effect, a preview effect (dialogue, background display, cut-in), a full spin, etc. Pattern D is, for example, a winning effect, a full spin, etc. In other words, when the first special symbol variable display is executed in the specific gaming state, a limited pattern of rainbow effects is executed. Furthermore, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol in the specific game state, some of the rainbow effect patterns that can be executed in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state can be executed, but there are more patterns than in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol in the special game state.

For example, when the first special symbol (first start condition) is displayed in a variable manner in the normal game state, and when the second special symbol (second start condition) is displayed in a variable manner in the advantageous game state, the main display device 131 displays rainbow effects such as "preview effects," "hold change," and "decisive effects." In the preview effects, rainbow effects are displayed using backgrounds, cut-ins, dialogue, etc. In the hold change effects, the display mode of the hold changes to rainbow colors. In the deciding effects, more flashy effects than the preview effects are displayed using not only the main display device 131 but also frame lamps and board lamps.

By being able to execute such effects, the effect content changes depending on whether the first special symbol is displayed in a favorable game state or in a normal game state, guiding players who see this to aim for the appropriate trigger conditions to be met, allowing them to enjoy the benefits of each game state and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31, in the gaming machine 100, when the first special symbol variable display is executed based on winning at the first start port 112 in a favorable game state (probable win/time-saving), the number of rainbow effects, i.e., the number of light-emitting patterns, executed in the variable display for a single win differs from when the second special symbol variable display is executed based on winning at the second start port 115 in a favorable game state.

By being able to execute such effects, the content of the effects changes depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in an advantageous game state or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in an advantageous game state, and the player who sees this can be guided to aim for the establishment of the appropriate starting condition, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of each game state and increasing the enjoyment of the game.
Also, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the execution of the rainbow effect is restricted for the preview effect, the reserved change, etc., and the probability of execution is set to be lower than in the normal gaming state, or not executed at all. Also, for example, the rainbow effect may be executed only for the "decisive effect." Also, for example, the rainbow effect may not be executed.

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 23)
The gaming machine 100 can execute a more flashy effect during the variable effect shown in Fig. 22 than during the customer waiting demo effect shown in Fig. 14. For example, during the variable effect, a rainbow effect is executed by flashing/simultaneously with the role/using many light emitting means, but during the customer waiting period, no flashing is executed and a color-changing effect using lamps is executed.
By being able to execute such effects, a greater effect can be provided to the player while the machine is in operation than while waiting for customers, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Examples of relatively unspectacular rainbow effects include, for example, a frame lamp that only emits rainbow-colored moving light, or a rainbow-colored display on part of the display screen of the main display device 131 (for example, the edges of the screen or some of the displayed objects are rainbow-colored). On the other hand, examples of relatively flashy rainbow effects include a rainbow-colored display that is displayed simultaneously using many light-emitting devices (a wide range in which the rainbow-colored display is displayed), a display that displays the rainbow-colored display for a relatively long time, a display that displays a rainbow flash, and a display in which the colors move quickly in moving light.

The customer waiting demo presentation is an example of the first state, and the variable presentation is an example of the second state. Specific examples of the first and second states are not particularly limited. For example, examples of the first state include when a jackpot is confirmed, when a variable presentation resulting in a jackpot is in progress, and when a jackpot game is in progress, and the second state is when a jackpot game is in progress (when the first state is not when a jackpot game is in progress).

The customer waiting demo, which is an example of the first state, may also be a timing when a specific display (such as a text display to prevent addiction) is displayed and the rainbow effect is restricted, but the specific display is not displayed. Furthermore, when an addiction prevention display is displayed, not only is the execution of the rainbow light-emitting display restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light-emitting display) may also be restricted.

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 24)
In the gaming machine 100, the rainbow color effect can be seen over a wider area when the effect symbol 50a is not displayed during the deciding effect as shown in Fig. 22 than when the rainbow color effect is seen when the effect symbol 50a is not displayed during the waiting period (such as when the title is displayed) as shown in Fig. 14. The area here refers to the planar range when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the player, i.e., when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100.

The above-mentioned area becomes larger when rainbow-colored light is emitted by multiple light-emitting means. In other words, the above-mentioned area becomes larger when rainbow-colored light is emitted by both frame lamps and board lamps than when rainbow-colored light is emitted by only one of them. Furthermore, when rainbow colors are displayed on the display screen of the main display device 131, the size of the above-mentioned area changes depending on the size of the displayed object.
By being able to execute such effects, the player can be made to have stronger expectations of a big win when the deciding effect is executed than when waiting for customers, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

The area size can be compared not only at specific times, but also over the range in which the rainbow light display is executed during the period in which the effect is executed. For example, it is possible to compare the overall size of the area in which the rainbow light display is executed during the first state (for example, when the effect pattern is not displayed while waiting for customers) with the overall size of the area in which the rainbow light display is executed during the second state (for example, when the effect pattern is not displayed during the winning effect).

In addition, the rainbow color effect may be configured so that it is visible over a wider area when the effect pattern 50a is not displayed while waiting for customers (when the title is displayed, a warning is displayed, a logo is displayed, etc.) than when the rainbow color effect is not displayed during the deciding effect, during jackpot fluctuation, or during jackpot play.

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 25)
In the gaming machine 100, the display patterns include a normal decorative pattern (first display mode) and a small pattern (second display mode), and as shown in Figures 14 and 22, a rainbow display can be executed at times when the display pattern 50a (normal decorative pattern) is not displayed during the customer waiting demo display and the final display.
Furthermore, for example, in the customer waiting demo, the rainbow effect is limited when a warning display such as an addiction display or a title display (specific effect) is executed. Furthermore, in the deciding effect, the light-emitting display of a certain area on the display screen of the main display device 131 is limited when a predetermined effect is executed. Note that a predetermined effect is, for example, an effect in which a movable role object is executed, and in this case, the movable role object blocks the player from the display screen, thereby limiting the rainbow effect visible to the player. Furthermore, a predetermined effect is, for example, an effect executed by the main display device 131, and in this case, the hold display that executes the rainbow effect during the specific effect is hidden, or the rainbow color displayed in the background during the specific effect disappears, thereby limiting the rainbow effect visible to the player.

By being able to execute such effects, the player can have stronger expectations of a big win when the deciding effect is executed than when waiting for customers, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.
Furthermore, when a warning display such as an anti-addiction display is being displayed, not only is the execution of the rainbow light-emitting display restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light-emitting display) may also be restricted.

(Light Emitting Feature 26)
In the gaming machine 100, the rainbow light display can be executed while waiting for customers and during the variable performance, and the rainbow light display while waiting for customers is restricted from being started based on the operation of the operating means, but as shown in Figure 22, the rainbow light display during the variable performance can be started based on the operation of the operating means.
21, when a specific effect is executed in the jackpot notification effect in which one effect pattern 50a occupies a larger proportion of the image display area of the main display device 131 than the other effect patterns 50a (an effect in which the central 7 of "777" is larger than the left and right), the rainbow effect is restricted. Examples of restrictions on the rainbow effect here include, for example, the rainbow effect not being executed on the display screen of the main display device 131, or some or all of the light-emitting means that were executing the rainbow effect ceasing to emit light, etc.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to prevent the rainbow-colored effects from interfering with the effects of the specific effects executed in the jackpot notification effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The rainbow light display during the customer waiting demo performance may be able to be terminated based on the player's operation of the operating means (sword handle unit 135, launch handle device 103). For example, in the case of the sword handle unit 135, the rainbow light display may be terminated by switching modes or operating a menu, and in the case of the launch handle device 103, it may be terminated when the fluctuation begins due to a winning start caused by the ball being launched. Furthermore, the rainbow light display during the fluctuation performance is restricted from being terminated based on the player's operation of the operating means. In this case, for example, the rainbow light display may end when the performance period has elapsed.

(Light Emitting Feature 27)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in FIG. 14, when the game machine is in a waiting state for customers, if a title display (second character display) is displayed, a rainbow effect can be produced by the frame lamp and the board lamp, and if an anti-addiction display or the like (first character display) is displayed, the rainbow effect produced by the frame lamp and the board lamp can be restricted.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that important text displays such as warnings are displayed by limiting the rainbow color effects, and the title display can have a great effect on the player, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The first character display may be a title display, in which case the second character display may be a warning display such as an anti-addiction display. Furthermore, when a warning display such as an anti-addiction display is displayed, not only may the execution of the rainbow light display be restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light display) may also be restricted.

(Light Emitting Feature 28)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Fig. 24, if a jackpot pattern alignment is displayed statically from the start of the jackpot variable display until the start of the first variable display after a round, at least one of a rainbow effect by the main display device 131, a frame lamp, a board lamp, etc. can be executed. On the other hand, if text information (such as an addictive prevention display) is displayed during the ED (ending) of the jackpot game due to the first win, the rainbow effect by the main display device 131 can be restricted.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that important text displays such as warnings are displayed by limiting the rainbow color effects, and when a jackpot pattern is displayed in a stopped state, a great effect of the effects can be provided to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
During the immersion prevention display, not only is the execution of the rainbow light emitting display restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light emitting display) may also be restricted.

(Light Emitting Feature 29)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Fig. 24, if a jackpot symbol alignment is displayed statically from the start of the jackpot variable display until the start of the first variable display after a round, at least one of a rainbow effect can be executed by the main display device 131, a frame lamp, a board lamp, etc. On the other hand, if text information (such as an addictive prevention display) is displayed during the ED (ending) of the jackpot game due to the first win, the rainbow effect by the main display device 131 or the light-emitting means can be restricted.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that important text displays such as warnings are displayed by limiting the rainbow color effects, and when a jackpot pattern is displayed in a stopped state, a great effect of the effects can be provided to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the anti-obsession display is enabled, not only is the execution of the rainbow light-emitting display restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light-emitting display) may also be restricted.

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 30)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Fig. 24, when a jackpot pattern is displayed stationary between the start of the jackpot variation display and the start of the first variation display after the round, at least one of the rainbow color effects can be executed by the main display device 131, the frame lamp, the board lamp, etc. On the other hand, when an operation instruction effect that displays a right-hit image (large/small), etc. is executed, the rainbow color effects by the main display device 131 can be restricted.
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that the rainbow effect is a display that suggests appropriate operations to the player by limiting the rainbow effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The restriction on the rainbow effect mentioned here means that when the right-hit image is displayed, the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow light-emitting display is reduced or all of them are stopped, the area is smaller (compared to scenes where other rainbow effect are executed), the frequency is reduced, etc. It also includes, for example, a case where the right-hit image is displayed in front on the display screen of the main display device 131, thereby hiding the rainbow-colored display object.
There are multiple right-hit displays, and for example, the rainbow effect may be limited when the right-hit display (large) is displayed, or the rainbow effect may be limited when the right-hit display (small) is displayed.

(Light Emitting Mode Feature 31)
The gaming machine 100 is configured to be able to progress through a game by switching between game states including a normal state (first game state), a more advantageous state (second game state) than the first game state, and a jackpot game (third game state) in which a special game is executed. The first game state and the second game state will be described in detail in the second embodiment.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 can be controlled so that a specific function (complete function) that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and the amount of game value used reaches a predetermined value (95,000) is activated at a predetermined timing. The specific function will be described in detail later.

There is a first start condition that is met based on a predetermined requirement that occurs at the first start port 112 (ball entering the start port), a second start condition that is met based on a predetermined requirement that occurs at the second start port 115 (ball entering the start port), and a third condition (round progress and payout conditions) that is met based on a predetermined requirement that occurs at the first large prize port 117 or the second large prize port 127 (ball entering the large prize port), and based on the fulfillment of the first start condition or the fulfillment of the second start condition, a change in the performance pattern can be performed on the main display device 131.
If a specific function is activated other than during a jackpot (first game state), the fulfillment of the first start condition can be restricted even if a ball enters the start port at the first start port 112.Furthermore, if a specific function is activated during a jackpot (third game state), the third condition can be fulfilled if a specified requirement occurs at the first large prize port 117 or the second large prize port 127 during the period (specified period) from the activation of the specific function to the end of the jackpot round, and the fulfillment of the first start condition can be restricted even if a ball enters the start port at the first start port 112.

When a winning variation effect is executed based on the first start condition being met in an advantageous state (second gaming state), the number of patterns in the direction of color movement in the rainbow light-emitting display may be relatively small (for example, only from bottom to top); on the other hand, when a winning variation effect is executed based on the second start condition being met in an advantageous state (second gaming state), the number of patterns in the direction of color movement in the rainbow light-emitting display may be relatively large. Note that the latter may be fewer than the former, as long as the number of patterns in the direction of color movement is different.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 112. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate winning hole according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Examples of restrictions on the rainbow effect in the second effect described above include not executing the rainbow effect, reducing the number of light-emitting effect means, and reducing the area in which the rainbow effect is executed.
In addition, the rainbow effect may be limited to when specific text information is displayed during the second effect. In other words, the rainbow effect may be limited when specific text information is displayed during the second effect. The specific text information here refers to a warning display such as an anti-addiction display displayed during the ending.

(Light Emitting Feature 32)
As shown in Fig. 19, the gaming machine 100 can execute a plurality of expectation suggestion effects (hold change, dialogue, cut-in) that suggest the possibility of a special game being played, and a deciding effect that suggests the execution of a special game, in the variable effect. The expectation suggestion effects include a first effect such as dialogue or a cut-in, and a second effect such as a hold change. When the variable effect is executed, the execution times of the first effect and the second effect are different. For example, the second effect is set to be executed for a longer period of time. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting display is more likely to be executed in the deciding effect than in the first effect of the expectation suggestion effect, and the execution period of the rainbow light-emitting display is longer.
By being able to execute such an effect, the player can be made to expect a big win more strongly when the deciding effect is executed than when the expectation suggestion effect is executed, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

(Light Emitting Feature 33)
In the gaming machine 100, as shown in Fig. 24, during a jackpot game resulting from a first win (particularly during ending), displays such as an addiction prevention display, a prepaid card forgetting display, and theft prevention display are displayed. Also, at this time, the rainbow-colored effects are restricted. In other words, during a jackpot game resulting from a first win (particularly during ending), displays such as addiction prevention display, a prepaid card forgetting display, and theft prevention display are more likely to be displayed, and the rainbow-colored effects are more likely to be restricted, than during a jackpot game during a consecutive win (particularly during ending).
By being able to execute such effects, it is possible to make the player aware that important text displays such as warnings are displayed by limiting the rainbow effects, and in other cases, it is possible to provide the player with a great effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
Furthermore, when a warning display such as an anti-addiction display is being displayed, not only is the execution of the rainbow light-emitting display restricted, but the execution of flash effects (including those other than the rainbow light-emitting display) may also be restricted.

(Variation of rainbow effect)
Even when the rainbow effect is executed, the first special pattern display 120, the second special pattern display 122, and the sub-LED (the LED controlled by the effect control board 320) may be restricted from displaying rainbow light.
Furthermore, although the performance pattern 50a emits rainbow light, the number patterns that make up the small patterns themselves may be configured not to emit rainbow light.
The illumination mode of the lamps (frame lamps, board lamps, gadgets, buttons, etc.) when a warning display is executed while waiting for customers and the illumination mode of the lamps when a warning display is executed in the ending effect of the first win may be different in the rainbow illumination display mode. For example, the color movement speed or blinking cycle may be different.

In addition, lamps (frame lamps, board lamps, gadgets, buttons, etc.) may be provided with a first area and a second area, and different lamp lighting modes (movement cycle, lighting cycle, light color) may be used to perform light-emitting effects at the first timing/second timing (first state/second state) when a warning display is executed in the first area, and it may also be possible to restrict the execution of rainbow light-emitting displays by the main display device 131/lamp.

Specific examples include the following: (i) (In the first area) The lamps light up in different ways at the first timing (waiting for customers/fluctuation (normal/probable change)) when the warning display is executed and the second timing (fluctuation/during ED performance), and it is possible to restrict the execution of the rainbow light display by the liquid crystal. (ii) (In the first area) The lamps light up in different ways at the first timing and the second timing (fluctuation/during ED performance) when the warning display is executed, and it is possible to restrict the execution of the rainbow light display by the lamp. (iii) (In the first area) The lamps light up in different ways at the first state (waiting for customers) when the warning display is executed and the second state (jackpot game state), and it is possible to restrict the execution of the rainbow light display by the liquid crystal. (iv) (In the first area) The lamps light up in different ways when the attention warning display is executed in the first state (waiting for customers) and the second state (jackpot game state), and the execution of the rainbow light display by the lamps can be restricted.

In the variable performance, the number of times (number of times executed) or type (rainbow light display by lamp/main display device 131/performance button/light guide plate, rainbow light display pattern in each performance) of the rainbow light display may be different before the reach (lines) and after the reach (cut-in, deciding performance, re-draw, revival).
For example, the selection rate of the rainbow light-emitting display in the successful selection effect or the re-lottery effect may be 100%. Also, for example, while a flash effect can be executed in the successful selection effect, the execution of the flash effect can be restricted when the addiction prevention display (specific character information) is executed.

The likelihood of a rainbow flash effect being executed may differ between the first timing (e.g., while waiting for customers) and the second timing (e.g., during a jackpot ending/variation). Also, the likelihood of a rainbow flash effect being executed may differ between the first state (e.g., while waiting for customers) and the second state (e.g., while a jackpot is being played).

For example, the execution of flash effects while waiting for customers may be restricted. In this case, rainbow-colored effects other than flash effects may be executed, or their execution may be restricted. Also, the execution of flash effects may be restricted when specific text information is displayed while waiting for customers. In this case, rainbow-colored effects other than flash effects may be executed, or their execution may be restricted, when specific text information is displayed.

For example, the flash effect may be restricted from being used in the ending for the first win, and may be allowed in the ending for the second or subsequent jackpots. In this case, rainbow effects other than flash effects may be allowed in the ending for the first win, or their use may be restricted. Also, rainbow effects other than flash effects may be allowed in the ending for the second or subsequent jackpots, or their use may be restricted.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, a slave control means (performance control board 320) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal from the main control means, a first light-emitting means (board lamp) that is provided in a first area and is capable of performing a light-emitting display based on a signal from the slave control means, and a second light-emitting means (frame lamp) that is provided in a second area different from the first area and is capable of performing a light-emitting display based on a signal from the slave control means, and the slave control means It is possible to execute a first effect in which the first area and the second area are illuminated in a specific manner that appears rainbow-colored (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the board lamp work together), and a second effect in which a predetermined manner of illumination is displayed that appears rainbow-colored to the player in an illumination manner different from the first effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and the board lamp each have different illumination modes such as flashing or moving), and the number of illumination patterns in the first effect differs depending on whether the game state is the first state (for example, waiting for customers) or the second state (for example, during a variable effect).

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a determination based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variable symbol display executed by the display means based on said determination results in a predetermined special result, is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player. The gaming machine is equipped with a first light-emitting means (board lamp) provided in a first area and capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and a second light-emitting means (frame lamp) provided in a second area different from the first area and capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting display. The gaming machine is capable of executing a first effect that executes the rainbow light-emitting display in the first area and the second area (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and board lamp work together), and a second effect that executes the rainbow light-emitting display in a different light-emitting mode from the first effect (for example, an effect in which the frame lamp and board lamp each have different light-emitting modes such as flashing or moving), and is characterized in that the number of light-emitting patterns of the first effect differs when the special game is being executed (during a jackpot game) and when the variable display is being executed.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, a secondary control means (effect control board 320) that controls the game effects based on signals from the main control means, and a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means provided on the role element (movable role element, center role element, starting hole, movable member) that are capable of producing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player based on signals from the secondary control means. The secondary control means is capable of producing a first effect in which the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are capable of producing the rainbow light-emitting display, and a second effect in which the rainbow light-emitting display is capable of limiting the light emission of either the first light-emitting means or the second light-emitting means (for example, a state in which a part of the light-emitting means does not produce a rainbow light-emitting display, or a state in which the rainbow light-emitting display is obstructed and cannot be seen by the player). The first effect is more likely to be produced when the gaming state is in the second state (for example, after a reach) than when it is in the first state (for example, before a reach).

◆ In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, is capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with two or more light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, light-emitting element) that can execute a rainbow light-emitting display in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and a display means (main display device 131) that can execute display of text information, and said light-emitting means is capable of executing a first light-emitting mode that executes said rainbow light-emitting display in a manner that shifts colors, and a second light-emitting mode that executes said rainbow light-emitting display in a manner different from said first light-emitting mode, and a first light-emitting area and The display means is capable of displaying a first character display (such as a cut-in effect or dialogue) executed at a first timing, and a second character display (such as a warning after a big win, a logo, cheating warning, model name, or manufacturer name) executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second timing being a predetermined timing during a specific period between the start of the effect (big win effect) during execution of the special game and the start of the next variable display, and when the second character display is displayed by the display means during the specific period, the execution of the second light emission mode by the light emitting means can be restricted.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, and is equipped with first and second light-emitting means capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and is capable of executing a first effect that executes the rainbow light-emitting display, a second effect that executes the rainbow light-emitting display in a manner different from the first effect, and a third effect (flashing effect) that executes the rainbow light-emitting display in a manner different from the first and second effects, and is characterized in that, in a predetermined effect (decisive effect) that suggests the execution of the special game, a light-emitting pattern in which the third effect is executed followed by the second effect is more likely to be executed than a light-emitting pattern in which the second effect is executed followed by the third effect.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, a secondary control means (effect control board 320) that controls the game effects based on signals from the main control means, a light-emitting means that can produce light-emitting displays based on signals from the secondary control means, and a display means (main display device 131), and the secondary control means is capable of using at least one of the light-emitting means or the display means to produce a first effect in which the rainbow colors seen by the player change in a first manner (e.g., colors moving slowly), and a second effect in which the rainbow colors seen by the player change in a second manner different from the first manner (e.g., colors moving quickly), and is characterized in that the combination patterns of the display means and the light-emitting means when the second effect is produced have a greater variety of patterns that appear as rainbow colors than the combination patterns of the display means and the light-emitting means when the first effect is produced.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a light-emitting means capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and is capable of executing a first effect (other than a flash) in which the light-emitting means displays the rainbow light-emitting display in a first light-emitting pattern, and a second effect (flash) in which the light-emitting means displays the rainbow light-emitting display in a second light-emitting pattern, and is characterized in that, in the effects executed after the start of a predetermined effect (successful decision effect) suggesting the execution of the special game (jackpot game), a pattern in which the second effect is executed followed by the first effect is more likely to be executed than a pattern in which the first effect is executed followed by the second effect.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the variable symbol display executed by the display means based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result. The gaming machine comprises a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, a secondary control means (effect control board 320) that controls the game effects based on signals from the main control means, and a light-emitting means that is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player based on signals from the secondary control means, and the secondary control means is capable of executing a first effect that executes the rainbow light-emitting display while the variable symbol display is being executed, and a second effect that executes the rainbow light-emitting display in a specific state (e.g., a waiting state) different from when the variable symbol display is being executed, and is characterized in that the light-emitting pattern when the first effect is executed has more patterns that appear rainbow-colored than the light-emitting pattern when the second effect is executed.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a determination based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variable display of symbols executed by the display means based on said determination results in a predetermined special result, a special game advantageous to the player can be executed, and is capable of executing a variable display of performance symbols based on the establishment of said start condition. The gaming machine is equipped with light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131, etc.) that can execute a rainbow-colored light-emitting effect that appears rainbow to the player, and the light-emitting means can execute a first effect in which the color moves in a specific direction and a second effect that is different from the first effect in the rainbow-colored light-emitting effect, and is characterized in that, between the start of a predetermined effect (decisive effect) suggesting the execution of the special game and the start of the next variable display, the rainbow-colored light-emitting effect that is different when the performance symbol becomes the first stopped display and when it becomes the second stopped display can be executed.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, is capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with two or more light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, light-emitting element) that can execute light-emitting displays, and a display means (main display device 131) that can execute display of text information, and the light-emitting means has a first light-emitting mode (e.g., fast color movement, flash, etc.) that emits light in a manner that appears rainbow-colored to the player in a first display mode, and a mode that appears rainbow-colored to the player different from the first display mode (e.g., slow color movement, The display means is capable of displaying a first character display (such as a cut-in effect or dialogue) executed at a first timing, and a second character display (such as a warning after a big win, a logo, cheating warning, model name, manufacturer name) executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second timing being a predetermined timing during a specific period from the start of the waiting-for-customer effect until the start of the next variable display, and when the second character display is displayed by the display means during the specific period, the execution of the first character display by the light emitting means can be restricted.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising a gaming board on which a play area is formed and a gaming frame, and is also equipped with light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, effect button) and display means, wherein the light-emitting means is capable of executing a first effect that produces a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and the display means is capable of executing a second effect that produces a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and when a customer waiting effect is performed, the execution period of the first effect (effect by the light-emitting means) is longer than the execution period of the second effect (effect by the liquid crystal display device).

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a variable effect of a performance symbol when a start condition is met, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (frame lamp) and a display means (main display device 131), wherein the light-emitting means is capable of executing a first effect that produces a rainbow-colored light display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and the display means is capable of executing a second effect that produces a rainbow-colored light display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and when one of the variable effects is executed, the execution period of the first effect is longer than the execution period of the second effect.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and is equipped with light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131) that can produce a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and is capable of producing a first effect in which the light-emitting means produces the rainbow light-emitting display in a first light-emitting mode in which it flashes, and a second effect in which the light-emitting means produces the rainbow light-emitting display in a second light-emitting mode different from the first light-emitting mode, and is characterized in that, in the effect that is executed after the start of a predetermined effect (decisive effect) that suggests the execution of the special game, a light-emitting pattern that executes the second effect after the first effect is more likely to be executed than a light-emitting pattern that executes the first effect after the second effect.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a determination based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variable display of symbols executed by the display means based on said determination results in a predetermined special result, is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player. The gaming machine is equipped with two or more light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131, etc.) that can execute a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and is capable of executing the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in both a first period and a second period that follows the first period during the period from the start of a predetermined effect (decisive effect) that suggests the execution of the special game to the start of the next variable display, and is characterized in that the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in the second period is different from the number of light-emitting means that execute the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in the first period.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that makes a determination based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player when the variable display of symbols executed by the display means based on said determination results in a predetermined special result. The gaming machine is equipped with one or more light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, main display device 131, etc.) that can execute a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and is capable of executing the rainbow-colored light-emitting display in both a first period and a second period that follows the first period during the period from the start of a predetermined effect (decisive effect) that suggests the execution of the special game to the start of the next variable display, and is characterized in that the area recognized by the player as the rainbow-colored light-emitting display being executed during the second period is different from the area recognized by the player as the rainbow-colored light-emitting display being executed during the first period.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, a secondary control means for controlling the presentation of the game based on signals from the main control means, and a light-emitting means capable of producing a light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player based on signals from the secondary control means, and the secondary control means is capable of producing a presentation in which at least one of the light-emitting cycle, direction of movement, or speed of movement of the color emitted and displayed by the light-emitting means is different when the gaming state is in a first state (when a jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot fluctuates, or during a jackpot game) and a second state different from the first state (during a customer waiting demo), and the number of light-emitting pattern patterns in which at least one of the light-emitting cycle, direction of movement, or speed of movement of the color emitted and displayed is different is fewer when the gaming state is in the second state than when the gaming state is in the first state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention comprises a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, a secondary control means (effect control board 320) that controls the game effects based on signals from the main control means, a display means (main display device 131) that is capable of producing rainbow-colored luminous displays that appear rainbow-colored to the player, and reels (light guide panel unit 181, upper reel unit 154, lower reel unit 156, 3D effects) that are capable of producing specific effects, and is characterized in that the rainbow-colored luminous displays using the display means are more likely to be produced when the reel performs the specific effects in a second state (decisive effect) different from the first game state than when the reel performs the specific effects in a first game state (at the start of variation, during development).

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising a gaming board on which a play area is formed, and a gaming frame, and is equipped with light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, effect button) configured to be able to produce a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and sound output means (audio output device 331) configured to be able to output sound, and is capable of executing a first effect in which the rainbow-colored light-emitting display and sound output (output of a confirmation sound) by the sound output means are performed simultaneously, and a second effect in which the rainbow-colored light-emitting display is performed but no sound is output by the sound output means, and is characterized in that the first effect is more likely to be executed in the first gaming state (a state other than the specific state during fluctuation or jackpot play) than in the second gaming state (a specific state during waiting for customers or jackpot play).

◆ In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, is capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, etc.) that can execute a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and a display means (main display device 131) that can execute display of text information, and said display means executes a first text display (effects such as cut-ins, dialogue characters) executed at a first timing, and a second text display (effects such as cut-ins, dialogue characters) executed at a different timing from said first timing. and a second character display (post-jackpot warning, logo, cheat warning, model name, manufacturer name) that is executed at a second timing, the second timing being a predetermined timing within a specific period between the start of the presentation (jackpot presentation) during execution of the special game and the start of the next variable display, and the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting display being executed differs between when the first character display is executed by the display means at the first timing and when the second character display is executed by the display means at the second timing.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a determination based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variable display of symbols executed based on said determination results in a predetermined special result, is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player. The gaming machine is equipped with light-emitting means (frame lamp, board lamp, etc.) capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying text information, the display means being configured to display a first text display (effects such as cut-ins, dialogue text) executed at a first timing, and a second text display (demos warning, logo, cheat warning, model name, manufacturer name) executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second timing being a predetermined timing during a specific period during which a customer waiting effect is executed, and when the second text display is displayed by the display means during the specific period, the rainbow light-emitting display by the light-emitting means can be restricted.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to the player, and has two gaming states: a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state; the display means is capable of executing a variation effect of the performance symbols based on the establishment of a first start condition for the first start means, or based on the establishment of a second start condition for the second start means; and is equipped with light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, gadget, main display device 131, etc.) that is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player; and the number of light-emitting patterns of the rainbow light-emitting display that can be executed in the variation effect differs between when the variation effect of a win based on the establishment of the first start condition in the specific gaming state is executed and when the variation effect of a win based on the establishment of the first start condition in the normal gaming state is executed.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to the player, and has two gaming states: a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state; the display means is capable of executing a variation effect of the performance symbols based on the establishment of a first start condition for the first start means, or based on the establishment of a second start condition for the second start means; and is equipped with light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, gadget, main display device 131, etc.) that is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player; and the number of light-emitting patterns of the rainbow light-emitting display that can be executed in the variation effect differs between when the variation effect of a win based on the establishment of the first start condition in the specific gaming state is executed and when the variation effect of a win based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific gaming state is executed.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of implementing special games that are advantageous to players, and is equipped with one or more light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, gadget, main display device 131, etc.) that can implement light-emitting displays, and is capable of implementing a rainbow light-emitting display in a first light-emitting mode (e.g., the colors move slowly) that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and a second light-emitting mode (e.g., the colors move quickly) that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and is characterized in that the rainbow light-emitting display in the first light-emitting mode is more likely to be implemented when the gaming state is in a second state different from the first state (while waiting for customers) than when the gaming state is in the first state (when a jackpot is confirmed, when the jackpot fluctuates, during jackpot play).

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a variable effect of a performance symbol on a display means when a start condition is met, and is equipped with one or more light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, gadget, main display device 131, etc.) that is capable of executing a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and is characterized in that it is possible to make the area in which the rainbow-colored light-emitting display is executed different between when the performance symbol is not displayed when the gaming state is in a first state (waiting for customers) and when the performance symbol is not displayed when the gaming state is in a second state different from the first state (when a jackpot is confirmed, when a jackpot is variable, during jackpot play).

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a variable effect of a performance symbol on a display means (such as a main display device 131) when a start condition is met, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, performance button, etc.) that is capable of executing a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to a player, and the display means that is capable of executing the rainbow-colored light-emitting display, and the performance symbol has a first display mode (normal decorative symbol) and a second display mode (small symbol) that is different from the first display mode, and the gaming state is changed to a first state in which the first display mode is not displayed (the decorative symbol while waiting for customers is not displayed), The display can be controlled between a first state (a state where the display is not displayed) and a second state (a deciding effect) different from the first state; in the first state, the rainbow light-emitting display can be executed, and the rainbow light-emitting display can be restricted when a specific effect (addiction display/title display) is executed; and in the second state, the rainbow light-emitting display can be executed, and when a specific effect (movable role effect/LCD screen effect) is executed, the area of the rainbow light-emitting display on the display means can be restricted (the visible range becomes narrower when hidden by the movable role effect/the reserved rainbow is not displayed/the background when the stop display (the center of the three decorative images is enlarged))

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that is capable of displaying a variable effect of multiple effect symbols on a display means (such as a main display device 131) when a start condition is met, and is equipped with light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp) that can display a rainbow-colored light that appears to the player in rainbow colors, and operation means (effect button 17, sword handle unit 135) that can be operated by the player, and is capable of displaying the rainbow-colored light using the light-emitting means while waiting for customers and while the variable effect is being executed, and the rainbow-colored light display while waiting for customers is restricted from being started based on operation of the operation means, and the rainbow-colored light display while the variable effect is being executed can be started based on operation of the operation means, and is capable of displaying the rainbow-colored light when a jackpot notification effect (jackpot symbol alignment) is executed, and is capable of restricting the area of the rainbow-colored light display displayed by the display means when a specific effect is executed in which one effect symbol occupies a larger proportion of the image display area displayed by the display means than the other effect symbols.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, and is capable of executing a variable effect of effect symbols on a display means (main display device 131, etc.) based on the establishment of a first start condition for a first start means (first start port 112) or the establishment of a second start condition for a second start means (second start port 115), and is equipped with light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, gadget, main display device 131, etc.) that is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and the display means is capable of displaying a first character display (addiction prevention display), a second character display (title display, etc.), and a predetermined effect (character display), and is characterized in that the rainbow light-emitting display is more likely to be executed when the predetermined effect is being executed in the customer waiting state than when the first character display (addiction prevention display) is displayed in the customer waiting state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a variable effect of a display pattern when a starting condition is met, and is equipped with light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, effect button, etc.) and display means (main display device 131), and is capable of executing a specific effect (jackpot pattern alignment) in which the display pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner from the start of a specific variable effect, which is the variable effect that results in a jackpot, until the start of the variable effect following the specific variable effect, and a predetermined effect (addiction prevention display, etc.) that is executed after the specific effect and displays predetermined text information; when the specific effect is being executed, the light-emitting means or display means can execute a light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player; and when the predetermined effect is being executed, the light-emitting display by the display means can be restricted.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a variable effect of a display pattern when a starting condition is met, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, effect button, etc.) and a display means (main display device 131), and is capable of executing a specific effect (jackpot pattern alignment) in which the display pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner from the start of a specific variable effect, which is the variable effect that results in a jackpot, until the start of the variable effect following the specific variable effect, and a predetermined effect (addiction prevention display, etc.) that is executed after the specific effect and displays predetermined text information; when the specific effect is being executed, the light-emitting means or the display means can execute a light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player; and when the predetermined effect is being executed, the light-emitting means can restrict the light-emitting display.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a variable effect of a display symbol on the display means (main display device 131) when a start condition is met, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, effect button, etc.) provided on at least one of the game board and game frame, and the display means (main display device 131). From the start of a specific variable effect, which is the variable effect that results in a jackpot, to the start of the variable effect following the specific variable effect, when a jackpot notification effect (jackpot symbol alignment) is executed, the light-emitting means or display means can execute a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and when an operation instruction effect (large right-hit display, full open, small right-hit display) instructing the player to perform a specific operation is executed, the operation instruction effect can limit the area of the rainbow light-emitting display by the display means.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that can progress through a game by switching between game states including a first game state (normal state), a second game state (advantageous state) that is more advantageous than the first game state, and a third game state (jackpot game) in which a special game is executed, and is configured to activate a specific function (complete function) that limits the progress of the game at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value (95,000). The controllable system includes a first condition (first starting condition) that is established based on a predetermined requirement (a ball entering the starting hole) that occurs in the first winning means (first starting hole 112), a second condition (second starting condition) that is established based on a predetermined requirement (a ball entering the starting hole) that occurs in the second winning means (second starting hole 115), and a third condition (a round progress or a payout condition) that is established based on a predetermined requirement (a ball entering the large winning hole) that occurs in the third winning means (large winning hole). Based on the establishment of the first condition or the establishment of the second condition, The display means is capable of executing a variation effect of the performance symbols, and when the specific function is activated in the first gaming state (other than a jackpot), the fulfillment of the first condition can be restricted even if the predetermined requirement is met in the first winning means, and when the specific function is activated in the third gaming state (jackpot), the third condition can be fulfilled if the predetermined requirement is met in the third winning means within a predetermined period (the period until the end of the jackpot round) after the specific function is activated, and the fulfillment of the first condition can be restricted even if the predetermined requirement is met in the first winning means, and the game is characterized in that it is equipped with a light-emitting means capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and the number of patterns of color movement directions in the rainbow light-emitting display that the light-emitting means can execute in the variation effect differs between when the variation effect is executed in response to a win based on the fulfillment of the first condition in the second gaming state and when the variation effect is executed in response to a win based on the fulfillment of the second condition in the second gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing a variation effect of the performance symbols on the display means (main display device 131) based on the establishment of a first start condition for the first start means, or based on the establishment of a second start condition for the second start means, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, gadget, main display device 131, etc.) that is capable of executing a rainbow-colored light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and the possibility of executing the special game is suggested in the variation effect. It is possible to execute a first effect (dialogue, cut-in), a second effect (hold change) that suggests the possibility of the special game being played in a manner different from the first effect, and a third effect (decisive effect) that suggests the special game being played in a manner different from the first or second effect, and in the variable effects, the execution time of the first effect and the execution time of the second effect are different, and the rainbow light-emitting display is more likely to be executed in the third effect (decisive effect) than in the first effect (dialogue, cut-in), and the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting display is longer.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, and is capable of executing a variable effect of a performance symbol on a display means (main display device 131) based on the establishment of a first start condition for a first start means or based on the establishment of a second start condition for a second start means, and is equipped with a light-emitting means (board lamp, frame lamp, gadget, main display device 131, etc.) capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting display that appears rainbow-colored to the player, and the display means is When the first specific game is played, it is possible to display specific text (to prevent addiction, etc.), and the special games that can be played include a first specific game (the first jackpot game) and a second specific game (a jackpot game during a winning streak) that follows the first specific game, and the specific text display (to prevent addiction, forgetting to remove the prepaid card, theft, etc.) is more likely to be displayed and the rainbow light-emitting display is more likely to be restricted when the first specific game is played than when the second specific game is played.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In principle, the second embodiment will be described using the same gaming machine as the first embodiment, but the reference numerals of some of the components shown in Figures 32 to 59 will be used only in the second embodiment.

(About time-saving gameplay)
In addition to or instead of the "low-probability time-saving game state after a jackpot" that is executed after the end of a jackpot game, the above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving game state" may set a "low-probability time-saving game state triggered by a specified number of changes in a specified number of times" that is triggered by the execution of a specified number of changes in a special symbol in a low-probability game state. The "low-probability time-saving game state triggered by a specified number of changes" is executed after a specified number of symbol changes, for example, 1,000 times, in a low-probability game state that includes a low-probability time-saving game state, and can be executed in combination with effects such as whether or not a jackpot has occurred, as well as effects that indicate when a time-saving entry has occurred, such as counting down the number of changes until the time-saving event occurs.

Furthermore, in addition to or instead of the "low-probability time-shortened game state after a jackpot" and/or the "low-probability time-shortened game state based on a specific symbol combination," a "low-probability time-shortened game state based on a specific symbol combination" may be set in the low-probability game state, triggered by the display of a predetermined combination of special symbols. The "low-probability time-shortened game state based on a specific symbol combination" can be executed in the low-probability state after the display of specific symbols such as "1, 2, 3" or "7, 8, 7," in addition to effects such as whether or not a jackpot has occurred, by combining a reach to determine whether or not the time-shortened game state will occur or other effects that will enter the time-shortened game state.

(Game ball entering the starting hole)
In the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, when a gaming ball is shot so as to pass through the left region of the gaming area 106, it is possible for the ball to enter the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 (second start port 115), which opens as a result of a winning normal symbol lottery held on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. In the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, when a gaming ball is shot so as to pass through the right region of the gaming area 106, it is possible for the ball to enter the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, which opens as a result of a winning normal symbol lottery held on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol activation gate 113b.

In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, a ball is more likely to pass through the normal symbol activation gate 113b when it is shot into the right region of the gaming area 106 than when it is shot into the left region of the gaming area 106. Therefore, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, in a "time-saving gaming state" (specific gaming state) in which the second start hole 47 is more easily controlled to an open state when the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b than in a "non-time-saving gaming state," the player can progress through the game more advantageously without consuming gaming balls by shooting the gaming ball into the right region of the gaming area 106 and aiming for it to enter the second start hole 47, rather than by shooting the gaming ball into the left region of the gaming area 106.

In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the entrance to the warp device opens on the left side of the decorative frame, and a first start opening 45, through which gaming balls can always enter (win), is located directly below the stage section along which gaming balls guided by the warp device roll. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state" (normal gaming state), in which the second start opening 47 is less easily controlled to an open state when a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b than in the "time-saving gaming state," the player can progress through the game more advantageously without consuming gaming balls by shooting the gaming ball into the left area of the gaming area 106 and aiming for it to win through the first start opening 45, rather than by shooting the gaming ball into the right area of the gaming area 106.

In this way, the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment is designed so that whether the ball is shot into the left or right region of the play area 106 will have an advantage or disadvantage to the player, and it is advisable to switch the region of the play area 106 from which the ball is shot depending on the game status. In other words, the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment is required to progress the game with the aim of winning in the start hole 45, 47 according to the game status. However, because whether the ball is shot into the right or left region of the play area 106 is left to the player's firing operation, there is a risk that the player will proceed with the game aiming to win in the wrong start hole 45, 47.

Furthermore, even if the gaming machine is one in which the gaming ball only needs to be shot into the same area of the gaming area 106 (for example, the left area) in both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state," whether the ball is shot into the right or left area of the gaming area 106 is left to the player's firing operation, so there is still a risk that the player may play the game aiming to win in the wrong starting hole 45, 47.

(Example of production 1)
32 and 33 are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the expectation level display, the pending icon change effect, the lamp change effect, the notification sound effect, the movable member operation effect, and the successive advance notice effect resulting from these. Note that various effects that raise expectations for the execution of a jackpot game are sometimes called win suggestion effects.

As shown in Figure 32(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss effect pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect starts, as shown in Figure 32 (b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a begins, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, a blue effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that begins to change, thereby starting the first of the continuous preview effects; the display mode of the first hold icon shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2 changes to a blue character icon, thereby starting the hold icon change effect; and the start port lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing blue state, thereby starting the lamp change effect. In addition, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak operation mode, vibrating vertically, is executed for a predetermined period of time. Note that the operation effect in the weak operation mode of the first movable member 73 begins before the effect pattern 70a begins to change, and is stopped before the effect pattern 70 scrolls at high speed (for example, before the preparatory operation).

After that, as shown in Figure 32(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 stops. In addition, a zone effect (normal zone effect) begins in the first image display device 70. Specifically, the background image changes to zone background A, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone background music is output. Then, after the change time has elapsed, the effect symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 32(d), and then the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect starts, as shown in Figure 32 (e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that begins the changing display, thereby starting the second consecutive preview effect, and the pending icon change effect, lamp change effect, and zone effect continue. In addition, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak operation mode, vibrating vertically, is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in Figure 32(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 stops. Then, after the variation time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 32(g), the effect symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily displayed, and then the loss effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the change effect that will cause the change begins, as shown in Figure 32 (h), the change display of the effect pattern 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, starting the third consecutive preview display. The effect image EF is displayed in red, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue. Additionally, the symbol effect image ZE changes color to indicate a higher expectation of a jackpot than before. The pending icon change display continues. The start lamp NR changes from a lit blue to a flashing red, which indicates a lamp change display indicating a higher expectation of a jackpot than the lit blue display. An operation display is also executed in which the first movable member 73 operates in a strong operation mode, moving significantly from the top of the first image display device 70 to the front of the first image display device 70. At this time, an operation display is executed in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak operation mode, vibrating diagonally, for a predetermined period. In this way, the advance notification executed in the variable display indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than the previous one.

Then, as shown in Figure 33(i), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 stops. The zone effect is switched to zone background B, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than zone background A.

As shown in Figure 33 (j), a mini character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an effect that builds anticipation is executed, for example, by having the mini character MCB move across the screen.

After that, as shown in Figure 33 (k), for example, the line uttered by the ally, "CHANCE!", is displayed in the line window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice corresponding to the line, "Your chance has come!", is displayed from the audio output device 331, thereby executing a line preview performance.

Then, as shown in Figure 33 (l), the "3" effect symbol 70a is displayed as a stopped symbol (temporarily stopped symbol) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the variable display symbol 70a, while a reach effect (normal reach) is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a moving symbol in the central variable display area. At this time, the display mode of the first reserved icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, thereby executing a reserved icon change effect that offers a higher expectation of a jackpot game than a blue character icon. Furthermore, accompanying this, the start port lamp NR changes from a red illumination to a multi-color (rainbow) illumination state, thereby executing a lamp change effect that offers a higher expectation of a jackpot than a red illumination.

After that, when the game progresses to SP Reach, as shown in Figure 33 (m), the SP Reach effect begins, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased. The reduced-size effect pattern 70a changes from a normal display mode consisting of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a specified character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, a decorative section consisting of a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number section (identification characters), to a simple reduced display mode consisting of just the identification section.

When the game progresses to an SPSP Reach, the SPSP Reach effect begins, as shown in Figure 33 (n), and the icon display area 70C is erased along with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 320 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in Figure 33 (o), the jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333", which indicates the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game), and the special symbol TZ are temporarily displayed as still symbols (shaking and fluctuating), and then are displayed as still symbols, and the fluctuating effect ends.

Although the start gate lamp NR remains off while the SP and/or SPSP reach is displayed, the lamp change presentation may continue, or the start gate lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g., white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (i.e., does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

(Expectation level display)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the display of the effect symbols 70a can be displayed using color effects such as effect images EF and effect images ZE to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 34, the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment has a lower rate of color effect display of the expectation level in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the variable display of the effect symbols 70a (hereinafter referred to as the special 1 variable display) executed in the normal game state based on the first start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 45 (execution rate a3 < execution rate a1). In other words, the color effect display of the expectation level in the special 1 variable display is less likely to be displayed when a left-handed shot is made in the specific game state than when a left-handed shot is made in the normal game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the left side of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 34, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the Special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a lower execution rate of the expectation display using color effects than the variable display of the performance pattern 70a based on the second start condition established by the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47 executed in the specific game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the Special 2 variable display). (Execution rate a3 < execution rate a4). In other words, the expectation display using color effects is less likely to be executed in the Special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is made in the specific game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game area 106.

By using this execution rate for the expectation display, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is unfavorable to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

The above-mentioned color effect may be a rainbow-colored light-emitting display by the image display device described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the above-mentioned color effect may involve various forms of rainbow color effects described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The expectation indication is not limited to color effects, but may be text or decorations superimposed on images such as background images or performance patterns, or around the images, as long as the differences in content or color create expectations of a jackpot game.
The above-mentioned expectation degree display may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 34 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation indications using color effects may be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of expectation indications using color effects may be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern A32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern A32 is not set), then the expectation display of presentation pattern A12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in a normal game state, but the expectation display of presentation pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern A12 will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 variation display executed in a normal game state is executed, it is possible to execute an expectation display of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern A32 when special 1 variation display is performed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or presentation pattern A32 is not set), the expectation display of presentation pattern A42 can be performed when special 2 variation display is performed in the specific gaming state, but the expectation display of presentation pattern A32 that corresponds to (or is the same as) presentation pattern A42 will not be performed. In this case, when the special 2 variation display performed in the specific gaming state is performed, it is possible to perform the expectation display of a presentation mode that cannot be performed in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Zone production)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, a zone effect accompanied by a scene change of the background image can be executed. The zone effect creates anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game over a predetermined period of time, and can be executed at the timing of either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one start condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of multiple start conditions.

As shown in Figure 35, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the zone effect is executed less frequently in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b1). In other words, the zone effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is made in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 35, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the zone effect is executed less frequently in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b4). In other words, the zone effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106.

With such a zone effect execution rate, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned zone effects may be accompanied by various rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 35 may be the same or different. Here, the number of zone presentation types may be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of zone presentation types may be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. Also, the number of rainbow presentation types executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of zone presentation types increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern B32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific gaming state is "0" (or presentation pattern B32 is not set), the zone presentation of presentation pattern B12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in the normal gaming state, but the zone presentation of presentation pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern B12 will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 variation display made in the normal gaming state is executed, a zone presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in a specific gaming state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in a specific gaming state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern B32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern B32 is not set), the zone presentation of presentation pattern B42 can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in the specific game state, but the zone presentation of presentation pattern B32 that corresponds to (or is the same as) presentation pattern B42 will not be executed. In this case, when a special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state is executed, it is possible to execute a zone presentation of a presentation type that cannot be executed when a special 1 variation display is executed in a specific game state.

The zone effect does not have to span multiple variable displays; it may also be performed in a single variable display. Furthermore, if it is possible to execute a winning suggestion effect such as a zone effect that spans a predetermined number of variable displays, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be more likely to have a shorter number of times (including 0 times) than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In other words, it can be said that a winning suggestion effect such as a zone effect with a pattern that spans a shorter number of variable displays is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute scene changes such as background changes, captions that appear on the screen, and decorative changes to the display pattern 70a for the zone effect, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of scene changes such as background changes, captions that appear on the screen, and decorative changes to the display pattern 70a for the zone effect. In this case, the rainbow effect may also be restricted.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Sound notification effect)
In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, when a CD icon appears as a reserved icon, a first generation alert sound is output as an alert sound when the icon appears. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32(b), when a reserved icon or a blue character icon appears (changes to) as the reserved icon, a second generation alert sound (first change alert sound) is output as an alert sound when the icon appears (changes). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 33(l), when a reserved icon or a red character icon appears (changes to) as the reserved icon, a third generation alert sound (second change alert sound) is output as an alert sound when the icon appears (changes). Furthermore, when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generation alert sound (third change alert sound) is output as an alert sound when the icon changes.

In this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), but there may be two types: a notification sound when the CD icon appears and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a blue character icon, red character icon, or rainbow character icon. Alternatively, no notification sound may be output when the CD icon appears, and a notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of these modes. Furthermore, for the rainbow character icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided, making three types available.

As shown in Figure 36, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a lower execution rate of the change notification sound effect than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate c3 < execution rate c1). In other words, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is made in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 36, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the change notification sound effect than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate c3 < execution rate c4). In other words, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106.

With this execution rate of the change notification sound effect, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
When the above-described change notification sound effect is executed, the various rainbow color effects described in the first embodiment may be executed. The same applies to the following description.

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be configured to be fewer for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be configured to be fewer for the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow color effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of types of change notification sound effects increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

The change notification sound effect can be used not only when the hold icon changes, but also when a win is won, or when a change starts or stops, as an exciting sound.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound when a special 1 change display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific change notification sound is not set), a notification sound effect using a specified change notification sound can be executed when a special 1 change display is made in the normal game state, but a notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specified change notification sound will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 change display made in the normal game state is executed, a notification sound effect of an effect type that cannot be executed in a special 1 change display made in a specific game state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow effect of an effect type that cannot be executed in a special 1 change display made in a specific game state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound when a special 1 change display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific change notification sound is not set), a notification sound effect using a specified change notification sound can be made when a special 2 change display is made in the specific game state, but a notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specified change notification sound will not be made. In this case, when a special 2 change display made in the specific game state is made, a notification sound effect of a presentation type that cannot be made in a special 1 change display made in the specific game state can be made. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation type that cannot be made in a special 1 change display made in the specific game state may also be made.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The notification sound effects are not limited to being associated with changes in the reserved (relevant) icon, but can also be associated with various conditions, such as when the game ball enters the starting hole, when a deciding effect (confirmation effect) such as "kyun" is executed, when a button change sound such as "gyuuin" appears when a buried operation button appears, the operation sound of movable members 73 and 74, the start of change sound and return sound when multiple movable members combine to form a specific design, and the completion sound when a specific design is created.

If an alert sound effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the rate at which the predetermined condition is executed may be the same or lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, and the rate at which the alert sound effect is executed may be lower.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute an effect using a confirmed notification sound from among the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of an effect using a confirmed notification sound. Note that this is not limited to confirmed notification sounds, but the same can be done with the various notification sound effects mentioned above. In other words, in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute an effect using a predetermined notification sound from among the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of an effect using a predetermined notification sound.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned notification sound effect may be accompanied by various rainbow color effects as described in the first embodiment.

(Pending icon change effect)
32 and 33, in the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, by changing the shape and color of the reserved icon, it is possible to execute a reserved icon effect that makes the player look forward to a jackpot game. The change of the reserved icon in this embodiment makes the player look forward to the execution of a jackpot game over a predetermined period of time, and can be executed at the timing of either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one start condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of multiple start conditions.

As shown in Figure 37, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is lower in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate d3 < execution rate d1). In other words, the reserved icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 37, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate d3 < execution rate d4). In other words, the reserved icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is made in the specific game state, which shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106.

With this execution rate of the reserved icon change effect, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned pending icon change effect may be accompanied by various types of rainbow color effects as described in the first embodiment.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 37 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of reserved icon change presentations may be fewer for the special 1 change presentation executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 change presentation executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of reserved icon change presentations may be fewer for the special 1 change presentation executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 change presentation executed in the specific game state. Also, the number of types of rainbow color presentations executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of types of reserved icon change presentations increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

The hold icon change effect is not limited to a change in the color of the hold icon (including the icon in question) or a change in the appearance of the icon itself, but may also be a change in the icon itself or the effect associated with the icon, such as an effect or character associated with the icon. Furthermore, the hold icon effect is not limited to changing from a round CD icon to a character icon as in the embodiment, but may also be a change in shape to a triangle, square, etc.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern D32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific gaming state is "0" (or presentation pattern D32 is not set), the reserved icon change presentation of presentation pattern D12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in the normal gaming state, but the zone presentation of presentation pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern D12 will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state is executed, a reserved icon change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern D32 when special 1 variation display is performed in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern D32 is not set), the reserved icon change presentation of presentation pattern D42 can be performed when special 2 variation display is performed in the specific game state, but the reserved icon change presentation of presentation pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern D42 will not be performed. In this case, when the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state is performed, it is possible to perform a reserved icon change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be performed in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be performed in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may also be performed.

The number of types of reserve icons that can be displayed in the special 1 change display in the specific game state may be fewer than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, in the reserve icon change presentation, the CD icon may change gradually from blue to red to rainbow, etc., or the CD icon may selectively change to blue, red, or rainbow. The number of types of display modes that can be changed from the current display mode of the reserve icon may be fewer in the special 1 change display in the specific game state than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute, for example, a reserve icon change effect, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the reserve icon change effect. In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute, for example, a change effect that is performed when changing the reserve icon change, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the change effect. Note that even if a reserve icon effect is not executed, icon decorations that are displayed in conjunction with the reserve icon, such as the base on which the reserve icon is placed or a frame surrounding the reserve icon, may be displayed.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Lamp change effect)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, by changing the light emission mode of the winning slot lamp NR across one or more variable displays, it is possible to perform a lamp change effect, which is a type of pre-reading preview effect that makes the player anticipate that a jackpot game will be played.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the lamp change effect is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (execution rate e3 < execution rate e1). In other words, the lamp icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is made in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 38, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the lamp change effect is executed less frequently in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate e3 < execution rate e4). In other words, the lamp change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106.

With this execution rate of the lamp change effects, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The lamp change effect described above may be accompanied by various rainbow color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The number and content of the presentation patterns in Figure 38 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of lamp change presentations may be fewer for the special 1 change presentation executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 change presentation executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of lamp change presentations may be fewer for the special 1 change presentation executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 change presentation executed in the specific game state. Also, the number of types of rainbow presentations executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of types of lamp change presentations increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the winning entrance lamp NR, but may also be performed in conjunction with other lighting devices, such as the movable members 73, 74, decorative frames, game boards, and glass frame lighting devices 34b.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern E32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific gaming state is "0" (or presentation pattern E32 is not set), the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in the normal gaming state, but the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern E12 will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 variation display made in the normal gaming state is executed, a lamp change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in a specific gaming state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in a specific gaming state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern E32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or presentation pattern E32 is not set), the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E42 can be made when a special 2 variation display is made in a specific game state, but the lamp change presentation of presentation pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern E42 will not be made. In this case, when a special 2 variation display made in a specific game state is made, a lamp change presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be made in a special 1 variation display made in a specific game state can be made. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be made in a special 1 variation display made in a specific game state may also be made.

The special 1 change display in the specific game state may have fewer types of lamp change effects than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the lamp change effects may change gradually from no light → blue → red → rainbow, etc., or may change selectively from no light to blue, red, or rainbow. The special 1 change display in the specific game state may have fewer types of light emission modes to which it can change from the current light emission mode than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of types of lamp change effects increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

For example, a predetermined pattern of lamp change effects can be executed when the special 1 change display is in normal game mode or when the special 2 change display is in specific game mode, but when the special 1 change display is in specific game mode, the execution of the predetermined pattern of lamp change effects may be restricted.

The lighting (lighting patterns) that make up the lamp change effects can be associated with a variety of conditions, such as the change of the reserved (relevant) icon, when the game ball enters the starting hole, when a deciding effect (confirmation effect) such as "kyun" is executed, the button change sound when a buried operation button appears such as "gyuuin," the operating sound of movable members 73 and 74, the change start sound and return sound when multiple movable members combine to form a specific design, and the completion sound when a specific design is created.

If a lamp change effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the rate at which the predetermined condition is executed may be the same or lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, and the rate at which the lamp change effect is executed may be lower.

In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute lamp change effects, such as the winning slot lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device), but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute effects using the board lighting device or frame lighting device, while restricting the execution of effects using the winning slot lamp NR. In other words, in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute lamp change effects using a specified part (area, component unit, etc.), but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of effects using a specified part.

The lamp change effect or the pattern selected in the lamp change effect may change depending on the timing (e.g., when a win is won, when the change starts, when the change stops, how many times in a row it occurs, when the movable member starts/stops/decides to operate, the vibration or operation of the operation button, etc.). In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, the lamp change effect can be executed at a predetermined timing, such as when a win is won, and at a specific timing when the movable member operates, but in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the lamp change effect at the predetermined and specific timings.

The execution period of the lamp change effect (predetermined pattern of lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the specific game state may be shorter than the execution period of the lamp change effect (predetermined pattern of lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the execution period of the rainbow effect may be configured to increase or decrease as the execution period of the lamp change effect increases or decreases, or the execution period may be configured not to change.

The number of types of light-emitting parts (areas, components, etc.) that emit light in the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the specific game state may be fewer than the number of types of light-emitting parts (areas, components, etc.) that emit light in the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the range of light emitted in the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the specific game state may be smaller than the range of light emitted in the light-emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Here, the light-emitting effect may be such that the number of lights emitted by the aligned LEDs changes, gradually changing the number of lights emitted or the light-emitting range, or the light-emitting pattern may change when a light guide plate or the like overlaps with an image display device or board lighting device.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Operation of moving parts)
As shown in Figures 32 and 33, by operating the first movable member 73 in an operation mode that includes a weak operation mode and a strong operation mode that operates more significantly (more conspicuously) than the weak operation mode, it is possible to produce an operation effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played.

As shown in Figure 39, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the weak operation mode of the operation effect by the first movable member 73 than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate f31 < execution rate f11). In other words, the weak operation mode operation effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in the normal game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 39, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the rate at which the weak operation mode of the operation effect by the first movable member 73 is executed is smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate f31 < execution rate f41). In other words, the weak operation mode of the operation effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106.

With this execution rate of the activation effects, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned operational effects may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The execution rate of the strong activation mode in the activation presentation may be smaller, the same, or larger than that of the weak activation mode. Furthermore, for the strong activation mode, the relationship between winning at the start slots 45, 47 and the game state may be the same as for the weak activation mode, or it may be reversed, and the execution rate may be the same.

Here, the number of different operational effect patterns may be configured to be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of different operational effect patterns may be configured to be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of different rainbow color effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of different operational effects increases or decreases, or the number of different effects may remain unchanged.

In this embodiment, the operation of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the operation of other movable parts, such as the second movable member 74, may be similar to that of the first movable member 73. In this case, the first movable member 73 and the other movable parts may be linked (associated) to operate.

For example, if the execution rate of the operation effect of a specific operation mode when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), an operation effect based on a predetermined operation mode can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in the normal game state, but an operation effect of a specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state is executed, an operation effect of a performance mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow-colored performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of the operation effect of a specific operation mode when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), an operation effect based on a predetermined operation mode can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in a specific game state, but an operation effect of a specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. In this case, when a special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state is executed, an operation effect of an effect mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow-colored effect of an effect mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state may also be executed.

Activation effects can be executed at various times, such as when a change begins, when the effect develops, when a reach occurs, when a trigger occurs, or when a decisive effect (confirmation effect) occurs. In the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state, weak and strong activation activation effects can be executed at predetermined times, such as when a change begins, and at specific times, such as when a decisive effect occurs. However, in the special 1 change display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of strong activation at predetermined times, while allowing strong activation at specific times. In this way, differences may be made in the activation mode and whether or not activation effects can be executed depending on the timing.

The activation effect can be executed in conjunction with a light-emitting effect using a light-emitting means such as an LED attached to the movable member. In this case, the light-emitting effect can select a light-emitting pattern, color, or range, such as a pattern with gradually changing expected values, such as blue light → red light → rainbow light. Furthermore, the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state can execute activation effects with a predetermined light-emitting mode, such as blue light, and a specific light-emitting mode, such as rainbow light. The special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be able to restrict the execution of activation effects in the predetermined light-emitting mode while still allowing the execution of activation effects in the specific light-emitting mode. In other words, the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state can execute activation effects with a predetermined light-emitting mode, such as blue light, and a specific light-emitting mode, such as rainbow light. The special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be able to restrict the execution of activation effects in the predetermined light-emitting mode while still allowing the execution of activation effects in the specific light-emitting mode. Furthermore, if there are predetermined light emission patterns that can be executed during weak activation and predetermined light emission patterns that can be executed during strong activation, the execution rate of the predetermined light emission pattern may be smaller for the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Display effect by display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 40 , a light guide plate display effect, which is a type of pre-reading preview effect that makes a player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game, can be executed by displaying a light guide plate image DG across one or more variable displays on a light guide plate provided in front of the first image display device 70. For example, as shown in FIG. 40( a), in the first consecutive preview effect, a light guide plate image DG resembling a character is displayed, for example, at the start of the variable display. As shown in FIG. 40( b), in the second consecutive preview effect, a light guide plate image DG resembling a character in a different pose from the first consecutive preview effect is displayed, for example, at the start of the variable display. As shown in FIG. 40( c), in the third consecutive preview effect, a light guide plate image DG resembling a character in the same pose as the second consecutive preview effect but in a different color (such as a red character or a rainbow character) is displayed, for example, at the start of the variable display. Note that the timing of the light guide plate display effect is not limited to the start of the variable display, but may be during the variable display or at the end of the variable display, and the timing of the consecutively executed light guide plate display effects may be different.

As shown in Figure 40-1, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the light guide panel display effect is executed less frequently in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g1). In other words, the light guide panel display effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is made in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 40-1, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the light guide panel display effect is executed less frequently in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g4). In other words, the light guide panel display effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106.

With this execution rate of the light guide plate display effect, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-described light guide plate display effect may be accompanied by various rainbow color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

Here, the number of different light guide plate display effect patterns may be configured to be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of different light guide plate display effect patterns may be configured to be fewer for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of different rainbow color effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of different light guide plate display effects increases or decreases, or the number of different effects may remain unchanged.

In this embodiment, the display performance of a light guide plate has been described, but the display performance performed by a display means other than the first image display device 70, such as the second image display device 71 or a 3D filter, may be the same as the light guide plate display performance or may have a different execution ratio. In this case, the light guide plate display performance and the other display performance may be executed in conjunction (associated) with each other.

For example, if the execution rate of presentation pattern G32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific gaming state is "0" (or presentation pattern G32 is not set), the light guide plate display presentation of presentation pattern G12 can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in the normal gaming state, but the light guide plate display presentation of presentation pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) presentation pattern G12 will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state is executed, a light guide plate display presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of effect pattern G32 when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or effect pattern G32 is not set), the light guide plate change effect of effect pattern G42 can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in a specific game state, but the light guide plate change effect of effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) effect pattern G42 will not be executed. In this case, when a special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state is executed, a light guide plate change effect of an effect mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow effect of an effect mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display executed in a specific game state may also be executed.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various times, such as when a change begins, when the effect develops, when a reach occurs, when a flurry occurs, and during a deciding effect (confirming effect). With the special 1 changing display in the normal game state or the special 2 changing display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display effect can be executed at a predetermined timing, such as when a change begins, and at a specific timing, such as during a deciding effect. However, with the special 1 changing display in the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the light guide plate display effect at a predetermined timing, while allowing the light guide plate display effect to be executed at a specific timing. In this way, differences may be made in the display mode and whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in conjunction with other winning indication effects, such as an activation effect using a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display effect can select an illumination pattern, color, or range, such as a pattern with gradually changing expected values, such as blue light → red light → rainbow light. Furthermore, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, a light guide plate display effect with a predetermined display mode, such as blue light, and a specific display mode, such as rainbow light, can be executed in conjunction with other winning indication effects, such as activation effects. In the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the execution of other winning indication effects in the predetermined display mode may be restricted, while other winning indication effects in the specific display mode may be executed. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, a predetermined display mode, such as blue light, and a specific display mode, such as rainbow light, can be executed in conjunction with activation effects. In the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the execution of activation effects and light-emitting effects in the predetermined display mode may be restricted, while the specific display mode may be executed in conjunction with activation effects. Furthermore, if there is a predetermined display pattern (executable during weak activation) and a predetermined display pattern (executable during strong activation), the execution rate of the predetermined display pattern may be smaller for the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Display effects performed by devices other than the first image display device 70 are not limited to light guide plates, but may also include sub-LCDs installed on the game board, such as the second image display device, or sub-LCDs installed on the frame, and display effects may also be performed by combining these display means, including the light guide plate.

(Continuous preview performance)
32, 33, and 40, the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment is capable of executing a continuous preview effect, which is a type of pre-reading preview effect that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game by executing a predetermined effect across one or more variable displays. In this embodiment, color effects, zone effects, change notification sound effects, hold icon change effects, lamp change effects, display effects using light guide panels, etc. are executed in a linked (associated) manner.

Accordingly, according to Figures 35 to 39 and 40-1, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the rate at which the continuous preview effect is executed is lower for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. In other words, the continuous preview effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific gaming state than when a so-called left hit is made in the normal gaming state, where the gaming ball is shot toward the left area of the gaming area 106.

In addition, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the rate at which the continuous preview effect is executed is smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. In other words, the continuous preview effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106.

With this execution rate of the consecutive preview effects, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned continuous preview effect may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as explained in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following explanation.

Here, the number of different patterns of continuous preview effects may be configured to be fewer in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Also, the number of different patterns of continuous preview effects may be configured to be fewer in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of different types of rainbow effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of different types of continuous preview effects increases or decreases, or the number of types may be configured to remain unchanged.

Continuous preview effects may include not only linked effects that are performed consecutively or in conjunction with multiple variable displays, but also development effects (development teasing effects, step-up (SU) effects, etc.) in which the expectation of a jackpot game increases through gradual or continuous changes as the number of variable displays increases or as predetermined conditions such as the passage of time progress. Development effects may also be change effects, such as countdown or timer effects, in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when predetermined conditions (such as the passage of time) are met.

Selection effects that suggest different results depending on the selected option, such as roulette effects and effects in which the number of symbols increases when a player reaches a certain level; preview effects that indirectly predict the occurrence of events that lead to a jackpot, such as pre-reading suggestion text, LCD conversation previews/cut-in previews, and development roulette effects; content suggestion effects that suggest the content of the event that will be executed after the effect, such as jackpot type suggestion effects (XX bonus); operation suggestion effects such as button long press guidance effects on image display devices and rapid press effects (a gauge fills up while a button is pressed and held, and the button vibrates for each level reached); operation of movable devices (including dedicated movable devices and devices with other functions such as light guide plates) (weak preview (suggestion) operation, strong preview (suggestion) operation, suggestion, development, decision effect); and operation effects such as vibration of operation buttons, and other advance notification effects, may also have an execution rate based on the relationship between the game state and the start conditions described above.

For example, if the execution rate of continuous preview effects of a specific presentation mode when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific gaming state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), continuous preview effects of a specific presentation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specific presentation mode can be executed when a special 1 variation display is made in the normal gaming state, but continuous preview effects of a specific presentation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specific presentation mode will not be executed. In this case, when a special 1 variation display made in the normal gaming state is executed, continuous preview effects of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in a specific gaming state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in a specific gaming state may also be executed.

For example, if the execution rate of continuous preview effects of a specific presentation mode when a special 1 variation display is made in a specific game state is "0" (or a specific operation mode is not set), continuous preview effects of a specific presentation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specific presentation mode can be executed when a special 2 variation display is made in the specific game state, but continuous preview effects of a specific presentation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the specific presentation mode will not be executed. In this case, when a special 2 variation display made in the specific game state is executed, continuous preview effects of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in the specific game state can be executed. In this case, a rainbow presentation of a presentation mode that cannot be executed in a special 1 variation display made in the specific game state may also be executed.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 45 and/or the timing when the variable effect symbol 70a (first special symbol) starts to change, it is possible to execute a light-up effect for the first start hole 45, and to execute a motion effect for the first movable member 73 and/or second movable member 74. Similarly, in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, at the timing when the game ball enters the second start hole 47 and/or the timing when the variable effect symbol 70a (second special symbol) starts to change, it is possible to execute a light-up effect for the second start hole 47, and to execute a motion effect for the first movable member 73 and/or second movable member 74.

In contrast, in the special 1 variable display in normal game mode, when the game ball enters the first start hole 45 and/or when the variable effect symbol 70a (first special symbol) begins to change, the light-up effect of the first start hole 45 is not executed, and the motion effects of the first movable member 73 and/or second movable member 74 are not executed. In other words, when a left-handed hit is made in normal game mode, the light-up effect and motion effects are executed, but when a left-handed hit is made in special game mode, the execution of the light-up effect and motion effects is restricted.

By using different light-emitting effects and action effects for the special 1 variable display in the normal game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.
When the above-described light emission effects and action effects are executed, various types of rainbow color effects described in the first embodiment may be executed. The same applies to the following description.

When the three effect symbols 70a appear (stop) as specific patterns (specific results = chance symbols), it may trigger a so-called sudden probability change (2R probability change) or develop into an SP reach (a reach with a high possibility of a jackpot). The variable display in which such a chance symbol appears may occur once or multiple times. In this case, the rate at which a chance symbol appears may be lower in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Also, the rate at which a chance symbol appears in multiple variations may be lower in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. The appearance of a chance symbol may result in the execution of various rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. This also applies to the following explanation.

The effect symbols 70a may be displayed in a variety of modes, including a predetermined display mode consisting of an identification element such as a number (1-9) or a letter (A, B, etc.) and a decorative element such as a character, and a specific display mode consisting only of an identification element. There may be multiple predetermined display modes. Furthermore, in addition to or instead of the effect symbols 70a, a pseudo-consecutive symbol such as "NEXT" may be displayed, executing an effect (pseudo-consecutive) that changes multiple times regardless of a single starting condition (a single winning). Furthermore, in addition to or instead of the effect symbols 70a, the appearance of a variation symbol, a mode entry symbol, or a development symbol may be displayed to anticipate the execution of a different mode (e.g., a different effect mode) or effect from the current one. Special symbols such as pseudo-consecutive symbols, variation symbols, mode entry symbols, and development symbols contain different information (expectation of a jackpot) than regular effect symbols 70a. The appearance of such special patterns can also be an element of the linked performance.

The rate at which special symbols appear may be lower in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the total number of symbols that can be displayed (normal effect symbols + special symbols) may be lower in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the rate at which linked effects that are performed in conjunction with the appearance of special symbols are executed may be lower in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

Even if the player erroneously hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned linkage effects may include various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

(Example of production 2)
A specific example 2 of the variable display effect is shown below.

(Normal game state special 1 variable display)
41 and 42, the special 1 variable display in the normal game state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 41, at the timing of P0, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 42 (a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "1" to "0," and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control unit (presentation control board 320) changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins to change, but the effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of part of the decorative part or the entire or partial expansion/contraction operation, as in this embodiment (see Figure 42 (b)).

At timing P2, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 42 (c)).

At timing P3, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 42 (d)).

After that, at timing P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("259"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 42 (e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 120. Additionally, processing is performed in the performance control unit (performance control board 320) to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("259") (see Figure 42 (f)), and the first lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 120 begins to display a changing first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control unit (presentation control board 320) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the changing presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 also changes from "2" to "1". The hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern begins to change, and after preparatory operations, scrolling begins (see Figure 42 (g)).

At timing P7, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 42 (h)).

After that, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 42 (i)).

Then, at timing P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 120. Additionally, processing is performed in the performance control unit (performance control board 320) to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 42 (j)), and the first lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

From then on, the Special 1 variable display will be displayed in normal game mode according to the flow described above.

We have explained the Special 1 change display in normal game mode, but the basic flow is the same for the Special 2 change display in normal game mode and the Special 2 change display in special game mode (time-saving game mode, special bonus game mode).

Specifically, the first reserved number, first special symbol, first special symbol display 120, first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123), sub-first variable indicator 81, sub-first reserved indicator 83, first reserved number display area 70E, first reserved icon display area 70B, first lamp symbol, and first start opening 45 should each be read as the second reserved number, second special symbol, second special symbol display 122, second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124), sub-second variable indicator 82, sub-second reserved indicator 84, second reserved number display area 70F, second reserved icon display area 70D, second lamp symbol, and second start opening 47.

(Special 1 variable display of specific game state)
The special 1 variable display in the special game state will be explained using Figures 43 and 44. As shown in Figure 43, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1" when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1." However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 44 (a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "1" to "0," and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control unit (presentation control board 320) changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (it is not shifted). Also, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 start to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains stopped (see Figure 44 (b)).

At timing P2, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1." However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 44 (c)).

At timing P3, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 44 (d)).

After that, at timing P4, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the effect pattern 70a remains stopped (see Figure 44 (e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 120. Additionally, processing is performed in the performance control unit (performance control board 320) to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the effect symbol 70a remains stationary. In addition, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("259") (see Figure 44 (f)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 120 begins to display a changing first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control unit (presentation control board 320) changes from "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the changing presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Also, the display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol begins to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains stopped (see Figure 44 (g)).

At timing P7, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 44 (h)).

After that, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect patterns 70a remain stationary (see Figure 44 (i)).

Then, at timing P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 120. Additionally, processing is performed in the performance control unit (performance control board 320) to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues scrolling and the performance symbol 70a remains stationary, but the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 44 (j)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

From then on, the special 1 variation display will be performed in the specific game state according to the flow described above. Note that in the above example, the effect pattern 70a does not vary, but the effect pattern 70a may vary.

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of executing a specific change display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display in the specific game mode, and in the specific change display of this embodiment, the effect symbol 70a does not change. On the other hand, in the normal game mode, the aforementioned specific change display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 1 change display, and the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of executing a specific change display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display in a specific game state, and in the specific change display of this embodiment, the effect symbol 70a does not change. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the aforementioned specific change display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 2 change display, and the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T2 from the start to the end of the special 2 change display.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
In addition, when the specific variable display is not executed, the rainbow effect may be executed. In addition, the specific variable display may be accompanied by the rainbow effect of various types described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

In the specific variable display, at least one of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can be made to vary. For example, both the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can vary, or the effect pattern 70a can vary while the special pattern TZ does not, or the special pattern TZ can vary but the effect pattern 70a is not displayed.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the reserved icon and reserved number can be displayed variably in a predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45. In contrast, in the specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed variably in a specific manner that differs from the predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45, in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, in a specific game state, the reserved icon and reserved numbers can be displayed variably in a predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 47. In contrast, in a specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed variably in a specific manner that differs from the predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45, in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the special 1 variable display in normal game mode or the special 2 variable display in specific game mode, information about the number of reserved balls is displayed using a reserved icon, reserved number, and display, while in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode, it is displayed using the reserved number and display. In other words, the special 1 variable display in specific game mode has fewer total types of information about the number of reserved balls than the special 1 variable display in normal game mode or the special 2 variable display in specific game mode. It can also be said that the information about the number of reserved balls is more difficult to grasp (confirm) in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode than the special 1 variable display in normal game mode or the special 2 variable display in specific game mode.

Furthermore, the reserved (relevant) icon may not necessarily be displayed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, but may be displayed. Furthermore, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the reserved (relevant) icon may not be shifted based on an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, or the reserved (relevant) icon may not be operated, and may be displayed in a manner different from the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In other words, the reserved icon can be shifted in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, but the execution of the shift display of the reserved icon can be restricted in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the reserved icon can be displayed in a predetermined manner in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, but the execution of the display of the reserved icon in a predetermined manner can be restricted in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned shift display of the hold icon or the display of the hold icon in a predetermined manner may be accompanied by various rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the shift display of the hold icon or the display of the hold icon in a predetermined manner is not performed, the rainbow effect may be executed. The same applies to the following description.

(Example of production 3)
A specific example 3 of the variable display effect is shown below.

(Special 1 variable display of reserved number "1" in normal game state)
45, an example of the special 1 variable display when the reserved number in the normal game state is "1" will be described. Note that the variable pattern is selected from a plurality of variable patterns.

As shown in Figure 45, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 45 (a)).

Next, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "1" to "0," and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control unit (presentation control board 320) changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins to change, but the effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of part of the decorative part or the entire or partial expansion/contraction operation, as in this embodiment (see Figure 45 (b)).

At this time, the effect patterns 70a will begin scrolling in the order of the left effect pattern 70a, the central effect pattern 70a, and the right effect pattern 70a (see Figures 45 (c) to (e)).

After that, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the following order: left effect symbol 70a, center effect symbol 70a, and right effect symbol 70a (see Figures 45 (f) to (h)). Furthermore, in addition to the effect symbols 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). Furthermore, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (effect motion) (see Figures 45 (f) to (h)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a missing symbol on the first special symbol display device 120. The performance control unit (performance control board 320) then performs processing to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 45(i)), and the first lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

(Special 1 variable display of reserved number "4" in normal game state)
46, an example of the special 1 variation display when the reserved number in the normal game state is "4" will be described. Note that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in Figure 46, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "3" to "4." At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "3" to "4."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 46 (a)).

Next, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "4" to "3," and the display of the first special symbol begins to change. Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "4" to "3." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control unit (presentation control board 320) changes from "4" to "3," and processing is performed to start the changing presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 also changes from "4" to "3." Furthermore, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 also begins, but the effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of part of the decorative part or the entire or partial expansion/contraction operation, as in this embodiment (see Figure 46 (b)).

At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a, and the right side effect pattern 70a will begin scrolling simultaneously (see Figure 46 (c)).

When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "3" to "4." At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "3" to "4."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 46 (d)).

After that, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the left effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a, and the right effect pattern 70a temporarily stop simultaneously (see Figure 46 (e)). Furthermore, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) so as to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect pattern 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect action). Furthermore, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (effect action) (see Figure 46 (e)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a missing symbol on the first special symbol display device 120. The performance control unit (performance control board 320) then performs processing to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 46 (f)), and the first lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

From then on, the special 1 variation display will be displayed in normal game mode using the variation pattern selected according to the flow described above.

We have explained the Special 1 change display in normal game mode, but the basic flow is the same for the Special 2 change display in normal game mode and the Special 2 change display in special game mode (time-saving game mode, special bonus game mode).

Specifically, the first reserved number, first special symbol, first special symbol display 120, first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123), sub-first variable indicator 81, sub-first reserved indicator 83, first reserved number display area 70E, first reserved icon display area 70B, first lamp symbol, and first start opening 45 should each be read as the second reserved number, second special symbol, second special symbol display 122, second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124), sub-second variable indicator 82, sub-second reserved indicator 84, second reserved number display area 70F, second reserved icon display area 70D, second lamp symbol, and second start opening 47.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern shown in Figure 46, in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling simultaneously and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop simultaneously, has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern shown in Figure 45, in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence.

As shown in Figure 47, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state differs at least between reserve numbers "1" and "4", and for example, the average fluctuation time becomes longer as the reserve number increases. The special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state has the longest average fluctuation time when the reserve number is "1" and the shortest average fluctuation time when the reserve number is "4". Similarly, the average fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state differs at least between reserve numbers "1" and "4", and for example, the average fluctuation time becomes longer as the reserve number increases. The special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state has the longest average fluctuation time when the reserve number is "1" and the shortest average fluctuation time when the reserve number is "4". Note that the average fluctuation time may be the same or different between reserve numbers "2" and "3", and the average fluctuation times for reserve numbers "2" to "4" may be the same or different.

In contrast, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific game state is the same or different at least for reserved numbers "1" and "4." For example, if they are different, the average fluctuation time is longest when the reserved number is "1" and shortest when the reserved number is "4."

Here, when executing the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the reserve number is "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the reserve number is "1" is smaller than the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the reserve number is "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the reserve number is "1". In other words, even if the average fluctuation time differs between the reserve numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller for the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state than for the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state.

Furthermore, when a special 2 variation display is executed in a specific game state, the difference between the average variation display time when the reserved number is "4" and the average variation display time when the reserved number is "1" is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time when the reserved number is "4" and the average variation display time when the reserved number is "1". In other words, even if the average variation time differs between the reserved numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller for the special 1 variation display in a specific game state than for the special 1 variation display in a normal game state.

In the embodiment, the difference in average fluctuation time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state is smaller than the difference in average fluctuation time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, and the difference in average fluctuation time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is smaller than the difference in average fluctuation time between the reserved number "4" and reserved number "1" in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state (normal special 1 > specific special 2 > specific special 1).

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern shown in Figure 46, in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling simultaneously and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop simultaneously, has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern shown in Figure 45, in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence.

In the special 1 variable display in normal game mode, when the reserved number is "4," the variable pattern in Figure 46 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 45, and when the reserved number is "1" to "3," the variable pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 46. In other words, the special 1 variable display in normal game mode has multiple variable patterns determined depending on the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode, even when the reserved number is "4" to "1," the variable pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 46, and the variable pattern in Figure 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode, the variable pattern is almost determined regardless of the reserved number. Thus, when executing the special 1 variable display for loss determination in specific game mode, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the specified reserved number is fewer than the number of variable display time patterns determined by the specified reserved number when executing the special 1 variable display for loss determination in normal game mode. Furthermore, when the variable display is executed, it may be accompanied by the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment. In this case, the number of executable rainbow effect patterns may be fewer when the special 1 variable display for a loss determination is executed in the special game state than when the special 1 variable display for a loss determination is executed in the normal game state. The same applies to the following explanation.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the special 2 variable display for a specific game state, the variable pattern in Figure 46 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 45 when the reserved number is "4," and the variable pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 46 when the reserved number is "1" to "3." In other words, the special 2 variable display for a specific game state has multiple variable patterns that are determined depending on the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display for a specific game state, even when the reserved number is "4" to "1," the variable pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 46, and the variable pattern in Figure 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variable display for a specific game state, the variable pattern is almost determined regardless of the reserved number. Thus, when a special 2 variable display for a loss determination is executed in a specific game state, the number of variable display time patterns determined by a predetermined reserved number is fewer than the number of variable display time patterns determined by a predetermined reserved number. Furthermore, when the variable display is executed, it may be accompanied by the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment. In this case, the number of executable rainbow effect patterns may be fewer when the special 1 variable display for a loss determination is executed in a specific game state than when the special 2 variable display for a loss determination is executed in a specific game state. The same applies to the following explanation.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

When executing a special 1 variable display for a loss determination in normal gaming mode or a special 2 variable display for a loss determination in specific gaming mode, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the reserved number from "4" to "1" is fewer than the number of variable display time patterns determined by the reserved number from "4" to "1." In this way, when comparing the total number of variable display time patterns that can be determined by the reserved number from "4" to "1," rather than comparing by reserved number as described above, there are fewer special 1 variable displays for a loss determination in specific gaming mode than special 1 variable displays for a loss determination in normal gaming mode or special 2 variable displays for a deviation determination in specific gaming mode. This also achieves the aforementioned effect.

In the special 1 variable display in normal game mode, the variable pattern in Figure 46 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 45 when the reserved number is "4," and the variable pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 46 when the reserved number is "1" to "3." In other words, the special 1 variable display in normal game mode has multiple variable patterns that are determined depending on the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode, even when the reserved number is "4" to "1," the variable pattern in Figure 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in Figure 46, and the variable pattern in Figure 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode, the variable pattern is almost always determined regardless of the reserved number. In other words, the rate at which the same variable pattern is executed for reserved numbers "4" and "1" is higher when a special 1 variable display for loss determination is executed in specific game mode than when a special 1 variable display for loss determination is executed in normal game mode.

Furthermore, when the variable display is executed, it may be accompanied by various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment. In this case, the rate at which the same rainbow effect pattern is executed for the reserved number "4" and the reserved number "1" may be higher when the special 1 variable display for a loss judgment is executed in the specific game state than when the special 1 variable display for a loss judgment is executed in the normal game state.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the special 2 variable display for a specific game state, the variable pattern in FIG. 46 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in FIG. 45 when the reserved number is "4," and the variable pattern in FIG. 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in FIG. 46 when the reserved number is "1" to "3." In other words, the special 2 variable display for a specific game state has multiple variable patterns that are determined depending on the reserved number. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display for a specific game state, even when the reserved number is "4" to "1," the variable pattern in FIG. 45 is more likely to be selected than the variable pattern in FIG. 46, and the variable pattern in FIG. 46 is less likely to be selected (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variable display for a specific game state, the variable pattern is almost determined regardless of the reserved number. In other words, the rate at which the same variable pattern is executed for reserved numbers "4" and "1" is higher when a special 1 variable display for a loss judgment is executed in a specific game state than when a special 2 variable display for a loss judgment is executed in a specific game state.

Furthermore, when the variable display is executed, it may be accompanied by various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment. In this case, the rate at which the same rainbow effect pattern is executed for the reserved number "4" and the reserved number "1" may be higher when the special 1 variable display for a loss judgment is executed in a specific game state than when the special 2 variable display for a loss judgment is executed in a specific game state.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Regardless of the number of reserved balls (even when the reserved ball number is "4" or "1"), the Special 1 variable display in the specific game state has a higher execution rate of variation patterns with the same stop mode or start mode than the Special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, it can be said that the total number of variation patterns with different stop modes (start modes) is smaller for the Special 1 variable display in the specific game state than for the Special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the Special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figures 45 and 46, the effect symbol 70a begins scrolling after preparatory actions such as partial movement of the decorative elements or full or partial expansion/contraction. The presence or absence of such preparatory actions and the type of preparatory action create anticipation of a jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 48, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the preparatory action is executed less frequently in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate h3 < execution rate h1). In other words, the preparatory action is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 48, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the preparatory action is executed less frequently in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate h3 < execution rate h4). In other words, the preparatory action is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right region of the game area 106.

With such a preparatory action execution ratio, even if the player erroneously hits the ball to the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the gaming ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the gaming state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-described preparation operation may be accompanied by various rainbow-color effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

As shown in Figure 48, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of types of preparatory actions in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is smaller than the number of types of special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state (number of types of variable pattern H3 < number of types of variable pattern H1). In other words, the preparatory actions are more likely to be executed in the same pattern in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific gaming state than when a so-called left hit is performed in the normal gaming state, where the gaming ball is shot toward the left area of the gaming area 106.

As shown in Figure 48, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of types of preparatory actions is smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (number of types of variable pattern H3 < number of types of variable pattern H4). In other words, the preparatory actions are more likely to be executed in the same pattern in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in the normal game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

With such a number of types of preparatory actions, even if the player erroneously hits the ball left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. The player can then be guided to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
In addition, the number of types of rainbow effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of types of preparatory actions increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the temporary stop is made, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down the predetermined stop position.
A stopping operation is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the image a perform a flickering operation (performance operation).

As shown in Figure 49, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the stop operation is smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state (execution rate i3 < execution rate i1). In other words, the stop operation is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific gaming state than when a so-called left hit is made in the normal gaming state, where the gaming ball is shot toward the left area of the gaming area 106. Note that the above-mentioned stop operation may be accompanied by various types of rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following explanations.

As shown in Figure 49, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the execution rate of the stop operation is smaller for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate i3 < execution rate i4). In other words, the preparatory operation is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called right hit is made in the specific game state, which launches the game ball toward the right area of the game area 106. Note that the above-mentioned preparatory operation may involve various types of rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following explanations.

By using this type of stopping operation execution ratio, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 48, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of types of stop operations in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is smaller than the number of types of special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (number of types of variable pattern I3 < number of types of variable pattern I1). In other words, the same pattern of stop operations is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

As shown in Figure 48, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of types of stop operations in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is smaller than the number of types of special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (number of types of variable pattern I3 < number of types of variable pattern I4). In other words, the same pattern of stop operations is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is performed in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is performed in the normal game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106.

Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be executed in the same pattern when a left-handed hit is made in a specific game state than when a left-handed hit is made in a normal game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the left region of the game area 106, or when a right-handed hit is made in a specific game state, in which the game ball is shot toward the right region of the game area 106.

By providing such a number of different stopping actions, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, instead of performing both the preparatory operation and the stopping operation, it is also possible to perform only one of them.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is stopped due to a loss determination, there are two patterns: a variable stop pattern in which three effect symbols 70a are stopped in sequence (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 45, and a variable stop pattern in which three effect symbols 70a are stopped together as shown in FIG. 46. As shown in FIG. 50, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which three effect symbols 70a are stopped together is lower in the special 1 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is executed when a loss determination is made, compared to the special 1 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state and is executed when a game ball is shot toward the left side of the game area 106 in the normal game state, when a left hit is made in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display with the reserved number of "4" is executed, compared to the special 1 variable display with the reserved number of "4" and the reserved number of "4" is executed when a left hit is made. Note that this type of stop may involve the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence is higher in the special 1 variation display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, than in the special 1 variation display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state and is determined to be a miss. In other words, the pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence in the special 1 variation display for reserved number "4" is more likely to be executed when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is made in the normal game state, where the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106. Note that such a stop pattern may be accompanied by various types of rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is stopped due to a loss judgment, there are two types of variable stop patterns: one in which three effect symbols 70a are stopped in order (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 45, and one in which three effect symbols 70a are stopped together as shown in FIG. 46. As shown in FIG. 50, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop together is lower for the special 1 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a loss, than for the special 2 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a loss. In other words, when a left-handed shot is made in the specific game state, it is more difficult for the special 1 variable display with reserved number "4" to stop together with three effect symbols 70a than when a right-handed shot is made in the specific game state. Note that such a stop pattern may involve the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence is higher for the special 1 variation display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, than for the special 2 variation display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss. In other words, when a left-handed hit is made in the specific game state, the variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence in the special 1 variation display when the reserved number is "4" is more likely to be executed. Note that such a stopping pattern may involve the various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

As shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence is the same for the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal gaming state and is a loss judgment, or the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is a loss judgment, and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is a loss judgment. Also, as shown in Figure 50, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence is the same for the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal gaming state and the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is a loss judgment, and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is a loss judgment.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is started upon a loss judgment, there are two patterns: a variable start pattern in which three effect symbols 70a scroll sequentially as shown in FIG. 45, and a variable start pattern in which three effect symbols 70a scroll simultaneously as shown in FIG. 46. As shown in FIG. 51, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which three effect symbols 70a start scrolling when all three effect symbols 70a line up is lower in the special 1 variable display, which is executed upon a loss judgment when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state, than in the special 1 variable display, which is executed upon a loss judgment when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state. In other words, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which three effect symbols 70a line up and start scrolling when all three effect symbols 70a line up is lower in the special 1 variable display, which is executed upon a loss judgment when the reserved number is "4," when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is made in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106 in the normal game state. Note that this type of scrolling start may involve the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence is higher in the special 1 variation display in which a loss is determined when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in which a loss is determined when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state. In other words, the pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence in the special 1 variation display in which the reserved number is "4" is executed more easily when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a so-called left hit is made in which the game ball is shot toward the left area of the game area 106 in the normal game state. Note that this type of scrolling start pattern may involve the various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is stopped due to a loss judgment, there are two patterns: one in which three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence, as shown in FIG. 45; and one in which three effect symbols 70a start scrolling together, as shown in FIG. 46. As shown in FIG. 51, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which three effect symbols 70a start scrolling together is lower for the special 1 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a loss, than for the special 2 variable display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a loss. In other words, when a left-handed hit is made in the specific game state, it is less likely that the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling together in the special 1 variable display when the reserved number is "4" will be executed than when a right-handed hit is made in the specific game state. Note that this type of scrolling start may involve the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence is higher for the special 1 variation display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, than for the special 2 variation display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss. In other words, when a left hit is made in the specific game state, the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when the reserved number is "4" than when a right hit is made in the specific game state. Note that this type of scrolling start may involve the various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a start scrolling when all three effect symbols 70a are aligned is the same for the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state and is determined to be a miss, or the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, respectively. Also, as shown in FIG. 51, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in sequence is the same for the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal game state and the special 2 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss, and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss. Note that this type of scrolling start may involve the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the displayed effect symbol 70a may not scroll, or may have a special display mode in which some of the decorative elements such as characters have disappeared from the effect symbol 70a, or the effect symbol 70a may not be displayed at all. For example, the effect symbol 70a may scroll but the decorative elements such as characters on the effect symbol 70a may not perform the specified function, or other such modes may be used. In other words, compared to the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is more likely to display the effect symbol 70a in a special mode that differs from the mode displayed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Note that the display of such specially shaped effect symbols may be accompanied by the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

Special patterns such as the pseudo-consecutive patterns mentioned above may be displayed over or in place of the effect pattern 70a. In this case, the display of the special pattern makes all or part of the scrolling of the normal effect pattern 70a and the movements of decorative parts such as the characters in the effect pattern (preparatory movements and stopping movements) invisible. Furthermore, the rate or range of normal patterns obscured by the display of the special pattern is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Note that the display of special patterns in this manner may be accompanied by the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of production 4)
A specific example 4 of the variable display presentation will be explained with reference to Figure 51.

As shown in Figure 51(a), the "8" effect pattern 70a is displayed as a static display (temporary static display) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, while a reach effect is being executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed as a dynamic display in the central variable display area.

Then, as shown in Figure 52(b), an effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right effect symbols 70a change to a display mode different from their previous display mode (Figure 52(b)), suggesting high expectations for a jackpot. Then, a pattern size change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and a predetermined effect such as the insertion of a video is performed in the first image display device 70. The reduced-size effect symbol 70a changes from a normal display mode consisting of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character and a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and numeric section (identification characters), to a simple reduced display mode consisting of just the identification section.

As shown in Figures 51(d) and (f), the pseudo effect symbols (pseudo symbols) GZ are displayed in three rows, one above the other, to increase the anticipation of a jackpot game. After that, when the execution period for the reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 320 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in Figure 51(g), the jackpot effect symbol 70a of "888" indicating the type of jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily displayed (shaking and fluctuating) and then displayed stationary, ending the fluctuating effect.

In an embodiment, the variable display can be implemented using normal display patterns 70a and specific display patterns 70a that are displayed at predetermined times during the variable display (for example, when a reach effect is entered or during a reach effect, at the start of a variable, during a variable, or when a variable stops). The specific display patterns 70a can be not only changed display patterns 70a (varied patterns) or pseudo-patterns GZ as shown in Figure 51(b), but also mode entry patterns that suggest a transition to a specified mode, or development patterns that increase anticipation of a jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 52, the rate at which the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state displays the special pattern 70a is lower than the rate at which the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state displays the special pattern 70a (m32 < m12). In other words, when a left-handed hit is made in the specific game state, it is less likely that the special 1 variable display will display the special pattern 70a in a specific manner than when a left-handed hit is made in the normal game state. Note that such a display of the special pattern 70a in a specific manner may involve the various rainbow-colored effects described in the first embodiment.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 52, the rate at which the special mode effect symbol 70a is displayed is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (m32 < m42). In other words, the rate at which the normal mode effect symbol 70a is displayed is greater in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. In other words, it is more difficult for the effect symbol 70a to be displayed in a specific mode when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a right hit is made in the specific game state. Note that such a display of the effect symbol 70a in a specific mode may involve the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 51, it is possible to execute a display size change effect that changes the display size of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, the execution rate of the display size change effect that changes the display size of the effect symbol 70a is smaller for the special 1 variable display that is executed in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss than for the special 1 variable display that is executed in the normal game state and is determined to be a miss (n3 < n1). In other words, it is more difficult to execute the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in the specific game state than when a left hit is made in the normal game state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, the execution rate of the display size change effect that changes the display size of the effect symbol 70a is smaller for the special 1 change display that is executed in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss than for the special 2 change display that is executed in the specific game state and is determined to be a miss (n3 < n4). In other words, the execution of the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a is less likely to be executed when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The display size change effect may be accompanied by various rainbow color effects as described in the first embodiment.

The display size change effect does not necessarily have to be performed in conjunction with a reach effect, but can also be performed at a specified timing, such as when the change begins or during the change. The display size change effect may also be performed in association with a win suggestion effect, such as the operation of a movable part, or with specified conditions, such as the number of reserved balls or the operation of an operation button.

The execution rate of the symbol change effect may be lower for the special 1 change display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific gaming state and is a miss determination, than for the special 1 change display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal gaming state and is a miss determination, or the special 2 change display, which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific gaming state and is a miss determination. The execution rate of the symbol change effect may be lower for the special 1 change display, which is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is a miss determination, than for the special 1 change display, which is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the normal gaming state and is a miss determination, or the special 2 change display, which is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is a miss determination. The symbol change effect may also be accompanied by various types of rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The execution rate of the symbol change effect may be the same for the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific gaming state and is determined to be a miss, and the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is determined to be a miss. Also, the execution rate of the symbol change effect may be smaller or larger for the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "1" in the specific gaming state and is determined to be a miss, than for the special 1 change display that is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific gaming state and is determined to be a miss.

The effect (pattern change effect) in which the pattern changes to anticipate the execution of a jackpot game is not limited to a display size change effect, and may take other forms, such as a change in the position where the pattern 70a is displayed or a change in the display order of the pattern 70a. Furthermore, if the pattern change effect has multiple patterns with different display sizes, display positions, or display orders, the total number of pattern change effect patterns may be fewer for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of rainbow effect patterns executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of pattern change effect patterns increases or decreases, or the number of patterns may remain unchanged.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figure 52, the variable display shows reach effects (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, reach development teasing effect, etc.). And, as shown in Figure 54, the execution rate of reach effects is lower for special 1 variable displays that are executed in specific gaming states and are judged to be a miss than for special 1 variable displays that are judged to be a miss in normal gaming states (o3 < o1). In other words, reach effects are less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display when a left hit is made in specific gaming states than when a left hit is made in normal gaming states.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 54, the execution rate of reach effects is lower for special 1 variable displays, which are determined to be a miss in a specific game state, than for special 2 variable displays, which are determined to be a miss in a specific game state (o3 < o4). In other words, reach effects are less likely to be executed when hitting left in a specific game state than when hitting right in a specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.
The above-mentioned reach effects may be accompanied by various rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

By repeating multiple advance notification effects before a reach effect, such as a first effect such as a mode entry effect or a development effect being performed before a second effect such as a roulette effect or a development effect, expectations for a jackpot are increased. Here, the execution rate of advance notification effects executed before a reach effect may be lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In other words, the execution rate of reach effects executed from advance notification effects may be lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the execution rate of advance notification effects executed before a reach effect may be lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In other words, the rate at which a reach effect is executed after a pre-announcement effect is displayed is lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

The likelihood of transitioning to a jackpot game after a reach effect is executed is lower for the special 1 change display in normal game mode than for the special 2 change display in specific game mode, and the likelihood of transitioning to a jackpot game after a reach effect is executed is lower for the special 1 change display in specific game mode than for the special 1 change display in normal game mode (special 2 change display in specific game mode > special 1 change display in normal game mode > special 1 change display in specific game mode).

When a reach effect is selected from multiple patterns and executed, the total number of reach effect types may be fewer for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of rainbow effect types executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of reach effect types increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

Related effects such as the operation of movable members and vibration of operation buttons, which are performed in association with reach effects at appropriate times, such as during or before the execution of a reach effect, can be selected from multiple patterns and executed. In this case, the execution rate of related effects performed in association with reach effects is lower for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Also, the number of types of related effects performed in association with reach effects is fewer for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of types of related effects increases or decreases, or the number of types may be configured to remain unchanged.

The rate at which a normal reach develops into an SP reach or SPSP reach is lower for a special 1 change display in a specific game state than for a special 1 change display in a normal game state or a special 2 change display in a specific game state. The reach effect execution period is shorter for a special 1 change display in a specific game state than for a special 1 change display in a normal game state or a special 2 change display in a specific game state. The rate at which a reach effect spanning multiple changes is executed is lower for a special 1 change display in a specific game state than for a special 1 change display in a normal game state or a special 2 change display in a specific game state.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of production 5)
55 and 56, a specific example of the variable display effect 5 will be described. In the specific example of the variable display effect 5, the specific game state is set, and the first specific notification SR1 is being performed in the upper right area of the first image display device 70 to guide the player to make a right hit.

As shown in Figure 55, at timing P0, a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47, causing the second reserved number U2 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) to increase from "3" to "4." At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "3" to "4." Note that the first reserved number stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) is "0," and the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) is "0."

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. The second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 also changes from "3" to "4." Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is additionally displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually increases in size from a very small size) (see Figure 56 (a)). The first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is "0." The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 is "0," and no hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Next, at timing P1, the second reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "4" to "3," and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "4" to "3." Furthermore, the second reserved number U2 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control unit (presentation control board 320) changes from "4" to "3," and processing is performed to start the variable presentation.

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. The second hold number U2 indicated by the LED on the sub-second hold indicator 84 also changes from "4" to "3." Furthermore, the hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern on the sub-second variable indicator 82 also begins, but the effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of part of the decorative part or the entire or partial expansion/contraction operation, as in this embodiment (see Figure 56 (b)).

At timing P2, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1." However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 56 (c)).

Furthermore, based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "Hit right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which the audio output device 331 outputs a sound such as "Please hit right" (see Figure 56 (c)).

After that, at timing P3, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 56 (d)).

Then, at timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the second special symbol display device 122. Additionally, processing is performed in the performance control unit (performance control board 320) to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 56 (e)), and the second lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

Next, at timing P5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control unit (main control board 300) decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control unit (performance control board 320) changes from "3" to "2", and processing is performed to start the variable presentation. Although the main control unit (main control board 300) also has a first reserved memory based on a win at the first start port 45, the second reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 47 takes priority and the variable presentation is carried out.

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. The second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 also changes from "3" to "2." Furthermore, the hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern on the sub-second variable indicator 81 also begins, but the effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of part of the decorative part or the entire or partial expansion/contraction operation, as in this embodiment (see Figure 56 (f)).

At timing P6, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control unit (main control board 300) to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 56 (g)).

Furthermore, based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "Hit right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which the audio output device 331 outputs a sound such as "Please hit right" (see Figure 56 (g)).

After that, at timing P7, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("913"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down around the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 56 (h)).

Then, at timing P8, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the second special symbol display device 122. Additionally, processing is performed in the performance control unit (performance control board 320) to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing mode ("913") (see Figure 56 (j)), and the second lamp symbol finally stops in a losing mode (for example, off).

In this way, it is possible to execute a first specific notification indicating that a specific game state is being played, and a second specific notification that is executed in addition to the first specific notification based on the game ball entering the first start hole 45 while the first specific notification is being executed. By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first start hole 45. This can also lead the player to aim for a win in the second start hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate start hole 45, 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.
The above-mentioned first specific notification may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description. The above-mentioned second specific notification may be accompanied by various rainbow-colored effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

The second specific notification SR2 differs from the right-hit notification that is issued at the start of a jackpot game, and is issued based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state.

When only the first specific notification SR1 is executed, predetermined effects (win suggestion effects) such as notification sounds, light-emitting effects such as the start gate, and hold icon change effects can be executed, but when the second specific notification SR1 is executed, the execution of predetermined effects (win suggestion effects) such as notification sounds, light-emitting effects such as the start gate, and hold icon effects can be restricted. In other words, when a win is made at the first start gate 45 in a specific game state, the second specific notification SR can be executed instead of executing the predetermined effects.

Furthermore, the rate at which the specified effect (win suggestion effect) is executed is lower when both the first specific notification SR1 and the second specific notification SR2 are executed than when only the first specific notification SR1 is executed. Note that the specified effect (win suggestion effect) described above may also include the various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment.

By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball to the left in a specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of production 6)
As notification effects (pre-notification effects) that anticipate the execution of a jackpot game, there are a first notification that is executed at a predetermined timing (when the variation starts) and a second notification that is executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (when the start port wins). For example, in an embodiment, when the variation of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern) starts, it is possible to execute notification effects of the first notification, which have a first light-emitting mode (see FIG. 57(a)) in which the winning port lamp NR (start port 45, 47) flashes in blue, for example, and a second light-emitting mode (see FIG. 57(b)) in which the winning port lamp NR (start port 45, 47) flashes in a color different from the first light-emitting mode, for example, red. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the starting holes 45, 47, it is possible to execute a second notification notification effect using a third light emission mode (see Figures 57(d) and (e)) that is different from the first and second light emission modes, for example, by combining the winning hole lamp NR with a board lighting device 76 such as a decorative frame or a frame lighting device 34b to emit light. Note that even for the second notification, the first light emission mode and/or the second light emission mode may be executed. Furthermore, as a notification effect, there is provided a fourth light emission mode (see Figures 58(c) and (f)) that is different from the first to third light emission modes, for example, does not involve the lighting of the winning hole lamp NR.

As shown in Figure 58, the first, second, and third light-emitting modes are executed less frequently in the notification effect when the special 1 variable display is executed in the specific game state than when the special 1 variable display is executed in the normal game state (p31 < p11). Furthermore, the fourth light-emitting mode is executed more frequently in the notification effect when the special 1 variable display is executed in the specific game state than when the special 1 variable display is executed in the normal game state (p32 > p12). In other words, the first, second, and third light-emitting modes are less likely to be executed in the notification effect when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Furthermore, the fourth light-emitting mode is more likely to be executed in the notification effect when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

As for the notification effects, the first notification can be executed in the first, second, and third light-emitting modes, and the second notification can be executed in the first and second light-emitting modes, but the third light-emitting mode cannot be executed in the second notification. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 58, the first, second, and third light-emitting modes are executed less frequently in the notification effects for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p31<p11). Furthermore, the fourth light-emitting mode is executed more frequently in the notification effects for the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p32>p12). In other words, the first, second, and third light-emitting modes are less likely to be executed in the notification effects when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Furthermore, the fourth light-emitting mode is more likely to be executed in the notification effects when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Note that the light emission patterns referred to here may include the various rainbow light emission patterns described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

Even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, this can make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 57, a vibration effect is produced by the operation button 17 in conjunction with the notification effect described above. The vibration effect is intended to raise the expectation of a jackpot by vibrating the operation button 17, and may be executed in combination with a button illumination effect that causes the operation button 17 to illuminate. The notification effect for the first notification can be executed using a first illumination mode (see FIG. 57(a)), in which the winning slot lamp NR (starting slots 45, 47) flashes, for example, blue, and a second illumination mode (see FIG. 57(b)), which is different from the first illumination mode and flashes, for example, red, the winning slot lamp NR (starting slots 45, 47). Furthermore, a second notification can be executed using a third illumination mode (see FIGS. 57(d) and (e)), which is different from the first and second illumination modes and, for example, combines the winning slot lamp NR with another illumination means, such as a decorative frame or a board illumination device 76 or a frame illumination device 34b, to illuminate the winning slot lamp NR.

As shown in Figure 59, in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, the second notification has a higher probability of causing a vibration effect to be executed by the operation button 17 than the first notification (q12 > q11). In other words, in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is easier to execute a vibration effect in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. Also, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a lower probability of causing a vibration effect to be executed by the operation button 17 than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (r3 < r1). In other words, it is more difficult to execute a vibration effect when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

The vibration effect may be selected from multiple vibration patterns, such as a pattern that is executed over a certain period of time or a pattern that is executed intermittently at predetermined intervals. The vibration effect may also be selected from multiple effect patterns, such as a weak effect pattern in which the device vibrates without emitting light, or a strong effect pattern in which the device vibrates while emitting light. The special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have fewer total vibration effect patterns than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. The special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state may be capable of executing vibration effects of weak and strong effect patterns, but the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be capable of restricting the execution of vibration effects of weak effect patterns while enabling the execution of vibration effects of strong effect patterns.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effects described above may also be accompanied by various rainbow effect patterns as explained in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following explanations. Furthermore, the number of rainbow effect patterns executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of vibration effect patterns increases or decreases, or the number of patterns may remain unchanged.

The lighting effect is not limited to the starting lamp NR, but other parts such as the game board or frame may also light up.

As shown in FIG. 57, lighting effects by the winning slot lamp NR, activation effects of the first movable member 73, and vibration effects of the operation button 17 can be executed in synchronization with the timing at which the effect symbol 70a begins to change. Here, the lighting effects can be executed by selecting from multiple patterns, such as a mode in which only the winning slot lamp NR is lit, or a mode in which the winning slot lamp NR is lit in combination with other specific positions such as the first movable member 73, the operation button 17, the game board (board lighting device), and the frame. Furthermore, lighting effects can be executed by selecting from multiple patterns of light colors such as blue, red, and rainbow colors. Furthermore, the activation effects of the first movable member 73 can be selected from multiple patterns, such as weak activation and strong activation. Furthermore, the vibration effects of the operation button 17 can be executed by selecting from multiple patterns with different durations, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 57 , in this embodiment, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the light-emitting effect of the winning slot lamp NR and the operation of the movable device (movable member 73 and operation button 17) can be executed at the timing of the start of the variation. Similarly, in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light-emitting effect of the winning slot lamp NR and the operation of the movable device (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may be executed at the timing of the start of the variation. In contrast, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the light-emitting effect of the winning slot lamp NR and the operation of the movable device (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing of the start of the variation. In the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the light-emitting effect of the winning slot lamp NR and the operation of the movable device (movable member 73 and operation button 17) do not execute at the same time, but may execute at different times.

As such, the total number of winning suggestion effects executed simultaneously for the special 1 change display in the special game state is smaller than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the special game state. The timing for executing the effects may also be when a win is won, during a change, or when the change has stopped.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The above-mentioned winning indication effects may be accompanied by various types of rainbow effects as described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following explanations. Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow effects executed may be configured to increase or decrease as the number of types of winning indication effects increases or decreases, or the number of types may remain unchanged.

(Modifications of specific examples 1 to 6 of the performance)
In the normal game mode, the special 1 variable display displays the effect symbol 70a. However, in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game mode, the effect symbol 70a may not be displayed, or may not scroll even if it is displayed. Also, in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game mode, the effect symbol 70a may not be displayed, or may not scroll even if it is displayed, in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game mode. By doing this, even if a player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game mode, as in the normal game mode, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to allow the game ball to land in the first starting hole 45. This can also guide the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45 or 47 depending on the game mode, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game mode and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Even if the reserved icon is not displayed during the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state, related displays such as a pedestal that decorates the reserved icon may be displayed.

The effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state and the effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be the same or they may be separate. Furthermore, the effect symbol 70a used in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state and the effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be the same or they may be separate.

The special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be separate and not shared. Also, the special symbol TZ used in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state may be separate and not shared. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same for the special 1 variable display in the normal game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, or they may be different. Also, the display position and/or display mode of the special symbol TZ may be the same for the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, or they may be different.

The reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state may be shared without being separate. Also, the reserved numbers used in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state may be shared without being separate.

Pre-announcement effects with different execution times can be combined and executed. At the start of the change, the degree of expectation for a jackpot can be suggested by the action of the effect symbol itself or the character of the effect symbol, etc., at the start of the change, and the order in which the effect symbols start changing. Furthermore, at the end (stop) of the change, the degree of expectation for a jackpot can be suggested by the action of the effect symbol itself or the character of the effect symbol, etc., at the start of the change, and the order in which the effect symbols start changing. Furthermore, during the first half of the execution period of the pre-announcement effects with one or more change displays, conversation announcements, cut-in announcements, development destination roulette effects, long press or rapid press effects on the operation button 17, changes in the pending icon or the icon, display effects on the light guide plate, operation effects of the movable members 73, 74 (hint, development, decision effects), vibration effects of the operation buttons (hint, development, decision effects), timer effects, lamp illumination effects on the start ports 45, 47, etc., can be executed singly or in combination. Furthermore, in the latter half of the execution period of the advance notice effects with one or more variable displays, it is possible to execute development effects and deciding effects on display means such as LCD, display effects on light guide plates (such as light emission according to the result of deciding effects), vibration effects of the operation buttons 17 (hint, development, deciding effects), operation effects of frame devices and board devices (movable members 73, 74), effects suggesting the type of jackpot (such as XX bonus), timer effects, lamp lighting effects of the start ports 45, 47 in accordance with changes in reserve, etc., either alone or in combination.

In this case, the execution rate of the advance preview effect executed in the first half of the execution time is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Also, the execution rate of the advance preview effect executed in the first half of the execution time is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. Also, the execution rate of the advance preview effect executed in the second half of the execution time is smaller for the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than for the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. Note that the advance preview effect described above may involve the various types of rainbow effects described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following explanation.

If the advance notice effects include a first effect performed in the first half of the execution period and a second effect performed in the second half of the execution period, the first and second effects can be executed with the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, but the first effect can be executed with the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state while the execution of the second effect can be restricted. Also, the first and second effects can be executed with the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, but the first effect can be executed with the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state while the execution of the second effect can be restricted.

Even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, this can make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

The various effects that are displayed in the special 1 variable display during the specific game states (time-saving game state or probability variable game state) mentioned above, which give the expectation of a jackpot game being executed, may have an execution rate of "0".

The various effects (sometimes collectively referred to as win suggestion effects) that anticipate the execution of the aforementioned jackpot game may be set to only one effect (display) pattern, or may be selected and executed from multiple effect (display) patterns. Win suggestion effects are not limited to having different execution rates depending on the relationship between the special 1 change display in the normal game state, the special 1 change display in the specific game state, and the special 2 change display in the specific game state; for example, the execution rates of multiple patterns of win suggestion effects that can be selected for the special 1 change display in the normal game state (special 1 change display in the specific game state, special 2 change display in the specific game state) may be the same or different.

For example, when a win suggestion effect is selected from multiple patterns in the special 1 variable display in a specific game state, the execution rate of a specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be lower than that of a predetermined pattern. In contrast, when a win suggestion effect is selected from multiple patterns in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, a first pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the predetermined pattern in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state and a second pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the specific pattern in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may have the same execution rate, but may have a different execution rate from the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. This difference in the execution rate of the patterns can make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45 in the specific game state, even if they accidentally hit the ball left-handed in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state. This can also lead the player to aim for a win in the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

For example, if the color effect used to indicate the degree of expectation is selected from "blue," "red," and "rainbow," the "red" effect selectable in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may have a lower execution rate than the "red" effect selectable in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution rates of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. This is not limited to expectation displays, and the same can be applied to various effects that inspire anticipation of the execution of a jackpot, as described above. In other words, if a win suggestion effect is selected from multiple patterns, the execution rate of a specific pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be lower than the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. This also makes it possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state. This can lead the player to aim for a win at the second starting hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Here, the execution rate of the winning hint effect or the pattern selected for the winning hint effect may vary depending on predetermined conditions such as timing (e.g., when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row), the game state, or a combination with other patterns (e.g., fluctuation pattern, fluctuation time, etc.). For example, if a fluctuation pattern in which three effect symbols 70a stop sequentially is selected, the execution rate of the "red" effect executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state may be lower than the "red" effect executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. Similarly, if a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the effect symbols 70a is short is selected, the execution rate of the "red" light-emitting effect executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state may be lower than the "red" light-emitting effect by the winning slot lamp NR executed at the start of fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. This is not limited to the expectation indicator and the starting gate illumination effect, but can also be applied to various effects that anticipate the execution of the aforementioned jackpot game. In other words, when a winning suggestion effect is executed under predetermined conditions, the execution rate of the winning suggestion effect (predetermined winning suggestion effect pattern) performed by the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be lower than the winning suggestion effect (predetermined winning suggestion effect pattern) performed by the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. This also makes the player aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting gate 45, even if the player accidentally hits the ball left-handed in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state. This can also lead the player to aim for a winning ball entering the second starting gate 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by aiming for the appropriate starting gate 45 or 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The execution period of the win suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of win suggestion effect) performed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be shorter than the execution period of the win suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of win suggestion effect) performed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the execution period of the rainbow effect may be configured to increase or decrease as the execution period of the win suggestion effect increases or decreases, or the execution period may be configured not to change.

When a joint effect in which multiple types of winning suggestion effects are performed simultaneously is executable, the execution rate of the joint effect may be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. When there is a joint effect that is a combination of multiple types of winning suggestion effects performed simultaneously, the execution rate of a specified winning suggestion effect among the joint effects may be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. When there is a joint effect that is a combination of multiple types of winning suggestion effects performed simultaneously, the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state may be able to execute a specified winning suggestion effect and a specific winning suggestion effect, but the special 1 change display in the specific game state may be able to restrict the execution of a specified winning suggestion effect among the joint effects while allowing the specific winning suggestion effect to be executed.

Confirmation effects (including strong jackpot effects) include a first effect in which, at a predetermined timing, movable members 73, 74 operate, operation button 17 vibrates, and a predetermined display is made, such as a rainbow display or rainbow light emission, and a second effect is performed at a different timing from the first effect (for example, when the fluctuation starts, during the fluctuation, or when the fluctuation stops). The second effect can be performed alone or in combination, and has multiple patterns, such as a confirmation notification sound output when the fluctuation starts, a hold change in a rainbow mode, or a probability change confirmation effect that raises the expectation of a probability change occurring when a performance such as a battle victory is won.

The first effect and/or the execution rate of the first effect of the confirmation effect differs between the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state and the special 1 change display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution rate of the first effect of the confirmation effect may be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. The execution rate of the second effect of the confirmation effect may also be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the execution rate of one of the first and second effects of the confirmation effect may be smaller for the special 1 change display in the specific game state than for the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution rate of the other of the first and second effects of the confirmation effect may be the same or different. The confirmation effect described above may also include the various rainbow effects described in the first embodiment. The same applies to the following description.

When the special 1 change display is in the normal game state or the special 2 change display is in the specific game state, the first and second effects of the confirmation effects can be executed, but when the special 1 change display is in the specific game state, it is preferable to restrict the execution of at least a predetermined pattern of the second effect. For example, when the special 1 change display is in the normal game state or the special 2 change display is in the specific game state, the first effect involving the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is executed as the confirmation effect, while the second effect pattern involving the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 45. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 45, 47 depending on the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase the enjoyment of the game.

We have explained the winning hint effect in the variable display for a loss judgment, but even in the variable display for a win judgment, the relationship between the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be the same as when a loss judgment is made.

As explained above, if a player feels something is off about the degree or type of the expected effects (win hint effects) in the special 1 variable display in a specific game state, they may suspect an error in the gaming machine 100 itself. In this case, it is expected that the hall manager will check the control parts that govern the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the configuration of the effects in the special 1 variable display in a specific game state described above, the configuration of the board case described below makes it easier for the hall manager to check, reducing player stress and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in both the normal game mode and the specific game mode, when a predetermined effect (operation of a role device, notification sound effect, radial effect) is executed, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be executed than when the predetermined effect is not executed. For example, when an effect that is executed for a certain period of time (reach effect, customer waiting demo effect, pre-reading hold change effect, during jackpot game) is executed, the rainbow effect is less likely to be executed when the predetermined effect is not executed than when the predetermined effect is executed. Note that the radial effect is an effect in which light appears to spread radially, and can be executed using a liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate.
In addition, in both the normal game state and the specific game state, the same effects (rainbow effect, special feature activation, radial effect) may be executable from the above-mentioned specified effects (function feature activation, alarm sound effect, radial effect).

The number or types of executable rainbow effects may be configured to differ when comparing the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state with the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. Note that the number of rainbow effects may be the number of times at each timing at which the rainbow effect is executed (first timing, second timing, third timing, etc.). Furthermore, the types of performance modes of the rainbow effect may be executable patterns of rainbow light-emitting display for each of the effects of dialogue, cut-ins, hold icons, and the icons.
In addition, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be configured to have a smaller number of executable rainbow color effects or a smaller number of types than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to limit the reserved change, the accessory effect, and the pseudo consecutive effect, so that the special 1 variable display in the normal game state has a larger variety of effect modes of the rainbow light-emitting effect.

In addition, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display of a win in a normal game state or the special 2 variable display of a win in a specific game state than in the special 1 variable display of a win in a specific game state.
Furthermore, rainbow effects can be executed (at the time of a jackpot, advance notice effect, and deciding effect) regardless of whether the special 1 variable display for a win in a specific game state, the special 1 variable display for a win in a normal game state, or the special 2 variable display for a win in a specific game state is executed, but the number of times or the number of types of rainbow effects that can be executed may be greater in the special 1 variable display for a win in a normal game state or the special 2 variable display for a win in a specific game state than in the special 1 variable display for a win in a specific game state. For example, in the special 1 variable display in a specific game state, the execution of rainbow effects due to a hold change is limited.

In addition, rainbow effects can be executed (at the time of a jackpot, advance notice effect, and deciding effect) regardless of whether the special 1 variable display for a win in a specific game state, the special 1 variable display for a win in a normal game state, or the special 2 variable display for a win in a specific game state is executed, but the special 1 variable display for a win in a normal game state or the special 2 variable display for a win in a specific game state may be configured to have a greater number of different color movement directions than the special 1 variable display for a win in a specific game state.

Furthermore, the likelihood of a rainbow effect being executed may differ between a predetermined state in a specific gaming state (a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has passed since the variable effect ended without a win at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) and the predetermined state in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be executed more easily when the predetermined state is reached in the normal gaming state than when the predetermined state is reached in the specific gaming state. Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be more easily restricted when the predetermined state is reached in a specific gaming state than when the predetermined state is reached in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, if a predetermined time has passed since the variable effect ended without a win at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, a customer waiting demo effect will be initiated in the normal gaming state, but a demo effect will not be initiated in the specific gaming state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 can execute first instruction effects (such as a large right-hit display or "Aim for V" that instructs a player to hit right during a specific period (when a right-hit starts)) and second instruction effects (such as a small right-hit display, a display instructing a player to hit left such as "Please hit left" in normal gaming mode, and a display instructing a player to hit right such as "Please hit right" in specific gaming mode). The likelihood of a rainbow effect being executed may differ between when the first instruction effect is being executed and when the second instruction effect is being executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be more easily executed when the first instruction effect is being executed than when the second instruction effect is being executed. Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be more easily restricted when the second instruction effect is being executed than when the first instruction effect is being executed.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45), Alternatively, based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can display a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and based on the judgment, can display an expectation level (e.g., a color effect) that raises anticipation of the execution of the special game, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the expectation level display (e.g., a color effect) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). The display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) based on a second start condition, and a special performance (e.g., a zone performance) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game over a predetermined period based on the judgment can be executed at either a predetermined variable display period based on one of the judgments or a predetermined variable display period based on multiple of the judgments, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the special performance (e.g., zone performance) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or based on the second winning means ( Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole (47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and based on the judgment, can execute an alert sound effect (such as an alert sound when a reserved icon changes) that raises anticipation of the execution of the special game, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the alert sound effect (such as an alert sound when a reserved icon changes) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a second start condition is established based on the establishment of a first start condition by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). Based on the second start condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light-emitting effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) that are executed consecutively or in conjunction with each other in multiple variable displays, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light-emitting effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the game state has a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45), or a game state (jackpot game) into the second winning means (second start opening 47), Based on a second start condition established by a winning ball, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a reserve icon change performance can be executed in which the display mode of the reserve icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the start condition is established changes from a normal mode (e.g., a CD icon) to a specific mode (e.g., a colored character icon), and the execution rate of the reserve icon change performance is smaller for the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than for the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or based on the second winning result, Based on a second start condition established by a game ball entering the prize means (second start port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a light-emitting effect (e.g., lighting up the prize port lamp NR) can be executed based on a win in the first prize means (first start port 45), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the light-emitting effect (e.g., lighting up the prize port lamp NR) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and has the first display means (first image display device 70) and a second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) different from the first display means, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or the second winning means Based on a second start condition established by a game ball entering the (second start hole 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) can execute a display performance in a display mode including a first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (e.g., a rainbow effect, etc.), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the display performance in the first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) on the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). Based on a second start condition established, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute an operation performance of the movable role element (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in an operation mode including a first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) and a second operation mode (e.g., strong operation such as a win), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) of the operation performance by the movable role element (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45), Alternatively, based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can display a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and based on the judgment, can display an expectation level (e.g., a color effect) that raises anticipation of the execution of the special game, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the expectation level display (e.g., a color effect) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). The display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) based on a second start condition, and a special performance (e.g., a zone performance) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game over a predetermined period based on the judgment can be executed at either a predetermined variable display period based on one of the judgments or a predetermined variable display period based on multiple of the judgments, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the special performance (e.g., zone performance) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or based on the second winning means ( Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole (47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and based on the judgment, can execute an alert sound effect (such as an alert sound when a reserved icon changes) that raises anticipation of the execution of the special game, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the alert sound effect (such as an alert sound when a reserved icon changes) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a second start condition is established based on the establishment of a first start condition by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). Based on the second start condition, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light-emitting effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) that are executed consecutively or in conjunction with each other in multiple variable displays, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light-emitting effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the game state has a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45), or a game state (jackpot game) into the second winning means (second start opening 47), Based on a second start condition established by the winning of a ball, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a reserve icon change performance can be executed in which the display mode of the reserve icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the start condition is established changes from a normal mode (e.g., a CD icon) to a specific mode (e.g., a colored character icon), and the execution rate of the reserve icon change performance is smaller for the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than for the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or based on the second winning result, Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the prize means (second start port 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and a light-emitting effect (e.g., the illumination of the prize port lamp NR) can be executed based on a win into the first prize means (first start port 45), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the light-emitting effect (e.g., the illumination of the prize port lamp NR) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and has the first display means (first image display device 70) and a second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) different from the first display means, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or the second winning means Based on a second start condition established by a game ball entering the (second start hole 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) can execute a display performance in a display mode including a first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (e.g., a rainbow effect, etc.), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the display performance in the first mode (e.g., a blue effect, etc.) on the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). Based on a second start condition established, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute an operation performance of the movable role element (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in an operation mode including a first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) and a second operation mode (e.g., strong operation such as a win), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) of the operation performance by the movable role element (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (100), which has a normal game state and a specific game state (time-shortened game state, probability variable game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or based on the second winning means ( Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 47), a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and when the first start condition is established in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, a variable display of at least one of the performance pattern 70a or the special performance pattern TZ without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display) can be executed, and when the first start condition is established in the normal game state, the specific variable display is not executed.
In order to solve the above problem, according to another gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (100), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-shortened gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45). The display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) based on the first start condition, or based on a second start condition that is established by the entry of a game ball into a second winning means (second start port 47), and when the variable display based on the first start condition is executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (for example, color effects, zone performance, change in pending icon, alarm sound, light emission, operation of movable parts, etc.) of a performance type that cannot be executed with the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (100), which has a normal game state and a specific game state (time-shortened game state, probability variable game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or based on the second winning means ( Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 47), a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and when the first start condition is established in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, a variable display of at least one of the performance pattern 70a or the special performance pattern TZ without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display) can be executed, and when the second start condition is established in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not executed.
In order to solve the above problem, according to another gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on the judgment becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed in the gaming machine (100), which has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-shortened gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45). The display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) based on a first start condition, or based on a second start condition that is established by the entry of a game ball into a second winning means (second start port 47), and when the variable display based on the second start condition is executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (for example, color effects, zone performance, change in pending icon, alarm sound, light emission, operation of movable parts, etc.) of a performance type that cannot be executed with the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or Based on a second start condition established by a game ball entering the second winning means (second start opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and in the normal game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the first start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, a rotation or other movement), and in the specific game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the first start condition can be displayed in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner (for example, no movement or no display).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a game ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and in the specific game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the second start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, a rotation or other movement), and in the specific game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls based on the first start condition can be displayed in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner (for example, no movement or no display).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45) or a second start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47). Based on the conditions, the display means (first image display device 70) can display a varying display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and when the varying display for loss determination based on the first start condition is executed in the normal gaming state, the difference between the average display time for the maximum reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) and the average display time for a predetermined reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) smaller than the maximum reserved number is smaller than the difference between the average display time for the maximum reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) and the average display time for a predetermined reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) smaller than the maximum reserved number.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by a gaming ball winning into the first winning means (first start opening 45), is capable of executing a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47), and is characterized in that when executing the variable display for loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state, the number of patterns of variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number is fewer than the number of patterns of variable display time determined by the predetermined reserved number when executing the variable display for loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), The display means (first image display device 70) can display a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) based on a second start condition established by the winning of a game ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47), and is characterized in that the same variable display pattern is executed more frequently between the first reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) and the second reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) when the variable display of a loss determination based on the first start condition is executed in the specific gaming state than when the variable display of a loss determination based on the first start condition is executed in the normal gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45) or a second start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47). Based on the conditions, the display means (first image display device 70) can display a varying display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the difference between the average display time for the maximum reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) when executing the varying display for loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state and the average display time for a predetermined reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) smaller than the maximum reserved number when executing the varying display for loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is smaller than the difference between the average display time for the maximum reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) when executing the varying display for loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state and the average display time for a predetermined reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) smaller than the maximum reserved number.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by a gaming ball winning into the first winning means (first start opening 45), is capable of executing a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47), and is characterized in that when executing the variable display for loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state, the number of patterns of variable display time determined by the specified reserved number when executing the variable display for loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is fewer than the number of patterns of variable display time determined by the specified reserved number when executing the variable display for loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention makes a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), The display means (first image display device 70) can display a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) based on a second start condition established by the winning of a game ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47), and is characterized in that the same variable display pattern is executed more frequently between the first reserved number (e.g., reserved 4) and the second reserved number (e.g., reserved 1) when the variable display is executed to determine a loss based on the first start condition in the specific game state than when the variable display is executed to determine a loss based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed.The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or a specific gaming state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a jackpot game is executed based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), Based on a second start condition established by winning, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute a motion display (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the motion display (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed.The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or a specific gaming state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a jackpot game is executed based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), Based on a second start condition established by winning, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute a motion display (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller number of motion displays (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and specific gaming states (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that are more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45) or by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47), The display means (first image display device 70) can display a varying display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) based on a second start condition that is established by the first start condition, and the varying display can be performed with the symbol in a first mode (e.g., 1 to 9) and the symbol in a second mode (e.g., special symbol without numerical information) that is displayed at a predetermined timing of the varying display, and the varying display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller proportion of symbols in the second mode (e.g., special symbol without numerical information) displayed than the varying display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed.The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or a specific gaming state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a jackpot game is executed based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), Based on a second start condition established by winning, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute a motion display (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the motion display (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed.The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or a specific gaming state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a jackpot game is executed based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), Based on a second start condition established by winning, the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute a motion display (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller number of motion displays (for example, a preparatory motion or a stopping motion) of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45), or based on the second winning means ( Based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second start hole (47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the symbol (performance symbol 70a), and in the variable display, the symbol can be displayed as a first symbol in a predetermined pattern (e.g., 1 to 9) and a second symbol in a specific pattern (e.g., a special symbol that does not have numerical information), and the first symbol is displayed more frequently in the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the display means The (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display has a stop display mode (e.g., a short time until stop) in which the pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed as stopped, which includes a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode (e.g., a long time until stop) in which the stop display period is different, and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific game state has a lower execution rate of the first stop display mode (e.g., a short time until stop) than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the pattern is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a first start condition that is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or a second start condition that is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). The variable display of the symbol (70a) can be executed, and the stop display modes in which the symbol (70a) is stopped in the variable display include a first stop display mode (e.g., simultaneous stop) in which the symbol (70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) in which the symbol (70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and the variable display in which a miss is determined based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific gaming state has a higher execution rate of the second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) than the variable display in which a miss is determined based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the normal gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first winning means (first start hole 45) is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means. Based on the start condition, or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of a pattern change effect that changes the display size of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) than the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a prize at the start port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the amount of game balls entering the first winning means (first start port 45) Based on a first start condition established by a win, or based on a second start condition established by a game ball entering the second win means (second start opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a), and the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller rate of execution of a reach effect than the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the display means The (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display has a stop display mode (e.g., a short time until stop) in which the pattern (performance pattern 70a) is displayed as stopped, which includes a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode (e.g., a long time until stop) in which the stop display period is different, and the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific gaming state has a lower execution rate of the first stop display mode (e.g., a short time until stop) than the variable display that is determined to be a miss based on the second start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the pattern is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a first start condition that is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or a second start condition that is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). The variable display of the symbol (70a) can be executed, and the stop display modes in which the symbol (70a) is stopped in the variable display include a first stop display mode (e.g., simultaneous stop) in which the symbol (70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) in which the symbol (70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and the variable display in which a loss is determined based on the first start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific gaming state has a higher execution rate of the second stop display mode (e.g., sequential stop) than the variable display in which a loss is determined based on the second start condition when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached in the specific gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first winning means (first start hole 45) is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means. Based on the start condition, or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of a pattern change performance that changes the display size of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) than the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a prize at the start port 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the amount of game balls entering the first winning means (first start port 45) Based on a first start condition established by a win, or based on a second start condition established by a game ball entering the second win means (second start opening 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can execute a variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a), and the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific game state has a smaller rate of execution of a reach effect than the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the first start condition is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45). Based on a second start condition established by a game ball entering the second winning means (second starting hole 47), or based on a second starting condition established by a game ball entering the second winning means (second starting hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) can display a varying display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a), and can execute a first specific notification (for example, a right-hit display) indicating that the specific game state is being reached, and a second specific notification (a display or notification separate from the right-hit display) that is executed in addition to the first specific notification (right-hit display) based on a game ball entering the first winning means when the first specific notification (right-hit display) is being executed.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start hole 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming state has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the display means (first screen) displays a special game based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start hole 45) or a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start hole 47). The display device (image display device 70) can display the varying patterns (performance patterns 70a), and the light-emitting performance at a predetermined position (e.g., the start gate lamp NR) and the operation performance of the movable role devices (e.g., the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state can be executed at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won or when a fluctuation starts), and the light-emitting performance at the predetermined position (e.g., the start gate lamp NR) and the operation performance of the movable role devices (e.g., the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state can be restricted from being executed at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won or when a fluctuation starts).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is capable of executing the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47), and a predetermined timing is used as a notification effect to anticipate the execution of the special game. The system is capable of executing a first notification at a timing (for example, when a variation starts) and a second notification at a timing different from the first notification (when a winning ball is entered into the starting gate), and the first notification can be executed in a first mode (for example, the starting gate lamp NR flashing blue) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, the starting gate lamp NR flashing red), and the second notification can be executed in a third mode different from the first and second modes (for example, the starting gate lamp NR and the board and/or frame lighting device lighting up), and is characterized in that the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the first to third modes in the notification presentation and a larger execution rate of the notification presentation in a fourth mode different from the first to third modes (for example, the starting gate lamp NR not lighting up) in the notification presentation, compared to the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. The gaming machine (100) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is capable of executing the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a first start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or based on a second start condition established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47), and a first notification is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation starts) as a notification effect that raises expectations for the execution of the special game. and a second notification that is made at a different timing from the first notification (when the ball enters the starting gate), and the first notification can be made in a first mode (for example, the starting gate lamp NR flashing blue), a second mode different from the first mode (for example, the starting gate lamp NR flashing red), and a third mode different from the first and second modes (for example, the starting gate lamp NR and the board and/or frame lighting device illuminating). The second notification can be made in the same mode as the first and second modes, but cannot be made in the same mode as the third mode. Compared to the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state, the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the first to third modes in the notification presentation, and a larger execution rate of the notification presentation of a fourth mode different from the first to third modes (for example, the starting gate lamp NR not illuminating).

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, a judgment is made based on the establishment of a start condition (a winning entry into the start opening 45, 47), and when the variable display of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) executed based on said judgment results in a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. In this gaming machine (100), the gaming states include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the pattern is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70) based on a first start condition that is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning means (first start opening 45) or a second start condition that is established by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning means (second start opening 47). The variable display (performance symbol 70a) can be executed, and the light-emitting performance that anticipates the execution of the special game can be executed in a first light-emitting mode using the first winning means (starting gate lamp NR) and a second light-emitting mode using another light-emitting means (for example, a board and/or frame lighting device) in conjunction with the first winning means, and in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, the second light-emitting mode has a higher execution rate of a vibration performance by a vibration means (operation button) than the first light-emitting mode, and the variable display based on the first starting condition executed in the special game state has a lower execution rate of the vibration performance than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In principle, the third embodiment will be described using the same gaming machine as the first embodiment, but the reference numerals of some of the components shown in Figures 60 to 92 will be used only in the third embodiment.

(Summary of specific functions)
The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment can be controlled to activate a specific function, also known as a complete function, which limits the progress of the game, at a predetermined timing when a specific value (sometimes called the MY value) derived based on the amount of game value awarded (e.g., prize balls) and the amount used (safe balls and out balls) reaches a predetermined value.

(Gaming value counting process)
The main CPU 301a performs a game value counting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process for counting game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (mainly the first start port 112 and the general winning port) during the low-probability non-time-shortened game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 11a during the low-probability non-time-shortened game state, the total payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into each winning port (the general winning port and the large winning port 117, 127) and each starting port (the first start port 112 and the second start port 115) regardless of the game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 11a regardless of the game state.

Note that "prize balls" refers to game balls that have been awarded to a player, regardless of whether payout from the gaming machine 100 has been completed (whether or not actual payout of game balls has been completed). Furthermore, the concept of "payout number" includes not only the number of game balls that have been actually paid out, but also the number of game balls stored in the payout counter of the gaming machine 100 (the number of game balls that have not yet been actually paid out).

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 100 counts the total payout number as the "planned number of prize balls" rather than the "actual payout number." To explain in more detail, when the gaming machine 100 detects the entry of a game ball into each winning slot or starting slot (general winning slot, first starting slot 112, second starting slot 115, large winning slot 117, 127), it calculates the number of prize balls to be paid out (planned number of prize balls) based on the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to each winning slot or starting slot and the corresponding number of prize balls. The total payout number is counted by adding the planned number of prize balls to the total payout counter. In other words, the gaming machine 100 counts the total payout number based on the value of the prize ball counter (planned number of prize balls), rather than the number of game balls paid out from the payout device (actual payout number). The total payout number may also be counted based on the "actual payout number" rather than the "planned number of prize balls."

In addition, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of payouts during normal play is counted based on the "planned number of prize balls" rather than the "actual number of payouts," just like the total number of payouts. Note that the number of payouts during normal play may also be counted based on the "actual number of payouts" rather than the "planned number of prize balls."

(Performance display data setting process)
The main CPU 301a performs a performance display data setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values for the four game sections saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds.

(MY value monitoring process and specific value arrival process)
The main CPU 301a performs an MY value monitoring process. Specifically, it calculates an MY value (described later) based on the total number of outs and the total number of payouts, and performs a process to update the MY value. Then, the main CPU 301a performs a specific value reaching determination process. Specifically, it performs a process to determine whether the MY value reaches a specific value, or the like, and determines whether the conditions for activating a specific function (described later) are met.

(Specific function activation flag determination process)
The main CPU 301a performs processing to determine whether or not a specific function activation flag is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs processing to determine whether or not a specific function activation flag is set in a specific function activation flag storage area of the main RAM 301c. If the specific function activation flag is set, for example, the following processing is executed.

If the specific function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs processing to invalidate the winning. Specifically, the main CPU 301a creates data indicating that a winning has occurred at the first start port 112 or the second start port 115, but does not use the created data for game control (determining the number of winning balls, random number drawing, etc.) (voiding the winning). When this processing is completed, the main CPU 301a ends the current start port detection switch input processing.

If the special function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs a variation stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a clears the variation time and performs a process to stop the variation. When this process is completed, the main CPU 301a ends the current special symbol variation process.
If the specific function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs a variation stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a clears the variation time and performs a process to stop the variation. When this process is completed, the main CPU 301a ends the current normal symbol variation process.

If the specific function activation flag is set, the main CPU 301a performs auxiliary game cancellation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a cancels the current auxiliary game and stops the operation of the normal electric device (closes the starting movable piece), and also performs processing to clear the values of various timer counters related to the auxiliary game (maximum number of times the starting movable piece is opened, opening time of the auxiliary game, opening time of the second starting port 115, interval time, ending time of the auxiliary game, etc.). When this processing is completed, the main CPU 301a ends the current auxiliary game processing.

(Main control board MY value monitoring process)
The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment can be controlled to activate a specific function that limits the progress of a game at a predetermined timing when a specific value (sometimes called an MY value) derived from the amount of game value awarded (e.g., prize balls) and the amount used (safe balls and out balls) reaches a predetermined value. When the specific function is activated, a predetermined process is executed, such as stopping the game (game stop) and notifying the relevant matter (that the game is stopped because a specific condition has been met). Examples of "game stop" include stopping the variation of special symbols and normal symbols (variation stop), and invalidating any winnings at each winning slot and starting slot (general winning slot, first starting slot 112, second starting slot 115, and large winning slot 117, 127).

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the progress of the game is restricted by stopping the game when a specific function is activated. Note that the gaming machine of the present invention may also prohibit the launch of game balls (stop launch) in addition to restricting the progress of the game when a specific function is activated. Furthermore, the launch may be stopped, for example, by stopping the flow of electricity to the launch solenoid 353 or the ball feed solenoid 354.

In the gaming machine 100, the specific function is activated when the number of gaming balls increases from a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000 balls) based on the lowest number of gaming balls when game results are obtained during a day's business hours, or after the end of a jackpot game if the jackpot symbol is not confirmed or a jackpot game is in progress when the predetermined value is reached. More specifically, in the gaming machine 100, the specific function is activated when the number of gaming balls increases from a predetermined value (95,000 balls) based on the value (MY calculation reference value) when the number of gaming balls decreases the most between the reference value at power-on (reference time = 0) and the time the power is cut off, or after the end of a jackpot game if the jackpot symbol is not confirmed or a jackpot game is in progress when the predetermined value is reached. This allows the gaming machine 100 to provide a wide range of gameplay while preventing excessive gambling.

In the following explanation, the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the total number of outs from the total number of payouts after the power is turned on (after business begins for the day) may be referred to simply as the "specific value." Note that the specific value when the power is turned on (when business begins for the day) is "0." Furthermore, the value of the specific value when it has decreased the most after power is turned on (the specific value when the number of game balls when a game result is obtained) may be referred to simply as the "MY calculation reference value." From another perspective, the "MY calculation reference value" can be said to be the value of the specific value when it has decreased the most in the results of game play from the start of business for the day (from power on) to the present.

In the gaming machine 100, the special function is activated when the deviation value between the special value and the MY calculation reference value reaches "95,000."

In the following explanation, the deviation value between the specific value and the MY calculation reference value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY calculation reference value from the specific value) may be referred to simply as the "MY value." In other words, the "MY value" can be said to be the increase in the number of game balls relative to the MY calculation reference value. As will be explained later, the MY value is always "0" or greater and is never a negative value (always "MY value ≧ 0").

The MY value ("95000") that is the condition for activating a specific function may be referred to simply as the "MY upper limit." Furthermore, the number of game balls remaining up to the MY value (MY upper limit "95000") that satisfies the condition for activating a specific function (MY upper limit - MY value) may be referred to simply as the "remaining MY number."

The main CPU 301a performs processing to determine whether there has been a change in the total payout number or the total number of outs. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs processing to determine whether there has been a change in at least one of the values of the total payout counter and the total number of outs counter in the main RAM 301c. If there has been a change in at least one of the total payout number and the total number of outs, the main CPU 301a performs processing to calculate a specific value. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs processing to subtract the value of the total number of outs counter from the value of the total payout counter in the main RAM 301c to calculate the current specific value. If there has been no change in either the total payout number or the total number of outs, the main CPU 301a ends the current MY value monitoring processing.

The main CPU 301a performs processing to determine whether the specific value is less than the MY calculation reference value. Specifically, the main CPU 301a references the MY calculation reference value stored in the MY calculation reference value storage area of the main RAM 301c and performs processing to determine whether the current specific value is less than that value. If the specific value is less than the MY calculation reference value (if "specific value < MY calculation reference value"), the main CPU 301a performs MY calculation reference value update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a updates the value of the specific value to the new MY calculation reference value and stores it in the MY calculation reference value storage area of the main RAM 301c. If the specific value is greater than or equal to the MY calculation reference value (if "specific value ≥ MY calculation reference value"), the main CPU 301a performs MY value update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a subtracts the MY calculation reference value from the specific value and stores the updated MY value in the MY value storage area of the main RAM 301c as the new MY value.

In this way, the MY calculation reference value is updated when the specific value (total payouts - total outs) is updated negatively. Explained from the opposite perspective, the MY calculation reference value is not updated when the specific value is updated positively. In other words, the MY calculation reference value is always the lowest specific value for that day (after power-on). Furthermore, the MY value is not updated (remains "MY value = 0") when the specific value is smaller than the MY calculation reference value (when the specific value < MY calculation reference value). Furthermore, the MY calculation reference value is also updated negatively as the specific value is updated negatively. Therefore, the MY value can be said to be the increase in the number of game balls starting from the MY calculation reference value. Therefore, the MY value is never smaller than "0" (always "MY value ≧ 0").

The main CPU 301a performs processing to set an MY value update command. Specifically, the main CPU 301a sets a new MY value as an MY value update command in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the updated MY value to be sent to the performance control board 320 as an MY value update command, and the performance control board 320 then performs processing to execute advance notifications, etc., as described below.

(Main control board specific function arrival determination process)
The main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether the MY value is equal to or greater than "95000." Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether the MY value stored in the MY value storage area of the main RAM 301c is equal to or greater than "95000." If the MY value is equal to or greater than "95000," the main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether a jackpot symbol is stopped for confirmation or a jackpot game is in progress. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to determine whether a special symbol (jackpot symbol) that will trigger a jackpot game is stopped (stopped for confirmation) or whether a jackpot game is in progress. If a jackpot symbol is not stopped for confirmation or a jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 301a performs a process to set a specific function activation flag in a specific function activation flag storage area of the main RAM 301c. This stops the game by invalidating each winning slot and starting slot, halting fluctuations, and so on. When the jackpot symbol is fixed and stopped or when the jackpot game is in progress, the main CPU 301a performs a special function activation preparation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a performs a process to set a special function activation preparation flag in the special function activation preparation flag storage area of the main RAM 301c. Note that if the MY value is not "95000" or more, the current special function achievement determination process is terminated.

The main CPU 301a sets the specific function activation command in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the specific function activation command to be sent to the performance control board 320, which then notifies the performance control board 320 that the specific function has been activated.

The main CPU 301a sets a specific function activation preparation command in the effect transmission data storage area. This causes the specific function activation preparation command to be sent to the effect control board 320, which activates the specific function after the jackpot game ends, and notifies the user that the game will be stopped.

If the jackpot game ends with the specific function activation flag set, the specific function activation flag will be set and the specific function will be activated. In this way, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, if the jackpot symbol is not fixed or the jackpot game is not in progress, the specific function activation process is performed when the MY value reaches "95000". If the jackpot symbol is not fixed or the jackpot game is in progress when the MY value reaches "95000", the specific function activation preparation flag is set and the specific function will wait for activation until the jackpot game ends.

(Processing for determining whether a specific function has been reached on a slave control board)
The sub-CPU 320a determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is an MY value update command. If it is an MY value update command, it performs MY-related notification update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to execute an optional notification based on the MY value included in the MY value update command. If it is not an MY value update command, it determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a specific function activation preparation command. If it is a specific function activation preparation command, it performs specific function activation preparation notification processing. Specifically, it sets a specific function activation preparation instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 320c based on the specific function activation preparation command. This causes the specific function activation preparation instruction command to be sent to the image/audio control unit and the lamp control unit, and processing to execute the specific function activation preparation notification described below is performed. If it is not a specific function activation preparation command, it determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a specific function activation command. If it is a specific function activation command, it performs specific function activation notification processing. Specifically, the specific function activation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 320c based on the specific function activation command. As a result, the specific function activation command is transmitted to the image/audio control unit and the lamp control unit, and processing for executing the specific function activation notification is performed. When this processing is completed, the current command analysis processing is also completed.

If the received command is not a specific function activation command, the program determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is an error specification command. An "error specification command" is a command that indicates the occurrence of an error. Specifically, error specification commands include a "magnetic detection error specification command" indicating that magnetism has been detected, a "radio wave detection error specification command" indicating that radio waves have been detected, and a "door open error specification command" indicating that an open door has been detected. If the received command is an error specification command, the program performs error notification processing. Specifically, based on the content (type of error, etc.) contained in the received error specification command, the program sets a command related to the error in question (e.g., a magnetic detection error instruction command, an ejection error instruction command, etc.) in the transmission buffer of sub-RAM 320c. This causes the error specification command to be sent to the image/audio control unit and lamp control unit, and processing to execute the error notification is performed. When this processing ends, the current command analysis processing ends. If the received command is not an error specification command, the program terminates.

(MY related notification update process)
The sub-CPU 320a performs an optional notification update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 320a performs a process for updating and displaying the optional notification mode (such as updating and displaying the remaining number of MY) based on the MY value included in the MY value update command. This process results in the remaining number of MY and other information being updated and displayed on the image display device 70.

The sub-CPU 320a performs processing to determine whether the MY value is greater than or equal to 90000. Specifically, it performs processing to determine whether the MY value included in the MY value update command is greater than or equal to 90000. If the MY value is greater than or equal to 90000, it performs advance notification start processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 320a performs processing to execute advance notification, which will be described later. This processing will start advance notification. If the MY value is not greater than or equal to 90000, it terminates the current MY-related notification update processing.

(Execution timing and notification examples of specific function activation related notifications)
In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, notifications regarding the operation of a specific function can be made in the form of "optional notification,""advancenotification,""notification that specific function is being prepared for operation," and "notification that specific function is being operated."

An "advance notification" is a notification that the remaining MY number is low. In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the advance notification is given after the MY value reaches a predetermined value ("90,000" in this embodiment) and before the specific function is activated or before the specific function is being prepared for activation.

A "specific function activation preparation notification" is given when the MY value reaches "95000" while the jackpot symbol is being confirmed or during jackpot play. A specific function activation preparation notification is given after the MY value reaches "95000" while the jackpot symbol is being confirmed or during jackpot play, and continues until the end of jackpot play (until the specific function is activated).

A "specific function activation notification" is issued when a specific function is activated. A specific function activation notification notifies you that a specific function has been activated.

In this way, the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of issuing "optional notification," "advance notification," "notification that specific function is being prepared for activation," and "specific function activation notification" as notifications related to specific function activation. Note that in the following explanation, notifications related to specific function activation, such as "optional notification," "advance notification," "notification that specific function is being prepared for activation," and "specific function activation notification," may be collectively referred to simply as "specific function activation-related notifications."

Furthermore, among the notifications related to specific function activation, "optional notifications" and "advance notifications" differ in whether the specific function is in a state where it will be activated or whether it is waiting for activation of the specific function. Specifically, "optional notifications" and "advance notifications" notify the estimated time until activation of the specific function (current MY value and MY remaining), while "specific function activation preparation notifications" notify that a specific function will soon be activated, and "specific function activation notifications" notify that a specific function is currently activated. For this reason, among the "notifications related to specific function activation," "optional notifications" and "advance notifications" that notify the estimated time until activation of the specific function are sometimes collectively referred to simply as "MY-related notifications."

(Timing of Execution of Notification Related to Specific Function Operation)
In this embodiment, when the MY value reaches, for example, "90000," a pre-alert is initiated. Furthermore, when the MY value falls below, for example, "89000" (when the MY value becomes < 89000), the pre-alert is canceled and an optional alert is initiated. Furthermore, when the MY value reaches "95000," a specific function is activated at a predetermined timing, and the pre-alert ends (a specific function activation alert is initiated). Furthermore, if the jackpot symbol is stopped or a jackpot is being played when the MY value reaches "95000," an alert indicating that a specific function is being prepared for activation is initiated. That is, the start condition for the pre-alert is "MY value ≥ 90000," and the release conditions for the pre-alert are "MY value <89000,""the start of a specific function activation preparation alert," or "specific function activation."

In the gaming machine 100, when the MY value reaches "95000," a special function is activated at a predetermined timing. Specifically, if the MY value reaches "95000" when the jackpot symbol is not being confirmed or the jackpot is not in progress, the special function is activated at that timing (when the MY value reaches "95000"). Also, if the jackpot symbol is being confirmed or the jackpot is in progress when the MY value reaches "95000," the special function is activated when the jackpot is over.

In the following explanation, if the timing when the MY value reaches "95000" is not during the jackpot symbol confirmation stop or jackpot play (e.g., during fluctuation), and a specific function is activated at that timing (when the MY value reaches "95000"), the specific function activation timing may be simply referred to as "first activation timing Tc1."

In addition, if the MY value reaches "95000" while the jackpot symbol is being confirmed or during jackpot play, the specific function activation timing when the specific function activates at the end of the jackpot play may be simply referred to as "second activation timing Tc2."

Until the MY value reaches "90000", an optional notification is made. After the MY value reaches "90000", an advance notification is made until the MY value reaches "95000" (until the first activation timing Tc1). Furthermore, once the MY value reaches "95000", a specific function activation notification is made from that timing (first activation timing Tc1).

Until the MY value reaches "90000", an optional notification will be made. Furthermore, after the MY value reaches "90000", a preliminary notification will be made until the MY value reaches "95000". Furthermore, when the MY value reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, a notification that a specific function is being prepared for activation will be made from that timing. Furthermore, a specific function activation notification will be made from the timing when the jackpot game ends (second activation timing Tc2).

In this way, the gaming machine 100 issues multiple notifications (optional notification, advance notification, notification that a specific function is being prepared) in stages before a specific function is activated. This allows the gaming machine 100 to prevent players from becoming confused when a specific function is activated. The gaming machine 100 also prevents situations such as a specific function being activated suddenly (sudden gameplay halting), giving players a sense of security.

If a specific function is activated at the second activation timing Tc2, the notification that specific function is being prepared for activation will continue until the jackpot game ends. In other words, the notification that specific function is being prepared for activation will begin when the MY value reaches "95000" during the jackpot game and will continue until the ending period of the jackpot game ends.

In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the notification indicating preparation for specific function activation that begins to be displayed during a jackpot game (for example, during a round of play) does not change its display mode even when the game moves to the interval period or ending period of the jackpot game (it maintains its current display mode).

In addition, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, while the notification that a specific function is being prepared for activation is being executed (while waiting for the specific function to be activated), an ending-only image is displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The ending-only image displays the game results (number of balls won during the advantageous period, number of consecutive wins, etc.).

(Example of notification related to specific function operation)
In the following description, when a predetermined image is displayed on the entire area of the image display device 70 (in this embodiment, the entire area of the first image display device 70), the screen on which the image is displayed may be referred to as "screen Z." For example, when a specific function activation image 205 is displayed on the entire area of the first image display device 70, the screen may be referred to as the "specific function activation screen" (FIGS. 76(g) and 76(h)). Furthermore, when a predetermined image is displayed on the entire area of the first image display device 70, the screen may be referred to simply as "full screen" or "full screen display."

The advance notification can be achieved by displaying an advance notification image 202 in a specified area of the image display device 70. The advance notification image 202 in this embodiment (see Figures 90 and 91) shows the number of MY remaining until the specific function is activated, and may also be an image that notifies that play will end after the specific function is activated (an image containing the text "The specific function will activate when there are approximately XX remaining. If activated, today's play will end").

The notification that a specific function is being prepared for activation can be made by displaying a specific function preparation image (warning image) in a specified area of the image display device 70.

In this embodiment, the specific function activation preparation notification darkens substantially the entire image display device 70 to lower the visibility priority of the presentation screen (presentation screen during jackpot play), and a specific function activation preparation image is displayed on a layer above the presentation screen during jackpot play (specific function activation preparation screen). In other words, in this embodiment, the specific function activation preparation notification slightly darkens substantially the entire screen while leaving the lower layer screen (presentation screen during jackpot play) visible, and displays a screen (specific function activation preparation screen) that displays the specific function activation preparation image. In addition, the specific function activation preparation image is an image that includes a text image encouraging play to continue, and text notifying the player that a specific function will be activated after the jackpot play ends.

The notification of a specific function activation can be achieved, for example, by displaying a specific function activation image 205 across substantially the entire image display device 70 and outputting a sound (specific function activation system sound) from the audio output device 331 notifying the user that a specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen) that darkens substantially the entire image display device 70 and displays a text image notifying the user that a specific function has been activated and that the game will end.

In this way, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, optional notifications and advance notifications show the remaining MY number as an approximate value (e.g., approximately 5,000). Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, advance notifications are made by displaying an image indicating that a specific function is being prepared for activation on the image display device 70.

Note that the notifications related to the activation of specific functions performed by the gaming machine of the present invention are not limited to this embodiment. For example, optional notifications and advance notifications may use a meter image or the like to allow the player to grasp the approximate number of balls remaining until the MY upper limit value. Furthermore, optional notifications and advance notifications may show the current MY value numerically, or may use a meter image or the like to allow the player to grasp the approximate MY value.

Furthermore, the advance notification may not be achieved by darkening the entire image display device 70 and displaying an image indicating that a specific function is being prepared for activation in approximately the center of the screen, but may be achieved by displaying a text image in a partial area (for example, the top).

(RAM clear)
When a RAM clear operation (RAM clear process) is performed, the main CPU 301a clears all areas of the main RAM 301c (including the MY values and MY calculation reference values described below) and sets the RAM at power-on.

If the specific function activation flag or specific function activation preparation flag is set, these flags will be cleared in this process. In other words, if the specific function activation flag or specific function activation preparation flag is set, these flags will be cleared by executing a RAM clear. The MY value and MY calculation reference value, described below, are also cleared in this process.

(Relationship between RAM clear and specific functions)
As shown in FIG. 60 , if the power is turned off without clearing the RAM while the specific function activation flag is set, or if the power is turned on after being turned off without clearing the RAM, the specific function activation flag before the power was turned off is maintained. This allows the specific function to continue to be activated based on the specific function activation flag after the power is turned on. In this case, after power is turned on, the specific function may be activated after displaying a power-on screen (e.g., the power recovery image DFG) and performing power-on processing such as an initial check. Alternatively, the specific function may be activated by simply displaying the power-on screen without performing power-on processing such as an initial check. Alternatively, the specific function may be activated without displaying the power-on screen or performing power-on processing such as an initial check.

As shown in Figure 60, if the specific function activation flag is set and the power is turned off by performing a RAM clear operation, or if the power is turned on after being turned off and then a RAM clear operation is performed, the specific function activation flag that was set before the power was turned off is cleared. This restricts the continued operation of specific functions based on this specific function activation flag after the power is turned on. In this case, the power-on screen is displayed and then power-on processing such as initial checks is performed.

As shown in FIG. 60, if the power is turned off without clearing the RAM while the specific function activation preparation flag is set, or if the power is turned on after being turned off without clearing the RAM, the specific function activation preparation flag set before the power was turned off is maintained. This allows the pre-activation notification of a specific function based on the specific function activation preparation flag (e.g., displaying the specific function activation image 205) to continue after power is turned on. In this case, after power is turned on, the pre-activation notification of a specific function may be executed after the power-on screen is displayed and power-on processing such as an initial check is performed; after the power-on screen is displayed, the pre-activation notification of a specific function may be executed in conjunction with power-on processing such as an initial check; the pre-activation notification of a specific function may be executed during the customer waiting display after power-on processing is performed; or the pre-activation notification of a specific function may be executed after the start of the first variable display (the first winning ball).

As shown in Figure 60, if the specific function activation preparation flag is set and the power is turned off by performing a RAM clear operation, or if the power is turned on after being turned off and then a RAM clear operation is performed, the specific function activation preparation flag that was set before the power was turned off is cleared. This restricts the specific function activation pre-notification based on this specific function activation flag from continuing to be executed after the power is turned on.

(Display priority)
Next, we will explain the display priority (display layer) of each image of the specific function activation related notification, the performance screen, the right-hit notification image 260, the special pattern TZ, and the number reservation.

In the following explanation, the number of reserved balls indicated by the numbers displayed in the first reserved ball number display area 70E and the second reserved ball number display area 70F may be referred to simply as "reserved number". Also, the images showing reserved numbers (first reserved ball number display area 70E, second reserved ball number display area 70F, and the numbers displayed therein) may be referred to simply as "reserved number image". Also, in the following explanation, the display screen during the variable display and the display screen during a jackpot game may be collectively referred to simply as "display screen".

Except for the specific function activation image 205, the special symbol TZ, number hold, and right-hit notification image 260 have a higher display priority (displayed on a higher layer) than images of specific function-related notifications (optional notification image, advance notification image 202, ending-only image, and specific function activation preparation image). Furthermore, images of specific function activation-related notifications have a higher display priority than image display screens (effect screens) during variable effects and jackpot play.

For example, the display priority (display layer) is "effect screen Z < specific function activation preparation screen <= right hit notification image 260 = special symbol TZ = number reserve." In other words, on the specific function activation preparation screen, the effect screen (for example, the effect screen during jackpot play) has a low display priority and is displayed in a darkened state, but the right hit notification image 260, special symbol TZ, and number reserve have a high display priority and are displayed without being darkened.

For example, the display priority (display layer) is "presentation screen < image dedicated to ending < image preparing for specific function activation < right-hit notification image 260 = special symbol TZ = number pending." Note that in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the right-hit notification image 260 is displayed during the ending period regardless of whether the notification preparing for specific function activation is being executed, but the gaming machine of the present invention may not display the right-hit notification image 260 during the ending period. Furthermore, when the right-hit notification image 260 is displayed, it may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) or the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD).

(Type of error, priority, error notification content)
Here, in this specification, "occurrence of an error" strictly means detecting the occurrence of an irregular event defined as an error, such as an event such as power restoration or the occurrence of an abnormal winning. For example, although the event of "power restoration" is not an error of the gaming machine 100 itself, from the perspective that the state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine 100 so that it can be used by a player is a normal state (in other words, a normal state), the event of the gaming machine 100's power switching from an OFF state to an ON state can also be considered a type of abnormality (error). Furthermore, although the event of "activation of a specific function" is not an error of the gaming machine 100 itself, the event in which game play is stopped can also be considered a type of abnormality (error).

As mentioned above, a "RAM clear operation" refers to turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 302a (with the RAM clear switch 302a in the ON state). Furthermore, a "power restoration operation" refers to turning on the power with the RAM clear switch 302a in the OFF state.

(1. Clear RAM)
The RAM clear is detected when a RAM clear operation is detected. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects the RAM clear when the gaming machine 100 is switched from a power-off state to a power-on state with the RAM clear switch 302a in an ON state (when a RAM clear operation is performed).

(2. Power restoration)
The power restoration is detected on the condition that a power restoration operation is detected. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects the power restoration on the condition that the gaming machine 100 has switched from a power-off state to a power-on state (a power restoration operation has been performed) without turning on the RAM clear switch 302a (while the RAM clear switch 302a is in an OFF state).

(3. Abnormal winning error)
An abnormal winning error is detected when a predetermined game ball detection switch (large prize entry port detection switch 306a, 306b, first start port detection switch 304, second start port detection switch 305) detects more than a predetermined number of game balls within a predetermined time (for example, three balls within 0.5 seconds).

(4. Magnetic detection error)
A magnetic detection error is detected when the magnetic sensor 54b detects a magnetic field for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a magnetic detection error when the magnetic sensor 54b continues to output an ON signal, such as when an abnormal magnetic field is applied to the gaming machine 100.

(5. Impact detection error)
The impact detection error is detected when an impact sensor (not shown) detects an impact (vibration). Specifically, the main control board 300 detects an impact detection error when abnormal vibration is applied to the gaming machine 100.

(6. Radio wave detection error)
The radio wave detection error is detected when the radio wave sensor 54a detects a radio wave. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a radio wave detection error when an abnormal radio wave is applied to the gaming machine 100.

(7. Ejection Error)
A discharge error is detected when the difference between the number of balls passing through the winning slot switch and the number of balls passing through the frame count switch is ±50 or more (or less).

(8. Specific function operation)
The activation of a specific function is detected on the condition that the specific function activation flag is "ON." As described above, when the MY value reaches the upper limit (95,000), the main control board 300 sets (turns ON) the specific function activation flag at a predetermined timing (when the MY value reaches 95,000 or when the jackpot game ends). The main control board 300 detects the activation of a specific function on the condition that the specific function activation flag is "ON."

(9. Door open error)
A door open error is detected by detecting that a door open detection switch (not shown) is in the OFF state (a state indicating that the glass frame 150 is in the open state). Specifically, the main control board 300 detects a door open error when the glass frame 150 is open relative to the outer frame 160 (when the door open detection switch is OFF). The door open detection switch is a switch that detects whether the glass frame 150 is in the closed state or the open state, and outputs an ON signal when the glass frame 150 is in the closed state and an OFF signal when the glass frame 150 is in the open state. Furthermore, when the main control board 300 detects that the door open switch is in the ON state, it cancels the event.

(10. Switch not connected error)
The switch unconnected error is detected when a switch unconnected state is detected. Specifically, the main control board 300 detects the occurrence of a switch unconnected error when the actual connection of a switch that should be connected to the main control board 300 is poor (including complete unconnection). Furthermore, when the main control board 300 detects a switch connected state, it cancels the event.

As such, at least 10 types of errors (errors 1 to 10) can occur in the gaming machine 100: RAM clear, power restoration, abnormal winning error, magnetic detection error, impact detection error, radio wave detection error, ejection error, specific function activation, door open error, and switch unconnected error.

Each of the errors described above is also assigned a notification priority. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, the more serious the event (error) that should be notified to the player, the higher the notification priority. Specifically, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the higher the priority of the error, the higher the priority. The priority order is: RAM clear > power restoration > abnormal winning error > magnetic detection error > impact detection error > radio wave detection error > ejection error > specific function activation > door open error > switch unconnection error. Errors related to the gaming machine 100's system, such as RAM clear and power restoration, have the highest priority, followed by errors related to fraud prevention. As such, notifications related to the gaming machine 100's system, such as RAM clear and power restoration, provide important information for continuing or disabling specific functions, so it is desirable to give them a higher priority than specific function activation notifications. Furthermore, even when a specific function is activated, fraudulent activity can adversely affect gameplay when the specific function is deactivated. Therefore, it is desirable to give error notifications related to fraud prevention a higher priority than specific function activation notifications. Additionally, notifications using images or sounds that can be performed by operating buttons or other controls, such as volume adjustment or mode switching, should be given a lower priority than notifications of specific function activation.

The errors mentioned above are merely examples, and other possible errors include setting change start, setting change end, and setting confirmation end. Furthermore, for these errors, the activation of a specific function can be set as a "lower-level error" (low-priority error) or a "higher-level error" (high-priority error).

The above-mentioned error and specific function activation-related notifications can be made using image display devices 70 such as LCDs, lamps such as board lighting devices 34a and frame lighting devices 34b, and audio output devices 331, either alone or in combination. Such notification means are not particularly limited as long as they are recognizable to players and hall managers. Notification methods can also be implemented using image displays, light emission, audio, and the like, either alone or in combination. High-priority error notifications may be made with more notification methods, with a greater variety of notification methods, for a longer notification period, or with more difficulty in canceling the notification, than low-priority error notifications. High-priority error notifications may also be made more recognizable, for example by being louder or emitting more flashy light, than low-priority error notifications.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of notifying players of a specific abnormality by using a notification means (such as an image display device 70 such as an LCD, lamps such as the board lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b, or an audio output device 331) to display an image, emit light, or emit sound based on the detection of the abnormality. Furthermore, even if a specific function is activated, the notification means can notify players of the abnormality. This can prevent fraudulent use of the gaming machine 100, accurately identify errors, and ensure a smooth resumption of play, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it may be possible to continue to notify of abnormalities that began to be notified before a specific function was activated, even after the specific function is activated. This can prevent fraudulent activity against the gaming machine 100, accurately identify errors, and ensure a smooth resumption of play, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, abnormality notifications that start before a specific function is activated may be stopped once the specific function is activated.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure may be capable of reporting an abnormality using a reporting means (such as an image display device 70 such as an LCD, a lamp such as the board lighting device 34a or the frame lighting device 34b, or an audio output device 331) based on the detection of a specific abnormality, even when a specific function is activated. This can prevent fraudulent activity against the gaming machine 100, accurately identify errors, ensure a smooth resumption of play, and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the case of a specific abnormality among the aforementioned abnormalities (such as an abnormality in the payout of prize balls), once the specific abnormality is resolved, the abnormality notification regarding the specific abnormality may be stopped even if the specific function is activated.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can execute multiple notifications (optional notification, advance notification, and notification that a specific function is being prepared) in stages before the activation of a specific function. Notifications before the activation of a specific function can be executed using image display, audio, or lamp illumination, either alone or in combination, but are preferably executed using image display. As shown in Figures 90, 91, and 92, advance notification can be executed by displaying an advance notification image 202 (advance display) in a predetermined area of the image display device 70. The advance notification image 202 as an advance notification can be displayed in a different position from the first information displayed on the image display device 70, such as the special symbol TZ or number reserve, and the second information, such as the effect symbol 70a, which is different from the first information. In this way, the advance notification image 202 is positioned so as not to overlap with the first information, such as the special symbol TZ, number reserve, reserve icon T1, and reserved number, which are information necessary for the player to progress through the game. This prevents players from being distracted by advance notification of the activation of a specific function, preventing them from seeing the changing effect of the effect pattern 70a, which attracts their attention.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of displaying first information such as the icon, the reserved icon, the special symbol TZ (also known as the small symbol), and reserved numbers even if the advance notification image 202 is displayed before the specific function activation image 205 is displayed. Here, if the advance notification image 202 is displayed before the specific function activation image 205 is displayed, the effect symbol 70a or the movement path of the effect symbol 70a may overlap the advance notification image 202. In this case, the advance notification image 202 may be hidden by the effect symbol 70a, but it is preferable that the advance notification image 202 not be hidden by the effect symbol 70a. In other words, during a variable effect, in certain effects such as reach effects, even if the trajectory, size, or variable display position of the effect pattern 70a changes, such as in a pattern movement effect in which the effect pattern 70a moves to a position different from its normal position, or in a pattern display size change effect in which the display size of the effect pattern 70a is changed, it is preferable to display the advance notification image 202 in a position different from the effect pattern 70a.

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, in the specific game state, a right-hit notification image 260 that guides the game ball's launch direction and guides the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 70. Also, in the specific game state, if the first starting hole 112 is won, a right-hit caution image 261 that warns the player that the second starting hole 115 is the starting hole that should be aimed for a win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 70. In the specific game state, if the second starting hole 115 is won, the right-hit caution image 261 that warns the player that the second starting hole 115 is the starting hole that should be aimed for a win is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 70. Note that in the normal game state, neither the right-hit notification image 260 nor the right-hit caution image 261 is displayed.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can display either the right hit notification image 260 or the right hit caution image 261, or both the right hit notification image 260 and the right hit caution image 261, even if the advance notification image 202 is displayed before the specific function activation image 205 is displayed. In this case, the advance notification image 202 may be hidden by the right hit notification image 260, but it is preferable that the advance notification image 202 is not hidden by the right hit notification image 260, and it is preferable that the advance notification image 202 and the right hit notification image 260 are in different positions. For example, the advance notification image 202 and the right hit notification image 260 are displayed in different positions, but the advance notification image 202 and the right hit caution image 261 may be displayed in a position where they partially or completely overlap. In this case, the right hit caution image 261 may be displayed with priority over the advance notification image 202, or the priority may be reversed.

The advance warning image 202 may be hidden by the right-hit warning image 261, but it is preferable that the advance warning image 202 is not hidden by the right-hit warning image 261, and the advance warning image 202 and the right-hit warning image 261 are preferably in different positions. For example, the advance warning image 202 and the right-hit warning image 261 are displayed in different positions, but the advance warning image 202 and the right-hit warning image 260 may be displayed in a position where they partially or completely overlap. In this case, the right-hit warning image 260 may be displayed with priority over the advance warning image 202, or the priority may be reversed.

As shown in Figures 62, 63, and 64, when a rainbow effect is executed on the image display device 70 at a first timing such as a deciding effect or cut-in in a variable effect, the area of the rainbow effect displayed on the image display device 70 by the effects or screen display can be limited by the advance notification image 202 as a pre-display. For example, the execution area of the rainbow effect is limited by the advance notification image 202 hiding the rainbow effect. In other words, even if part of the rainbow light-emitting effect image of the rainbow effect displayed on the image display device 70 overlaps with the advance notification image 202, the advance notification image 202 remains visible to the player. In any case where an advance notification of a specific function activation is given based on a win in the first starting slot 112, which is aimed at by hitting with the left hand, in a normal game state, or where an advance notification of a specific function activation is given based on a win in the first starting slot 112, in a specific game state such as a time-saving or probability variable state, or where an advance notification of a specific function activation is given based on a win in the first large winning slot 117, which is aimed at by hitting with the right hand, it is possible to limit the area of the rainbow-colored effects and screen display displayed on the image display device 70 at the first timing using the advance notification image 202 as an advance display.

As shown in Figures 65, 66 and 67, when a rainbow effect is executed in the image display device 70 at a second timing different from the first timing, such as a hold change in a variable effect, the area of the rainbow effect by the hold icon T displayed on the image display device 70 is not limited by the advance notification image 202 as a pre-display. For example, by displaying the advance notification image 202 in a different position from the hold icon T, the rainbow effect can be seen in its entirety without being obscured by the advance notification image 202. In any case where an advance notification of a specific function activation is given based on a win in the first starting slot 112, which is aimed at by hitting with the left hand, in a normal game state, or where an advance notification of a specific function activation is given based on a win in the first starting slot 112, which is aimed at by hitting with the left hand, in a specific game state such as a time-saving or probability variable state, or where an advance notification of a specific function activation is given based on a win in the first large winning slot 117, which is aimed at by hitting with the right hand, at the second timing, the advance notification image 202 as an advance display can limit the area of the rainbow effect of the hold icon T displayed on the image display device 70.

This allows players to properly recognize the advance notification of the activation of a specific function, reducing confusion for the player and increasing their interest in the game.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of producing rainbow effects, for example, on the image display device 70 (first effect means), and is also capable of producing rainbow effects on a light-emitting device (second effect means) different from the image display device 70, such as the game board lighting device 34a or the game frame lighting device 34b. As described above, the gaming machine is also capable of producing a pre-activation notification (first notification) for a specific function that notifies a player that a specific function is about to be activated, and a pre-activation notification and a specific function activation notification (second notification) for a specific function. Here, when the pre-activation notification (first notification) for a specific function is executed, it is possible to produce either a rainbow effect by the image display device 70 or a rainbow effect by the lighting devices 34a and 34b, or both a rainbow effect by the image display device 70 and a rainbow effect by the lighting devices 34a and 34b. In other words, when a specific function pre-activation notification (first notification) is executed, the image display device 70, the board lighting device 34a, and the frame lighting device 34b can be used alone or in combination to produce a rainbow effect.

On the other hand, when a specific function operation notification (second notification) is executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of either the rainbow effect by the image display device 70 or the rainbow effect by the lighting devices 34a, 34b, or both the rainbow effect by the image display device 70 and the rainbow effect by the lighting devices 34a, 34b. In other words, when a specific function operation notification (second notification) is executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of the rainbow effect in at least one of the means capable of executing the rainbow effect, such as the image display device 70, the board lighting device 34a, and the frame lighting device 34b, or to restrict the execution of the rainbow effect in all of the means capable of executing the rainbow effect, such as the image display device 70, the board lighting device 34a, and the frame lighting device 34b.

This will help prevent players from becoming confused when specific functions are activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of executing predetermined effects (hold changes, dialogue, cut-ins) that create anticipation of a transition to special play. It is also capable of executing a first notification (notification before a specific function is activated) and a second notification (notification that a specific function is activated) that is different from the first notification as notifications related to a specific function. The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of executing a rainbow-colored effect in the predetermined effects when the first notification is executed, while restricting the execution of the rainbow-colored effect in the predetermined effects when the second notification is executed. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming confused when a specific function is activated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure, in normal game mode, the game progresses primarily with the aim of the game ball entering the first start hole 112, and in specific game modes such as time-saving and probability variation modes, which are more advantageous to the player than normal game mode, the game progresses primarily with the aim of the game ball entering the second start hole 115. Here, a first start hole detection switch 304 is installed in the first start hole 112, and a start condition based on the first start hole 112 is set based on the first start hole detection switch 304 detecting a game ball, and game progresses with variable effects and other effects once this start condition is satisfied. Similarly, a second start hole detection switch 305 is installed in the second start hole 115, and a start condition based on the second start hole 115 is set based on the second start hole detection switch 305 detecting a game ball, and game progresses with variable effects and other effects once this start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure, during jackpot play, the game basically progresses with the aim of having the gaming ball enter the large prize opening 117, 127. Large prize opening detection switches 306a, 306b are installed in the large prize openings 117, 127, and based on the detection of a gaming ball by the large prize opening detection switches 306a, 306b, specific conditions are met for predetermined processing such as the payout of prize balls and the progress of the jackpot game round. In this way, the gaming machine 100 progresses the game by switching the target for the gaming ball to enter.

As shown in FIG. 68, when the specific function activation flag is set, the internal game state is determined to be a jackpot game or another game state. If the game state is other than a jackpot game, the specific function is activated. Activation of the specific function results in a specific function activation notification, and the start gate detection switches 304, 305 and the special prize gate detection switches 306a, 306b are disabled, and a predetermined specific function activation process, such as restricting the release of game balls, is executed. Disabling the detection switches can be achieved in various ways, such as by not enabling the detection even if the detection switches detect a game ball, or by de-energizing the detection switches so that they do not detect game balls. Thus, in the gaming machine 100 disclosed herein, even if a game ball enters the start gate or special prize gate after activation of the specific function, the detection switches are disabled, so the start condition based on the game ball entering the start gate is not met, and similarly, the specific condition based on the game machine's ball entering the special prize gate is not met. Additionally, in addition to or instead of disabling the special prize opening detection switches 306a and 306b, the special prize opening may be closed. If a specific function is activated during a game state other than a jackpot, the special prize opening will not be open, and the entry of game balls into the special prize opening will be restricted.

As shown in FIG. 68, when the specific function activation flag is set, the internal game state is determined to be a jackpot game or another game state. If a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot game continues. At this time, the jackpot entry port detection switches 306a and 306b are not disabled, the launch of game balls is not restricted, and functions necessary for the progress of the jackpot game are not limited. Alternatively, by disabling the start port detection switches 304 and 305 and the jackpot entry port detection switches 306a and 306b, even if a game ball enters the start port or the jackpot entry port, the fulfillment of the start condition based on the game ball entering the start port may be restricted. In this way, the gaming machine 100 disclosed herein is configured to fulfill a specific condition based on the game ball entering the jackpot entry port during a predetermined period from when the specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game until the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure limits the fulfillment of the start condition based on the entry of a game ball into the start hole during a predetermined period from when the specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game until the jackpot game ends.

This will help prevent players from becoming confused when specific functions are activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game (when the activation conditions for the specific function are met), it may be possible to execute the payout of prize balls by balls entering the start port, gate, or general prize port. On the other hand, if the specific function activation flag is set during a game state other than a jackpot game (when the activation conditions for the specific function are met), it may be possible to restrict the payout of prize balls by balls entering the start port, gate, or general prize port.

If the specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game, a rainbow effect associated with the round effects of the jackpot game can be executed during the specified period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the jackpot game ends. Then, after the specified period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the jackpot game ends has elapsed, the specific function is activated and the execution of the rainbow effect is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the specific function activation flag is set during a game state other than a jackpot game, during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (the specific function activation image 205 is displayed), the displays that were being executed on the image display device 70, such as variable effects, rainbow effects, display of effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, reserved memory such as the icon, reserved icon, and reserved number, background image, and image effects, can be continued. When the specific function activation flag is set during a game state other than a jackpot game, during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (the specific function activation image 205 is displayed), the light-emitting effects and rainbow effects of the board lighting device 34a, the light-emitting effects and rainbow effects of the frame lighting device 34b, and the main audio output from the audio output device 331 can be continued. Note that during a game state other than a jackpot game, the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed may be very short.

As shown in FIG. 69, when a specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game, during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (the specific function activation image 205 is displayed), it is possible to continue displaying the jackpot effect, rainbow effect, and other effects that were being executed on the image display device 70. When a specific function activation flag is set during a jackpot game, during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed (the specific function activation image 205 is displayed), it is possible to continue displaying the light-emitting effect and rainbow effect of the board lighting device 34a, the light-emitting effect and rainbow effect of the frame lighting device 34b, and the main audio output from the audio output device 331. Note that during a jackpot game, the length of the period from when the specific function activation flag is set until the specific function activation notification is executed varies depending on factors such as the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot game.

In game states other than jackpot play, the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification is executed is different in length from the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification is executed in jackpot play. Here, the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification is executed in jackpot play is likely to be longer than the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification is executed in game states other than jackpot play.

In game states other than jackpot play, the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification begins is constant. Furthermore, in jackpot play, the timing of the setting of the specific function activation flag varies depending on the length of the remaining jackpot play during the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification begins. In other words, there are more different lengths of the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification begins during jackpot play than there are different lengths of the period from when the specific function activation flag is set to when the specific function activation notification begins in game states other than jackpot play.

As shown in Figure 70, if power is interrupted (cut off) during a variable effect and then restored by turning on the power switch, for example, a power restoration image DFG such as "Power restoring" is displayed on the image display device 70 after power is restored. At this time, even if there was pending memory at the time of the power interruption and the RAM clear operation was not performed when power was restored, the display of pending memory on the image display device 70 is restricted during the period in which the power restoration image DFG is displayed. Note that after a predetermined initial check is performed after the power restoration image DFG is displayed, the variable effect may be performed based on the pending memory stored before the power was interrupted.

As shown in Figure 71, if a specific function is activated during a variable effect, a specific function activation image 205 is displayed on the image display device 70. If the power is cut off (power is removed) while the specific function activation image 205 is displayed and then power is restored by turning on the power switch without performing a RAM clear operation, the power restoration image DFG such as "Power restoring" is restricted from being displayed on the image display device 70 after power is restored, and the specific function activation image 205 is displayed on the image display device 70. Even if there is pending memory when the specific function is activated and the RAM clear operation is not performed when power is restored, the display of the pending memory on the image display device 70 is restricted during the period in which the specific function activation image 205 is displayed. Note that the start of the variable effect is restricted based on the pending memory stored before the specific function was activated.

In addition, when the specific function operating image 205 is displayed, if the power is turned off (shut off) and then restored by turning on the power switch without clearing the RAM, for example, the specific function operating image 205 may be restricted from being displayed on the image display device 70 after power is restored, and a power restoration image DFG such as "Power being restored" may be displayed on the image display device 70, and the specific function operating image 205 may be displayed after the display period of the power restoration image DFG has ended.

The power restoration image DFG is not limited to "Power restoration in progress," but may also display other content, such as "Loading" as shown in T1.

Even if the reserved memory stored before the specific function is activated is not displayed when the specific function is activated, the reserved memory may remain stored while the specific function is activated. Also, if the power is restored without a RAM clear operation while the specific function is activated, even if the reserved memory stored before the specific function is activated is not displayed, the reserved memory may remain stored while the specific function is activated.

(Power restoration when no specific function operation flag is present)
Note that "when power is restored without the specific function activation flag" specifically refers to when the power is turned off after a specific function is activated, and when the gaming machine 100 is turned on again, the RAM is cleared (power on with RAM clear operation). Since the specific function activation flag is cleared (flag is turned OFF) by the RAM clear operation, if the power is turned on without the RAM clear operation, the specific function activation flag will not be cleared.

(Example of initial operation check after power restoration)
Figure 72 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no recovery abnormality in the various role-playing devices (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17 (corresponding to sword handle unit 135)) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 301c. In the figure, the item labeled with reference numeral 17 corresponds to the sword handle unit 135 as an effect button, and the item labeled with reference numeral 9 corresponds to the audio output device 331 capable of outputting audio.

Note that power-on that involves initializing main RAM 301c can be a power-on that initializes main RAM 301c after a setting change process has been performed, or a power-on that initializes main RAM 301c without performing a setting change process. Here, we will explain the case where power-on initializes main RAM 301c without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 100 is turned ON and power supply begins, the image display device displays an initial screen (power restoration image) with the words "Loading" displayed as its initial operation.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 320 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 300, the origin return process is initiated, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin returning to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135," which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a static state (still display), and the audio output device 331 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-regular map change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the sub-first reserve indicator 83, the sub-second reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 change to a display mode showing "0."

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and effect button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process begins, starting the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. At this time, the first movable member LED and second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and it turns on while waiting for customers (lights up in white). At timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, turning on (white) while waiting for customers. At timing T8, when the output period for the initialization notification sound (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the machine becomes silent.

At timing T9, when a first special symbol reserve number designation command (first special symbol reserve number = 1) based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserve number in the first special symbol reserve number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserve icon is displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B, the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong♪" is output from the audio output device 331.

At timing T10, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 300, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 begins to display fluctuations, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during fluctuations, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0."

(Example of how customers wait after power is restored)
The customer waiting effect executed after power restoration can be executed as described above with reference to Figures M3 and M4. After performing a predetermined initial check after power restoration, if, for example, the number of reserved balls, such as the first reserved ball, is "0" and no game balls have entered the first starting slot 112, the machine enters a customer waiting state and a demo begins for a predetermined period. As described below, if the specific function activation flag is set even after power restoration, the machine will not transition to the customer waiting effect even if the conditions for executing the customer waiting effect (e.g., the passage of time or no reserved balls) are met. Here, if the specific function activation preparation flag is set, a specific function activation advance notification may be executed in the customer waiting effect executed after power restoration, or the execution of the specific function activation advance notification may be restricted.

In the customer waiting performance that is performed after power is restored, a specific light-emitting effect that appears rainbow-colored (rainbow-colored performance in customer waiting performance) can be produced by combining one or more performance devices capable of producing rainbow-colored performances, such as the image display device 70, the board lighting device 34a, or the frame lighting device 34b. Note that the specific content of the rainbow-colored performance in customer waiting performances can be as described separately.

(Power restoration when a specific function is activated)
Note that "when power is restored with the specific function activation flag in place" specifically refers to when the power is turned off after a specific function is activated, and when the gaming machine 100 is turned on again, the power is turned on without a RAM clear operation (power on without a RAM clear operation). Because the specific function activation flag is cleared (flag turned OFF) by a RAM clear operation, if the power is turned on without a RAM clear operation, the specific function activation flag will not be cleared.

When power is restored (power is turned on without clearing the RAM) while the specific function activation flag is set, a power restoration command and a specific function activation command are sent from the main control board 300 to the presentation control board 320. Furthermore, upon receiving the power restoration command, the presentation control board 320 displays a power restoration notification (power restoration image DFG) and then displays the specific function activation screen 205. In other words, the specific function activation screen 205 is displayed, and play is disabled. Furthermore, after power is restored, the initial operation of the movable member 73, etc., is not performed. Furthermore, after power is restored, the power restoration system sound is output, but the specific function activation system sound is output in an inaudible state, although sound data is output. Even if a predetermined period of time has passed since power was restored and it is time for the customer waiting effect to be executed (when power is restored without the specific function activation flag (power is turned on with clearing the RAM)), the customer waiting effect will not begin to be executed.

In this way, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure does not check the initial operation of the movable member 73, etc., if the specific function activation flag is present when power is restored. This allows the gaming machine 100 to indicate to the gaming machine manager (e.g., hall staff) that the specific function activation flag has been set ON due to a failure to perform a RAM clear operation, etc. Furthermore, by not operating the movable member 73, etc., the gaming machine 100 does not obstruct the visibility of the specific function activation notification screen. As a result, the gaming machine 100 can more efficiently indicate to the gaming machine manager that the specific function activation flag has been set ON due to a failure to perform a RAM clear operation, etc.

When the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure has no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information) when powered on, it can execute a specific light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) that appears rainbow-colored using the effect means (image display device 70, lighting devices 34a, 34b on the game board and frame, etc.) during a predetermined period after powering on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). In contrast, when the specific function activation instruction flag is present (specific function activation information is present) when powering on, it can restrict the execution of the specific light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) using the effect means (image display device 70, lighting devices 34a, 34b on the game board and frame, etc.) during a predetermined period after powering on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). This more efficiently notifies the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation designation flag has been set due to a failure to clear the RAM, etc., ensuring a smooth start to the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the gaming machine 100 disclosed herein has no specific function activation instruction flag (no specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, it can execute a customer waiting effect at a predetermined timing after power is turned on and before the start conditions are met. In contrast, when the specific function activation instruction flag is present (specific function activation information is present) when power is turned on, it is possible to restrict the execution of the customer waiting effect even when it has occurred at a predetermined timing after power is turned on and before the start conditions are met. This makes it possible to more efficiently indicate to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation instruction flag has been set ON due to a failure to clear the RAM, for example, ensuring a smooth start to play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is powered on, if there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no specific function activation information), it can execute a specific light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) that appears rainbow-colored on multiple effect means (e.g., the image display device 70, the lighting devices 34a, 34b on the game board and frame, etc.) during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). In contrast, when there is a specific function activation instruction flag (e.g., there is specific function activation information) when power is turned on, it can restrict the execution of a specific light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) on any of the multiple effect means (e.g., the image display device 70) during a predetermined period after power-on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). This more efficiently notifies the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation instruction flag has been set due to, for example, forgetting to clear the RAM, ensuring a smooth start to the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is powered on and there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no specific function activation information), it can execute a specific effect, such as a rainbow-colored specific light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) that appears rainbow-colored using the effecting means (image display device 70, lighting devices 34a, 34b on the game board or frame, etc.) during a predetermined period after powering on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). In contrast, when the specific function activation instruction flag is present (there is specific function activation information) during the predetermined period after powering on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed), it can execute an effect (e.g., a circular spin without light) that is different from the predetermined effect executed during the predetermined period after powering on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). This more efficiently notifies the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation instruction flag has been set due to a failure to clear the RAM, etc., ensuring a smooth start to the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is powered on and there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no specific function activation information), it can execute display effects (e.g., model name display, title display, etc.) using the effector (image display device 70, game board or frame lighting devices 34a, 34b, etc.) during a predetermined period after powering on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed). In contrast, when there is a specific function activation instruction flag (there is specific function activation information) during powering on and before the start conditions are met (the period during which the customer waiting effect should be executed), it can restrict the execution of display effects (e.g., model name display, title display, etc.). This more efficiently notifies the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation instruction flag has been set due to a failure to clear the RAM, etc., ensuring a smooth start to play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can perform initial operation checks of movable devices and the like if there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no specific function activation information) when the power is turned on. In contrast, if there is a specific function activation instruction flag (specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, it is possible to restrict the execution of initial operation checks of movable devices and the like. This makes it possible to more efficiently indicate to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation designation flag has been set ON due to a failure to clear the RAM, etc., ensuring a smooth start to play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Even if there is a specific function activation instruction flag (specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, an initial operation check of movable parts, etc. may be performed. In this case, the specific function activation screen 205Z may be displayed after the initial operation check has been performed or while the initial operation is being performed.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can perform initial operation checks of gimmicks such as attackers if there is no specific function activation instruction flag (no specific function activation information) when the power is turned on. In contrast, if there is a specific function activation instruction flag (specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, it can restrict the execution of initial operation checks of gimmicks such as attackers. This makes it possible to more efficiently indicate to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation instruction flag has been set ON due to a missed RAM clear operation, etc., ensuring a smooth start to play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Even if there is a specific function activation instruction flag (specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, an initial operation check of gimmicks such as attackers may be performed. In this case, the specific function activation screen 205Z may be displayed after the initial operation check has been performed or while the initial operation is being performed.

The gaming machine 100 disclosed herein can execute a specific light-emitting effect that appears rainbow-colored (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) when the start condition is not met for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined game state (such as a normal game state or a time-saving state) that is different from a special game that is advantageous to the player. In contrast, when a specific function is activated in a predetermined game state (such as a normal game state or a time-saving state), the execution of the specific light-emitting effect (rainbow-colored effect in the customer waiting effect) can be restricted even if the start condition is not met for a predetermined period of time. This can more efficiently indicate to the gaming machine administrator that the specific function activation designation flag has been set ON due to a failure to clear the RAM, etc., ensuring a smooth start to the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Examples of variable effects)
In the following specific example, we will explain the case where the presentation control board 320 cannot receive commands normally in normal game mode, but even if the game mode is a specific game mode (time-reduced game mode, special game mode), the basic flow is the same as in normal game mode.

Specifically, the first reserved number, first special symbol memory designation command, first special symbol, first special symbol display 60 (120), first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123), sub-first variable indicator 81, sub-first reserved indicator 83, first reserved number display area 70E, first reserved icon display area 70B, first lamp symbol, and first start port 112 can be read as the second reserved number, second special symbol memory designation command, second special symbol, second special symbol display 62 (122), second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124), sub-second variable indicator 82, sub-second reserved indicator 84, second reserved number display area 70F, second reserved icon display area 70D, second lamp symbol, and first start port 115.

Specific examples of variable effects will be explained using Figures 73 and 74.

First, at timing P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the variable display control board 320 receives the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, display symbol designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the display control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variable display.

At this time, while the changing background music continues to be output, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number (numeric information) displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. Also, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and special pattern (referred to as the first lamp pattern when particularly distinguished) on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins, but the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after a preparatory operation.

The first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) displays the first reserve number U1 (reserve memory) stored (captured) by the main control board 300 by turning on, off, or blinking the LED. The fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by the blinking of the LED of the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81. Furthermore, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays the first reserve number U1 (reserve memory) stored (captured) by the performance control board 320 by turning on, off, or blinking the LED.

Next, at timing P1, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2". In addition, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". When the performance control board 320 receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control board 300 at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T12 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 74 (a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 74 (b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). At this time, when the performance control board 320 receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control board 300, processing is carried out to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Furthermore, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see Figure 74 (c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 finally stops in a losing mode (for example, off).

Next, at timing P4, when the stop time for the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the variable display control board 320 receives the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, display symbol designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the display control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variable display.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 also changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one-lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 also begins. The effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as partial movement of the decorative parts or full or partial expansion/contraction, as in this embodiment (see Figure 74 (d)).

After that, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the hold icon T1 was completed, the effect pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has begun to change, so the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see Figure 74 (e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also sway (effect operation). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation (effect operation) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see Figure 74 (f)).

Then, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). At this time, when the performance control board 320 receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control board 300, processing is carried out to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Furthermore, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing mode ("164") (see Figure 74 (g)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 finally stops in a losing mode (for example, off).

Next, at timing P8, when the stop time for the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." At this timing, when the variable display control board 320 receives the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, display symbol designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the display control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable display.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 also changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, one hold icon H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one-lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 also begins. The effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of a portion of the decorative element or the entire or partial expansion/contraction, as in this embodiment (see Figure 74 (g)).

After that, at timing P9, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 was completed, the background image continues to scroll and the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has begun to change, so the icon TH is rotating (performing) (see Figure 74 (h)).

Then, at timing P10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("365"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also sway (effect operation). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation (effect operation) of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see Figure 74 (i)).

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). At this time, when the performance control board 320 receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control board 300, processing is carried out to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Furthermore, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("365") (see Figure 74 (j)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

After that, because the first reserve number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 is "0", it transitions to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for play). At this timing, when the performance control board 320 receives a customer waiting command (a command to specify a customer waiting state) sent from the main control board 300, the performance control board 320 performs processing to end the variable performance. In this way, the customer waiting performance begins at timing P12, a predetermined time after the start of the variation of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern).

Specific details of the customer waiting effect can be implemented as explained above with reference to Figures M3 and M4. Here, if the specific function activation preparation flag is set, a specific function activation advance notification may be implemented in the customer waiting effect, or the implementation of the specific function advance notification may be restricted.

In the customer waiting performance, a specific light-emitting effect that appears rainbow-colored (rainbow-colored performance in customer waiting performance) can be produced by combining one or more performance devices capable of producing rainbow-colored performances, such as the image display device 70, the board lighting device 34a, or the frame lighting device 34b. Note that the specific content of the rainbow-colored performance in customer waiting performances can be determined by the items described separately.

When the first hold number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 is "0," the predetermined effect that is executed a predetermined time after the start of the change in the effect pattern 70a (special pattern) is not limited to a customer waiting effect, but may also include an adjustment guide effect such as adjusting the volume or brightness of the image display device, a guide effect regarding game operations, or other effects. In this case, a customer waiting demo effect may be executed after an effect other than a customer waiting demo effect is executed. In this way, predetermined effects include effects that are executed until the next change in the effect pattern 70a that is temporarily or permanently stopped begins. Note that predetermined effects are not limited to being executed by a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), but may also be executed by other commands, timer time, etc.

(Example of a variable effect - when a specific function is activated)
In the following specific example, we will explain the case where the presentation control board 320 cannot receive commands normally in normal game mode, but even if the game mode is a specific game mode (time-reduced game mode, special game mode), the basic flow is the same as in normal game mode.

Specifically, the first reserved number, first special symbol memory designation command, first special symbol, first special symbol display 60 (120), first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123), sub-first variable indicator 81, sub-first reserved indicator 83, first reserved number display area 70E, first reserved icon display area 70B, first lamp symbol, and first start port 112 can be read as the second reserved number, second special symbol memory designation command, second special symbol, second special symbol display 62 (122), second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124), sub-second variable indicator 82, sub-second reserved indicator 84, second reserved number display area 70F, second reserved icon display area 70D, second lamp symbol, and first start port 115.

(Specific Example 1)
Using Figures 75 and 76, we will explain specific example 1 of the variable presentation when a specific function is activated.

First, at timing P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the variable display control board 320 receives the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, display symbol designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the display control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variable display.

At this time, while the changing background music continues to be output, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number (numeric information) displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. Also, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and special pattern (referred to as the first lamp pattern when particularly distinguished) on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins, but the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after a preparatory operation.

The first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) displays the first reserve number U1 (reserve memory) stored (captured) by the main control board 300 by turning on, off, or blinking the LED. The fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by the blinking of the LED of the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81. Furthermore, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays the first reserve number U1 (reserve memory) stored (captured) by the performance control board 320 by turning on, off, or blinking the LED.

Next, at timing P1, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2". In addition, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". When the performance control board 320 receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control board 300 at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T12 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 76 (a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 76 (b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). At this time, when the performance control board 320 receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control board 300, processing is carried out to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Furthermore, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see Figure 76 (c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 finally stops in a losing mode (for example, off).

Next, at timing P4, when the stop time for the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the variable display control board 320 receives the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, display symbol designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the display control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variable display.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 also changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one-lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 also begins. The effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as partial movement of the decorative parts or full or partial expansion/contraction, as in this embodiment (see Figure 76 (d)).

After that, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the hold icon T1 was completed, the background image continues to scroll and the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has begun to change, so the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see Figure 76 (e)).

Next, at timing P6, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2". In addition, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". When the performance control board 320 receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control board 300 at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T12 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 76 (f)).

When the game ball enters the first starting hole 112 at timing P6, the activation conditions for the specific function are met and the specific function activation flag is set. This causes a specific function activation notification to be executed on the image display device 70 or the like (see FIG. 76 (g)). For example, this can be achieved by displaying a specific function activation image 205 across substantially the entire image display device 70 and outputting a sound (specific function activation system sound) from the audio output device 331 notifying the user that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen) that darkens substantially the entire image display device 70 and displays text images notifying the user that the specific function has been activated and that the game will end. Note that, while the above embodiment increases the number of reserved memory displays, such as the reserved icon T1, the specific function activation image 205 may also be displayed without increasing the number of reserved memory displays.

When a specific function activation notification is being executed, the screen of the image display device 70 restricts displays related to the game, such as the icon, reserved icon, reserved numbers, performance symbols, special symbols (small symbols), and background images, and displays a specific function activation notification image 205. It is also possible to display a management display, such as a display instructing the user to call an administrator, separate from the specific function activation notification image 205. When a specific function activation notification is being executed, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64, which are controlled by the main control board 300, may continue to display the reserved memory, or the continuation of the display of the reserved memory may be restricted on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64. Similarly, when a specific function operation notification is being executed, the display of the hold memory may be continued on the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84, which are controlled by the performance control board 320, or the continuation of the display of the hold memory on the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 may be restricted.

After that, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change in the performance pattern 70a (special pattern), the customer waiting performance will not start, and the special function activation notification will continue to be executed (see Figure 76 (h)).

(Specific Example 2)
Using Figures 77 and 78, we will explain specific example 2 of the variable presentation when a specific function is activated.

First, at timing P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the variable display control board 320 receives the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, display symbol designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the display control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variable display.

At this time, while the changing background music continues to be output, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number (numeric information) displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C in a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. Also, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and special pattern (referred to as the first lamp pattern when particularly distinguished) on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins, but the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after a preparatory operation.

The first special symbol reserve indicator 63 (123) displays the first reserve number U1 (reserve memory) stored (captured) by the main control board 300 by turning on, off, or blinking the LED. The fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by the blinking of the LED of the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81. Furthermore, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 displays the first reserve number U1 (reserve memory) stored (captured) by the performance control board 320 by turning on, off, or blinking the LED.

Next, at timing P1, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2". In addition, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". When the performance control board 320 receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control board 300 at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T12 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 78 (a)).

After that, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 78 (b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). At this time, when the performance control board 320 receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control board 300, processing is carried out to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Furthermore, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see Figure 78 (c)), and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 finally stops in a losing mode (for example, off).

Next, at timing P4, when the stop time for the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol variable display begins on the first special symbol display 60 (120). Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." At this timing, when the variable display control board 320 receives the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, display symbol designation command, first special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 300, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the display control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variable display.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 also changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one-lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 also begins. The effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as partial movement of the decorative parts or full or partial expansion/contraction, as in this embodiment (see Figure 78 (d)).

After that, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the hold icon T1 was completed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has begun to change, so the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performing) (see Figure 78 (e)).

Next, at timing P6, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2". In addition, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2". When the performance control board 320 receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting hole winning designation command (pre-reading designation command)) sent from the main control board 300 at this timing, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "2".

In specific example 2, when a game ball enters the first start hole 112 at timing P5, the activation conditions for the specific function are met and the specific function activation flag is set. The first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is not displayed as changing from "1" to "2" in a non-animated manner over one frame. Furthermore, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 is not displayed as changing from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T12 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 78 (f)).

When the specific function activation flag is set, a specific function activation notification is executed on the image display device 70 or the like (see Figure 78 (g)). For example, this can be achieved by displaying a specific function activation image 205 across substantially the entire image display device 70, 71, and outputting a sound (specific function activation system sound) from the audio output device 331 to notify that a specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen 205Z) that darkens substantially the entire image display device 70, 71 and displays a text image notifying that a specific function has been activated and that the game will end.

When a specific function activation notification is being executed, the screen of the image display device 70 restricts displays related to the game, such as the icon, reserved icon, reserved numbers, performance symbols, special symbols (small symbols), and background images, and displays a specific function activation notification image 205. It is also possible to display a management display, such as a display instructing the user to call an administrator, separate from the specific function activation notification image 205. When a specific function activation notification is being executed, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64, which are controlled by the main control board 300, may continue to display the reserved memory, or the continuation of the display of the reserved memory may be restricted on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) and the second special symbol indicator 64. Similarly, when a specific function operation notification is being executed, the display of the hold memory may be continued on the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84, which are controlled by the performance control board 320, or the continuation of the display of the hold memory on the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 may be restricted.

After that, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change in the performance pattern 70a (special pattern), the customer waiting performance will not start, and the special function activation notification will continue to be executed (see Figure 78 (h)).

As described above, when a specific function is activated, a specific function activation notification is issued, the start gate detection switches 304, 305 and the special prize gate detection switches 306a, 306b are disabled, and a predetermined specific function activation process, such as restricting the release of game balls, is executed. Disabling the detection switches can be achieved in various ways, such as by controlling the detection switches so that they do not detect game balls even if they detect a game ball, or by de-energizing the detection switches so that they do not detect game balls. In this way, even if a game ball enters the start gate or special prize gate after a specific function is activated, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure has the detection switches disabled, so that the start condition based on the game ball entering the prize gate is not met, and similarly, the specific condition based on the game machine's ball entering the special prize gate is not met. Furthermore, in addition to or instead of disabling the special prize gate detection switches 306a, 306b, the special prize gate may be closed. If a specific function is activated during a game state other than a jackpot, the big prize opening will not be open, so the entry of game balls into the big prize opening will be restricted.

When a specific function is not activated, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can display the reserved memory (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved display means) in accordance with the increase or decrease in reserved memory as reserved memory is stored or consumed. In contrast, when a specific function is activated, the display of the reserved memory (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved display means) can be limited even if a gaming ball enters the start hole. This can reduce player confusion when a specific function is activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When a specific function is not activated, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of displaying reserved memories (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved display means) in accordance with the increase or decrease in reserved memories as reserved memories are stored or consumed. In contrast, when a specific function is activated, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of restricting the display of reserved memories (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers) on the image display device 70 (reserved display means) even if reserved memories are stored. This makes it possible to prevent confusion for the player when a specific function is activated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of executing variable effects on the image display device 70 if a reserved memory is stored when a specific function is not activated. In contrast, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of restricting the execution of variable effects on the image display device 70 (reserved display means) when a specific function is activated, even if a reserved memory is stored. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming confused when a specific function is activated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the specific function is not activated, the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can update the display on the image display device 70 (hold display means) to reflect the increase or decrease in the reserved memory when the reserved memory increases or decreases due to a win or other reason. In contrast, when the specific function is activated, the image display device 70 (hold display means) can limit the update display to reflect the increase or decrease in the reserved memory, even if a game ball enters the start hole. This can reduce player confusion when the specific function is activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is powered on and there is no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information), if a reserved memory is stored, the image display device 70 (reserved display means) can display the reserved memory (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers). On the other hand, when there is a specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) when the gaming machine 100 is powered on, even if a reserved memory is stored, the image display device 70 (reserved display means) can limit the display of the reserved memory (reserved icon T1 and reserved numbers). This can reduce player confusion when a specific function is activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure has no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information) when power is turned on, if an increase or decrease in reserved memory occurs due to a winning entry into the start slot, etc., the image display device 70 (reserved display means) can display an updated display in accordance with the increase or decrease in reserved memory. In contrast, when the specific function activation flag is present (specific function activation information is present) when power is turned on, the image display device 70 (reserved display means) can limit the update display in accordance with the increase or decrease in reserved memory, even if a gaming ball enters the start slot. This can reduce player confusion when a specific function is activated, improving the enjoyment of the game.

As mentioned above, the front side of the main control board 300 is equipped with an RWM (RAM) clear switch 302a that inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in the main RAM 301c or to update the setting value (the probability of determining a jackpot), which indicates the degree of advantage in play; a setting key switch 302b that inputs a signal to transition to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode; an information display 302c that displays the base value B and setting value, which enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped; and other electronic components.

The information display 302c is used to display setting values and performance information (normal base values) and is composed of four 7-segment displays with decimal points DP arranged horizontally. The two 7-segment displays corresponding to the most significant two digits form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), while the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the least significant two digits form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information indicating the setting value and the numerical value of the performance information. These four 7-segment displays display the setting value and the base value B in normal game play. Note that when displaying the base value B, dynamic lighting is used, and when displaying a two-digit setting value, static lighting is used by the two 7-segment displays from the right.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can display reserved memory based on the fulfillment of the start conditions on the image display device 70 and LED displays 83, 84. Furthermore, as mentioned above, information related to game value (e.g., base value) can be displayed on the information display device 302c (performance display means). If the power is turned off while a specific function is not operating and then power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and there is no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, the reserved memory stored before power was turned off can be displayed on the image display device 70 and reserve display means such as the LED displays 83, 84, and the information before power was turned off can be displayed on the information display device 302c (performance display means).

When the power is turned off while a specific function is not operating, and then power is turned on with the RAM cleared, and the specific function operation flag is not present when power is turned on (there is no specific function operation information), it is possible to restrict the display of reserved memory stored before power is turned off on the reserved display means such as the image display device 70 and LED indicators 83, 84, while it is possible to display newly stored reserved memory on the reserved display means such as the image display device 70 and LED indicators 83, 84. In this case, the information before power is turned off can be displayed on the information display 302c (performance display means), and the information on the information display 302c (performance display means) can be updated based on information such as new reserved memory.

If the power is cut off while a specific function is operating, and then power is turned on with the RAM cleared, and the specific function operation flag is not present when the power is turned on (there is no specific function operation information), it is possible to restrict the display of the reserved memory stored before the power was cut off on the reserved display means such as the image display device 70 and LED indicators 83, 84, and to display the information before the power was cut off on the information display 302c (performance display means). In this case, the newly stored reserved memory can be displayed on the reserved display means such as the image display device 70 and LED indicators 83, 84.

If the power is shut off while a specific function is operating and then turned on without clearing the RAM, and the specific function operation flag is present when the power is turned on (there is no specific function operation information), it is possible to restrict the display of the reserved memory stored before the power was shut off on the reserved display means such as the image display device 70 and LED indicators 83, 84, and to display the information before the power was shut off on the information display 302c (performance display means). In this case, even if a specified condition occurs that causes new reserved memory to be stored while the specific function is operating (a ball hitting the starting hole), it is possible to restrict the display of the reserved memory on the reserved display means such as the image display device 70 and LED indicators 83, 84.

When the power is turned off while a specific function is operating and then turned on without clearing the RAM, and the specific function operation flag is not present when the power is turned on (there is no operation information for the specific function), if there is pending memory stored, the pending memory can be displayed on a pending display means such as the image display device 70 or LED indicators 83, 84, and information before the power was turned off can be displayed on the information display 302c (performance display means). In contrast, if the specific function operation flag is present when the power is turned on (there is operation information for the specific function), even if pending memory is stored, display of the pending memory on a pending display means such as the image display device 70 or LED indicators 83, 84 can be restricted, but information before the power was turned off can be displayed on the information display (performance display means).

This will help prevent players from becoming confused by the activation of specific functions, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the power is turned off when a specific function is not in operation and then turned on without clearing the RAM, and there is no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, prize balls can be paid out based on the payout information stored before the power was turned off.

When the power is turned off while a specific function is not operating, and then the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on, if there is no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, it is possible to restrict the payout of prize balls based on the payout information before the power was turned off.

If the power is cut off while a specific function is in operation, and then the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on, and there is no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information) when the power is turned on, it is possible to limit the payout of prize balls based on the payout information before the power was turned off.

If the power is cut off while a specific function is operating and then powered on without clearing the RAM, and the specific function operation flag is present (specific function operation information is present) when the power is turned on, prize balls can be paid out based on the payout information stored before the power was cut off.

This will help prevent players from becoming confused by the activation of specific functions, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of retaining the reserved memory stored before the specific function is activated when a specific function is activated. If the gaming machine 100 is powered on without a RAM clear operation after a power outage following activation of a specific function and the specific function activation flag (activation information for a specific function) is set, the reserved memory stored before the specific function is activated can be retained, but the execution of variable effects based on the reserved memory can be restricted. Furthermore, if the gaming machine 100 is powered on with a RAM clear operation after a power outage following activation of a specific function and the specific function activation flag (activation information for a specific function) is not present, the execution of variable effects based on the reserved memory stored before the power outage can be restricted. This can prevent players from becoming confused by the activation of a specific function, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Here, when a miss reserve memory that results in a miss variation presentation and a hit reserve memory that results in a hit variation presentation are stored, if the gaming machine 100 is powered off after a specific function is activated and then powered on without a RAM clear operation and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is set, the miss reserve memory and hit reserve memory stored before the specific function is activated can be retained, but the execution of variation presentations based on the hit reserve memory can be restricted. Also, when a miss reserve memory that results in a miss variation presentation and a hit reserve memory that results in a hit variation presentation are stored, if the gaming machine 100 is powered off after a specific function is activated and then powered on without a RAM clear operation and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is set, the miss reserve memory and hit reserve memory stored before the specific function is activated can be retained, but the execution of variation presentations based on the miss reserve memory can be restricted. Furthermore, if a miss reserve memory that results in a miss variable effect and a hit reserve memory that results in a hit variable effect are stored, if the gaming machine 100 is powered off after a specific function is activated and then powered on without a RAM clear operation and the specific function activation flag (specific function activation information) is set, it is possible to retain the miss reserve memory and hit reserve memory that were stored before the specific function was activated, but it may also be possible to restrict the execution of both the variable effect based on the miss reserve memory and the variable effect based on the hit reserve memory.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of executing a variable effect of the effect pattern 70a on the image display device 70 (display means) based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting hole (a specified requirement). Furthermore, when a specific function is activated, the execution of variable effects based on the reserved memory can be restricted. Here, when a specific function is activated, even if a ball newly enters the starting hole (a specified requirement), the storage of the reserved memory can be restricted and the execution of variable effects can be restricted. Here, "a ball newly enters the starting hole (a specified requirement)" is assumed to mean a case where a ball jam occurs in the game area before the specific function is activated, and the ball jam is cleared after the specific function is activated, allowing the game ball to enter the starting hole. This can reduce player confusion when a specific function is activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the gaming machine 100 disclosed herein has no specific function activation flag (no specific function activation information) when powered on, it can store new pending memory based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting hole (predetermined requirement) after powering on, and can execute variable effects based on this pending memory. In contrast, when the specific function activation flag is present (specific function activation information is present) when powered on, even if a new ball enters the starting hole (predetermined requirement) after powering on, it can restrict the storage of new pending memory and can restrict the execution of variable effects. Here, "a new ball entering the starting hole (predetermined requirement)" refers to a situation where a ball jam occurs in the play area before the specific function is activated, and the ball jam is cleared after powering on, allowing the game ball to enter the starting hole. This can reduce player confusion when a specific function is activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Referring to Figure 79, we will explain what happens when a specific function is activated while the movable member 73 is in operation. For example, if a specific function is activated while a predetermined effect such as a promotion notification effect is being executed, a specific function activation image 205 is displayed on the image display device 70. Here, the predetermined effect in which the operation effect of the movable member 73 and the rainbow color effect are executed simultaneously is not limited to promotion notification effects that suggest a change to an advantageous pattern, but is also used for effects with a relatively high level of expectation, such as decisive effects that suggest the pattern will line up, scene change effects, step-up effects, and reach transition effects. Note that the specific content described separately can be applied to the content of the rainbow color effect of the predetermined effect.

As shown in Figure 79, before a specific function is activated, a pre-notification image 202 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 70. Here, as shown in Figure 79 etc., when a specific function is activated, a specific function activation image 205 is displayed on the image display device 70, and a notification that the specific function is activated is made.

As shown in Figure 79, assume that the image display device 70 is executing a rainbow effect while also executing a motion effect of the first movable member 73. At this time, the first movable member 73 is executing a rainbow effect using a built-in lamp. When a specific function is activated while the rainbow effect and the motion effect of the first movable member 73 are being executed, the first movable member 73 overwrites its normal driving data and sets driving data for when the specific function is activated. In other words, the first movable member 73 abandons the planned operation and performs the operation when the specific function is activated (does not complete the operation currently being executed).

For example, as shown in FIG. 79, if a specific function is activated while a rainbow effect and a movement effect of the first movable member 73 are being executed, the first movable member 73 will stop its planned operation and return to its retracted position. On the other hand, if a specific function is activated while a rainbow effect and a movement effect of the first movable member 73 are being executed, the continuation of the execution of the rainbow effect on the image display device 70 will be restricted. Also, if a specific function is activated while a rainbow effect and a movement effect of the first movable member 73 are being executed, the continuation of the execution of the rainbow effect on the first movable member 73 will be restricted.

In other words, when a specific function is activated while the first movable member 73 is operating, the first movable member 73 stops the series of operations (normal operation) of retracted position → advanced position → retracted position, temporarily stops at the position where the specific function is activated, and then performs an operation returning to the retracted position (operation when the specific function is activated). Note that when the specific function is activated, the first movable member 73 performs the retraction operation performed when the specific function is activated using "low speed and high torque." The image display device 70 also stops the rainbow-colored effect, and the screen of the image display device 70 switches to the specific function activation image 202. Furthermore, the first movable member 73 turns off the built-in lamp. That is, when the first movable member 73 returns to the retracted position, the built-in lamp is turned off.

In this way, in the gaming machine 100 disclosed herein, if a specific function is activated while the first movable member 73 is operating during a predetermined effect, including a rainbow effect, the planned operation is abandoned and the specific function activation operation is performed. This allows the gaming machine 100 to reliably and quickly return the first movable member 73 to the retracted position regardless of the position of the first movable member 73. As a result, the gaming machine 100 prevents the first movable member 73 from interfering with the visibility of the specific function activation image 205 displayed on the image display device 70, and can quickly notify the player that a specific function has been activated.

Even if a specific function is activated while the first movable member 73 is operating, the first movable member 733 may continue the planned protruding operation (operation related to the set power-on time) and complete that operation (carry out the operation to completion). Furthermore, the operation performed when the specific function is activated may be the same as the initial check operation of the first movable member 73 that is performed when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure is capable of executing predetermined effects including an action effect by the first movable member 73 (movable gadget) and a specific light-emitting effect (rainbow effect) that appears rainbow-colored using the effect means (image display device 70, board lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.). If a specific function is activated while the action effect of the first movable member 73 is being executed in a predetermined effect, the action effect can be continued, while the continuation of the specific light-emitting effect (rainbow effect) in the predetermined effect can be limited. This can reduce player confusion when a specific function is activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game. It can also reduce the burden associated with suddenly stopping the action of the movable gadget.

(About time-saving gameplay)
In addition to or instead of the "low-probability time-saving game state after a jackpot" that is executed after the end of a jackpot game, the above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving game state" may set a "low-probability time-saving game state triggered by a specified number of changes in a specified number of times" that is triggered by the execution of a specified number of changes in a special symbol in a low-probability game state. The "low-probability time-saving game state triggered by a specified number of changes" is executed after a specified number of symbol changes, for example, 1,000 times, in a low-probability game state that includes a low-probability time-saving game state, and can be executed in combination with effects such as whether or not a jackpot has occurred, as well as effects that indicate when a time-saving entry has occurred, such as counting down the number of changes until the time-saving event occurs.

In addition to or instead of the "low-probability time-saving game state after a jackpot" and/or the "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination," a "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" may be set in the low-probability game state, triggered by the display of a predetermined combination of special symbols. The "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" can be executed in the low-probability state after the display of specific symbols, such as "1, 2, 3" or "7, 8, 7," and can be executed by combining effects such as whether or not a jackpot has occurred, as well as a reach to indicate whether or not the time-saving game state will occur, or other time-saving entry effects.

(Game ball entering the starting hole)
In the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, when a gaming ball is shot so as to pass through the left region of the gaming area, it is possible for the ball to enter the first start gate 112 or the second start gate 115 which opens as a result of a winning regular pattern lottery which is held on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the regular pattern activation gate 113b. In the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, when a gaming ball is shot so as to pass through the right region of the gaming area 106, it is possible for the ball to enter the first start gate 112 or the second start gate 115 which opens as a result of a winning regular pattern lottery which is held on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the regular pattern activation gate 113b.

In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, a ball is more likely to pass through the normal symbol activation gate 113b when it is shot into the right region of the gaming area 106 than when it is shot into the left region of the gaming area 106. Therefore, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, in a "time-saving gaming state" (specific gaming state) in which the second start hole 115 is more likely to be controlled to an open state when the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b than in a "non-time-saving gaming state," the player can progress through the game more advantageously without consuming gaming balls by shooting the gaming ball into the right region of the gaming area and aiming for it to enter the second start hole 115, rather than by shooting the gaming ball into the left region of the gaming area.

In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the entrance to the warp device opens on the left side of the decorative frame, and a first start opening 112, through which gaming balls can always enter (win), is located directly below the stage section along which gaming balls guided by the warp device roll. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state" (normal gaming state), in which the second start opening 115 is less easily controlled to open when a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b than in the "time-saving gaming state," the player can progress through the game more advantageously without consuming gaming balls by shooting the gaming ball into the left area of the gaming area 106 and aiming for it to win through the first start opening 112, rather than by shooting the gaming ball into the right area of the gaming area 106.

In this way, the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is designed so that whether the ball is shot into the left or right area of the play area will have an advantage or disadvantage for the player, and it is advisable to switch the area of the play area that is shot out depending on the game status. In other words, the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is required to progress through the game with the aim of winning in the start hole 112, 115 that corresponds to the game status. However, because whether the ball is shot into the right or left area of the play area 106 is left up to the player's firing operation, there is a risk that the player will proceed with the game aiming to win in the wrong start hole 112, 115.

In addition, even if a gaming machine only requires that the gaming ball be shot into the same area of the gaming area (for example, the left area) in both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state," whether the ball is shot into the right or left area of the gaming area is left to the player's firing operation, so there is still a risk that the player may play the game aiming to win in the wrong starting hole 112, 115.

(Example of production 1)
80 and 81 are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the expectation level display, the pending icon change effect, the lamp change effect, the notification sound effect, the movable member operation effect, and the successive advance notice effect resulting from these. Note that various effects that raise expectations for the execution of a jackpot game are sometimes called win suggestion effects.

As shown in Figure 80(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss effect pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect begins, as shown in Figure 80 (b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a begins, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display unit 70B1, second display unit 70B2, and third display unit 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, first display unit 70B1, and second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, a blue effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that begins to change, thereby starting the first of the continuous preview effects; the display mode of the first hold icon shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2 changes to a blue character icon, thereby starting the hold icon change effect; and the start port lamp changes from an off state to a flashing blue state, thereby starting the lamp change effect. In addition, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak operation mode, vibrating vertically, is executed for a predetermined period of time. The operation effect in the weak operation mode of the first movable member 73 begins before the effect pattern 70a begins to change, and is stopped before the effect pattern 70 scrolls at high speed (for example, before the preparatory operation).

After that, as shown in Figure 80(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 stops. In addition, a zone effect (normal zone effect) begins in the first image display device 70. Specifically, the background image changes to zone background A, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone background music is output. Then, after the change time has elapsed, the effect symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 80(d), and then the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect starts, as shown in Figure 80 (e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that begins the changing display, thereby starting the second consecutive preview effect, and the pending icon change effect, lamp change effect, and zone effect continue. In addition, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak operation mode, vibrating vertically, is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in Figure 80(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 stops. Then, after the variation time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 80(g), the effect symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily displayed, and then the loss effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the change effect that will cause the change begins, as shown in Figure 80 (h), the change display of the effect pattern 70a begins, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, an effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, starting the third consecutive preview display. The effect image EF is displayed in red, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue. Additionally, the symbol effect image ZE is displayed in a color that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than before. The pending icon change display continues. The start lamp changes from a lit blue to a flashing red, which indicates a lamp change display that indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than when the lamp is lit blue. An operation display is also executed in which the first movable member 73 operates in a strong operation mode, moving significantly from the top of the first image display device 70 to the front of the first image display device 70. At this time, an operation display is executed in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak operation mode, moving in a diagonal vibration direction, for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the advance notification executed in the variable display indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than the previous one. Here, the rainbow effect is more likely to be produced when the movable members 73, 74 are actuated in a strong actuation mode than when they are actuated in a weak actuation mode.

Then, as shown in Figure 81(i), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 stops. The zone effect is switched to zone background B, which indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than zone background A.

As shown in Figure 81 (j), a mini character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an effect that builds anticipation is executed, for example, by having the mini character MCB move across the screen.

After that, as shown in Figure 81 (k), for example, the line uttered by the ally, "CHANCE!", is displayed in the line window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice corresponding to the line, "Your chance has come!", is displayed from the audio output device 331, thereby executing a line preview performance.

Then, as shown in Figure 81 (l), the "3" effect symbol 70a is displayed as a stopped symbol (temporarily stopped symbol) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the variable display symbol 70a that was being displayed, while a reach effect (normal reach) is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a moving symbol in the central variable display area. At this time, the display mode of the first reserved icon that has been shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, thereby executing a reserved icon change effect that offers a higher expectation of a jackpot game than a blue character icon. Furthermore, in conjunction with this, the start port lamp changes from a red light to a multi-colored (rainbow) light, thereby executing a lamp change effect that offers a higher expectation of a jackpot than a red light.

After that, when the game progresses to SP Reach, as shown in Figure 81 (m), the SP Reach effect begins, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased. The reduced-size effect pattern 70a changes from a normal display mode consisting of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a specified character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, a decorative section consisting of a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number section (identification characters), to a simple reduced display mode consisting of just the identification section.

When the game progresses to an SPSP Reach, the SPSP Reach performance begins, as shown in Figure 81 (n), and the icon display area 70C is erased along with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 320 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in Figure 81 (o), the jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333", which indicates the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game), and the special symbol TZ are temporarily displayed as still symbols (shaking and fluctuating), and then displayed as still symbols, and the fluctuating effect ends.

Although the start gate lamp remains off while the SP and/or SPSP reach is displayed, the lamp change effect may continue, or the start gate lamp may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g., white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (i.e., does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

(Example of production 2)
A specific example 2 of the variable display effect is shown below.

(Normal game state special 1 variable display)
The special 1 variable display in the normal game state will be explained using Figures 82 and 83. As shown in Figure 82, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1" when a game ball enters the first starting hole 112. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually increases in size from a very small size) (see Figure 83 (a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable indicator 81 begins to change, but the effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of part of the decorative part or the entire or partial expansion/contraction operation, as in this embodiment (see Figure 83 (b)).

At timing P2, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 83 (c)).

At timing P3, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 83 (d)).

After that, at timing P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("259"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 83 (e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). Additionally, processing is performed on the performance control board 320 to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("259") (see Figure 83 (f)), and the first lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol display 60 (120) begins to display a changing first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the changing presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. The first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 also changes from "2" to "1". The hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first icon being displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern begins to change, and after preparatory operations, scrolling begins (see Figure 83 (g)).

At timing P7, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 83 (h)).

After that, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 83 (i)).

Then, at timing P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). Additionally, processing is performed on the performance control board 320 to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 83 (j)), and the first lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

From then on, the Special 1 variable display will be displayed in normal game mode according to the flow described above.

We have explained the Special 1 change display in normal game mode, but the basic flow is the same for the Special 2 change display in normal game mode and the Special 2 change display in special game mode (time-saving game mode, special bonus game mode).

Specifically, the first reserved number, first special symbol, first special symbol display 60 (120), first special symbol reserved display 63 (123), sub-first variable display 81, sub-first reserved display 83, first reserved number display area 70E, first reserved icon display area 70B, first lamp symbol, and first start opening 112 should each be read as the second reserved number, second special symbol, second special symbol display 62 (122), second special symbol reserved display 64 (124), sub-second variable display 82, sub-second reserved display 84, second reserved number display area 70F, second reserved icon display area 70D, second lamp symbol, and second start opening 115.

(Special 1 variable display of specific game state)
The special 2 variable display in the special game state will be explained using Figures 82 and 84. As shown in Figure 82, at the timing of P0, the game ball enters the second starting hole 115, and the second reserved number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is additionally displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 84 (a)).

Next, at timing P1, the second reserved number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the second reserved number U2 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TH. Also, the display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and second lamp pattern on the sub-second variable indicator 82 begins to change, but the effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after preparatory operations such as the movement of part of the decorative part or the entire or partial expansion/contraction operation, as in this embodiment (see Figure 84 (b)).

At timing P2, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 115, the second reserved number U2 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is additionally displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 84 (c)).

At timing P3, a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 115, causing the second reserved number U2 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is additionally displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 84 (d)).

After that, at timing P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("259"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 84 (e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing mode on the second special symbol display 62 (122). Additionally, processing is performed on the performance control board 320 to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("259") (see Figure 84 (f)), and the second lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second reserved number U2 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the second special symbol display 62 (122) begins to display a changing second special symbol. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved display 64 (124) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the second reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the performance control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the changing performance.

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. The second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 also changes from "2" to "1." The hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one displayed as the icon TH. The display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern begins to change, and after preparatory operations, scrolling begins (see Figure 84 (g)).

At timing P7, a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 115, causing the second reserved number U2 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second hold indicator 84 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one hold icon T2 is additionally displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) (see Figure 84 (h)).

After that, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("789"). At this time, the effect symbols 70a slightly sway (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the effect symbol 70a also perform a swaying motion (effect motion). In addition, the reserved icon T and the icon TH are rotating (effect motion) (see Figure 84 (i)).

Then, at timing P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the second special symbol display 62 (122). Additionally, processing is performed on the performance control board 320 to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Additionally, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a finally stops at the stop position, the special symbol TZ finally stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 84 (j)), and the second lamp symbol finally stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

From then on, the Special 2 variable display will be displayed in the specific game state according to the flow described above.

(Special 1 variable display of specific game state)
The special 1 variable display in the special game state will be explained using Figures 85 and 86. As shown in Figure 85, at the timing of P0, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1" when a game ball enters the first starting hole 112. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1." However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 86 (a)).

Next, at timing P1, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 decreases from "1" to "0," and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. Also, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "0." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the performance control board 320 changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (it is not shifted). Also, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable indicator 81 start to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains stopped (see Figure 86 (b)).

At timing P2, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, the first reserved number U1 stored (kept) by the main control board 300 increases from "0" to "1." At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "0" to "1."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 changes from "0" to "1." However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 86 (c)).

At timing P3, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, no additional hold icon T1 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 86 (d)).

After that, at timing P4, even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the effect pattern 70a remains stopped (see Figure 86 (e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). Additionally, processing is performed on the performance control board 320 to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, and the effect symbol 70a remains stationary. In addition, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("259") (see Figure 86 (f)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

Next, at timing P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the main control board 300 decreases from "2" to "1," and the first special symbol display 60 (120) begins to display a changing first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) changes from "2" to "1." Furthermore, the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledge) by the presentation control board 320 changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the changing presentation.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Also, the display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol begins to change, but the performance symbol 70a remains stopped (see Figure 86 (g)).

At timing P7, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112, causing the first reserved number U1 stored (knowledged) by the main control board 300 to increase from "1" to "2." At this time, the first reserved number U1 displayed by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123) changes from "1" to "2."

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see Figure 86 (h)).

After that, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, center, and right effect patterns 70a remain stationary (see Figure 86 (i)).

Then, at timing P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in a losing state on the first special symbol display device 60 (120). Additionally, processing is performed on the performance control board 320 to end the variation performance.

At this time, the background image continues scrolling and the performance symbol 70a remains stationary, but the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("789") (see Figure 86 (j)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing pattern (for example, off).

From then on, the special 1 variation display will be performed in the specific game state according to the flow described above. Note that in the above example, the effect pattern 70a does not vary, but the effect pattern 70a may vary.

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of executing a specific change display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display in the specific game mode, and in the specific change display of this embodiment, the effect symbol 70a does not change. On the other hand, in the normal game mode, the aforementioned specific change display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 1 change display, and the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 112. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 112 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 112, 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 100 is capable of executing a specific change display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 change display in a specific game state, and in the specific change display of this embodiment, the effect symbol 70a does not change. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the aforementioned specific change display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 2 change display, and the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ change while displaying the hold icon T2 from the start to the end of the special 2 change display.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 112. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 112 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 112, 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

In the specific variable display, at least one of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can be made to vary. For example, both the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can vary, or the effect pattern 70a can vary while the special pattern TZ does not, or the special pattern TZ can vary but the effect pattern 70a is not displayed.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the reserved icon and reserved number can be displayed variably in a predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 112. In contrast, in the specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed variably in a specific manner that differs from the predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 112, in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 112.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 112. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 112, 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

In an embodiment, in a specific game state, the reserved icon and reserved numbers can be displayed variably in a predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 115. In contrast, in a specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed variably in a specific manner that differs from the predetermined manner in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 112, in response to an increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 112.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 112. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 112, 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

In the special 1 variable display in normal game mode or the special 2 variable display in specific game mode, information about the number of reserved balls is displayed using a reserved icon, reserved number, and display, while in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode, it is displayed using the reserved number and display. In other words, the special 1 variable display in specific game mode has fewer total types of information about the number of reserved balls than the special 1 variable display in normal game mode or the special 2 variable display in specific game mode. It can also be said that the information about the number of reserved balls is more difficult to grasp (confirm) in the special 1 variable display in specific game mode than the special 1 variable display in normal game mode or the special 2 variable display in specific game mode.

Furthermore, the reserved (relevant) icon may not necessarily be displayed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, but may be displayed. Furthermore, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the reserved (relevant) icon may not be shifted based on an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, or the reserved (relevant) icon may not be operated, and may be displayed in a manner different from the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In other words, the reserved icon can be shifted in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, but the execution of the shift display of the reserved icon can be restricted in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the reserved icon can be displayed in a predetermined manner in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, but the execution of the display of the reserved icon in a predetermined manner can be restricted in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state, just as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the game ball enter the first starting hole 112. This can then lead the player to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 115 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, by the player aiming for the appropriate starting hole 112, 115 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state and increase their interest in the game.

(When a specific function is activated in the special 1 variable display in normal game mode)
When a game ball enters the first starting hole 112 during normal game play, the activation condition for the specific function is satisfied and the specific function activation flag is set, and a specific function activation notification is executed on the first image display device 70 or the like (see FIG. 87 ). For example, this can be achieved by displaying a specific function activation image 205 on the first image display device 70 and outputting a sound (specific function activation system sound) that notifies that the specific function has been activated by the audio output device 331. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen 205Z) that darkens substantially the entire image display devices 70 and 71 and displays a text image that notifies that the specific function has been activated and that the game will end.

After that, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change in the effect pattern 70a (special pattern), the effect of waiting for customers will not start, and the special function activation notification will continue to be executed.

(When a specific function is activated in the special 2 variable display of a specific game state)
When a game ball enters the second start hole 115 in the specific game state, the activation condition for the specific function is satisfied and the specific function activation flag is set, and a specific function activation notification is executed on the first image display device 70 or the like (see FIG. 88 ). For example, this can be achieved by displaying a specific function activation image 205 on the first image display device 70 and outputting a sound (specific function activation system sound) from the audio output device 331 notifying the user that the specific function has been activated. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen 205Z) that darkens substantially the entire first image display device 70 and displays a text image notifying the user that the specific function has been activated and that the game will end.

After that, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change in the effect pattern 70a (special pattern), the effect of waiting for customers will not start, and the special function activation notification will continue to be executed.

(When a specific function is activated in the special 1 variable display of a specific game state)
When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 112 in the specific game state, the activation condition for the specific function is satisfied and the specific function activation flag is set, and a specific function activation notification is executed on the first image display device 70 or the like (see FIG. 89 ). For example, this can be achieved by displaying a specific function activation image 205 on the first image display device 70 and outputting a sound (specific function activation system sound) that notifies that the specific function has been activated by the audio output device 331. In this embodiment, the specific function activation image 205 is a screen (specific function activation screen) that darkens substantially the entire image display device 70, 71 and displays a text image that notifies that the specific function has been activated and that the game will end.

After that, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change in the effect pattern 70a (special pattern), the effect of waiting for customers will not start, and the special function activation notification will continue to be executed.

In this way, even if a prize ball lands in the first start hole 112, which is not a target ball entry hole, in the specific game state, if the activation conditions for the specific function are met by the prize ball resulting from this entry, the specific function will be activated. Also, even if a prize ball is generated as a result of a variable presentation based on the start conditions established by a prize ball lands in the first start hole 112, which is not a target ball entry hole, in the specific game state, if the activation conditions for the specific function are met by this prize ball, the specific function will be activated. In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure is capable of activating the specific function even if a prize ball lands in the first start hole 112, which is not a target ball entry hole in the specific game state.

Even if a prize ball lands in the first start hole 112, which is not a target ball entry hole, in the specific game state, the prize ball based on this prize can set the specific function activation preparation flag, and a specific function activation advance notification can be issued based on this specific function activation preparation flag. Also, even if a prize ball is generated as a result of a variable presentation based on a start condition established by a prize ball lands in the first start hole 112, which is not a target ball entry hole, in the specific game state, the prize ball can set the specific function activation preparation flag, and a specific function activation advance notification can be issued based on this specific function activation preparation flag. In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure is capable of issuing a specific function advance notification even if a prize ball lands in the first start hole 112, which is not a target ball entry hole, in the specific game state.

In a specific game state, it is possible to restrict the display of a reserve icon based on a win at the first start port 112, and if a specific function is activated based on this win, it is possible to continue restricting the display of the reserve icon. In a normal game state, it is possible to display a reserve icon based on a win at the first start port 112, and if a specific function is activated based on this win, it is possible to not continue displaying the reserve icon but to restrict the display of the reserve icon. In a specific game state, it is possible to display a reserve icon based on a win at the second start port 115, and if a specific function is activated based on this win, it is possible to not continue displaying the reserve icon but to restrict the display of the reserve icon.

In a specific game state, it is possible to restrict the display of reserved memory as a reserved icon based on a win in the first start slot 112, but it is also possible to display the reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved display 83, or first special symbol reserved display 63 (123). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special 1 win, it is possible to continue to restrict the display of the reserved icon, and it is also possible to restrict the display of reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved display 83, or first special symbol reserved display 63 (123).

In a specific game state, it is possible to restrict the display of a reserved memory based on a win at the first start port 112 as a reserved icon, but if there is a reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115, the reserved memory based on this reserved memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the reserved number, sub-second reserved display 84, or second special symbol reserved display 64 (124). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special 1 win, it is possible to continue to restrict the display of the reserved icon based on a win at the first start port 112, and it is also possible to restrict the display of the reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115 as a reserved icon, reserved number, sub-second reserved display 84, or second special symbol reserved display 64 (124).

In normal game mode, a reserved memory based on a win in the first start slot 112 can be displayed as a reserved icon, and the reserved memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved display 83, or first special symbol reserved display 63 (123). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special 1 win, the display of the reserved icon can be limited without continuing to display the reserved icon, and the display of the reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved display 83, or first special symbol reserved display 63 (123) can be limited.

In normal gameplay, a reserved memory based on a win at the first start port 112 can be displayed as a reserved icon, but if there is a reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115, the reserved memory based on this reserved memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the reserved icon, reserved number, sub-second reserved indicator 84, or second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124). In this case, if a specific function is activated based on a special 1 win, it is possible to continuously restrict the display of the reserved icon based on a win at the first start port 112, and it is also possible to restrict the display of the reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115 in one or more (including all) of the reserved icon, reserved number, sub-second reserved indicator 84, or second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124).

In a specific game state, it is possible to display a reserved memory based on a win in the second start port 115 as a reserved icon, and to display the reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-second reserved display 84, or second special symbol reserved display 64 (124). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special 1 win, it is possible to limit the display of the reserved icon without continuing to display the reserved icon based on a win in the second start port 115, and to limit the display of the reserved memory in one or more (including all) of the reserved numbers, sub-first reserved display 83, or first special symbol reserved display 63 (123).

In a specific game state, a reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115 can be displayed as a reserved icon, but if there is a reserved memory based on a win at the first start port 112, the reserved memory based on this reserved memory can be displayed in one or more (including all) of the reserved icon, reserved number, sub-first reserved indicator 83, or first special symbol reserved indicator 63 (123). In this case, when a specific function is activated based on a special 1 win, it is possible to restrict the display of the reserved icon based on a win at the first start port 112, and it is also possible to restrict the display of the reserved memory based on a win at the second start port 115 in one or more (including all) of the reserved icon, reserved number, sub-second reserved indicator 84, or second special symbol reserved indicator 64 (124).

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, in a specific game state, a right-hit notification image 260 that guides the right hit and guides the launch direction of the game ball is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. Also, in a specific game state, if the first starting hole 112 is won, a right-hit warning image 261 that warns that the starting hole that should be aimed for a win is the second starting hole 115 is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. In a specific game state, if the second starting hole 115 is won, a right-hit warning image 261 that warns that the starting hole that should be aimed for a win is the second starting hole 115 is not displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. The right-hit notification image 260 is displayed continuously throughout the entire execution period of the specific game state. The right hit warning image 261 is displayed for a predetermined period of time that is shorter than the execution period of the specific game state from the time when a winning entry into the first start port 112 occurs in the specific game state, and is repeatedly displayed each time a winning entry into the first start port 112 occurs in the specific game state. Note that, as shown in FIG. 62, neither the right hit notification image 260 nor the right hit warning image 261 is displayed in the normal game state.

The gaming machine 100 of the present disclosure can execute a first predetermined notification (a small right-hit arrow notification while in a favorable position) exemplified by, for example, the right-hit notification image 260, and a second predetermined notification (please return to right-hit) exemplified by, for example, the right-hit warning image 261, when a ball wins the first start slot 112 in the specific game state and the first start condition is met. On the other hand, when a ball wins the first start slot 112 in the normal game state and the first start condition is met, or when a ball wins the second start slot 115 in the specific game state and the second start condition is met, the execution of the second predetermined notification (please return to right-hit) exemplified by, for example, the right-hit warning image 261, can be restricted. Furthermore, when a specific function is activated in the normal game state or the specific game state, a specific notification exemplified by, for example, the specific function activation notification (specific function activation image 205) can be executed. Furthermore, if a specific function is activated when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 112 in a specific game state and the first start condition is met, the display of the right hit notification image 260 (first predetermined notification) and the right hit caution image 261 (second predetermined notification) can be restricted, and the specific function activation image 205 (specific notification) can be displayed instead. This can reduce player confusion when a specific function is activated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The specific explanations of each rainbow effect provided separately can be applied to the content of each rainbow effect.

The above describes an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, an error notification image such as a magnetic detection error notification image was described as an example of an image having a higher priority than the specific function operation screen, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may set another image as an image having a higher priority than the specific function operation screen.

For example, after a specific function is activated, a menu selection button or the like may be displayed on a layer above the screen showing the specific function in operation, allowing the menu screen to be opened after the specific function is activated. It may also be possible to accept specified operations such as the menu selection button, and display a "pachi log image" that allows game history and other data to be saved on the player's terminal device.

Furthermore, after a specific function is activated (for example, when a "pachilog image" is displayed), the effect sound may be audibly output. Specifically, after a specific function is activated, the fader value of the effect variable channel may be amplified (the volume may be returned to normal). In other words, after a specific function is activated, the fader value may be set to "0" for only some sounds (only some sounds may have their volume limited).

For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to a managed gaming machine (so-called smart pachinko). That is, the gaming machine of the present invention may be one in which information about the gaming value (gaming balls) (such as the number of payouts) is stored on a predetermined information medium (such as a card) (the card may store information about the balls held, etc.).

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (effect control board 320) that executes effects based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, to be activated at a predetermined timing. The secondary control means is capable of executing a specific light-emitting effect that appears rainbow-colored (rainbow effect) using the effect means (image display devices 70, 71, board lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.) if there is no operation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (no specific function operation flag), during a predetermined period after the power is turned on and before the start conditions are met (period during which the customer waiting effect can be executed); and is capable of restricting the execution of the specific light-emitting effect by the effect means during the predetermined period if there is operation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (specific function operation flag).

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (effect control board 320) that executes effects based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, so as to activate at a predetermined timing. The secondary control means is capable of executing a specific light-emitting effect that appears rainbow-colored (rainbow effect) when a state in which the start condition is not met (a state in which no game ball enters the start slot 112, 115) continues for a predetermined period in a predetermined game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state, etc.) that is different from a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and when the specific function is activated in the predetermined game state, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect (rainbow effect) can be restricted even if the state in which the start condition is not met continues for a predetermined period.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) that executes performance based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, and the secondary control means is capable of reporting an abnormality using an alarm means (image display device 70, 71, audio output device 331, board lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.) based on the detection of a specific abnormality (power restoration, RAM clear, magnetic error, radio wave error, impact, door opening, etc.), and is characterized in that the alarm means is capable of reporting an abnormality even when the specific function is activated.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when a start condition is met (a gaming ball enters the start port 112, 115), and the reserved memory based on the fulfillment of the start condition can be displayed on a reserve display means (image display device 70, first special symbol reserve indicator 63, second special symbol reserve indicator 64, sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84, etc.), and can be controlled to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, and when the specific function is activated, the reserve display means can limit the update of the reserved memory even if a gaming ball enters the start port.

◆To solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when a start condition is met (a gaming ball enters the start port 112, 115), and is capable of displaying a reserved memory based on the fulfillment of the start condition on a reserved display means (image display device 70, first special symbol reserved indicator 63, second special symbol reserved indicator 64, sub-first reserved indicator 83, sub-second reserved indicator 84, etc.), and is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game to be activated at a predetermined timing when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, and is capable of displaying the reserved memory using the reserved display means if there is no activation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (no specific function activation flag) and the reserved memory is stored, and is capable of restricting the update of the reserved memory if there is activation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (specific function activation flag).

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the fulfillment of a start condition (entry of a gaming ball into the start hole 112, 115), and the reserved memory based on the fulfillment of the start condition can be displayed on a reserve display means (image display device 70, first special symbol reserve display 63, second special symbol reserve display 64, sub-first reserve display 83, sub-second reserve display 84, etc.), and information regarding the gaming value can be displayed on a performance display means (information display 302c), and a specific value derived based on the amount of gaming value awarded and the amount used reaches a predetermined value. When the power is turned on, the device can be controlled to activate a specific function that limits the progress of the game at a predetermined timing; if there is no operation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (no specific function operation flag), and the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display means can display the reserved memory and the performance display means can display information before the power was turned off; and if there is operation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (a specific function operation flag is present), even if the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display means can limit the display of the reserved memory and the performance display means can display information before the power was turned off.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) that executes performance based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the secondary control means displays a performance pattern in a display means (image display device 70) based on a reserved memory that is stored when a start condition is met (a game ball entering the start hole 112, 115). (70a) is capable of executing a variable effect, and when the specific function is activated, the reserved memory stored before the specific function is activated can be retained, and if there is operation information for the specific function when the gaming machine is powered on after being cut off after the specific function is activated (specific function activation flag present), the reserved memory stored before the specific function is activated can be retained, but the execution of the variable effect based on the reserved memory can be restricted, and if there is no operation information for the specific function when the gaming machine is powered on after being cut off after the specific function is activated (specific function activation flag absent), the execution of the variable effect based on the reserved memory can be restricted.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) that executes performance based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the secondary control means controls a display means (image display device 70) to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that limits the progress of the game. It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) based on the reserved memory that is stored when a start condition based on the occurrence of a predetermined requirement (a game ball entering the start port 112, 115) is met (the entry of a game ball into the start port 112, 115 is systematically met), and when the specific function is activated, it is possible to restrict the execution of the variable effect, and when the specific function is activated, it is possible to restrict the storage of new reserved memory due to the predetermined requirement even if the predetermined requirement newly occurs (a game ball entering the start port 112, 115).

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (performance control board 320) that executes performance based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the secondary control means is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game when a specific requirement occurs (a game ball entering the starting hole 112, 115). When the start condition is met (the entry of a game ball into the start opening 112, 115 is met systematically), a display means (image display device 70) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and if there is no operation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (no specific function operation flag), new reserved memory can be stored when a new predetermined requirement occurs, and if there is operation information for the specific function when the power is turned on (specific function operation flag present), storage of new reserved memory can be restricted even if a new predetermined requirement occurs.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (effect control board 320) that executes effects based on signals from the main control means. The main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived from the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, so as to activate at a predetermined timing. The secondary control means is capable of executing predetermined effects including an action effect using a movable role device (movable member 73) and a specific light-emitting effect that appears rainbow-colored (rainbow effect) using the effect means (image display device 70, board lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.). If the specific function is activated during the period in which the action effect in the predetermined effect is being executed, the action effect can continue to be executed, but the continuation of the specific light-emitting effect in the predetermined effect can be restricted.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means (presentation control board 320) that executes presentations based on signals from the main control means, and the main control means is controllable to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that restricts the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, and the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state or a probability variable gaming state) that is more advantageous than the first gaming state are restricted. The slave control means is capable of executing a first predetermined notification (right hit notification image 260) and a second predetermined notification (right hit caution image 261) when the first start condition is met in the second gaming state (a gaming ball enters the first start hole 112), and is capable of executing a specific notification (specific function in operation image 205) when the specific function is activated in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and is capable of restricting the execution of the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification and executing the specific notification when the specific function is activated while the first start condition is met in the second gaming state.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 320) that executes performance based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the slave control means displays a pre-display (pre-warning image 202) that notifies in advance of the activation of the specific function. The pre-display can be executed by a display means (image display device 70), and the pre-display can be displayed in a position different from the first information (reserved numbers, special symbol TZ, etc.) and the second information (effect symbol 70a) different from the first information displayed on the display means, and when a rainbow effect is executed at a first timing (decisive effect, cut-in, etc.) on the display means, the pre-display can limit the area of the rainbow effect, and when a rainbow effect is executed at a second timing (reserved change, etc.) on the display means, the pre-display does not limit the area of the rainbow effect.

◆In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine (100) of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 300) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 320) that executes performance based on signals from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of controlling a specific function that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and used reaches a predetermined value, and the slave control means is capable of executing a rainbow performance in a first performance means (image display device 70), and is capable of executing a rainbow performance in a second performance means (board lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, etc.) different from the first performance means. a rainbow effect can be produced by the first effect means, a first notification (pre-notification image 202) regarding the specific function, and a second notification (specific function activation image 205) regarding the specific function that is different from the first notification can be produced; when the first notification is executed, either the rainbow effect produced by the first effect means or the rainbow effect produced by the second effect means, or both the rainbow effect produced by the first effect means and the rainbow effect produced by the second effect means, can be restricted when the second notification is executed, either the rainbow effect produced by the first effect means or the rainbow effect produced by the second effect means, or both the rainbow effect produced by the first effect means and the rainbow effect produced by the second effect means can be restricted.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of progressing through a game by switching between a first gaming state (a normal gaming state other than a jackpot or a time-saving gaming state) and a second gaming state (jackpot game) different from the first gaming state, the gaming machine is controllable to activate a specific function at a predetermined timing that limits the progress of the game when a specific value derived based on the amount of gaming value awarded and the amount used reaches a predetermined value, and the first condition (condition for performing a variable presentation) that is established based on a predetermined requirement that occurs in the first winning means (starting hole 112, 115 (entry of a gaming ball into the starting hole 112, 115)) and a predetermined requirement that occurs in the second winning means (big winning hole) A second condition (such as progress in a round or a payout) is established based on a first condition (a game ball entering a jackpot slot), and if the specific function is activated in the first gaming state (the specific function activation flag is set), the establishment of the first condition can be restricted even if the specified requirement occurs in the first winning means. If the specific function is activated in the second gaming state (the specific function activation flag is set), the second condition can be established if the specified requirement occurs in the second winning means within a specified period after the specific function is activated (the period until the end of the jackpot game), and the establishment of the first condition can be restricted even if the specified requirement occurs in the first winning means.

[Modification]
The gaming machine 100 described in each of the above embodiments may be configured as follows.
The gaming machine 100 can execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) in a customer waiting state in which a variable display is not executed. Furthermore, even if an operating means such as the effect button 17 or the sword handle unit 135 is pressed during execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the LED of the effect button 17 or the sword handle unit 135, and other light-emitting means may be configured not to display a rainbow light emission.

The variable effect, which changes the display of the effect symbols, can be initiated by operating the operating means described above (such as the effect button 17). For example, various lighting modes are possible, such as a rainbow light display when the operating means is pressed when the variable effect is successfully decided, a rainbow icon is displayed when the operating means is pressed in an effect that suggests the operation of the hold button, a rainbow light display when the operating means is pressed when progressing to an SP reach, and a rainbow light display when a specific operation (such as the back button or a long press) is performed during an SP reach without any operation suggestion.

The gaming machine 100 also includes, as examples of operation means, a first operation means (such as the effect button 17) and a second operation means (the launch handle device 103). The rainbow light display in the customer waiting effect can be ended when a start win occurs (the start condition is met) based on the operation of the launch handle device 103. On the other hand, the rainbow light display in the variable effect may be configured not to end with the press of the effect button 17 (termination based on the operation of the first operation means may be restricted). Furthermore, the rainbow light display may be configured not to start even if an operation means such as the effect button 17 is pressed while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (start may be restricted).

Furthermore, the gaming machine 100 may have a greater number of light-emitting means capable of executing the rainbow light display in the second light-emitting mode (rainbow light-emitting display during a customer waiting demo performance) which has different start conditions than the first light-emitting mode (for example, rainbow light-emitting display during a variable performance) which can be initiated based on the operation of the operating means. For example, during a customer waiting demo performance, the machine may be configured to execute/enhance the rainbow effect without using the LEDs of the main display device 131, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, or the LEDs of the performance buttons. On the other hand, during a variable performance, the machine may be configured to execute the rainbow effect using, for example, the LEDs of the main display device 131, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, the LEDs of the performance buttons, the LED of the launch handle device 103, etc.

The gaming machine 100 may also be capable of executing a first rainbow effect (rainbow light emission during a variable effect) in which a specific effect using the operating means (vibration effect of the effect button 17 or sword handle unit 135) is executed, and a second rainbow effect in which a specific effect using the operating means is not executed. In this case, the first rainbow effect may have a greater number of light-emitting means capable of executing rainbow light emission than when the second rainbow effect is executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 100, the rainbow effect (such as a successful win effect) that notifies a jackpot may be configured to use a greater number of colors for illumination in the effect compared to the rainbow effect executed in customer waiting effects, advance notice effects, hold changes, etc. For example, if a white light is used to flash, the number of colors will increase to accommodate the white light.

It is also possible to execute a first effect from the start of the variable effect until the start of the deciding effect, and a second effect from the start of the deciding effect until the final stop, and the rainbow effect may be more likely to be executed for the special 1 variable effect for a win in the normal game state or the special 2 variable effect for a win in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable effect for a win in the specific game state. In this case, in the first effect described above, the rainbow effect may be more likely to be executed for the special 1 variable effect for a win in the normal game state or the special 2 variable effect for a win in the specific game state than for the special 1 variable effect for a win in the specific game state. In other words, in the first effect, it may be more difficult to execute a rainbow light-emitting display due to a preview effect or the like.

The gaming machine 100 is also capable of announcing the result of a determination as to whether or not to execute a special game at a predetermined timing in a variable effect (for example, a deciding effect). When this notification is executed, it may be possible to execute a first effect in which a first light-emitting means displays rainbow light (for example, a rainbow effect display by the main display device 131), and a second effect in which a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (such as a frame lamp, board lamp, movable role object, effect button, etc.) displays rainbow light. In this case, the timing at which the first effect ends and the timing at which the second effect ends may be different. For example, the timing at which the first effect ends may be later. Or, the timing at which the first effect ends may be earlier.

The gaming machine 100 can also display multiple types of images (instruction effects) encouraging a right hit while a special game is being played. For example, a right hit (large) and a right hit (small) can be played, and the machine may display either one of these or both. Here, the machine may be configured so that the main display device 131 is more likely to display a rainbow light-emitting display when only one instruction effect is being played (for example, when only a right hit (small) is being played) than in other cases (for example, when a right hit (large) is displayed), or so that the main display device 131 displays more types of rainbow light-emitting displays. The machine may also be configured so that the time the rainbow light-emitting display is displayed by the main display device 131 is longer.

The gaming machine 100 can display, on the display means (image display device 70), information (second information) such as the number of game values expected to be awarded in a special game (first information), the number of awarded game values during a special game, the cumulative number of awarded game values when special games occur consecutively, the cumulative number of awarded game values reaching a predetermined number, and the cumulative number of awarded game values displayed in the results. The first information and the second information may be different in the ease with which the rainbow display is executed.
For example, when a consecutive hold is confirmed, the number of wins may be displayed in rainbow colors. Also, when a revival is confirmed in the results, the number of wins may be displayed in rainbow colors. Furthermore, in a slot game machine, when an additional bonus such as +300 is added, the display may be displayed in rainbow colors.

The gaming machine 100 may also be capable of executing two special games (jackpot games): a first special game (a four-round jackpot corresponding to a specific stopping symbol) and a second special game (a ten-round jackpot corresponding to another specific stopping symbol). When the specific value described above reaches a predetermined value, the gaming machine 100 may be capable of executing a pre-notification display that notifies in advance of the activation of a specific function that limits the progress of the game. It may also be capable of displaying first information (a "XX Bonus" display) relating to the first special game and second information (a "Super XX Bonus" display) relating to the second special game on the image display device 70. Here, the first information may be capable of being limited in its rainbow-colored display, but the second information may be capable of being displayed in rainbow colors. Furthermore, when a pre-notification display is executed during the rainbow-colored display of the second information, the rainbow-colored display of the second information may be configured not to end when the pre-notification is executed.

The present invention has been described above based on embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments of the invention are intended to facilitate understanding of the invention and do not limit the invention. The present invention may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are also included within the scope of the present invention.

17: Operation button 70: First image display device 71: Second image display device 34a: Board lighting device 34b: Frame lighting device 63: First special symbol hold indicator 64: Second special symbol hold indicator 70a: Performance symbol 73: Movable member 83: Sub-first hold indicator 84: Sub-second hold indicator 100: Gaming machine 103: Launch handle device 112: First start opening 115: Second start opening 131: Main display device 132: First side display device 133: Second side display device 134: Upper display device 135: Sword handle unit 141: Back-stage display device 154: Upper role unit 156: Lower role unit 180: Upper unit 181: Light guide panel unit 260: Right hit notification image 261: Right hit warning image 205 : Specific function operation image 202 : Advance notification image 300 : Main control board (main control means)
320: Performance control board (slave control means)
331: Audio output device

Claims (1)

an operating means operable by a player;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A gaming machine including a game execution means for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of a first start condition or a second start condition, judging the judgment information and executing a variable display of a pattern, and executing a special game when the variable display reaches a predetermined mode ,
It is possible to execute a variable performance of a plurality of performance patterns in accordance with the execution of the variable display,
The judgment information acquired during the variable display is reserved and stored, and the reserved storage can be displayed on the display means,
In the display means, the variable effect, the specific character display, the specific effect in which the effect pattern is enlarged and displayed, or the instruction effect instructing the player to perform a specific operation can be executed,
a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state;
When a specific value derived based on the amount of game value awarded and the amount of game value used reaches a predetermined value, a specific function that limits the progress of the game can be controlled to be activated at a predetermined timing;
The light emitting means or the display means can perform a rainbow light emitting display that appears to a player in rainbow colors,
The rainbow light emitting display can be executed using the light emitting means while waiting for customers and while the variable performance is being executed,
the operation means includes an adjustment means for adjusting a volume level,
The rainbow light emitting display during the waiting period is restricted from being started based on the operation of the adjusting means ,
The rainbow light-emitting display during the execution of the variable performance can be started based on the operation of the operating means,
When the special game is executed, the rainbow light emitting display can be executed,
As the instruction performance, a first instruction performance and a second instruction performance that is displayed smaller than the first instruction performance can be executed,
When the first instruction performance is being executed, the rainbow light emitting display by the display means is limited;
When the second instruction performance is being executed, the rainbow light emitting display by the display means can be executed,
When the specific effect is executed in which one of the effect patterns occupies a larger proportion of the image display area by the display means than the other effect patterns, the area of the rainbow light-emitting display by the display means can be limited,
A gaming machine capable of executing the rainbow light emitting display in different modes depending on whether the performance symbol becomes a first stop display or a second stop display, during the period from when a predetermined performance suggesting the execution of the special game is started until the next variable performance is started .